Smart Sketch User Guide

SmartSketch v4.
0
Users Guide
October 2001
DVA007821
Copyright
Copyright 2001
Intergraph Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software
license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which
is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be provided or otherwise made available without
proper authorization.
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)
(1) (ii) of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 or
subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19,
as applicable.
Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase
contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a
modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is
accurate as of its publication date. The information and the software discussed in this document are subject
to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation
is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of this license.
No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not
supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO
MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN
ENVIRONMENT.
Trademarks
Intergraph, InterPlot, SmartSketch, Image Integrator, and the Intergraph logo are registered trademarks of
Intergraph Corporation.
ActiveCGM is a registered trademark of InterCap Graphics Systems, Inc.
Microsoft, the Windows logo, the Office logo, Visual Basic, ActiveX, IntelliMouse, Windows, and Windows
NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems Inc. AutoCAD is a registered trademark of
AutoDesk. Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. TrueType is a registered trademark
of Apple Computer, Inc. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. Netscape is a
trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation. Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
All other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
III
WHAT'S NEW IN SMARTSKETCH V4.0: AN OVERVIEW

AutoCAD/MicroStation Translator Enhancements
Productivity Enhancements
Symbol Enhancements
GETTING STARTED WITH SMARTSKETCH: AN OVERVIEW
Installing SmartSketch: An Overview
1
1
1
3
4
6
System Management Services (SMS) Support

Install SmartSketch
Uninstall SmartSketch
7
20
20
Exploring the Interface: An Overview
21
Menu Bar and Menus

Ribbons and Dialog Boxes
Toolbars
22
22
23
Using the Keyboard
25
Standard Control Keys

Function Keys
25
25
Using the Mouse
26
Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse
Viewing Your Work
27
28
Restore a View
Pan a View
Zoom Area
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Switch to Another Open Document
29
29
30
30
31
31
Commands and Dialog Boxes
32
Cascade Command (Window Menu)

Fit Command (View Menu)
New Window Command (Window Menu)
Pan Command (View Menu)
Previous Command (View Menu)
Window List Command (Window Menu)
Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu)
Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu)
Zoom Area Command (View Menu)
Zoom In Command (View Menu)
Zoom Out Command (View Menu)
32
32
32
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
35
Getting Help for AutoCAD Users: An Overview
36
Command Comparison: AutoCAD to SmartSketch
36
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide iii
Table of Contents
Task Comparison: AutoCAD to SmartSketch
Getting Help for MicroStation Users: An Overview

Command Comparison: MicroStation to SmartSketch
Task Comparison: MicroStation to SmartSketch
Using the Learning Center: An Overview

Access Online Tutorials
Accessing Support Resources: An Overview
40
52
52
60
65
65
66
User Assistance
Access Online Support
67
68
69
About SmartSketch Command (Help Menu)

Help Command (Main Toolbar)
Learning Center Command (Help Menu)
Help Topics Command (Help Menu)
SmartSketch on the Web Command (Help Menu)
SmartSketch Web Forum Command (Help Menu)
Tip of the Day Command (Help Menu)
Tip of the Day Dialog Box
UNDERSTANDING DOCUMENT CONCEPTS: AN OVERVIEW

Setting Up Documents: An Overview
Create a Document
Open a Document
Set Up a Drawing Sheet
View the Properties of a Document
Set Document Properties
Set File Locations
69
69
69
69
69
70
70
70
71
72
73
74
74
75
75
75
77
New Command (File Menu)

File New Dialog Box
Open Command (File Menu)
File Open Dialog Box
Options Command (Tools Menu)
Options Dialog Box
Properties Command (File Menu)
Properties Dialog Box
Sheet Setup Command (File Menu)
Sheet Setup Dialog Box
Most Recently Used Files Command (File Menu)
77
77
77
77
78
79
83
83
89
89
91
Managing Multi-sheet Documents: An Overview
93
Create a Background Sheet

Display Background Sheets
Activate a Drawing Sheet
Change the Background Sheet
Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets
Rename a Drawing Sheet
Delete a Drawing Sheet
Move Sheet Border

iv SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
96
97
97
97
98
99
99
99
101
Table of Contents
New Sheet Command (Insert Menu)
Working Sheets Command (View Menu)
Move Sheet Border Command (File Menu)
Move Sheet Border Dialog Box
Background Sheets Command (View Menu)
Rename Command (Shortcut Menu)
Rename Dialog Box
Delete Sheet Command (Edit Menu)
101
101
101
101
103
103
103
103
Saving and Printing Documents: An Overview

Saving Documents
104
105
Save a Document
Saving a Document Automatically
Setting AutoSave Options
Send a Document to Others
Close a Document
Close a Document Without Saving Changes
106
107
107
108
108
108
109
Save Command (File Menu)

Save As Dialog Box
Save As Command (File Menu)
AutoSave Command (Tools Menu)
AutoSave Dialog Box
Send Command (File Menu)
Close Command (File Menu)
Exit Command (File Menu)
109
109
109
109
110
110
111
111
Printing Documents
112
Print a Document
Set Printing Options
Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet
Print Several Documents Simultaneously
Print to a File
113
114
115
116
117
118
Print Command (File Menu)

Print Dialog Box
Printer Document Properties Dialog Box
Print Area Dialog Box
Settings Dialog Box
118
118
119
120
121
USING SMARTSKETCH TEMPLATES: AN OVERVIEW
124
Using General Diagramming Templates: An Overview
126
Atlas Mapping Templates

Basic Diagramming Templates
Directional Mapping Templates
Flowchart Templates
Network Diagram Templates
Office Layout Templates
Organizational Chart Templates
Workflow Diagram Templates
Using AEC Solutions Templates: An Overview

Architectural Templates
126
128
130
132
135
137
141
143
146
146
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide v
Table of Contents
HVAC Templates
Landscape Templates
Site Templates
Using Electrical Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Control Loop Templates
Electrical Schematic Templates
Using Mechanical Engineering Templates: An Overview

Mechanical Templates
Using Process Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Ortho Piping Templates
PFD and P&ID Templates
Plot Plan Templates
Process Block Diagramming Templates

Save as Template Command (File Menu)
Organizational Chart Wizard (Tools Menu)
DRAWING BASIC ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW

Drawing Lines: An Overview
Draw a Line
Draw a Point

Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw Toolbar)
Line Ribbon
Point Command
Point Ribbon
Drawing Connectors: An Overview

Place a Connector
Modify a Connector
Format a Connector
Attach a Connector to an Object
Merge Connectors
Split a Connector

Connector Command (Draw Toolbar)
Connector Ribbon
Drawing Doublelines: An Overview

Draw a Doubleline
148
151
153
156
157
158
161
161
165
166
168
171
173
178
178
178
179
181
181
182
183
183
183
184
184
186
187
189
192
192
193
193
194
194
194
197
197
199
Place Doubleline Command (Draw Toolbar)

Place Doubleline Ribbon
199
199
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses: An Overview

Draw Circles
201
202
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points

Draw a Circle by Center Point
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two Elements

Circle by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)
vi SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
202
202
203
205
205
Table of Contents
Circle by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar)
Tangent Circle Command (Draw Toolbar)
Circle Ribbon
Draw Arcs
207
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points

Draw an Arc by Center Point
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with FreeSketch
Draw a Curve
Insert a Node into a Curve
Delete a Node from a Curve
Change the Curve Type
214
214
214
215
215
215
Draw Ellipses
218
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points

Draw an Ellipse by Center Point
218
219
220
Ellipse by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar)

Ellipse by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)
Ellipse Ribbon
Draw a Rectangle or Square
Draw a Rectangle or Square with FreeSketch

Rectangle Command (Draw Toolbar)
Rectangle Ribbon
Drawing FreeForm Shapes: An Overview

Draw a Line with FreeSketch
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch
Draw a Curve with FreeForm
207
208
208
209
210
211
212
212
213
214
Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)

Arc By Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar)
Tangent Arc Command (Draw Toolbar)
Arc Ribbon
Curve Command (Draw Toolbar)
Curve Ribbon
Drawing Squares and Rectangles: An Overview
205
205
205
220
220
220
222
222
224
225
225
225
226
227
228
229
229
231
FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar)

FreeSketch Ribbon
FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar)
FreeForm Ribbon
231
231
232
232
Creating Isometric Drawings: An Overview
233
Draw an Isometric Circle

Draw an Isometric Line
Draw an Isometric Rectangle
234
234
235
237
Isometric Circle Command

Isometric Circle Ribbon
237
237
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide vii
Table of Contents
Isometric Line Command
Isometric Line Ribbon
Isometric Rectangle Command
Isometric Rectangle Ribbon
SELECTING, MOVING, & COPYING ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW

Selecting Elements: An Overview
Select an Element

Select Tool (Draw Toolbar)
Select Tool Ribbon
Select All Command (Edit Menu)
Undo Command (Edit Menu)
Redo Command (Edit Menu)
Moving Elements: An Overview

Move an Element with the Select Tool
Move an Element Precisely

Move Command (Change Toolbar)
Move Ribbon
Copying and Pasting Elements: An Overview

Copy an Element
Copy an Element with the Select Tool
Copy a Format
Paste an Element
Paste an Element with a Different Format
Offset Elements

Copy Command (Edit Menu)
Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar)
Paste Command (Edit Menu)
Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)
Paste Special Dialog Box
Offset Command
Offset Ribbon
Creating Patterns: An Overview

Draw a Circular Pattern
Draw a Rectangular Pattern

Circular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar)
Circular Pattern Ribbon
Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box
Rectangular Pattern Command (Change Toolbar)
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon
Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box
Cutting or Deleting Elements: An Overview

Cut an Element
Delete an Element
viii SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
238
239
239
239
241
243
244
247
247
247
248
248
248
249
251
251
252
252
252
253
253
253
254
254
255
255
257
257
257
257
257
258
258
258
260
260
260
262
262
262
262
263
263
264
265
265
265
Table of Contents
267
Cut Command (Edit Menu)

Delete Command (Edit Menu)
267
267
ADDING TEXT TO DOCUMENTS: AN OVERVIEW

Placing Annotations: An Overview
268
269
Place a Text Box

Place a Balloon
Move an Annotation
Move a Text Box
Delete Text in a Text Box
Use Spell Checker
Apply a Border to a Text Box
Edit a Text Box
Resize a Text Box
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box
Add a Leader
Insert a Vertex in a Leader
Delete a Vertex from a Leader
271
272
273
275
275
276
277
277
277
277
278
279
280
282
Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar)

Text Box Ribbon
Text Box Properties Dialog Box
Balloon Command (Dimension Toolbar)
Balloon Ribbon
Balloon Properties Dialog Box
Spelling Command (Tools Menu)
Spelling Dialog Box
Character Map Command (Tools Menu)
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box
Leader Command (Dimension Toolbar)
Leader Ribbon
Leader Properties Dialog Box
282
282
284
291
291
292
293
294
295
295
296
296
297
Labels: An Overview
298
Create a Text Label

Edit a Text Label
Move a Label
Place a SmartLabel
Place Multiple Labels
Edit a SmartLabel
Engineering Fonts
300
300
300
300
301
301
302
DRAWING WITH RELATIONSHIPS: AN OVERVIEW

Using Relationships as You Draw: An Overview
Intent Zones
303
306
308
Draw with Relationships

Suspend Relationships
Establish a Relationship with the SmartSketch Command
Delete a Relationship
310
310
311
311
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide ix
Table of Contents
Maintain Relationships
Display or Hide Relationship Handles
Lock an Element or Key Point
Insert a Detail View

Relationships Command (Main Toolbar)
Alignment Indicator Command (Tools Menu)
SmartSketch Settings Command (Tools Menu)
SmartSketch Dialog Box
Maintain Relationships Command (Tools Menu)
Relationship Handles Command (Tools Menu)
Lock Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Detail View Command (Insert Menu)
Detail View Ribbon
Sample Workflows
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line
Draw a Line
Draw an Arc
Draw a Horizontal Line
Case Where a Relationship Is Not Maintained
Connect Points While Drawing a Line
Connect Points While Modifying a Line
Establish More Than One Relationship
DRAWING PRECISELY: AN OVERVIEW

Placing Elements in Precise Locations: An Overview
Draw with PinPoint
Re-Orient PinPoint

PinPoint Command (Tools Menu)
PinPoint Ribbon
Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon
Placing Elements with a Grid: An Overview
311
311
312
312
314
314
314
314
315
316
316
316
316
316
318
318
319
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
327
329
329
329
330
331
Place Elements With a Grid
331
333
Grid Display Command (View Menu)

Grid Snap Command (View Menu)
Dimensioning Drawing Elements: An Overview

Types of Dimensions
Dimension Groups
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial Dimension
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements or Key Points
Place a Dimension Group
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group
Set a Dimension Axis
Set the Dimension Type
Edit a Dimension Prefix
Set the Dimension Units
Move a Dimension
x SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
333
333
334
337
339
340
341
343
344
347
348
348
349
349
Table of Contents
Using Dimensions to Change Existing Elements
Place a Driving Dimension
Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving Dimension
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value of the Element
355
Dimension Command (Main Toolbar)

Dimension Ribbon
Dimension Properties Dialog Box
Angle Between Command (Dimension Toolbar)
Axis Command (Dimension Toolbar)
Coordinate Dimension Command (Dimension Toolbar)
Distance Between Command (Dimension Toolbar)
Dimension Prefix Dialog Box
Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu)
SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar)
Symmetric Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Symmetric Diameter Command (Dimension Toolbar)
Setting Paper and Model Units: An Overview

Measuring Distances and Areas: An Overview
375
376
Bearing and Azimuth
378
Set Bearing and Azimuth
378
379
Measure Area Command (Tools Menu)

Measure Distance Command (Tools Menu)
Bearing and Azimuth Command
Set Bearing Dialog Box
379
379
380
380
Using the Variable Table: An Overview
381
Create a Variable with a Value or Expression

Edit an Existing Variable
Create a Variable Using a Function or Subroutine
Create a Variable with a Link to a Spreadsheet
Edit a Formula Containing a Function
Insert a Function Into a Formula
Format a Column
Sample Workflows
Example: Draw a Line with PinPoint
Place a Doubleline Precisely
Measure the Length of a Line
373
375
Measure an Area
Measure a Distance
Variables Command (Tools Menu)

Variable Table Dialog Box
Filter Command (Shortcut Menu)
Filter Dialog Box
Function Wizard Step 1 of 2 Dialog Box
Open Source Command
Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu)
355
355
359
366
366
367
367
368
368
369
370
370
372
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on the Drawing Sheet
351
352
353
353
383
384
385
386
387
387
388
389
389
389
391
392
392
393
394
394
395
395
395
396
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xi
Table of Contents
Dimension the Length of a Line
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle
Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional Values
Creating a Variable with an External Function or Subroutine
Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet
TRANSFORMING ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW

Changing the Shape of an Element: An Overview
Modify an Element with the Select Tool
Rotating Elements: An Overview

Rotate an Element

Rotate Command (Change Toolbar)
Rotate Ribbon
Mirroring Elements: An Overview

Mirror an Element

Mirror Command (Change Toolbar)
Mirror Ribbon
Scaling Elements: An Overview

Scale an Element
Scale an Element with Its Handles
Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original Model Size

Scale Command (Change Toolbar)
Scale Ribbon
Extending or Trimming Elements: An Overview

Extend an Element
Trim an Element
Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending Elements
Draw a Chamfer
Draw a Fillet

Extend to Next Command (Draw Toolbar)
Trim Command (Draw Toolbar)
Trim Corner Command (Draw Toolbar)
Chamfer Command (Draw Toolbar)
Chamfer Ribbon
Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar)
Fillet Ribbon
Applying Relationships to Change Existing Elements: An Overview

Make Elements Concentric
Make Elements Parallel
Make Elements Perpendicular
Connect Elements
Make Elements Tangent
Make Elements Equal
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or Vertical
xii SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
397
397
398
398
400
403
405
405
407
407
409
409
409
412
412
414
414
414
415
415
416
417
418
418
418
419
420
421
421
422
425
427
427
427
427
427
428
429
429
430
433
433
433
434
434
435
435
Table of Contents
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis
436
437
Change Command (Main Toolbar)

Colinear Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Concentric Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Connect Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Equal Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Horizontal/Vertical Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Parallel Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Perpendicular Command (Relationship Toolbar)
Tangent Command (Relationship Toolbar)
ARRANGING ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW
437
437
437
437
437
438
438
438
438
439
Grouping Elements: An Overview
440
Group or Ungroup Elements
441
443
Group Command (Change Toolbar)

Group Ribbon
Group Properties Dialog Box
UnGroup Command (Change Toolbar)
443
443
444
444
Element Display Priority: An Overview
446
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display Order

Send an Element to the Back of the Display Order
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order
Push an Element Down in the Display Order
446
447
447
447
448
Bring to Front Command (Change Toolbar)

Send To Back Command (Change Toolbar)
Pull Up Command (Change Toolbar)
Push Down Command (Change Toolbar)
448
448
448
448
Using Layers to Arrange Elements: An Overview
449
Control the Display of Elements in a Window

Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or Layers
Create a Layer
Display or Hide Layers
Change the Layer of an Element
Change the Active Layer
Create a Layer Group
Modify Layers in a Layer Group
Delete a Layer Group
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group

Colors Dialog Box
Layers Command (Tools Menu)
Layers Ribbon
Layer Display Dialog Box
Change Layer Dialog Box
Layer Groups Command (Tools Menu)
Groups Dialog Box
Display Manager Command (Tools Menu)
450
451
451
452
452
453
453
453
453
454
455
455
455
455
456
457
457
457
458
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xiii
Table of Contents
Display Manager Dialog Box
USING SYMBOLS IN DOCUMENTS: AN OVERVIEW

Creating Symbols: An Overview
Create a Symbol

Create Symbol Command (Draw Toolbar)
The Symbol Explorer: An Overview

Open a Symbol Library
View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer
View Documents with the Symbol Explorer
Close the Symbol Explorer
Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer
Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer
Move the Symbol Explorer
Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer
Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol Explorer
Delete From a List of Favorites in the Symbol Explorer

Symbol Explorer Command (Main Toolbar)
Symbol Explorer Window
Show Favorites Command (Shortcut Menu)
View File Type Command (Shortcut Menu)
Delete Favorites Command (Shortcut Menu)
Discovering Symbol Behavior and Handles: An Overview

Associate a Symbol with an Element
459
462
462
462
464
464
464
466
467
467
468
469
469
470
470
471
471
472
472
472
473
473
474
475
477
Placing Symbols: An Overview
479
Place a Symbol
Place Copies of a Symbol
479
481

Place Here Command (Shortcut Menu)
Stamp Here Command (Shortcut Menu)
483
483
483
Editing Symbols: An Overview
484
Edit a Symbol
Edit Symbol Properties
485
486
488
Symbol Properties Dialog Box

Convert Command (Symbols Shortcut Menu)
Scaling Symbols: An Overview

Scale a Symbol
Mirroring Symbols: An Overview

Mirror a Symbol
Rotating Symbols: An Overview

Rotate a Symbol
Manipulating Symbols: An Overview

Manipulate a Symbol
Unlock a Symbol From an Element
Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with Drop Points
xiv SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
488
489
490
490
492
492
493
494
495
496
496
497
Table of Contents
Mechanism Modeling: An Overview
Sample Workflow
498
499
Create a Kinematics Animation
499
WORKING WITH ATTRIBUTES: AN OVERVIEW
503
Display the Attribute Viewer

Move the Attribute Viewer
Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer
Edit Attributes
Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set
Create a Symbol Report
Update a Symbol Report
Reports
504
504
504
505
506
506
507
507
509
Attribute Viewer Dialog Box
509
MANAGING STYLES, FORMATS, AND COLORS: AN OVERVIEW

Applying Formats with Styles: An Overview
Apply a Style
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements
Format Part of an Element
Rename a Style
Delete a Style
Create a Style Using a Formatted Element
Create a Style with the Style Command
Change the Formats of a Style
Save a Style to a Template
Add Styles to the Current Document
510
511
513
513
513
514
514
515
515
515
516
516
518
Style Command (Format Menu)

Style Dialog Box
New Line Style Dialog Box
New Text Box Style Dialog Box
New Dimension Style Dialog Box
Modify Line Style Dialog Box
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box
Segmented Style Command
Reapply Style Dialog Box
Style Resources Dialog Box
518
518
520
521
521
521
521
521
522
522
523
Applying Unique Formats: An Overview
523
Format a Geometric Element

Format a Text Box
Format a Dimension or Annotation
524
525
525

Properties Command (Edit Menu)
Element Properties Dialog Box
Line Command (Format Menu)
Format Line Dialog Box
527
527
527
534
534
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xv
Table of Contents
Text Box Command (Format Menu)
Dimension Command (Format Menu)
Format Dimension Dialog Box
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed Boundaries: An Overview
534
534
534
535
537
Place a Fill
Format a Fill
Create a Fill Color
Refill a Modified Boundary
538
539
539
540
541
Fill Command (Draw Toolbar)

Fill Properties Dialog Box
Fill Ribbon
Custom Color Name Dialog Box
Sample Workflows
Formatting a New Drawing
Formatting an Existing Drawing
WORKING WITH OLE OBJECTS: AN OVERVIEW

How Embedding Works: An Overview
Embed an Object
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source Software

Object Command (Insert Menu)
Insert Object Dialog Box
How Linking Works: An Overview

Link an Object
Open an OLE Object for Editing
Edit a Link
Change a Link
Break a Link
Close an Object's Document and Save the Changes

Links Command (Edit Menu)
Links Dialog Box
CUSTOMIZING SMARTSKETCH: AN OVERVIEW

Add-Ins Included with the Software
Customize the Software with the Options Command
Create a New Toolbar
Add a Button to a Toolbar
Remove a Command from a Toolbar
Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default Settings
Run a Macro
Create a New Menu
Add a Command to a Menu
Delete a Command From a Menu
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original Settings
xvi SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
541
541
541
542
543
543
543
545
549
550
551
553
553
553
555
556
557
557
558
558
558
560
560
560
561
562
563
563
563
564
564
564
564
565
565
566
Table of Contents
Installing Additional Tools
Install or Remove an Add-In
566
566
568
Add-Ins Command (Tools Menu)

Customize Command (Tools Menu)
Customize Dialog Box
Toolbars Command (View Menu)
Toolbars Dialog Box
Macro Command (Tools Menu)
Run Macro Dialog Box
568
568
569
570
570
571
571
Sample Workflow
573
Customizing a Toolbar
573
IMAGE INTEGRATION: AN OVERVIEW
575
Working with Raster Images
575
Insert a Raster Image

Position an Image by Dragging:
Position an Image by a Single Click:
Select a Rectangular Area of an Image
Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image
Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an Image
Fill an Image Area with Color
Invert Colors in an Image
View Image Properties
Undo Changes to Images
Redo Changes to Images
Save Changes to a Linked Image
Save as Image
577
577
578
579
580
581
582
582
583
583
584
584
584
586
Image Command (Insert Menu and Image Integrator Toolbar)

Position Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Rectangular Select Area Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Polygonal Select Area Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Contrast and Brightness Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box
Fill Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Fill Dialog Box
Image Properties Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Image Properties Dialog Box
Image Undo Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Image Redo Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Invert Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
Save as Image Command (File Menu)
Save as Image Dialog Box
Save Selected Image(s) Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)
586
586
586
587
588
588
589
590
590
592
593
593
593
594
594
595
SYMBOL AUTHORING: AN OVERVIEW
597
Planning Your Symbol: An Overview
597
Define Symbol Properties
598
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xvii
Table of Contents
Define Handles for a Symbol
Create a Parametric Symbol
Add a Symbol Attribute
Modify a Symbol Attribute
Remove an Attribute from a Symbol
Define Several Representations of a Symbol in One Document
Redefine the Origin of a Symbol
Define an Icon for a Symbol
Managing Text in Symbols: An Overview

Define Smart Text Attributes for a SmartLabel
Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol
Define a Text-Driven Symbol
Create a Leader for a SmartText Label
599
599
602
602
603
603
606
606
607
607
608
608
610
Integrating Programs with Your Symbol: An Overview
611
Add Commands to the Shortcut Menu for a Symbol

Run a Program That You Created from a Symbol
611
612
Using Blank Color and Fill with Symbols: An Overview
614
Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking
Defining SmartPoints: An Overview

Place a SmartPoint with Connect Point Attributes
Place a SmartPoint with Drag Point Attributes
Place a SmartPoint with Drop Point Attributes
Edit SmartPoints for a Symbol
614
616
617
617
618
618
Symbol Lookup Tables: An Overview
620
Set Up an ODBC Data Source

Generate a Lookup Table
620
621

SmartPoint Properties Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)
SmartPoint Properties Dialog Box
Symbol Origin Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)
Symbol Properties Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)
Define Symbol Properties Dialog Box
Lookup Table Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)
Lookup Table Dialog Box
Symbol Representation Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)
Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box
SmartText Editor Command (Symbol Authoring Tools Toolbar)
SmartText Editor Dialog Box
USING THE INTERNET: AN OVERVIEW

Open a Document Inside the Internet Explorer
Hyperlinks
Insert a Hyperlink
Edit a Hyperlink
Delete a Hyperlink
Follow a Hyperlink
ActiveCGM
Save a Document as a Web Page

xviii SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide
622
622
622
624
624
625
630
631
632
633
633
634
635
636
637
637
638
639
639
640
641
642
Table of Contents
Hyperlink Command (File Menu)
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box
Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu)
Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu)
Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu)
Show Links Command (Shortcut Menu)
Save as Web Page Command (File Menu)
Save as Web Page Dialog Box
642
642
642
643
643
643
643
644
WORKING WITH CAD DRAWINGS: AN OVERVIEW

Working with MicroStation Files: An Overview
646
MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples

Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Import
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During Export
Open a MicroStation Document
Place MicroStation Information in the Document
Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation Document
Establish Relationships on a MicroStation Reference File
Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference File
Add MicroStation Linestyles to a Document
MicroStation Cells in Your Document
Open a MicroStation Cell Library
MicroStation Construction Class Information
669
671
Working with AutoCAD Files: An Overview
673
AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples

Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export
Open an AutoCAD Document
Place AutoCAD Information in the Document
Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD Reference File
Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference File
AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box
INDEX
648
652
657
660
661
663
663
664
665
666
666
667
668
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box

MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box
645
675
679
684
687
688
690
690
692
692
694
697
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide xix
What's New in SmartSketch v4.0: An Overview
What's New in SmartSketch v4.0:

An Overview
AutoCAD/MicroStation Translator
Enhancements
Improved Data Fidelity - When translating a .dgn or .dwg document, blocks
and cells containing attribute or tag data are now translated into symbols with
SmartLabels that display the attribute data.
Reference File Layer Control - You have more control over reference files
with the ability to turn on or off the display of layers in your AutoCAD and
MicroStation reference files.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators

module.
Productivity Enhancements
Improved product performance - Faster file open, faster display

of objects and faster updates - upon opening a file, a "lightweight"
representation of each object (instead of the whole object) is
loaded into memory. Once selected or modified, the whole object
is then loaded into memory.
Format Painter command - Copy a selected object's format,

including color, line weight, line style, and font, and apply it to
other objects as you select them, whether the objects are similar or
not.
Save as Image command - Write the graphics on the current

drawing sheet or defined area to a standard image file. Editable
options include image file format, compression factor, and
resolution.
Enhanced view options - Turn off the display of the drawing

sheet as well as specify whether the sheet outline is to be used
during a fit.
Detail View command - Insert a detail view based on graphics

inside a user-defined envelope. You can further refine the detailed
view by selecting a scale factor from 1.5 to 10.
SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 1
Improved PinPoint tool - Enhanced PinPoint ribbon now

provides four additional placement modes for precision placement
of geometry:
Relative Tracking moves the PinPoint target to last point clicked

during a drawing command.
Define Point Origin activates an additional ribbon bar containing

fields for X & Y values which define a document origin for
PinPoint.
Save Document Origin saves the currently displayed X and Y

values to the document.
Reposition Target to Origin moves the PinPoint target to the X,

Y position saved using Save Document Origin.
Edit common attributes within a select set - If multiple symbols

containing the same attributes are selected, these command
attributes will be displayed in the attribute viewer for editing. Any
changes made to one symbol's attributes is applied to all selected
symbols.
Enhanced options on the Connector ribbon:
The Split Connector button splits a selected connector at a point

defined by a single mouse click. Or use it to identify a symbol and
split the connector based on the best two points on that symbol the resulting new connector is given the same properties as the
original connector.
The Merge Connector button allows you to select two connectors

and merge them into one.
Improved Label placement and editing - New labels placed on a

symbol will be glued to the symbol so that they move when the
symbol is moved. You can also associate multiple labels to
symbols.
Improved hyperlinking to include logical names - Now the

logical name of the default hyperlink displays as a tool tip when
the mouse passes over an object containing an hyperlink. Logical
names are also displayed on the shortcut menu for the Hyperlink
command.
Spell Checker - Uses Microsoft Word's Spell Checker to find

possible spelling errors in all text boxes on the current drawing
sheet.
Enhanced file linking Linked objects inserted into a
2 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide

SmartSketch drawing are saved as relative links, increasing the
portability of your drawings.
Symbol Enhancements
Single-click symbol placement - Select a symbol from Symbol

Explorer and place multiple copies in your drawing sheet without
having to drag it in mouse down mode.
Improved Attribute Viewer:
Edit displayed attributes before and during symbol placement.
Use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to scroll
through Attribute Viewer values.
Improved Symbol Authoring:
The SmartPoint Properties dialog box allows you to place

"smartpoints" which have one or more of the following behaviors:
Connect Point, Drop Point, or Drag Point.
New symbol behavior that allows a symbol to split elements on

drop. Intended primarily to split connectors when placing an inline
symbol, it will also split most other elements.
More easily identifiable SmartPoint graphics.
Symbol Lookup tables - Ideal for use with Ortho and Structural
content, these tables allow you to drive parameters of a symbol
using data from spreadsheet, database, or any other ODBC data
source.
Important
To use the Improved Symbol Authoring and Symbol Lookup

tables enhancements, you must install the Symbol Authoring
module.
Getting Started with SmartSketch: An Overview
Getting Started with

SmartSketch: An Overview
SmartSketch, formerly known as Imagineer Technical or Imagination
Engineer, is the only desktop application that gives you the power to create
quick sketches, complex engineering designs, production drawings, plot plans,
schematics, business diagrams, and more.
Industry solution templates with numerous symbols available for

SmartSketch
Sketch ideas spontaneously and accurately, instantly transforming

them into precise CAD geometry
What-if scenarios and testing real-world models reduce

prototyping time
Merge your designs with AutoCAD and MicroStation using the

module for translation
Add text and spreadsheets from Word, Excel, and PowerPoint;

integrate with popular databases
Share drawing data across the World Wide Web using the module
for Web publishing
Industry Solutions Available in SmartSketch and in

Additional Modules
Get a quick start in projects with workflow templates tailored to different
industries including:
Process: Process Flow Diagrams, P&ID, Electrical Schematics,

Ortho Piping, Control Loop, Process Block Diagramming
Business Diagrams: Workflow Diagramming, Basic Diagramming,

Office Layout, Flowcharts, Organization Charts, Network
Diagrams
Network Diagram
Technical Drawing
Mapping: Atlas Mapping, Directional Mapping
AEC: Architecture, Construction, HVAC, Plot Plans, Site,

Landscape
Mechanical: Mechanical Drawings (ANSI & ISO)
SmartSketch Works with Leading CAD Products

Unlike most low-end sketching and drawing products, SmartSketch supports
major existing CAD environments such as AutoCAD and MicroStation.
You have full import and export capabilities for traditional CAD data. In
addition, you can work with .dgn and .dwg data in native formatsas if these
formats were OLE-enabled.
Acting as wrappers around foreign data, OLE servers allow you to simply
drag AutoCAD or MicroStation data into SmartSketch. You can even locate
points in the CAD geometry and work directly off those points in your
SmartSketch document.
This capabilitygiving you live access to legacy datamakes SmartSketch a
powerful tool on your desktop.
Installing SmartSketch: An Overview

You can install SmartSketch 4.0 on an individual workstation or deploy it via
a network. The following specifications are required in order to install
SmartSketch 4.0 on a workstation:
Microsoft Windows 2000, Windows ME, Windows 98, or

Windows NT SP4 or higher
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher to view Programming

guide.
Pentium 133 microprocessor or higher
64 MB RAM recommended
83 MB disk space for minimum installation (175 MB disk

recommended)
CD-ROM drive
800 x 600 resolution or higher
Microsoft or Microsoft-compatible mouse (IntelliMouse

recommended)
Prior to running a silent setup of SmartSketch over a network, the System

Management Services (SMS) administrator should ensure the following:
1. All existing versions of SmartSketch should be uninstalled prior to
network installation.
2. The client machines should not have a directory by the same name to
which SmartSketch is to be installed.
3. The client machine should have the following free disk space available:
TEMP Dir Drive: 3000 kb
System Drive : 4800 kb
Additional hard drive space for Typical installation: 123,000 kb
Additional hard drive space for Compact installation: 59, 000 kb
Additional hard drive space for Custom installation: 165, 000 kb
Important
The figures shown above are the maximum disk space that the
product can use because of the file system overhead.
System Management Services (SMS)

Support
Prior to installing SmartSketch, the SMS administrator should ensure the
following before running a silent setup over a network:
All existing versions of SmartSketch should be uninstalled prior to network
installation.
1. The client machines should not have a directory by the same name to
which SmartSketch is to be installed.
2. The client machine should have the following free disk space available:
TEMP Dir Drive: 3000 kb
System Drive : 4800 kb
Additional hard drive space for Typical installation: 123,000 kb
Additional hard drive space for Compact installation: 59, 000 kb
Additional hard drive space for Custom installation: 165, 000 kb
Note:
The figures shown above are the maximum disk space that the
product can use because of the file system overhead.
Three response (.iss) files are included with the product. The administrator
can use them or create a customized .iss file by running Setup r from a
command line.
Recording your own .iss file:

1. Choose No to indicate not to reboot the machine after installation. The
setup will update the system when it is next rebooted.
Note:
If you must choose Yes to reboot immediately after setup, edit the
.iss file you created as follows: in the Data keynames section,
change the BootOption=O for [SdFinishReboot-0] to
BootOption=3.
2. In the [File Transfer] section change OverwriteReadOnly=NoToAll to

OverwriteReadOnly=YesToAll.
A PDF file is also provided for use with the SMS server. You may create you
own PDF file or import the one that is provided.
Setup.log
Setup.log is the default name for the silent setup log file, and its default
location is Dis in the same folder as Setup.ins. You can specify a different
name and location for Setup.log using the -f1 and -f2 switches with Setup.exe
The Setup.log file contains three sections. The first section, [InstallShield
Silent], identifies the version of InstallShield Silent used in the silent setup. It
also identifies the file as a log file.
The second section, [Application], identifies the installed application's name
and version, and the company name.
The third section, [ResponseResult], contains the result code indicating
whether or not the silent setup succeeded. An integer value is assigned to the
ResultCode keyname in the [ResponseResult] section. Setup places one of
the following return values after the ResultCode keyname:
0 Success.
-1 General error.
-2 Invalid mode.
-3 Required data not found in the Setup.iss file.
-4 Not enough memory available.
-5 File does not exist.
-6 Cannot write to the response file.
-7 Unable to write to the log file.
-8 Invalid path to the InstallShield Silent response file.
-9 Not a valid list type (string or number).
-10 Data type is invalid.
-11 Unknown error during setup.
-12 Dialog boxes are out of order.
-51 Cannot create the specified folder.
-52 Cannot access the specified file or folder.
-53 Invalid option selected.
The Setup.log file for a successful silent setup of SmartSketch is illustrated as

follows:
[InstallShield Silent]
Version=v5.00.000
File=Log File [
Application]
Name=SmartSketch LE
Version=03.00
Company=Intergraph Corporation
Lang=0009
[ResponseResult]
ResultCode=0
Setup.exe
Setup.exe is the main setup executable; it performs setup initialization and
launches the appropriate Setup engine file (_instxxx.ex_, where xxx indicates
the target platform) to execute the setup script (Setup.ins) on the target
system.
You can pass command line switches directly to Setup.exe.
Syntax
Setup [switches]
Switches
These switches are optional. They are not case sensitive; upper- or lowercase
letters can be used:
/f<path\CompiledScript> or -f<path\CompiledScript> - Specifies

an alternate compiled script.
Important
Unless the compiled script (.ins file) also resides in the same
directory as that of Setup.exe, the full path to the compiled script
must be specified. _setup.dll must also reside in the same directory
as your .ins file. For example, setup -ftest.ins will launch setup
using Test.ins instead of Setup.ins.
/f1<path\ResponseFile> or -f1<path\ResponseFile> - Specifies

an alternate location and name of the response file (.iss file).
Notes
If this option is used when running Silent setup, the response file is
read from the folder/file specified by<path\ResponseFile>.
If this option is used along with the -r option, the response file is
written to the folder/file specified by<path\ResponseFile>.
If an alternate compiled script is specified using the -f switch, the f1 switch entry must follow the -f switch entry.
/f2<path\LogFile> or -f2<path\LogFile> - Specifies an alternate location

and name of the log file created by Silent setup.

Note
By default, Setup.log log file is created and stored in the same

directory as that of Setup.ins.
Important
If an alternate compiled script is specified using the -f switch, the f2 switch entry must follow the -f switch entry.
/m<filename> or -m<filename> - Causes Setup.exe to generate a

Management Information Format (.mif) file automatically at the end of the
setup.
Caution
Do not include a paththe .mif file is always placed in the

Windows folder. <filename> is optional. If you do not specify a
filename, the resulting file will be called Status.mif.
/m1<serial number> or -m1<serial number> - Tells setup to place the

indicated serial number in the created .mif file.
/m2<locale string> or -m2<locale string> - Tells setup to place the
indicated locale in the .mif file. English (ENU) is the default; refer to
Microsoft documentation for a complete listing of locale strings.
/r or -r - Causes Setup.exe automatically to generate a silent setup file (.iss
file), which is a record of the setup input, in the Windows folder.
/s or -s - Runs Silent setup to execute a silent setup.
/SMS or -SMS - Prevents a network connection and Setup.exe from closing
before the setup is complete. This switch works with setups originating from a
Windows NT server over a network.
Important
SMS must be uppercase; this is a case-sensitive switch.
/z or -z - Prevents Setup.exe from checking the available memory during

initialization.
Important
This switch is necessary when running a setup on a machine with

more than 256 MB of memory; if it is not used, Setup.exe reports
insufficient memory and exits.
Comments

Separate multiple command line switches with a space. But do not put a space
inside a command line switch. For example, /r /fInstall.ins is valid, but /r/f
Install.ins is not.
When using long path and filename expressions with switches, enclose the
expressions in double quotation marks. The enclosing double quotes tell the
operating system that spaces within the quotation marks are not to be treated
as command line delimiters.
Response File
A normal (non-silent) setup receives the necessary input from the user in the
form of responses to dialog boxes. However, a silent setup does not prompt
the user for input. A silent setup must get its user input from a different
source. That source is the file (.iss file).
A response file contains information similar to that which an end user would
enter as responses to dialog boxes when running a normal setup. Silent setup
reads the necessary input from the response file at run time.
The format of response files resembles that of an .ini file, but response files
have .iss extensions. A response file is a plain text file consisting of sections
containing data entries.
There are two ways in which you can create an response file: You can run the
setup and have the setup record and create the response file for you, or you
can write the response file from scratch.
Recording a Response File

You have the option of letting Setup create the response file for you. Simply
run your setup with the Setup.exe -r command line parameter. Setup will
record all your setup choices in Setup.iss and place the file in the Windows
folder.
All the Setup dialog box functions write values into the Setup.iss file when
Setup runs in record mode (Setup -r).
Manually Creating a Response File

You can also create the response file completely by hand. As mentioned, the
Setup.iss file is similar to an .ini file. The sections of a Setup response file
must be in the following order:
1. Response File Header Section
2. Response File Application Header Section
3. Response File Dialog Box Sequence Section
4. Response File Dialog Box Data Section

Section names are contained in square brackets, as in [InstallShield Silent].
Data entries follow their section names, and consist of <name=value> pairs,
as inDlg0=Welcome-0.
Follow these steps to create the response file:
1. Create a text file named Setup.iss using any text editor.
2. Enter the silent header into Setup.iss.
3. Enter the application header into Setup.iss.
4. Enter the dialog box sequence into Setup.iss.
5. Enter the dialog box data into Setup.iss.
6. Save and close Setup.iss.
Three sample response files (Typical.iss, Compact.iss and Custom.iss) are
delivered with the product that may be used for Typical, Compact or
Custom setup or help familiarize you with the format.
Response File Header

All response files begin with a response file silent header. The response file
silent header allows InstallShield to identify the file as a legitimate
InstallShield response file. It also helps to verify that the response file
corresponds to an setup created with the proper version of InstallShield.
The format of the silent header is shown below. Enter the following lines at
the beginning of your Setup.iss file:
[InstallShield Silent]
Version=v5.00.000
File=Response File
Use v5.00.000 in all response files.
Response File Application Header

The response file application header is the second block of information in the
response file, immediately following the response file silent header. The
response file application header allows setup developers to identify response
files visually. It is not used by the setup script or by Setup.exe. Setup
developers can use the application header to identify exactly which setup the
response file is for, since it is often difficult to determine this by looking at the
dialog box data.
The format of the application header is shown below. Enter the following
lines into your Setup.iss file below the silent header:
[Application]
Name=SmartSketch
Version=04.00
Company=Intergraph Corporation
Lang=0009
Response File Dialog Box Sequence

The third block of information in the response file, after the silent header and
the application header, is the response file dialog box sequence. The dialog
box sequence section lists all dialog boxes you would need to use in a normal
setup (including custom dialog boxes), in the order in which they would
appear. The dialog boxes are listed under the section heading [DlgOrder].
Note:
The dialog box numbering sequence begins at 0. There is no limit

to the number of dialog boxes you can list.
The order and the number of dialog boxes are significant. When InstallShield
Silent runs, if either the number or the order of the dialog boxes does not
match the order or the number of the dialog boxes in the non-silent setup, the
silent setup fails and the log file records the failure. Make one entry for each
occurrence of a dialog box. A given dialog box may be listed more than once
if it appears more than once in the setup.
The format for a dialog box sequence entry is Dlg<#>=<DialogIdentifier>.
Dlg<#> consists of the letters Dlg and a sequence number. The first dialog
box in the setup is Dlg0. Each dialog box after that increments the value of
<#> by one.
<DialogIdentifier> is in the form functionname-<#>, where functionname
is the name of the function that created the dialog box, and <#> represents the
sequential order of that particular dialog box in the setup.
For custom dialog boxes, you can use any unique alphanumeric name for the
functionname portion of <DialogIdentifier>. For example, you could refer to
a custom dialog box as MyDialog. If the tenth dialog box in the setup were
the second occurrence of the custom dialog box MyDialog, there would be an
entry in the dialog box sequence section like this:
Dlg9=MyDialog-1
The <DialogIdentifier> expression will be used to identify the dialog box

data section for the dialog box.
Always end the dialog box sequence section with a statement of the form

Count=<number of dialog boxes> that specifies the exact number of dialog
boxes listed in the dialog box sequence section. Count every entry. Since
dialog box numbering begins with 0, the value of Count will always be 1
greater than the highest <#> value for a dialog box sequence.
The example below lists two dialog boxes, the Welcome dialog box and the
AskOptions dialog box. Enter your dialog box sequence list into Setup.iss as
shown in the example below.
[DlgOrder]
Dlg0=Welcome-0
Dlg1=AskOptions-0
Count=2
Response File Dialog Box Data Section

The last block of information in a response file is the response file dialog box
data. The response file dialog box data is a collection of sections containing
the values returned by each dialog box identified in the dialog box sequence
section. Each dialog box has its own section. The values listed are the same
values that the dialog box returns in a normal, user input-driven setup. The
format for a dialog box data section is as follows:
[<DialogIdentifier>]
Result=value
Keyname1=value
Keyname2=value
The [<DialogIdentifier>] section header identifies the specific dialog box

and is followed by the dialog box data entry list. <DialogIdentifier> is the
same expression used to list the dialog box in the dialog box sequence section.
Data entry items are in the format keyname=value. The keyname is a name
for a value returned by a dialog box and recorded in the response file. All
dialog boxes return a value for the keyname Result, reflecting the button that
was clicked to end or exit the dialog box. Many dialog boxes will also set or
return a value in a variable.
For example, in a non-silent setup the AskDestPath dialog box returns the
destination location in the svDir parameter. The line in the our script might
look like the following:
nResult = AskDestPath( szTitle, szMsg, svDir, 0 );

The corresponding dialog box data entry in the Setup.iss file for a silent setup
might look like the following:
[AskDestPath-0]
Result=1sz
Path=C:\Program Files\SmartSketch
In the previous example, Result=1 is equivalent to clicking the Next button

in the dialog box, and szPath=C:\Program Files\SmartSketch is the value
returned in the svDir parameter ofAskDestPath.
The name of the variable used in the script is meaningless relative to the
Setup.iss file. However, in the Setup.iss dialog box data sections, each built-in
and Sd dialog box has its own set of keynames which map to its parameters.
The keynames are important and must be exact as defined for each dialog box.
Refer to Dialog box data keynames list, below.
Result Standard Values

All dialog boxes return a keyname value called Result, indicating which push
button was clicked to end the dialog box. Unless otherwise indicated, the
Result standard values are:
12 for the Back button
1 for the Next or OK button
Recording Component and Subcomponent Selections

Some dialog box functions allow the user to select components and
subcomponents. There are three kinds of dialog box data keyname entries
used to record component and subcomponent selections in response files:type,
count, and <#> (described below).
Every set of component selections and every set of subcomponent selections
has one type keyname entry, one count keyname entry, and as many <#>
keyname entries as are required to document each individual component or
subcomponent selection.
When creating keynames to record component selections, precede the type,
count, and <#> keyname entries with the word "Component", thus:
Component-type
Component-count
Component-0
When creating keynames to record subcomponent selections, precede the


type, count, and <#> keyname entries with the name of the component to
which the subcomponents belong, thus:
Program Files-type
Program Files-count
Program Files-0
Program Files-1
To create complete value entries, use the equal sign to attach the values to the
keynames. (The types of values assigned to each kind of keyname are
described below.) The following example shows complete value entries for
two components, Program Files and Binary Files, and two subcomponents of
Program Files, Executables and Support Elements:
Component-type=string
Component-count=2Component-0=Program Files
Component-1=Binary Files
Program Files-type=string
Program Files-count=2
Program Files-0=Executables
Program Files-1=Support Elements
Type Keyname Entry

The type keyname indicates the data type of the components or
subcomponents list. Since InstallShield dialog boxes currently use only string
lists for components and subcomponents lists, type is always equal to "string",
as in Component-type=string. Future versions may use number lists, in
which case type could equal "number".
Count Keyname Entry

Count is equal to the number of selections for a given component or
subcomponent entry. For example, if two components were selected for
installation in the ComponentDialog dialog box, the count dialog box data
entry would be Component-count=2. If two subcomponents of the Program
Files component were selected, there would be a Program Files-count=2
entry.
<#> Keyname Entry

The number portion of the <#> keyname entry is simply a sequential (one-up)

number, beginning with 0, that numbers each recorded component or
subcomponent selection. Since numbering begins with 0, the greatest number
value will always be one less than the value of count.
The value assigned to a <#> keyname entry is the selected component's or
subcomponent's visible name (the string passed as the second parameter to
ComponentAddItem when the components or subcomponents list was built).
For example, assume the ComponentDialog dialog box offers the user a
component selection of Program Files, Help Files, Sample Files, and Utilities.
If the user selects Program Files and Help Files, then the dialog box data
section for that instance of the ComponentDialog dialog box will have two
list item entries and will look something like this:
[ComponentDialog-0]
szDir=C:\MYAPP\FILES
Component-count=2
Component-0=Program Files
Component-1=Help
FilesResult=1
The following example shows how subcomponent list selections are recorded.
The example is for an instance of the SdComponentMult dialog box. The
example shows that two componentsProgram Files and Help Fileswere
selected. It also shows that four subcomponents were chosenMain Files,
Aux. Files, Main Help, and Tutorial Files. Main Files and Aux. Files are
subcomponents of Program Files, and Main Help and Tutorial Files
subcomponents of Help Files.
[SdComponentMult-0]
Component-count=2
Component-0=Program Files
Component-1=Help Files
Program Files-type=string
Program Files-count=2
Program Files-0=Main Files
Program Files-1=Aux. Files

Help Files-type=string
Help Files-count=2
Help Files-0=Main Help
Help Files-1=Tutorial Files
Result=1
Dialog Box Data Keynames List

The dialog box data keynames for the dialog boxes are listed in the following
table. The first column contains the dialog box names. The second column
lists the keynames applicable to each dialog box. The third column contains
descriptions of the values associated with the keynames.
Dialog Box
AskYesNo-<#>
Keyname
Result
Description
1=User selected Yes
0=User selected No
SdAskDestPath<#>
Result
SdComponentMult Result
-<#>
Standard values
szDir
The path entered in

the Destination
Directory edit Field
Standard values
Component-type
<subcomponent
>-type
Componentcount,
String (the only value

currently allowed)
The total number of

component or
subcomponent
selections
<subcomponent
>-count
Componentnumber,
<subcomponent
>-<#>
The selected item's

number in the list
(numbering begins
with "0")
SdConfirmNewDir- Result
<#>
1=User selected Yes
SdConfirmRegistra Result
tion-<#>
1=User selected Yes
0=User selected No

0=User selected No
SdFinishReboot<#>
Result
1=Finish BootOption
0=Do not restart
Windows or the
machine
2=Restart Windows
3=Reboot the
machine
SdLicense-<#>
Result
12=Back
1=User selected Yes
SdRegisteredUser- Result
<#>
Standard Values
szName
The text entered in

the Name field
szCompany
The text entered in
the Company field
szSerial
The text entered in

the Serial (number)
field
SdSelectFolder<#>
Result
Standard values
szFolder
SdSetupType->#> Result
The folder name

entered in the
Program Folder field
12=Back
Or, when the Next
button is clicked:
301=Typical radio
button is currently
selected
szDir
302=Compact radio
button is currently
selected
303=Custom radio
button is currently
selected
The path entered in
the Destination
Directory edit field
SdStartCopy-<#> Result
SdWelcome-<#> Result
Standard values
Standard values
Install SmartSketch
SmartSketch automatically uninstalls any previous version of SmartSketch,
Imagineer Technical or Imagination Engineer upon installation.
1. Determine whether to install from a CD or the network. Install from the
network if you want to load symbols and tutorials in a networked location
for distributed access.
From a CD-ROM drive: Insert the CD into its drive. If the

installation does not start on your Windows system, run Setup
from your CD-ROM drive. Click setup.exe.
From a Network: From Start on the taskbar, click Run, and enter
the path on your network to the SmartSketch setup.exe file.
Tip
Record your installation path for quick reference.
2. Follow the installation instructions on your screen. Choose an installation

option from below:
Typical
Compact
Custom
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to finish the installation process.

Notes
For CD installations, leave the CD in the CD-ROM drive to access

tutorials.
For network installations, verify the network drive or UNC

network connection where the product was installed.
We recommend a UNC network connection, such as

\\myserver\share\setup, so you can easily access the tutorials after
installation.
Uninstall SmartSketch
Important
The following procedure only pertains to uninstalling SmartSketch

independent of an upgrade to or installation of a newer version of
the product.
1. From your Windows desktop click Start > Settings > Control Panel.

2. Click Add/Remove Programs.
3. From the program list, select the Intergraph SmartSketch component to
remove.
Important
When uninstalling SmartSketch manually, we recommend the

following guidelines: first, remove any installed custom add-in
modules (Symbol Authoring, AEC Solutions, etc.), and then
remove SmartSketch.
4. Click the Add/Remove button and follow any instructions in the uninstall
wizard.
Tips
The wizard displays progress indicators during the uninstalling

process.
It is recommended that you reboot your computer after uninstalling

SmartSketch.
Exploring the Interface: An Overview

SmartSketch features a standard Microsoft Windows menu bar command
structure. You can access all commands from the menu bar directly or by
using the command's keyboard shortcut. Additionally, many of the most often
used commands are available on the toolbars provided by SmartSketch. These
toolbars are completely customizable.
User Interface Components
Menu Bar and Menus
Toolbars
Keyboard
Mouse
Windows and Views
Menu Bar and Menus

The SmartSketch menu bar allows you to access all commands, divided by
workflow or task. When you click a command, a description of the command
appears in the message field at the bottom left of the SmartSketch window.
You can also click the Help button on the Main toolbar, and then click a
menu command to view a description of that command.

Because SmartSketch is Office-Compatible, you will find the ribbons and
dialog boxes work just like those in Windows. A unique ribbon appears when
you click a specific command or when you select an element. These ribbons
help you control various settings for the active command. You can place a
ribbon bar only at the top or the bottom of the window. You can drag a ribbon
to the top or the bottom, but not to the sides, of the window The following
figure shows a ribbon.
Ribbons and dialog boxes contain one or more of the following tools:
A check box sets or clears an option. When you click the check box, an X
appears to show that the option is set. Clicking the check box again clears it.
Some options give you two or more choices. You can click an option to
activate it.
A box accepts a value when you type it and press Tab or Enter. You can edit
the text by highlighting it with the mouse and then pressing Backspace or
Delete.

A drop-down list box gives you several options to select from. In some cases,
you can also type a value in the field.
A list box allows you to select an item from a list. You can scroll through the
list using the scroll bar and double-click an item. Or, you can click an option
on the list and then click OK on the dialog box.
Toolbars
Toolbars contain the same commands found on menus in SmartSketch. You
can show or hide toolbars or move them to any location in your workspace.
You can also add or remove commands from toolbars, or create your own.
To show or hide a toolbar, point to Toolbars on the View menu.

The list shows all of the available toolbars. A check mark next to a
toolbar name means that the toolbar will be displayed. To show a
toolbar that isn't checked, click its name. To hide a toolbar, click
the name of the toolbar to clear the check mark.
To move a toolbar to a different location, click the toolbar's title

bar and then drag the toolbar to the new
location.
On a toolbar, some command buttons display fly-outs when you

click and hold the command button. Fly-outs access commands
that are closely associated with the button that you clicked. These
types of buttons have a small black arrow in the bottom right
corner.
To add a command to a toolbar from a menu, click View >

Toolbars > Customize and then click the Commands tab. In the
Categories list, click the group that contains the command you
want to add, and then in the Commands list, click that command
and drag it to the toolbar in your workspace.
To remove a command from a toolbar, drag it off the toolbar and

release it anywhere in the 3D model viewing area (except on
another toolbar).
If you add commands to one of the default toolbars, such as the

Dimension toolbar, you can reset the toolbar to its original state:
Click View > Toolbars.
Click the Toolbars tab.
In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to reset.
Click Reset.
Click OK.
Using the Keyboard

Use the following keys and key combinations to execute functions or enter
commands:
Function Keys
Control Keys
Standard Control Keys

The following table lists the standard Microsoft shortcuts supported by
SmartSketch. You can access these commands by pressing Ctrl + a letter.
Ctrl + A
Ctrl + C
Ctrl + N
Ctrl + O
Ctrl + P
Ctrl + S
Ctrl + V
Ctrl + X
Ctrl + Y
Ctrl + Z
Select All
Copy Text
New
Open
Print
Save
Paste Text
Cut Text
Redo
Undo
Function Keys
Certain function keys work only when the appropriate command is active. For
instance, F9 through F12 are only available when you use PinPoint.
The following table lists F-keys and their corresponding functions. Function
key equivalents and modifier keys, if any, display next to commands on
menus, according to standard Microsoft Windows conventions.
F1
Shift + F1
F3
Alt + F4
Ctrl + F4
F5
Alt + F5
Ctrl + F7
F9
Ctrl + F9
F10
Help
What's This? Help
Grid Snap
Exit
Close File
Update Active View
Previous Zoom Level
Paste From Clipboard
Toggle PinPoint Display
Cut to Clipboard
PinPoint Lock X axis

Shift + F10
F11
F12
Select First Menu Item

PinPoint Lock Y axis
Reset PinPoint Home
Using the Mouse

Use a standard mouse or a Microsoft IntelliMouse to quickly and efficiently
manipulate different views of the drawing.
Use the left mouse button to do the following:
Select multiple elements by dragging to fence them.
Drag a selected element.
Click or drag to draw an element.
Select a menu or toolbar command.
Double-click to activate an embedded or linked object.
Use the right mouse button to do the following:
Restart a command.
Display a shortcut menu. Shortcut menus are context-sensitive.

The commands on the menu depend upon your mouse location and
which elements, if any, are selected.
You can also use the mouse to locate objects. As you move the pointer around
on the drawing sheet, objects under the mouse change to a highlight color to
indicate that they have been located. When you move the mouse away from a
highlighted object, the object returns to its original color.
Microsoft IntelliMouse Pointing Device

You can use the Microsoft IntelliMouse with the software so that you can

manipulate different views of the document faster and more efficiently.
Caution
The newest version of Microsoft IntelliPoint Drivers (2.2) supports

universal scrolling. Universal scrolling allows you to scroll up and
down in any window that displays scroll bars by using the wheel
button on the IntelliMouse. Universal scrolling prohibits the
recognition of the scrolling behavior defined for the software. You
must, therefore, identify the name of the software and any other
applications as exceptions to universal scrolling.
Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse
When you do this:

Rotate the wheel button forward
Rotate the wheel button backwards
Drag the wheel button
Press Ctrl and drag the wheel button
Press Shift and click the wheel button
Press Alt and click the wheel button
The view does this:

Zooms in at the current pointer location
Zooms out at the current pointer location
Pans from one location to another
Zooms the area of the window that you
defined by dragging the pointer
Fits the graphics on the document to the
window
Restores the previous view
Tip
You can perform any of these actions with a three-button mouse;

you click the middle mouse button, instead of the wheel button. No
action occurs when you click the wheel button just one time.
Exclude Universal Scrolling with the

IntelliMouse
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2. Select the Mouse icon.
3. On the Mouse Properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab.
4. In the Universal Scrolling area of the dialog box, click Exceptions.
5. On the Exceptions for Universal Scrolling dialog box, click Add.
6. On the Add Exception for Universal Scrolling dialog box, click to open
the Program Files folder. Next, click SmartSketch > Program >
draft.exe. Then click Open.
7. Accept the new settings.

Note
The appropriate IntelliMouse drivers, or equivalent, must be installed in order
to see the wheel tab on the mouse properties dialog.
Viewing Your Work

You can manipulate windows and views to affect how you see a document on
the computer screen. A window can be compared to a camera. When you look
through a camera, you see a view of a real-world object. When you look
through a window on the computer screen, you see a view of the objects in the
document. In both cases, you can change the view by zooming in and out, and
focusing on different parts of the document. You can also use the Microsoft
IntelliMouse to zoom or pan views.
Windows
When you start the software, the application window displays a blank
document. You can use commands on the File menu to create a new document
or open an existing one.
With the commands on the Window menu, you can create and arrange new
windows that allow you to see more than one section of a document or more
than one document. You can minimize open windows and display them as
icons in the application work space.
Views
Views are what you see in software windows. With the view commands, you
can do the following:
Use Zoom Area to set the zoom area to see more detail in the
document.
Use Zoom In to enlarge the display of elements around a

specified point in the document.
Use Zoom Out to reduce the display of elements around a

specified point in the document.
Use Pan to position another part of the document in the center of a

view, fit all of the document in a view, or identify the area of the
document you want to see.
Use Fit to restore the previous view of the document.
Use Previous to restore the previous view.
Use Toolbars to display or hide toolbars in the application

window.
Drawing Sheets
With drawing sheets, you can place different drawings on different sheets in a
document. Working sheets are the drawing sheets on which you place most of
your graphics. Background sheets are drawing sheets that allow you to define
and display the border of a drawing sheet.
Restore a View
Click View > Previous.

Notes
You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu.
You can also select the Previous option by right mouse clicking
within the drawing area.
You can also press Alt and click the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel
to restore the view.
To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press ESC. This

is convenient if you are working with a large document. To refresh
the window, press <F5>.
Fit All Elements in the Active View
On the Main toolbar, click Fit
Note
If you have a Microsoft IntelliMouse, you can press Shift and click
the mouse wheel to fit the view.
Pan a View
1. On the Main toolbar, click Pan
2. Click in the view you want to pan.

3. Click in the view again to show how far you want to pan.
Notes
You can also drag the pointer to pan the view.
When you drag using the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel, the view

pans. Click the wheel to start the pan, then click when the pan is
complete.
When you press and drag the mouse wheel and move the pointer
from one location to another, the view pans from one location to
another.
To go back to the previous view, click Previous on the View

menu.

To exit the command, right-click or press ESC.
Zoom Area
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area
2. On the drawing sheet, drag around the area that you want to zoom in on.
The view zooms in on the area you fenced with the pointer.
Notes
When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward, the view
zooms in at the current pointer location. You can also press Ctrl
and drag the mouse wheel to zoom an area or window.

menu.

Zoom In
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom In
2. Click the view.

Notes
You can drag to dynamically zoom in the view.
When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel forward, the view

zooms in at the current pointer location.

menu.

Zoom Out
1. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Out
2. Click the view.

Notes
You can drag to dynamically zoom out of the view.
When you roll the Microsoft IntelliMouse wheel backward, the

view zooms out at the current pointer location.

menu.

Switch to Another Open Document

When multiple documents are open, you can switch between documents. Only
one document at a time, called the active working document, can receive
input.
To switch between multiple documents, do one of the following:
If you can see a portion of the document that you want to switch
to, click its window.
On the Window menu, click the document you want to work in.
The document is displayed on top of other open documents.

Cascade Command (Window Menu)
Overlaps windows diagonally across the screen.
Tip
Cascade Windows is available only if you use the Customize

command to place it on a toolbar or menu.

Fits all visible elements in the active view.
Tip
You can also right-click to access Fit on the shortcut menu. If a

selection is defined only those elements in the selection set are
fitted.
New Window Command (Window Menu)

Opens a new window that displays the same document as the active window.
The new window appears on top of all the other windows and becomes the
active window. If you change the contents of the open document in one
window, the other windows that contain the same document reflect the
changes.
Tip
New Window is available only if you use the Customize


Allows you to move in any direction from a specific point in a document to
see other areas of the drawing or model.
Tip
You can also right-click to access Pan on the shortcut menu.
Previous Command (View Menu)

Restores the previous view.
Tip
Previous View is available only if you use the Customize

You can also right-click to access Previous on the shortcut menu.
Window List Command (Window Menu)

Displays an alphabetical list of open document windows below the commands
on the Window menu. You can easily access another open document by
clicking one of the window names on the list.
Tile Horizontally Command (Window Menu)

Arranges windows to fit horizontally on the screen. All the windows appear at
an even distance from each other on the screen.
Tile Vertically Command (Window Menu)

Arranges windows to fit vertically on the screen. All the windows appear at an
even distance from each other on the screen.

Enlarges the display of elements in the active window.
Notes
If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom

an area by holding Ctrl, pressing the mouse wheel or middle
mouse button, and dragging the pointer. To stop the repainting of
elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is convenient if
you are working with a large document. To refresh the window,
press F5.
You can also right-click to access Zoom Area on the shortcut

menu.
Zoom In Command (View Menu)

Enlarges the display of elements around a specified point in the active
window.
Notes
If you have an IntelliMouse or a three-button mouse, you can zoom

in by rolling the wheel of the IntelliMouse. To stop the repainting
of elements in the window, press Esc. This feature is convenient if
you are working with a large document. To refresh the window,
press F5.
You can also right-click to access Zoom In on the shortcut menu.

Reduces the display of elements around a specified point in the active
window.
Notes
You can also zoom out by rolling the wheel of the IntelliMouse.
To stop the repainting of elements in the window, press Esc. This
feature is convenient if you are working with a large document. To
refresh the window, press F5.
You can also right-click to access Zoom Out on the shortcut

menu.
Getting Help for AutoCAD Users: An

Overview
This Help provides you with information about how you can use your
AutoCAD files with SmartSketch to get the most out of both systems. A
command comparison and task comparison will help the AutoCAD user
become familiar with SmartSketch terminology.
Command Comparison: AutoCAD to

SmartSketch
This command comparison lists AutoCAD commands and their equivalent
commands in SmartSketch.
AutoCAD
A
Arc
...Center Start Angle
...Center Start End
...Center Start Length
...Start Center Angle
...Start Center End
...Start Center Length
...Start End Angle
...Start End Direction
Area
Array
.....Polar
....Rectangular
B
Block
C
Change
Arc By Center Point Command (Draw

Toolbar)
Toolbar)
Toolbar)
Circular Pattern Command (flyout on the
Change Toolbar)
Rectangular Pattern Command (Change
Toolbar)
Symbols
Properties Command (Edit Menu) and Style
Command (Format Menu)

...color
...endpoint
...layer
...linetype
...style
Circle
...2 Point
...3 Point
...Center Radius
...Tangent Radius
Color
Copy
...Multiple
...Single
D
DIM
...diameter
...horizontal
...leader
...style
Dimension
...Radius
...Save
...Variables
...Vertical
Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) and

Circle by Center Point Command (Draw
Toolbar) and Tangent Circle Command
(Draw Toolbar)
Circle by 3 Points Command (Draw
Toolbar)
Toolbar)
with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu)
Style Command (Format Menu) or the
command ribbon.
Copy Command (Change Toolbar)
Copy Command (Change Toolbar) or Move
Command (Change Toolbar) with copy
option
SmartDimension Command (Dimension

Toolbar)
Distance Between Command (Dimension
Toolbar)
Toolbar)
DxfIn
DxfOut
E
Ellipse
....Center
... Axis Endpoint
End
Erase
...multiple objects
...single object
Extend
F
Fillet
G
Grid
H
Hatch
...Single Hatch
I
J
K
L
Layer
...OFF
...ON
Line
...Line
...Osnap TAN
Toolbar)
Open Command (File Menu) (choose a dxf
format document)
Save As Command (File Menu) (use the dxf
file format)
Ellipse by Center Point Command (Draw

Toolbar)
Ellipse by 3 Points Command (Draw
Toolbar)
(use direct manipulation of the handles.)
SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) and
Style Command (Format Menu) and Fill

Command (Draw Toolbar)

Line/Arc Continuous Command (Draw
Toolbar)
Toolbar)

...perp
Linetype
List
M
Mview
Menu
Mirror
Move
...multiple objects
...single object
N
O
Ortho
Osnap
...INT
P
PSpace
Pan
Pline
Plot
Point
Q
Quit
R
Redraw
Regen
Rename
...Block
Rotate
....several objects
S
Save
Scale

Toolbar) and SmartSketch Command
(Tools Menu)
Not Applicable
Toolbars and Shortcut menus
SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu)

Drawing Sheets
FreeSketch Command (flyout on the Draw
Toolbar)
This command is available only if you use
the Customize command to place it on a
toolbar or menu.
Screen refresh is automatic.

Not applicable.

...a single object
...multiple objects

Snap
...Standard
Stretch
Style
T
Text
...Justify
Trim


Trim Command (Draw Toolbar) and
U
Undo
Units
V
W
X
Y
Z
Zoom
...All
...In
...Out
...Window

Task Comparison: AutoCAD to SmartSketch

This task and term comparison lists AutoCAD tasks and terms and the
equivalent functionality in SmartSketch.
AutoCAD
SmartSketch
A
Angular
Dimension
The SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar)

measures the angles or sweep angles of arcs. The Angle
Between Command (Dimension Toolbar) measures the
angle between two elements.
Absolute
Coordinates
The Pin Point Command (Tools Menu) allows you to

specify coordinates.
Annotations
The annotation commands allow you to add text, balloons,

and leaders to drawings.
Anonymous
Block
Although anonymous blocks are not necessary for

crosshatching, you can use the Fill Command (Draw
Toolbar) and select from several fill patterns.
Approximation
Points
The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to

easily sketch curves. The software converts the
approximation into a precision drawing.
Array
The software provides the Rectangular Pattern Command

(Change Toolbar) and Circular Pattern Command (flyout
on the Change Toolbar) for drawing patterns of elements.
Arrowhead
The terminator, such as an arrow or dot at the end of a

dimension line shows which element a dimension
measures.
Associative
Dimension
The dimensions in the software are associative.
AutoCAD
Development
System (ADS)
The software uses macros to create programs to run with

the software. You can create programs that automate many
software tasks.
AutoDesk Device The system architecture of The software uses GDI or Open
Interface (ADI) GL for developing device drivers needed for peripherals.
Axes Tripod
The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) displays the xy axis

as you draw.
AutoLISP
Programming with the software is easy. You can write

macros for graphics or use 3rd Party LISPS that support
the software architecture.
B
B-spline Curve

draw curves.
Bezier Curve

draw curves.

Bind
OLE servers can be used to join files.
Blip Marks
Blip marks, temporary screen markers displayed when you

designate a point, are not applicable to the software. The
software automatically refreshes geometry as you draw.
Block
Symbols in the software are similar to AutoCAD blocks.

You can also use OLE servers to embed or link an
AutoCAD block in a software document.
Block Definition Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you
to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file.
Block Reference Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you
to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD file.
BYBLOCK
The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to define

the color or line type of symbols within a drawing.
BYLAYER
The Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) allows you

to define colors, line types and other properties associated
with a layer.
C
Cartesian
Coordinate
System
The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to

define precision points in space using a Cartesian
coordinate system.
Centerline
The AutoCenter Line option in the SmartDimension

Command (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to place a
center line at the center of a curved element.
Center Mark
The AutoCenter Line option in the SmartDimension

Command (Dimension Toolbar) allows you to place a
center line at the center of a curved element.
Chamfer
The Chamfer Command (flyout on the Draw Toolbar)

allows you to draw a line between existing lines. The
existing lines are trimmed to the chamfer's end points.
Circular External OLE servers allow you to link or embed a file as a

Reference
reference file.

Color Map

the colors of elements.
Cubic Curve

draw curves.
Cursor
The mouse cursor allows you to place graphics and

annotations. It is a screen display device.
Cursor Menu
The Shortcut menu automatically appears when you rightclick. The commands displayed on the Shortcut menu
depend upon the type of element or object you select.
Curve
The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar allows you to

draw curves.
Curve Fitting
The FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar allows you to

draw curves.
D
Default
The Style Command (Format Menu) allows you to

predefine the default settings of elements.
Definition Points The software does not need definition points for placing an
associative dimension because all dimensions are
associated with the geometry.
DIESEL (Direct Programming in the software allows you to program and
Interpretively
customize menu items.
Evaluated String
Expression
Language)
Diameter
Dimension

allows you to place a diameter dimension.
Dimension Line
A dimension line shows where a measurement starts and

stops. All dimensions in the software have dimension lines.
Dimension Line
Arc
The arc spanning the angle formed by the extension lines

of an angular dimension. An angular dimension can be
placed with the SmartDimension Command (Dimension
Toolbar) .

Dimension Style The settings that determine the appearance of the
dimension. You can set the dimension style formats in the
software by using the Dimension Command (Format
Menu).
Dimension Text
The value and text display of dimensioned elements is

defined by using the Dimension Command (Format
Menu).
Dimension
Variables
The dimensioning variables can be defined with the

Dimension Command (Format Menu).
Display Extents
Windows are used as display devices. The window

coordinates are defined as view coordinates.
Documentation
Drawing
Documentation drawings are two-dimensional drawings

that describe a real world object. Documentation drawings
are composed of drawing sheets.
Drag
Geometry or documents can be moved by dragging them

with the mouse cursor.
Drawing
Drawing sheets are used to draw your elements on.
Drawing Extents The Fit Command (View Menu) displays the entire
drawing in a window.
Drawing File
Documents are drawing files that can be saved on the disk.

You can save files in the software format or in AutoCAD
format.
Drawing Unit
The units of measure for a drawing sheet can be English or

metric.
dxf (Drawing
Interchange
Format)
The files you create can be saved in the ASCII file format
used by AutoCAD through OLE servers.
E
Entity
Elements are entities within documents.
Extension Lines
Extension lines, also called witness lines or projection

lines, are parts of dimensions.
External Program The software allows you to write and run external
programs.
External
OLE servers allow you to attach files to one another.
Reference (xref)
F
Fill
The Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill

enclosed shapes with various colors or styles .
Fillet
The Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar) creates a constant

radius blend between two elements. The elements are
trimmed to the end points of the fillet.
Fit Points

place curves with interpolation and approximation points.
Freeze
The Display Manager Command (Tools Menu) allows you

to define how you want the information on specific layers
to display.
G
Graphics Area
Drawing sheets provide an area for creating and editing a

drawing.
Graphics Cursor The mouse cursor is a screen display device that allows
you to place graphics and annotations.
Graphics Screen / The windows of the software allow you to create graphics
Graphics
and select commands. Drawing sheets are displayed in the
Window
window.
Grips
Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry

is selected for an element modification or edit.
Grips Modes
Handles and selection sets are highlighted when geometry

is selected for an element modification or edit.
H
Handle
Handles in the software are similar to grips in AutoCAD.

Hatching
The Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to fill

enclosed shapes with various colors or styles .
Horizontal
Dimension
Horizontal or vertical dimensions can be placed with the

Distance Between Command (Draw Toolbar) .
I
Icon Menu
Toolbars contain icons, and menus and shortcut menus

contain Command names.
Include Angle

allows you to describe the sweep angle of a dimension.
Initial
Environment
Templates allow you to define variables and settings for a

new drawing.
Instance
Symbols can be created with the software by allowing you

to use OLE servers to embed or link an AutoCAD block or
convert the graphics of an AutoCAD block.
Interpolation
Points

create curves. The points that the curve passes through are
created when you draw the curve.
Island
Islands are closed boundaries that have not been filled

within an area that has been filled with the Fill Command
(Draw Toolbar) .
J
K
Key
The software provides user properties, OLE servers, and

Open Database Connection (ODBC) from Microsoft.
L
Layer
Layers allow you to group elements according to type or

for manipulation purposes.
Leader
A leader line with a terminator allows you to place

annotations on drawings.
Linetype

dash definitions for lines.
Link
In AutoCAD, a link is a database connection between an

SQL element and a database record. In the software, links
allow you to reference information between documents.
M
Macro
The software allows you to write programs in the form of .

A macro is a sequence of actions or commands that are
named and saved.
Method
When you program with the software, you use methods. A

method is a named operation or instance.
Mirror
The Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) allows you to

move elements or sets of elements about a mirror point.
Mnemonic
The mnemonics on menus and dialog boxes allow you to

select commands quickly.
Model Space
In the software, you can create 2-D models, which

represent real world objects, by drawing the real world
object on a drawing sheet.
N
Node
The Curve Command (Draw Toolbar) in the software

draws a curve that has nodes. The nodes describe the
various key points along the curve.
Normal
A perpendicular vector.
Noun/Verb
Selection
In the software you can select either the command or the

object first.
NURBS (NonA non-uniform rational B-spline curve. The software

Uniform Rational curves are mathematically defined as NURBS.
B-spline) Curve
O
Object
The software provides elements for drawing creation.
Object Snap
The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) and PinPoint


(Osnap)
Command (Tools Menu) allow you to create precise

elements on drawings. The software recognizes key points
of elements and describes the relationship between the
element and the mouse pointer.
Object Snap
Override

Origin

specify the coordinates of a point. The SmartSketch
Command (Tools Menu) allows you to locate positions and
points on elements including elements on symbols .
Ortho Mode

Orthogonal
The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to

define horizontal or vertical element positions on
drawings. The software recognizes key points of elements
and describes the relationship between the element and the
position of the mouse pointer.
P
Pan
The Pan Command (View Menu) allows you to shift the

view of a drawing.
Paper Space
Drawing sheets are 2-D areas that you can use to draw.
Parallel
Dimension
Parallel dimensions can be placed with the

SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) . A
linear dimension can be parallel to the line it measures.
Personalization
You can personalize when you install the software.
Pick
Handles and selection sets allow you to select geometry

and objects. The mouse cursor is a screen display device
that allows you to place graphics and annotations.
Point
An x and y position in space.
Pline
The FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to

create an element that is composed of one or more
connected line or arc segments.
Polar Coordinate The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to

System
specify the coordinates of a point.
Polygon Window Handles and selection sets highlight when geometry is
selected for an element modification or edit.
Polyline
The FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar) allows you to

create an element that is composed of one or more
connected line or arc segments.
Q
R
Radial Dimension Radial dimensions can be placed with the SmartDimension
Command (Dimension Toolbar) .
Real World Units The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to
specify the coordinates of a point. You can draw on
drawing sheets and then scale to real-world units.
Redraw
Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.
Regenerate
Windows are automatically refreshed as you draw.
Region
Regions are automatically closed as you draw with the

SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu).
Relative
Coordinates

Rubber-Band
Line
The software displays geometry as it is constructed. As

you use a command, one end of a dynamic line is attached
to a point in your drawing and the other end of the line is
attached to the mouse cursor.
Running Object
Snap

connect end points by moving the pointer over the end

points.
S
Screen Menu

Script File
Scripts are written and run as macros. Programming with

SmartSketch allows you to write macros for the software.
A macro is a sequence of actions or commands that are
named and saved.
Selection Set
The software provides group selection and manipulation

using the Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar)
and edit commands.
define how you want to locate elements.
Snap Mode
Snap Resolution The SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) allows you to

define locate zones that define how close the pointer must
be to an element you want to recognize or select.
Space
Drawing Sheets allow you to draw in a 2-D work space.
T
Text Style
The Text Box Command (Draw Toolbar) lets you define

the text characteristics you want to use.
Thickness
The z value, or elevation, of a 3-D element is maintained

as an attribute through OLE servers when an AutoCAD file
is embedded in a software file.
Toolbar

Transparent
Command
The view commands allow you to start a Command while

another is processing.
U
UCS (User
Coordinate
System) Icon


Unit

V
Vector

Vertical
Dimension
The length of a line can be measured with the

SmartDimension Command (Dimension Toolbar) . The
Distance Between Command (Dimension Toolbar) can
also be used to place a horizontal or vertical dimension.
View
Windows are used to display drawings from a particular

viewpoint.
Viewport
Drawing sheets allow you to define a bounded area.
W
WPolygon
The software provides group selection and manipulation

using the Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar)
.
X
XYZ Point Filters The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) allows you to
Y
Z
Zoom Extents
The Zoom Out Command (View Menu) and Zoom Area

Command (View Menu) allow you to increase or decrease
the display of the graphics in a drawing. The Fit Command
(View Menu) changes the display of a window so that all
the elements are displayed.
Getting Help for MicroStation Users: An

Overview
This Help provides you with information about how you can use your
MicroStation files with SmartSketch to get the most out of both systems. A
command comparison and task comparison will help the MicroStation user
become familiar with SmartSketch terminology.
Command Comparison: MicroStation to

SmartSketch
This command comparison lists MicroStation commands and their equivalent
commands in SmartSketch .
MicroStation
A
Active
...Color (CO=)
...Font (FT=)
...Keypoint
...Style
...Weight(WT=)
Array

.....Polar

Change Toolbar)
Toolbar)
....Rectangular
B
C
Change
...Color
...Level
...Style


Construct
...Tangent Arc1
Construct Bisector
...Angle

Toolbar) and SmartSketch Command
(Tools Menu)
Toolbar)
...Line
Construct Circle
...Tangent to Three Elements
Circle by 3 Points Command (Draw

Toolbar) with SmartSketch Command
(Tools Menu)
Construct Line
...AA1

(Tools Menu)
Construct Perpendicular
...From
...To

(Tools Menu)
(Tools Menu)
Construct Tangent
...Between
...Circle 1
...Perpendicular
...To
...from Element
Copy Element

(Tools Menu)
(Tools Menu)
(Tools Menu)
(Tools Menu)
(Tools Menu)
Copy Parallel
...by Distance
Create Cell
Create Chain
...Manual
Crosshatch

Move Command (Change Toolbar) with
copy option
Move Command (Change Toolbar) with
copy and step distance option
Symbols
Toolbar)
Style Command (Format Menu); Fill
D
Define Cell Origin
Delete
Symbols
...Element
Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) with

...Partial
Delete Cell
Dimension
...Diameter Extended
...Radius
...Save style
...Size Arrow
...modify text location
...settings
...text style
E

Toolbar)
Toolbar)
Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar)
Enter data field

...commands
Exit
Extend Element 2
Extend Line

...Intersection

with SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu)

...by Keyin
F
Fence
...Change Color
...Change Level
...Change Style
...Change Symbology
...Copy
...Delete
...Move
...Stretch
Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar);

Fence Array
...Polar
...Rectangular

Change Toolbar)
Toolbar)
Fence Rotate
...Original

Fence Scale
...Copy
...Original

Scale Command (Change Toolbar) with
copy option
File Fence (FF=)

Fillet
...Modify
...Nomodify
Fillet Command (Draw Toolbar) with

...Single
Fit
G
Graphic Group

SmartSketch Command (Tools Menu) and
Group Command (Change Toolbar) and
Ungroup Command (Change Toolbar)
H
Hatch
I
Identify
...Cell
Increment Text
Intersection
J

select a symbol
Macros with Text Box Command (Draw
Toolbar)
Justify
...Center
...Left
...Right
K

L
Levels
...Off (OF=)
...On (ON=)
Lock

...Axis
...Grid
M

Measure
...Area

...Area Element
...Distance Points
...Radius

Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) or
Toolbar)
Mirror Copy
...Horizontal/Vertical
...Line
Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) with

copy option
Mirror Command (Change Toolbar) with
copy option
Mirror Original
...Horizontal/Vertical
...Line
Modify

...Element
Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar) (Use

direct manipulation of the handles)
Modify Arc
...Angle
...Radius
Move
...Element
...Up/Left/Right/Down

N
O
P
Place
...Lstring Point
...Mline
...Note
...Shape
...Shape Orthogonal
...Text

Toolbar)

Place Arc
...by Center
...by Edge
...by Radius
Place Block
...Rotated
Place Cell
Arc By Center Command (Draw Toolbar)

...Absolute
Place Circle
Symbols
...Center
...by Diameter
...by Edge
...by Radius
Place Ellipse
Circle by Center Command (Draw Toolbar)

...Half

Toolbar) and Trim Command (Draw
Toolbar)
Toolbar) and Trim Command (Draw
Toolbar)
Toolbar)
Toolbar)
Toolbar)
...Quarter
...by Center
...by Edge
Place Line
Place Point
Place Text
Plot
Q
Quit
...Stop
R
Rename Cell (CR)=

Reset (button)
Rotate
Symbols
Right mouse button.

...Copy
...Original
S
Rotate Command (Change Toolbar) with

copy option
Save
Scale
...Copy
Scale Command (Change Toolbar) with

copy option.
...Original
Select Cell
...Absolute
Set
Symbols
...Linefill
Style Command (Format Menu); Fill

Command ( Toolbar)
Symbols
Screen automatically refreshes.
Set Coordinates
Show Library
Stop Drawing
T
U
Undo
Update
V

Screen automatically refreshes.
W
Window
...Area
...Center
Zoom Area Command (View Menu) Also

located on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
Pan Command (View Menu) Also located
on Main tool bar and shortcut menu.
X
Y
Z
Zoom
...In
Zoom In Command (View Menu) Also


...Out
Zoom Out Command (View Menu) Also

Task Comparison: MicroStation to

SmartSketch
This task and term comparison lists MicroStation tasks and terms and the
equivalent functionality in SmartSketch.
MicroStation
A
Active Depth
The active depth of a 3-D element is

maintained through OLE servers as an
attribute when a MicroStation file is
embedded in a software file.
B
C
Cell
Symbols can be created with the software

by allowing you to use OLE servers to
embed or link a MicroStation cell or
convert a cell library.
Command Window
The ribbon allows you to give and receive

feedback when you are using a command.
Compress
It is not necessary to compress documents

in the software.
D
Default
The Style Command (Format Menu) allows

you to pre-define the default settings of
elements.
Data Point
The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu) is

used to draw geometry.
Data Button
The software uses the left mouse button for

providing input points.

Dimension Units
The Dimension Command (Format Menu)

allows you to specify the units you want to
use when you place dimensions.
Dimension Format
The Dimension Command (Format Menu)

allows you to specify how your dimensions
appear when you place them.
Drop Status
The UnGroup Command (Change Toolbar)

allows you to remove an element from a
group.
Design ".dgn" file
Drawing sheets provide an area for creating

and editing a drawing. Drawing sheets are
part of the software document.
Dynamic Update
The software displays geometry as it is

constructed. As you use a command, one
end of a dynamic line is attached to a point
in your drawing and the other end of the
line is attached to the pointer.
E
Element Attributes

you to define the attributes of elements.
F
Fence
Font
The software provides group selection and

manipulation using the Select Tool
and edit commands.
Font support includes TrueType fonts
G
Graphics Cursor
The pointer is a screen display device that

allows you to place graphics and
annotations.
Graphics Screen / Graphics

Window
The windows of the software allow you to

create graphics and select commands.
Drawing sheets are displayed in the
window.

H
Handles
Handles and selection sets are highlighted

when geometry is selected for modification.
Hatching
The Fill Command (Draw Toolbar) allows

you to fill enclosed shapes with various
colors or styles.
I
Identify
The Select Tool Command (Draw Toolbar)

allows you to identify elements for
selection and manipulation.
J
K
L
Level
The Display Manager Command (Tools

Menu) allows you to define layers and
styles for layers.
Line style

you to define the line styles of elements.
M
MicroCSL
The software allows you to program and

customize.
Mirror
The Mirror Command (Change Toolbar)

allows you to move elements or sets of
elements about a mirror point.
N
O
Origin
The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu)

allows you to specify the coordinates of a
point. The software Command (Tools
Menu) allows you to locate positions and
points on elements including elements on
symbols.

P
Parameter
The software allows you to define user

properties of elements and objects.
Pull-down Menus
The software has menus, shortcut menus,

and toolbars for command selection.
Q
R
Real World Units

point. You can draw on drawing sheets and
then scale to real-world units.
Relative Coordinates

point.
Reset Button
Reset by releasing a button or by selecting a

new command.
S
Screen Menu
The software has menus, shortcut menus,

and toolbars for command selection.
Seed File
Templates allow you to define variables and

settings for a new drawing.
T
Tags
The provide a mechanism for using

database features.
Tentative
The software SmartSketch Command

(Tools Menu) allows you to locate the key
points of elements as you draw.
U
UCS (User Coordinate System) The PinPoint Command (Tools Menu)
Icon
point.

Update
Windows are automatically refreshed as you

draw.
V
View
Views are used to display the information in

a window. Windows display drawings from
a particular viewpoint.
W
Working Units
The software allows you to specify the

working units you want to use when you
draw.
X
Y
Z
Z Depth
The z value of a 3-D element is maintained

as an attribute through OLE servers when a
MicroStation file is embedded into a
software file.
Zoom
The Zoom Out Command (View Menu) and

Zoom Area Command (View Menu) allow
you to increase or decrease the display of
the graphics in a drawing. The Fit
Command (View Menu) changes the
display of a window to display all elements.
Using the Learning Center: An

Overview
Each tutorial in the SmartSketch Learning Center contains a combination of
step-by-step guidelines and video demonstrations to help you learn to use
SmartSketch. For optimal performance of the multimedia content, you
should install the tutorial locally while you learn to use the product. You can
also run the tutorials over the network, but network traffic may degrade the
sound or visual quality of the multimedia.
The tutorial files occupy a large amount of space on the SmartSketch CD and
on the hard drive of your computer, so after you have worked through each
tutorial, you may want to delete the Tutorials directory from your computer
to conserve memory. The Tutorials directory resides in the SmartSketch
directory at the installation location for SmartSketch.
Caution
If the tutorials exist on the server, do not delete them; otherwise,

other users on the network will be unable to access them.
If you delete Learning Center tutorials from your computer, the

Help > Learning SmartSketch command continues to open the
Learning Center, but the links to tutorials no longer work.
Access Online Tutorials

1. Click Help > Learning SmartSketch.
2. Select a tutorial.
3. Follow the instructions in the Learning Center to navigate within the
tutorials and view demonstrations.
4. Return to the product at anytime by clicking the SmartSketch icon on the
bottom of your screen.
Notes
You can open tutorials from either the SmartSketch CD or from

the network.
If you installed the software from the CD, leave the CD in the CDROM drive to open tutorials.
If you installed the software from a network, verify the network

drive or Universal Naming Convention (UNC) network
connection.
Accessing Support Resources: An

Overview
Web Site
The Intergraph web site brings you fast, convenient, and up-to-the-minute
information about Intergraph's support, products, services, and direction. Our
web address is http://www.intergraph.com/pbs.
Additionally, the SmartSketch on the Web command (available via the Help
menu) offers a myriad of tools to help you use SmartSketch more efficiently,
keep up-to-date on product happenings, view a web gallery of SmartSketch
drawings, and contact Intergraph.
Important
To use the SmartSketch on the Web command, you must be

connected to the Internet with a modem or other connection.
Intergraph's Knowledge Base

If you have Internet access and have bought product maintenance, you may
want to try our knowledge base at http://smart.intergraph.com.
Telephone Support
In the United States, call Intergraph's standard support number at 1-800-7667701, Monday through Friday, except holidays. If you are outside the United
States, please call your local Intergraph office.
Please have the following information when you call:
The product's name, version, and serial number.
Your name and telephone number.
A brief description of the problem.
Customization Services
Intergraph provides consulting services to help you take advantage of the
SmartSketch Application Programming Interface (API). The services range
from basic telephone consultation to on-site custom programming and
complete turnkey solutions. Contact us at the following:
http://www.smartsketch.com
1-800-260-0246 (inside the United States of America)
1-256-730-3707 (international callers)
User Assistance
SmartSketch's user assistance supplies command information as you perform
tasks. You can access different kinds of information any time you are running
the software. This information could include reference topics, narrative
descriptions, or instructional material.
In addition, SmartSketch provides several learning tools that you can activate
from the online Help menu.
SmartSketch offers the following important user assistance features:
Online Help
Complete command descriptions give you more information.

When you click Help or press Shift + F1, the pointer changes to a
northwest arrow with a question mark. You can then get contextsensitive Help for any command by clicking the toolbar button or
by clicking the menu command at the top of the window.
A structured table of contents, an index, and full-text search

capabilities provide easy access to Help topics. Press F1 any time
you need online Help during a design session. When a command is
active, the Help topic for that command appears. If no command is
active, then the table of contents for the Help topics appears.
You can also access the table of contents by clicking Help Topics on the Help
menu.
Learning Tools
You can use About SmartSketch on the Help menu to see your
software version and license information.
User Interface Features
ToolTips helps you find command names. When you pause the
pointer on the command button on the toolbar, a yellow label
displays the command's name.
Brief command descriptions show you the basic function of a

command. When you point the pointer at the command button on
the toolbar, the description appears in the Status Bar at the bottom
of the window. Also, messages that explain your actions for each
step of the command appear in the Status Bar.
Display Frequently Asked Questions

1. Click Help > SmartSketch on the Web.
2. Follow the instructions on the HTML page to navigate within the site and
to leave the site.
3. Return to the SmartSketch product at any time by clicking the
SmartSketch icon on the bottom of your screen.
Access Online Support

1. Click Help > Learning SmartSketch.
2. Follow the instructions on the web page to navigate within the site and to
leave the site.
3. Return to the product at anytime by clicking the product icon on the
bottom of your screen.

About SmartSketch Command (Help Menu)
Displays information about your copy of the software, including the version
number and the copyright, legal, and licensing notices.
Help Command (Main Toolbar)

Displays context-sensitive Help on an item in the current window. You can
use this command to get help on any item even when the item is not active.
When this command is active, the pointer changes to a northwest arrow with a
question mark.
Tip
You can press Shift + F1 to get context-sensitive Help on an

active command.
Learning Center Command (Help Menu)

Accesses a set of multi-media tutorials to help you get up and running with the
software.
Help Topics Command (Help Menu)

Displays the table of contents for the SmartSketch Help topics, which include
step-by-step instructions for using the software, reference information,
examples of features, and technical support information. It also provides
access to the Help index and full-text search.
SmartSketch on the Web Command (Help

Menu)
Activates your World Wide Web browser and opens the SmartSketch World
Wide Web page. On this page, you can access registration and support
information, learning tools, and other items to help you use SmartSketch more

efficiently.
SmartSketch Web Forum Command (Help

Menu)
Allows you to access Intergraph's online community of SmartSketch users. In
addition to facilitating communication between Intergraph personnel and other
SmartSketch users, the forum also provides access to short, informative video
clips that illustrate step-by-step guidelines for performing sophisticated
workflows. These clips may be viewed online, or they may be downloaded to
your local machine for later viewing.
Tip of the Day Command (Help Menu)

Displays tips about using features in the software. This command also offers a
tip each time you start the software.
Tip of the Day Dialog Box

Displays a tip each time you start the software. You can also activate this
dialog box by choosing Tip of the Day from the Help menu.
Dialog Box Options

Did You Know - Displays a tip about using a feature.
More Tips - Displays a list of available tips.
Next Tip - Displays the next tip in the list.
Show Tips At Startup - Displays a tip every time you start the software. If
you do not want to display tips when you start the software, clear this option.
Understanding Document Concepts: An Overview
Understanding Document
Concepts: An Overview
SmartSketch provides quick and easy to use tools for setting up, saving, and
printing documents.
You can create documents by selecting one of many industry standard
templates provided with SmartSketch, or you can open SmartSketch using
NORMAL.igr as a starting template. Once a document has been created, the
document itself can be saved as a template for future use.
With Sheet Setup on the File menu, you can create unlimited sheets within a
document. Each sheet acts like a separate drawing. You can make changes to
each sheet individually, and then save them collectively in a multi-sheet
document.
The SmartSketch File menu provides several options for saving your
documents, including the ability to automatically save open documents at
specified intervals or to save an existing document in a new format.
You can print your documents by choosing a menu command or toolbar
button.
Setting Up Documents: An Overview

When you start SmartSketch, a new, blank document opens. You can format
each new document you create or use a pre-formatted template as a starting
point for a new document and save the changes when you are finished.
When you create a drawing, the drawing is displayed on your screen. You can
use the commands on toolbars and in menus to add information to your
document, and you can use edit commands to modify the information in your
document.
Any changes you make are temporarily stored in memory. You have to save
the document to preserve the changes to your document. You can also save
documents in a specific format.
Opening Existing Documents

Open on the File menu opens existing documents. SmartSketch keeps track of
the documents you open and displays them at the bottom of the File menu.
Options on the Tools menu allows you to set the number of entries
SmartSketch displays in the list. To open one of the documents, choose it
from the list.
Setting Up Properties for a Document

Properties on the File menu allows you to view, edit, and store properties for
a document. Document properties can include the title, the author, and
keywords that identify important information. These properties also can
include document statistics, such as document size and the date that a
document was created and last modified. Some properties, such as the date the
document was last modified, are updated automatically.
Setting Up Units of Measure for a Document

The units of measure settings for a document are stored as a property. You can
set units of measure in both English and metric units for values such as length,
area, or angles. Once you set the units of measure, all the measurements in the
drawing are affected. For example, if you set the length unit of measure to
inches, then all the measurements in the drawing display in inches.
You can change the unit of measure at any time while you are drawing, and
the document still retains complete accuracy of the measurements in the
drawing.
The precision readout determines the accuracy of the unit readout value by
setting the number of significant figures to display. The precision setting does

not alter the numbers that you type into the fields, only the display of the
numbers in the field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For example, if the
precision readout is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then
the line value length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches
long. If you are using mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the
values display in the fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50 mm.
Tip
When you set the units of measure for a document, the settings do
not affect the dimensional values for the document. You can set
units for the dimensional values with the Dimension Properties
dialog box. You can access this dialog box by selecting a
dimension and then clicking Properties on the shortcut menu. You
can also set the dimension units by editing a dimension style with
Dimension on the Format menu.
Working with Several Open Documents

Several documents can remain open in the same session. You can use Cut,
Copy, and Paste to move or copy information between the documents or
within one open document. You can use commands on the Window menu to
arrange all the open documents so that you can view them easily.
You can also use Object on the Insert menu to import objects, such as
drawings, spreadsheets, or text created in other software, into an open
document. You can link or embed the imported objects. You can also drag
information from another document into an open document.
Create a Document
1. On the Main toolbar, click the New File icon
, or click File > New.
2. In the Templates list, select the template you want to use to create the
document.
Notes
If you want to create a template, you can simply save the document
to the TEMPLATE directory located in the directory where you
installed the software. A different filename extension is not
needed.
You can change the directory where templates are saved by

selecting Options on the Tools menu and setting the directory that
you want to use on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog
box.
Open a Document
To Open a document without leaving the software.
1. On the Main toolbar, click Open
Tip
You also can click File > Open.
4. Select the directory containing the document you want to open.

5. Type the name of the document or select it from the list of documents.
6. On the Open dialog box, click Open.
To Drag and Drop a Document

1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the document that you want.
2. Drag the document to the title bar at the top of the software window.
Notes
You can open one of the last documents you worked on by

selecting from the list at the bottom of the File menu.
In the Open dialog box, you can double-click the document name
for the document to open the document.
If you do not see the document you want to open, make sure the
drive, directory, and type are correct.
If you do not know the location of the document, you can look for
the document. On the Windows Taskbar, click Start > Find.
Set Up a Drawing Sheet

1. Click File > Sheet Setup.
2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options you want.
Tip
If you want to set up a background sheet, click the Background

tab and set the options you want.
Notes
You can save the sheet setup as a default using Save Defaults on
the Sheet Setup dialog box. The current settings will then be used
as the default settings for any new drawing sheets you create in the
document.
You can set up options for an existing drawing sheet by doubleclicking any tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog box. You can
also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving the pointer over
a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the shortcut menu,
and clicking Sheet Setup.
View the Properties of a Document

1. Click File > Properties.
2. On the Properties dialog box, click the tab that contains the information
you want to see.
Tip
You must save the document before you can set or view the
document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and
Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box.
Notes
The Properties dialog box displays information about the current

condition of the active document. If the document has unsaved
changes, you must save the document to update the property
information.
Set Document Properties

2. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that you want, such as
summary information or keywords.
Notes
You must save the document before you can set or view the
document statistics or summary information on the Statistics and
Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box.
Set File Locations

1. Click Tools > Options.
2. On the Options dialog box, click the File Locations tab.
3. Select one of the file types in the list.
4. Click Modify and, on the Modify Location dialog box, select the
directory where you want the software to look for the file type.

Notes
You can set the software to look for files on another machine. To
connect to another machine, click the Modify button to define
other directories or network paths.

New Command (File Menu)
Creates a new document or template. You can use a template to create the
document.
File New Dialog Box

Creates a new document or template.
Dialog Box Options

Templates - Lists the templates available in the TEMPLATE directory that
is located in the directory where you installed the software. Select the
template that you want to use to create a new document or template.
Tip
You can change the directory where templates are stored by

you want on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box. If
you change this setting, the Templates list on the File New dialog
box displays a list of the templates in the directory that you
specified.
Open Command (File Menu)

Opens an existing document or template in a new window.
File Open Dialog Box

Controls how a document is opened.
When you position the pointer in this dialog box and right-click, you can
access a variety of standard commands that help you manage your documents
more efficiently. For example, if you select a document in the list and then

right-click, you can then click the Select command on the shortcut menu to
automatically open the document. You can also create shortcuts, send the
document somewhere else, and other activities.
Tip
To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the
Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box and
click the control that you want information about.
Options Command (Tools Menu)

Changes settings that control screen appearance, document location, user
information, and so forth.
Note
Tools > Options also allows you to set options for importing
MicroStation or AutoCAD documents into SmartSketch. These
foreign data settings are available only when the CAD Translator
module is installed.
Options Dialog Box

Sets options for the current document. For example, you can set the grid
display by clicking the View tab.
Options Dialog Box Tabs
Colors Tab
General Tab
File Locations Tab
View Tab
Symbols Tab
Reference Files Tab
Colors Tab
Controls color settings for the active document.
Tab Options
Sheet - Sets the default color of all drawing sheets in the active document.
Highlight - Sets the highlight color.
Selected Element - Sets the color of selected elements.
Disabled Elements - Sets the color of disabled elements.
Handles - Sets the color of handles when an element is selected.
General Tab
Controls settings such as the display of 3-D effects and the number of entries
in the list of recently used files.
Tab Options
Update Links Automatically At Open - Updates links automatically when
the document is open and this option is set.
Recently Used Files List - Sets the number of entries for the Recent Files
area of the File menu when the Recent Files area is set.
Dimension Keyin Values Automatically - Places dimensions for recognized

step values or for values you type in a ribbon field.
Display Unit Of Measurement Labels - Displays the units of measurement
in the value field.
Undo Steps - Sets the number of operations that can be undone.
File Locations Tab

Specifies the default location for documents, templates, and other objects you
create or use in the software. You can use the following types of documents:
Documents
User-defined templates
Fonts
Macros
MicroStation references
AutoCAD references
Tab Options
File Types - Indicates the file type for which you want to specify a location.
Location - Displays the designated location for each file type.
Modify - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box. The directory selected
with the dialog box is displayed in the Location column on this tab. After you
select a location, you can delete it later by selecting the location in the
Location column and pressing Delete.
Reference Files Tab

Tab Options
Scale - Sets a scale option for importing a document.
Coincident - Brings in a reference file, also known as an inserted object, at
full scale (1:1) and coincident to its original coordinate position. The setting
shifts the drawing sheet to the lower left of the document graphic range and
then determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the reference file within the
sheet. If the current document already contains graphics, the drawing sheet
shifts to include those graphics.

Tip
If you use the Coincident setting, the reference file does not
appear when you drag the pointer.
Select Scale - Sets the drawing scale to a standard ratio. The specified ratio
defines the size of the drawing in relation to the size of the real-world object.
For a 2:1 ratio, 2 represents the size of the drawing and 1 represents the size of
the real-world object.
Tip
Fit to Sheet determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the

reference file within the sheet, but allows you to specify where to
insert the file by clicking on the drawing sheet.
Custom Scale - Sets the scale that you type in the boxes for a document that
you insert or drag. For example, when you type in 3 and 2 in each of the
respective boxes, the scale of the foreign document is one-and-a-half times its
original size.
Symbols Tab
Determines the default actions when you drag a symbol into the document.
You can override the settings on this tab when you drag a symbol. You can
press Ctrl to embed the symbol or Ctrl + Shift to link the symbol.
Tab Options
Drag and Drop Default - Specifies actions when you drag a symbol into the
document.
Embed - Sets the default action so that the symbol embeds when you drag it
on the drawing sheet. Embedding the symbol means that the software places a
copy of the symbol in the document. If you edit one instance of the embedded
symbol in a document, all copies of that symbol within the current document
reflect those changes.
Link - Sets the default action so that the symbol is linked when you drag it
into the document. Linking the symbol allows you to edit the original symbol
document. The symbol that you placed on the drawing sheet updates
automatically. If you edit the symbol inside the active document, those
changes are saved in the .sym document on your computer.
View Tab (Options Dialog Box)

Controls the appearance of the software and document window, such as the
display of the graph paper, ruler, and scroll bar.
Tab Options
Display As Printed - Displays the document as it appears on paper.
Window - Controls the window display.
Vertical Scroll Bar - Displays the vertical scroll bar of the active window.
Horizontal Scroll Bar - Displays the horizontal scroll bar of the active
window.
Status Bar - Displays the status bar of the application.
Sheet Tabs - Displays the drawing sheet tabs.
Grid - Allows you to set options for the grid.
Note
The grid display option must be checked from the view menu
before these settings will be visable.
Grid Display - Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision.
The grid lines are not considered part of the document and do not print.
Grid Snap - Aligns elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines
in the document that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap,
elements always align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid
lines.
Grid Style - Changes the format of the grid lines to either static or dynamic.
When you zoom in or out, the software dynamically generates the grid lines
for a dynamic grid . You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium,
or coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common major measurement
increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker,
solid grid lines.
A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out.
The grid maintains a constant minimum spacing.
Grid Index - Determines the number of index grid lines, also known as minor
grid lines, to be equally spaced between the major grid lines. This option is
available only if you select Static in the Grid Style list box.
Grid Spacing - Sets the spacing of the major grid lines. This option is
available only if you select Static in the Grid Style list box. The selected
options on the Units tab of the Properties dialog box determine the units that
you can enter, such as inches or centimeters.

Tip
You can open the Properties dialog box by clicking Properties on

the File menu.
Grid Density - Changes the number of dashes in the index lines, or minor
grid lines, between intersections with the grid lines. This option is available
only if you select Dynamic in the Grid Style list box.
Sheet outline - Allows you to set options for the outline of the drawing sheet.
Display - Displays the outline of a drawing sheet so you can view its
boundaries.
Use during fit - Specifies whether or not to use the sheet outline during a fit.
Properties Command (File Menu)

Accesses general information about the current document. You can review
and edit the following document information: the document summary,
statistics, units, and Browser properties. If a symbol document (.sym) is open,
you can review and edit the general, unit, behavior, and specific symbol
properties for the document.
Properties Dialog Box

Tracks information about the properties of a document.
Tip
You must save the document before you can access the Statistics
and Summary tabs of the Properties dialog box. If a symbol
document (.sym) is open, the only tabs that appear are the
General, Units, Browser, Symbols, and Behavior tabs.
Tabs
General Tab
Summary Tab
Statistics Tab
Units Tab
Browser Tab
Symbols Tab
Behavior Tab
Behavior Tab
Tab Options
Insertion Type - Specifies the insertion type for a symbol. You can set the
insertion type by clicking Options on the Tools menu and then clicking the
Symbols tab on the Options dialog box. After you set an insertion type for a
symbol, you cannot change the type.
Update - Displays the type of update for the link on the symbol. To change
the update status of a link, click Automatic. To prevent updating the link,
click Frozen. You can select Automatic when you want the document to
automatically reflect any changes to the symbol document. You can select
Frozen when you do not want the symbol in the current document to change
at all.
Scale Factor - Specifies the scale factor that the symbol uses when you drag it
into the active document. The scale factor used is relative to the model units
of the symbol. For example, if you set the scale factor to 2 and the symbol has
1 cm square in model units, it displays 2 cm square when you drag it into the
active document.
Lock Scale - Specifies if you can scale the symbol after you place it in a
document.
Tip
You can scale a symbol by clicking Scale on the Change toolbar

or by dragging the symbol handles.
Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation

on the drawing sheet according to the applied relationships . If you clear the
check box, the symbol does not change its orientation regardless of changes to
its relationships.
This check box is available only when the symbol is an open document. You
can open the symbol document (.sym) with the Open command on the File
menu. When you set or clear this check box and close the symbol document,
the setting affects the behavior of the symbol when it is dragged from the
Symbol Explorer onto the drawing sheet.
The check box is clear by default. When the check box is clear, a symbol
maintains its orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the symbol or
other elements that are related to it. In the following example, the line and
symbol share a dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is
grounded in place with a lock relationship.
If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line
and symbol to modify the position of the elements, the symbol does not
change its orientation on the drawing sheet. The driving dimension changes to
a driven dimension that is not to scale, as indicated by the underlined
dimensional value.
When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships check box, the symbol
changes orientation on the drawing sheet according to the applied
relationships. In the example, when you edit the dimensional value of the
driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol changes
orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships.
Nested Display - Defines the behavior of nested symbols. The options are
Public and Private. When you open a document that contains nested symbols,
the public option displays these symbols, but the private option hides these
symbols.
Browser Tab
Sets the home address for the active document. Every time you open this
document and click Home on the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol Explorer
goes to the address in the Address box. This tab is available only for

documents that are symbols and have an .sym extension.
Tab Options
Address - Sets the home address for the current document. When you open a
document and then open the Symbol Explorer and click Home, the Symbol
Explorer goes to the address that you type here. You can any address that you
use in a web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer; for example, you
can type http://www.ingr.com.
If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at symbols on your
computer, you can enter the following syntax in the Address box:
<application.path>\..\<path of symbols. For example, you could enter
<application.path>\..\symbols\arch.htm.
Browse - Accesses the Modify Location dialog box so that you can set
another directory for the Symbol Explorer to look in. You can set the dialog
box to look in directories on your computer or a network drive.
General Tab
Displays general information about the current document.
Tip
If some of the following information is not available, the boxes

display "Unknown."
Tab Options
Filename - Displays the name of the document.
Type - Displays the type of document. The type is based on the application
used to create the document.
Location - Displays the directory containing the document.
Size - Displays the size of the document in bytes, kilobytes, and megabytes.
MS-DOS Name - Displays the name of the document as it would appear in a
File Allocation Table file naming system. These types of documents have an
eight-character name and three-character extension.
Created - Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.
Modified - Displays the date and time the document was last modified.
Accessed - Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.

Attributes - Displays the attributes of the current document. These settings
are read-only.
Read-Only - Indicates that the document is read-only. You cannot open a
read-only file for writing. You cannot create a file with the same name as a
read-only file.
Archive - Shows that the document is an archive document.
Hidden - Indicates that the document is a hidden document. You usually
cannot see this document in the Windows Explorer.
System - Shows that the document is a system document. You usually cannot
see this document unless you change the options in the Internet Explorer.
Statistics Tab
Displays detailed information about the current document. The software
automatically generates these properties when you create, save, or print the
document.
Tab Options
Created - Displays the date and time the document was created or copied.
Creating Application - Displays the name of the application that created the
document.
Modified - Displays the date and time the document was last modified.
Accessed - Displays the date that the document was last opened or copied.
Last Saved By - Displays the name of the person who last saved the
document.
Saving Application - Displays the name of the application that most recently
saved the document.
Currently Opened By - Displays the name of the person who has the
document open.
Summary Tab
Displays the title and author, if available, along with keywords and comments
for the current document. The software generates the author and template
information when you create, save, or print the document. You can also edit
these properties, with the exception of the template, unless the document is
write-protected.
Tab Options
Title - Specifies the title of the current document.
Subject - Gives a general description of the current document.
Author - Displays the name of the person who created the document.
Keywords - Displays a list of words that identify the document when you
browse or search documents.
Comments - Specifies comments about the current document.
Template - Displays the name of the document template that was used to
create the document.
Symbol Tab
Defines the symbol properties for an .sym document. With this tab, you can
assign descriptive information that identifies the symbol. When you drag the
symbol into a document, these values appear in the Attribute Viewer.
For example, if you wanted to define a bill of materials, you can assign
manufacturing information on this tab for a door symbol, place the symbol in
a document, and then create a report that displays the manufacturing
information.
Tab Options
Name - Defines a property name.
Type - Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property
name. You can choose from Character, Number, Money, or Date.
Value - Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a
manufacturer's name, a serial number, or other descriptive information as a
value.
Properties - The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for
the symbol.
Units Tab
Sets up units of measure and precision readout for the length, area, or angle
values in a drawing.
The precision readout sets the number of significant figures to display. It sets
the accuracy of the unit readout value. The precision setting does not alter the
numbers that you type into the fields, only the display of the numbers in the

field. Values ending in 5 are rounded up. For example, if the precision readout
is .123 and you draw a line that is 2.1056 inches long, then the line value
length is rounded. The length value appears as 2.106 inches long. If you are
using mm as your drawing sheet units, you can have the values display in the
fields as 3.5 mm or 3.50 mm.
Tab Options
Length Readout - Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the
length values in a document.
Angle Readout - Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the angle
values in a document.
Area Readout - Sets the unit of measure and precision readout for the area
values in a document.
Sheet Setup Command (File Menu)

Defines the properties of the working sheet. You can display and modify the
following properties: the name, size, and scale used in the working sheet; and
the properties of the working sheet margin. You can also select the
background sheet you want to use.
You can save settings only for the active working sheet. These settings can
also be saved so that they are used when you add a new working sheet to the
document. To display a working sheet, use Working Sheets.
Tip
Sheet Setup is available only if you use the Customize command

to place it on a toolbar or menu.
Sheet Setup Dialog Box

Defines the properties of the active drawing sheet.
Tabs
Size and Scale Tab
Background Tab
Name Tab
Size and Scale Tab

Defines details for the drawing sheet size, scale, and print setup information.
Tab Options
Sheet Size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet.
Same As Print Setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the current print
setup definition. For example, if the printer is set up as 8 1/2 X 11, the
drawing sheet size is set up as 8 1/2 X 11.
Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and
ISO paper sizes.
Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered width and
height values.
Drawing Scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet.
Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. As a result, the
representation of the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the realworld object being described.
For a 2:1 ratio, the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1 represents
the size of the real-world object.
Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance
on the drawing sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal
to in the real world.
Paper Units - Sets the paper units for the drawing sheet.
Units - Controls the display of numeric values in dialog boxes that define the
size of non-scaled objects. Some examples of non-scaled object values are text
height and line width. This setting does not affect dimension units.
Only value boxes use this option. For example, if you are working in feet and
inches, you can specify that you want to read and enter values for text height
in fractional inches. (1/8" instead of 0.00'-0.125" )
Tip
When printing or plotting a drawing sheet, the non-scaled items

appear on the printed document with the exact size that you
specify.

Precision - Sets the number of significant figures to display, or the accuracy
of the unit readout value. The precision setting does not change the numbers
that you can type in the fields, only the display of the numbers in the field.
Values ending in 5 are rounded up to the next whole number.
For example, if you set this control to .001 and you draw a line that is 2.1056
inches, then the line length value is rounded. The length value appears as
2.106 inches. If you set this control to 0.01 and you type a line length value of
3.5 mm, the length value appears as 3.50 mm.
Background Tab
Defines the color, margin settings and background sheet display information.
Tab Options
Background Sheet - Specifies the background sheet that you want to use for
the working sheet. If you have not created a background sheet, this box does
not display any options. You must first create a background sheet before you
can select it from the list.
All graphics on the background sheet display on the working sheet. Changing
the background sheet updates the size and margin settings of the working
sheet to the values defined by the selected background sheet.
Show Background - Displays the background sheet graphics on the selected
working sheet.
Preview - Displays the range of the graphic to print on the printer paper.
Name Tab
Defines the name of a drawing sheet. You can also change the name of a
drawing sheet.
Tab Options
Sheet Name - Specifies a name for the drawing sheet. You can also use this
box to rename a drawing sheet by selecting the sheet in the document before
clicking Sheet Setup on the File menu.
Most Recently Used Files Command (File

Menu)
Opens one of the documents that you worked on most recently. The file names
are listed near the bottom of the File menu. You can change the number of

files listed on the menu by clickingTools > Options and selecting the
General tab.
Managing Multi-sheet Documents: An

Overview
Drawing sheets are similar to pages in a notebook. You can place different
sketches or drawings on different drawing sheets in the document. For
example, you can draw one idea for a design on one drawing sheet and
another idea on another drawing sheet, and then save both drawings in the
same document. There is no limit to the number of sheets you can have in a
document.
When you create a new document, a default sheet appears with a border and a
title box. You can modify the default settings with Sheet Setup on the File
menu. For example, you can give a specific name to a sheet by setting options
with this command. If you want to insert new sheets, click New Sheet on the
Insert menu.
Each sheet acts like a separate drawing and can have different scales and sheet
borders. If you want to locate or use relationships between elements, you
should place the elements on the same sheet.
You can display a number of drawing sheets on top of each other and
simultaneously view the drawings on all of the drawing sheets, much as you
would view a stack of transparencies.
Areas of a Drawing Sheet

A drawing sheet has two areas that affect the way you work - the sheet outline
and the working sheet. The sheet outline (A) shows the orientation of the sheet
and the default print region of the sheet. You can change the size and
orientation of the sheet outline with Sheet Setup on the File menu.
You can draw new elements on the sheet outline or outside the borders of the
outline. All new graphics that you create are placed on the active drawing
sheet.
The sheet where you will create most of your graphics is called a Error!
Hyperlink reference not valid.. In a document, you can create as many
working sheets as you need to plan your project. A working sheet can have a
single background sheet attached to it.
Choosing a Sheet Size

You can modify a drawing sheets characteristics, such as the size and scale of
the sheet, with Sheet Setup on the File menu. Sheet Setup also allows you to
set the defaults for all new working sheets created in the document. You can
do this by setting the options you want and then clicking Save as Default.
Drawing Sheet Scale

Drawing sheets allow you to use a specified scale as you draw. When you

specify the scale with Sheet Setup the File menu, everything on the drawing
sheet is scaled except for Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. and
annotations. For example, if the scale is one inch to ten inches and you place a
line 30 inches long, the line is three inches long in proportion to the drawing
sheet and three inches long when printed. However, a dimension measures the
length of the line as 30 inches.
The dimension and annotation sizes in your working sheets are independent of
the drawing view scale. For example, when you define the height and size of
dimension text, these values specify how you want the dimensions to appear
when you print the drawing.
The graphics on the attached background sheet are displayed at a 1:1 scale.
The scale set with Sheet Setup on the File menu does not affect them.
Manipulating Drawing Sheets

At the bottom of the drawing sheet, you can see drawing sheet tabs that allow
you to manipulate and display the drawing sheets in your document. When
you open a document or create a new one, the tabs are displayed at the bottom
of the workspace. There is a tab for each drawing sheet in your document.
Attaching a Background Sheet

After you set up the drawing sheet, you can attach a background sheet. A
background sheet is used as a backdrop to the working sheet. For example,
you can add borders to a drawing, draw a title block, insert a raster image, or
draw geometry. You can make one background sheet and attach the same
background sheet to several different drawing sheets.
When you attach a background sheet to a working sheet with the Sheet Setup
command, the items on the background sheet are displayed and printed. The
size of the working sheet is automatically set to the size of the background
sheet you attach. This is so the paper sizes and graphics on both sheets line up.
Background sheets allow you to customize your borders and title blocks so
that they match your company standards and requirements. You can use the

background sheet delivered in a template or design your own background
sheet. You can create tailor-made background sheets by adding your company
logo, creating any other graphics that you need, and using various styles and
options. A typical customization scheme would be to have a different
background sheet for each standard-sized drawing (A, B, C, D; or A0, A1, A2,
A3, A4).
Sheets and Document Templates

You can re-use your sheets by creating and saving them in a document
template. When you create a new document based on a template, all of the
drawing sheets that are part of the template are copied into your new
document.
Create a New Drawing Sheet
Click Insert > New Sheet. The new sheet is inserted after the
active drawing sheet.
Notes
You can attach a background sheet to any drawing sheet using

Sheet Setup on the File menu. Click the Background tab on the
Sheet Setup dialog box to find the background sheet settings.
Scroll Through Drawing Sheet Tabs
On the current drawing sheet, click a scroll button next to the

drawing sheet tabs. Clicking a scroll button displays the drawing
sheet tabs so that you can access them easily and select a drawing
sheet. Click the scroll buttons of the following picture to find out
what each button does:
Tip
Clicking a scroll button does not display a different drawing sheet.

If the document has only a few drawing sheets, the scroll buttons
might not be available.
Create a Background Sheet

1. Click View > Background Sheets.
2. Click Insert > New Sheet. The background sheet is created using the
default drawing sheet settings.

4. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the options you want.
5. On the new background sheet, draw any graphics, such as title blocks and
borders, that you want to appear on your working sheets.
6. Click View > Working Sheets.
8. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab.
9. Click the Background Sheet list box and select the name of the
background sheet you just created to attach the new background sheet to
the working sheet.
Notes
You can double-click any tab to access the Sheet Setup dialog
box. You can also access the Sheet Setup dialog box by moving
the pointer over a drawing sheet tab, right-clicking to activate the
shortcut menu, and clicking Sheet Setup.
Display Background Sheets
Click View > Background Sheets.
Activate a Drawing Sheet
Click the tab of the drawing sheet you want to activate.

Notes
You can display an available shortcut menu by right-clicking while

the pointer is over a drawing sheet tab.
Change the Background Sheet

2. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Background tab.
3. Select a new background sheet from the list.
Tip
If a background sheet has not been created, the list does not display

any options.
Notes
When you change the background sheet, the size and margins of
your working sheet equal the settings of the selected background
sheet.
Select and Manipulate Drawing Sheets

To display or manipulate a drawing sheet, you must click a drawing sheet tab.
Drawing sheet tabs are displayed at the bottom of the work space. There is a
tab for each drawing sheet in your document.
To select a drawing sheet
Click a drawing sheet tab at the bottom of the drawing sheet. The
drawing sheet is displayed and the name of the drawing sheet
appears in bold. This drawing sheet becomes the working sheet.
To select several drawing sheets
Press and hold Ctrl and click one or more tabs.

Tip
To de-select several drawing sheets, press and hold Ctrl and click
one or more current drawing sheet tabs.
To select a range of drawing sheets
Click the first tab in the range, hold Shift, and then click the last
tab in the range.
Tip
To de-select all of the drawing sheets in a range, click any tab that
is not part of the range.
To select all drawing sheets at once
On the shortcut menu, click Select All Sheets.

Tip
To access this command, you must hold the pointer over one of the
drawing sheet tabs and right-click.
Notes
When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on
the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one
composite drawing, like layers on top of one another. The software
uses the scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for
printing the final document.
Rename a Drawing Sheet

1. On the drawing sheet, click the tab of the sheet you want to rename.
3. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, click the Name tab and type a new name
for the sheet you selected.
Notes
You can also rename a drawing sheet using Rename on the

shortcut menu. You can get the shortcut menu by moving the
pointer over a drawing sheet tab and right-clicking.
Delete a Drawing Sheet

1. Click Edit > Delete Sheet.
2. Confirm the selection.
Notes
Delete Sheet deletes the active drawing sheet and any drawing
sheets whose drawing sheet tabs are selected.
Move Sheet Border

1. Click File > Move Sheet Border.
2. Specify the options to move, scale, and select the paper size for the sheet.
Notes
To access the Move Sheet Border dialog box, right-click in the

active working sheet.
When you open a foreign data file and the software creates the

graphic objects relative to their original X, Y positions, the objects
often position off the existing sheet.
Your changes to the sheet scale and size appear in the Sheet Setup
dialog box.
When you click the settings that you want on the Move Sheet
Border dialog box, you can click Apply to preview your settings.
When you click Apply, the settings apply to the active sheet.
However, the settings are not final until you click OK.

New Sheet Command (Insert Menu)
Creates a new drawing sheet in the document using the default drawing sheet
settings. You can change the default settings using Sheet Setup.
You can create either a working sheet or a background sheet with this
command. To create a background sheet, set the Background Sheets toggle
on the View menu before selecting New Sheet. To create a working sheet,
clear the Background Sheets toggle before selecting New Sheet.
Tip
Insert Sheet is available only if you use the Customize command

Working Sheets Command (View Menu)

Displays all working sheets in a document. If a background sheet is attached
to the working sheet, the graphics on the background sheet are displayed on
the working sheet. When you attach a background sheet to a working sheet,
the software automatically adjusts the size and the margin of the working
sheet to match the size and margin of the background sheet.
Move Sheet Border Command (File Menu)

Moves the active working sheet to reposition, scale, and select paper size.
Move Sheet Border Dialog Box

Allows you to reposition or scale a working sheet and selects paper size.
Tip
When you click the settings that you want on this dialog box, you
can click Apply to preview your settings. When you click Apply,
the settings update the active sheet. However, the settings are not
final until you click OK.
Dialog Box Options


Sheet Origin Location - Specifies the X and Y coordinates for the sheet
origin. The sheet origin is the lower left corner of the drawing sheet. After
setting these coordinates, click Apply.
Interactive Move - Allows you to use the pointer to identify a location for the
lower left corner of the sheet. Selecting this option automatically attaches the
drawing sheet border to the pointer. Click once and the sheet is in the location
that you want. You must click Apply for your changes to start.
Caution
While you are moving the sheet border with the pointer, the Move
Sheet Border dialog box is not displayed. It appears again after
you click the pointer to complete the move.
Drawing Scale - Sets options for the scale of the drawing sheet.
Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. This ratio means that the
representation of the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the realworld elements contained in the document.
For a 1:2 ratio, the 1 represents the distance of the drawing sheet and the 2
represents the real-world distance. That is, every centimeter of paper is equal
to two centimeters of real-world distance. Thus, the largest real-world element
that you can represent on an 21.59 x 27.94 cm drawing sheet is 43.18 x 55.88
cm.
Tip
When the first value is smaller than the second value, the sheet size
is usually increased. When the first number is larger than the
second number, the sheet size is usually reduced.
Custom - Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance
on the drawing sheet and the second value defines what this distance is equal
to in the real world.
Sheet Size - Sets the size for the drawing sheet.
Same As Print Setup - Sets the drawing sheet size using the settings for the
default system printer. For example, if the printer is set up as 27.94 x 43.18
cm paper, the drawing sheet size is set to 27.94 x 43.18 cm.
Standard - Defines the drawing sheet size from a list of standard ANSI and
ISO paper sizes.
Custom - Defines the drawing sheet size according to the entered x and y

values.
Previous - Clears the last set of options that you applied to the drawing sheet.
Background Sheets Command (View Menu)

Switches the view from a working sheet to the background sheet. When you
set this toggle, all of the background sheets in the document are displayed as
tabs at the bottom of window. All working sheet tabs are hidden. You can use
a background sheet to draw graphics that you want to display on more than
one drawing sheet. For example, you can draw borders and title blocks that
contain your company logo, your name, and information about the drawings.
You can display background sheet graphics on any or all working sheets,
using Sheet Setup.
Rename Command (Shortcut Menu)

Renames a sheet.
Tip
Before you can select this command from the shortcut menu, you
must move the pointer over a drawing sheet tab.
Rename Dialog Box

Renames a drawing sheet.
Dialog Box Options

New Name - Renames the active sheet when you type a new name.
Delete Sheet Command (Edit Menu)

Deletes the active drawing sheet and any other sheets whose tabs are selected.
You can delete either a working sheet or a background sheet with this
command. To delete a background sheet, set the Background Sheets toggle
on the View menu before selecting Delete Sheet. To delete a working sheet,
clear the Background Sheets toggle before selecting Delete Sheet.
Saving and Printing Documents: An

Overview
To keep your work for future use, you must give the document a name and
save it. After you save it, the document is available each time you want to use
it.
It's best to name and save a document soon after you start working on it. After
that, it's a good idea to frequently save drawings or diagrams as you work.
You should also be sure to save any template files that you change.
You can print your drawings by choosing a menu command or toolbar button.
Saving Documents
When you first save a new document, the software provides a default name
and directory location. You can give the document a meaningful name and
specify where you want to store the document.
When you open an existing document, the software copies the document from
its stored location and displays it on the screen. As you work, the changes you
make to the document are displayed on your screen. To preserve these
changes, you must again save the document.
Tip
You can quickly save changes to an open document by clicking the

Save button
on the Main toolbar.
After you save a document, it remains displayed on the screen. You can use
Close to close the document and clear it from your screen, or you can use Exit
to close the document and exit the software.
Saving a Copy
If you need to make a copy of your work, click Save As on the File menu and
type a different name for the document in the Save As dialog box.
Saving Documents to .cgm Format

The Computer Graphics Metafile (.cgm) provides an efficient way to make
information available on the Internet. You can use Save As to save documents
in .cgm format. Once in .cgm format, you can place the graphics on a web
page (.html or .htm) and view them with browsers such as the Internet
Explorer or Netscape Navigator. cgm is an efficient format for publishing 2D
vector drawings on the Web because it takes up little storage space, renders
quickly, and has the ability to zoom to achieve more detail. These types of
drawings can contain embedded hyperlinks, allowing quick access to
information outside the drawing.
Saving Documents to HTML Format

In addition to the cgm format, you can use Save As Web Page to save
documents in .html format. This command saves the document in an HTML
document; the graphics in the document are embedded in the HTML as .cgm
graphics. You can then view the document with browsers such as the Internet
Explorer or Netscape Navigator.

Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Web Publishing

module.
Closing a Document
If you want to close a document without saving your work, click Close on the
File menu and then, when prompted to save your work, click No. If you do
want to save your work, click Yes. If you decide not to close the document at
all, click Cancel.

You can set an option to automatically save open documents at the interval
that you specify. This safety feature prevents you from losing work in case of
an unexpected system shutdown. You can set several options for AutoSave,
including how often to save, which documents to save, and whether to be
prompted for each save. You can use AutoSave when you have one or more
documents open.
Caution
If AutoSave does not appear on the Tools menu, you must install
it by clicking Add-Ins on the Tools menu.
Sending a Document to Others

After you finish drawing a sketch or adding notes to it, you can send the
document to other users by clicking Send on the File menu. An e-mail
message appears, allowing you to attach the drawing to the message. You can
also embed or link the drawing to a Word document and send the document in
e-mail to other users.
Save a Document
If you save a document that has not previously been saved, the software
automatically prompts you to indicate if you want to save the changes.
To save the active document

1. Click File > Save.
2. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you
have never saved the active document, you are prompted to indicate if you
want to save your changes. Do one of the following:
If you do not want to save your changes, click No.
If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the

Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document
a name and specify a directory and format to save it to.
If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
To save a document in a different format

1. Click File > Save As.
2. Select the drive and directory for the new document.
3. In the File Name box, type a new name for the document.
4. In the Save As Type box, select the document format you want to use.
To save a document that was created in a different

format
1. Click File > Save As.
2. Select the drive and directory for the new document.
3. In the File Name box, type a new name for the document.
4. In the Save As Type box, select the document format you want to use.
Notes
If the active document is read-only, you can save changes only by

saving the document with a new name.

You can set an option to automatically save open documents at the interval
that you specify. This safety feature prevents you from losing work in case of
an unexpected system shutdown. You can set several options for AutoSave,
including how often to save, which documents to save, and whether to be
prompted for each save. You can use AutoSave when you have one or more
documents open.
Caution
If AutoSave does not appear on the Tools menu, you must install
it by clicking Add-Ins on the Tools menu.
Setting AutoSave Options

Tip
You must install the AutoSave add-in using Add-Ins on the Tools
menu before you set AutoSave options.

1. Click Tools > AutoSave.
2. Select the options you want from the AutoSave dialog box.
3. Click OK.
Send a Document to Others

1. Open the document you want to send.
2. Click File > Send.
3. Select the recipients using your electronic mail application's dialog box.
4. Type the subject and the accompanying message.
5. Send the message with the document attached.
Close a Document
1. Click File > Close.
2. If you have made changes since the document was last saved or if you
have never saved a new document, you are prompted to indicate if you
want to save your changes. Do one of the following:
If you do not want to save your changes, click No.
If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you click Yes, the
Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document
a name and specify a directory and format to save it to.
If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel.
Close a Document Without Saving Changes

Any changes not saved when you close a document or exit SmartSketch are
lost and cannot be recovered. If you want to close the document without
saving any changes, select the No button on the Close dialog box. When you
open the document again, it will revert to the state when the last save was
performed.

Saves the active document with its currently defined name, directory, and
format. If you are saving the document for the first time, the Save As dialog
box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify a
directory and format to save it to.
Save As Dialog Box

Specifies the name of, location of, and format for a document when you save
it.
Tip
Question Mark in the upper right corner of the dialog box and

Saves the active document to a new name, directory, and format.
AutoSave Command (Tools Menu)

Automatically saves open documents at the interval you specify.
Tip
If you do not have AutoSave on the Tools menu, the AutoSave

add-in has not been installed. Click Related Topics for more

information.
AutoSave Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options
Automatic Save Every __ Minutes - Automatically saves open documents at
the interval you specify.
Save Options - Saves either the active document or all documents that are
open.
Save Active Document Only - Saves only the active document.
Save All Open Documents - Saves all documents that are open.
Prompt Before Saving - Displays a dialog box whenever AutoSave begins
saving documents. You can click one of the following buttons to answer the
dialog box question: "Save changes in <document name>?"
Save - Saves the document.
Skip - Skips to the next document. Does not save the current document.
Available only when Save All Open Documents is selected.
Cancel - Cancels the current AutoSave session.
Note
The Save As dialog box appears if the document has not yet been
saved.
Send Command (File Menu)

Activates your electronic mail application so you can send a mail message
with the active document attached.
Tip
Send Mail is available only if you use the Customize command to

place it on a toolbar or menu.

Closes the active document. If you have made changes since the document
was last saved or if you have never saved a new document, you are prompted
to indicate if you want to save your changes. If you do not want to save your
changes, click No. If you want to save the changes, click Yes. If you do not
want to close the document, click Cancel. If you click Yes, the Save As
dialog box is displayed so that you can give the document a name and specify
a directory and format to save it to.
Tip
Close is available only if you use the Customize command to


Closes all open documents and exits the software. If you have made changes
since the document was last saved or if you have never saved a new
document, you are prompted to indicate if you want to save your changes. If
you do not want to save your changes, click No. If you want to save the
changes, click Yes. If you do not want to close the document, click Cancel. If
you click Yes, the Save As dialog box is displayed so that you can give the
document a name and specify a directory and format to save it to.
Printing Documents
You can print your documents on many different devices ranging from dot
matrix printers to high-end laser printers. Except for the color settings and a
few special effects, your drawing prints exactly as it appears on the drawing
sheet.
Preparing to Print
The printer you use affects the way the current document prints and displays
text on the screen. Before you print a document, you must install and select
the printer that you want to use. For more information about installation, see
your printer documentation.
Before you print, you will want to choose a printer and the settings for it. To
do this, click Print on the File menu and then click the printer that you want
to use. You can set properties for the printer by clicking Properties. To set the
print range and scale, click Settings.
Printing a Document
As you work on a document, you might need to send a copy of it to a specified
printer, plotter, or file. You can click Print on the File menu to do the
following:
Print an entire document or specific sheets from a document.
Print a draft copy of a document.
Set printing options, such as the range of sheets or number of

copies to print.
The software supports WSYWIG plotting, using standard Windows NT

plotting capabilities. The software also supports pen plotters, subject to the
limitations of the device driver. Elements appear the same on the screen and in
the printed document.
However, the fonts that you choose can affect the match between what you
see on the screen and what appears on the printed page. Three kinds of fonts
affect your work: scalable fonts, printer fonts, and screen fonts. Use scalable
fonts, such as TrueType fonts, to confirm that what you see on the screen is
what appears on the printed page. If you use printer fonts, you must have a
corresponding screen font and font size to display each font on the screen. If
each screen font you use has a matching printer font, the screen display of the
document will closely match the printed document.
Printing Part of a Document

You can print selected sheets in a document or a selected area. This practice is
handy if you are working on a complex drawing and you want to print only
certain parts to proof them.
To print selected sheets, you should first select sheets in the document to
make them active. To do this, you can click the drawing sheet tabs of the
sheets that you want while pressing Ctrl. Then, you select Print on the File
menu and click Selected Sheets on the dialog box.
When you select several sheets and then click Selected Sheets on the Print
dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one composite drawing, like
layers on top of one another. The software uses the scale, paper size, and
orientation of the active sheet for printing the final document.
To print a selected area, you should first select the drawing sheets that you
want to print. Then, you select Print on the File menu and click Print Area
on the dialog box. After you click OK, a set of crosshairs appears. You drag
over the area that you want to print. The Print Area dialog box then
automatically appears and allows you to set options for printing the selected
area.
Printing Time
Required time for printing varies by document. Expect longer print times
when you have drawings that contain a large number of the following items:
Curved elements
Many fills that have complex colors, patterns, or textures
Large bitmaps
Links to various documents
The type of printer that you have also affects the printing time. PostScript
printers print faster than LaserJet printers because they can calculate faster.
Some older versions of PostScript printers are slower when compared to the
newer ones. The type of controller boards and the amount of RAM in the
printer also affect your printing times.
Print a Document
Because the fonts available on the selected printer affect both display and
printing, select the printer you will use before you begin working on a
document.
Before you can print for the first time, you must connect the printer to the

computer or network, install a printer driver, and select the printer you will
use to print the document. For more information about how to install a printer,
see the printer's documentation. To set options for an installed printer, click
Print on the File menu and then click Properties.
1. Click File > Print
Tip
You can also click the Print button on the Main toolbar
2. On the Print dialog box, in the Name box, select the printer you want to
use.
3. In the Number Of Copies box, type the number of copies you want.
4. In the Print range box, specify the range of pages you want to print.
Notes
You can set other options for the printer by clicking Properties or
Settings on the Print dialog box.
It is a good idea to save your document before you print it. This
way, if a printer error or other problem occurs, you will not lose
any work completed since the last time you saved the document.
You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Options

on Tools menu. Then, on the View tab, click the Display As
Printed check box.
Set Printing Options

1. On the Main toolbar, click Print
2. Do one of the following:

To print
A selected area of a sheet
A range of continuous sheets
Do this
Under Print Range, click Print Area and
then click OK. A set of crosshairs appears
that you can drag to define the area. The
Print Area dialog box automatically
appears so that you can set options for
printing the area.
In the Sheets box, type a range with a
hyphen between the sheet numbers. For
example, to print sheets 3 through 7, type
3-7. This prints each sheet on a separate
piece of paper.

Noncontinuous sheets
Selected sheets
An entire document
Multiple copies of the entire

document
In the Sheets box, type the sheet numbers,

separated by commas. For example, to
print pages 1 and 6, type 1,6.
In the document, select the sheets you
want to print; then, on the Print dialog
box, click Selected Sheets. This prints the
selected sheets as a composite drawing,
like layers on a single sheet of paper. The
software uses the scale, paper size, and
orientation of the active sheet for printing
the final document.
Click All Sheets. This is recommended
only when all the sheets have the same
orientation and paper size.
In the Number of Copies box, type or
select a number of copies. To sort the
sheets by sheet number, select the Collate
Copies check box.
Notes
the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets are printed as one
composite drawing, like layers on top of one another.
Settings on the Print dialog box. You can set the paper size,
source, and orientation.
Click File > Sheet Setup to specify the drawing sheet size and
scale.
Print an Area of a Drawing Sheet

Because the available fonts available on the selected printer affect both
display and printing, select the printer to use before you begin working on a
document.
Before you can print for the first time, you must connect the printer to the
computer or network, install a printer driver, and select the printer to print the
document. For more information about installing a printer, see the printer
documentation. To set options for an installed printer, click Print on the File
menu, and then click Properties.
2. On the Print dialog box in the Name box, select the printer you want to

use.
3. In the Number Of Copies box, type the number of copies you want.
4. In the Print Range box, click Print Area and click OK.
When a set of crosshairs appears, drag them to define the area that you
want to print.
7. On the Print Area dialog box, set the options to print the area that you
selected.
Notes
Settings on the Print dialog box. You can set the paper size,
source, and orientation.
the Print dialog box, all the selected sheets print as one composite
drawing, like layers on top of one another. The software uses the
scale, paper size, and orientation of the active sheet for printing the
final document.
Click Sheet Setup on the File menu to specify the drawing sheet
size and scale.
Saving your document before you print it is a good idea. This way,
if a printer error or other problem occurs, you will not lose any
work completed since the last time you saved the document.
You can display the document as it will be printed. Click Options

on Tools menu. Then, on the View tab, click the Display As
Printed check box.
Print Several Documents Simultaneously

Caution
Caution The command line that you type to print several

documents simultaneously uses the options that you set in the
software, except for printer selection and the number of copies.
Before you begin, review the options on the Print dialog box. On
that dialog box, click Settings to review the options on the
Settings dialog box.
1. On the Windows Taskbar, in the Programs menu, click MS-DOS Prompt.

2. In the DOS Window, type a command line with the following syntax:
smartsketch.exe<space>-p<space>-q<space><printer path><space>116 SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide

c<space><integer for number of copies><space><document
path><space><document path><space><document path, and so forth>
Example: smartsketch.exe p q \\print1\laserjet c 2 c:\temp\first
file.igr c:\temp\second_file.igr
smartsketch.exe<space>-p<space>-q<space><printer path><space>c<space><integer for number of copies><space><document
path><space><document path><space><document path, and so forth>
Example smartsketch.exe p q \\print1\laserjet c 2 c:\temp\first
file.igr c:\temp\second_file.igr
Tip
Spaces separate the document paths. If the filename contains a

space, you must use double quotes.
1. Press Enter to print the document.
Notes
You can use the command line locally or remotely when the
Windows NT Server Resource Kit is installed. You can print from
local and network printers and plotters.
You can also print multiple documents with an asterisk ( * ) in the

file name as a wildcard.
The software is compatible with AIMPWV (Asset and

Information ManagementPrint Without View).
Print to a File
2. On the Print dialog box, set Print to file.

3. Click OK.
4. On the Print to file dialog box, type the name of the file and select the
directory that you want to print to.

Sends a copy of the active document to a specified plotter, printer, or file.
Options are available for defining the printing area, range, number of copies,
and other printing characteristics.
Before using this command, you must install and select a printer. For help on
installing a printer, see the Windows documentation.
Print Dialog Box

Controls the way a document prints.
Dialog Box Options

Name - Specifies the printer that you want to use. You can select from a list
of all the configured printers available for printing.
Properties - Accesses the Printer Document Properties dialog box.
Status - Displays the current status of the selected printer. This area is readonly.
Type - Displays the type of printer currently selected. This area is read-only.
Where - Displays the printer path or location for the currently selected
printer. This area is read-only.
Comment - Displays any comments you input during printer configuration.
This area is read-only.
Print To File - Prints the document to a file, instead of a printer. You specify
the file's name on the Print To File dialog box after you set the check box and
click OK on the Print dialog box. This saves a document to a file instead of
routing it directly to a printer or plotter. Then, you can print from a computer
that does not have the application installed or print to a printer other than the
one you currently have installed.

Print Range - Displays options for selecting the print range.
All Sheets - Prints all drawing sheets in the active document.
Selected Sheets - Prints all the sheets that you selected as a composite
document, as layers all on one sheet of paper.
Sheets - Specifies the range of pages that you want to print. You can enter the
starting page you want to print as the "From" value and the ending page you
want to print as the "To" value. In the Sheets box, type a range with a hyphen
between the sheet numbers. For example, to print sheets 3 through 7, type 3-7.
This prints each sheet on a separate piece of paper.
Print Area - Accesses the Print Area dialog box. When you click this option
and then click OK on the dialog box, a set of crosshairs appears. You drag the
crosshairs to define the area that you want to print. Then, the Print Area
dialog box automatically appears so that you can set various options for
printing the area that you selected.
Copies - Sets options for the number of copies you want to print.
Number Of Copies - Specifies the number of copies you want to print.
Collate - Organizes sheets when you print multiple copies.
Pure Black and White - Prints a black and white document.
Settings - Accesses the Settings dialog box.
Tip
in the upper right corner of the dialog box and
Question Mark
Printer Document Properties Dialog Box

Sets properties for the current printer that you selected on the Print dialog
box. The settings available on this dialog box depend on the type of printer
that you selected.

Tip
Question Mark
Print Area Dialog Box

Specifies the area that you want to print.
Dialog Box Options

Scale - Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document.
Best Fit - Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer
paper for the configured device.
Manual Scale - Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during
printing. For example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and
you set a manual scale of 1:12, then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm
on the printer paper. If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you
can set the paper length to 1 and the design length to 1.
Tip
If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes,
the red, blue, and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect
the values.
Paper Length - Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print.
Design Length - Specifies a design length.
Origin - Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper.
Center - Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If
you do not set this option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom
left.
X - Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin.
Y - Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin.

XY Range - Clears the previous defined print area and prompts you to define
a new print area.
Settings Dialog Box

Controls the print area of a selected sheet.
Dialog Box Options

Scale - Controls the scale applied to the print area in a document.
Best Fit - Scales the selected drawing sheets or print area to fit the printer
paper for the configured device.
Manual Scale - Specifies the scale value to apply to the print range during
printing. For example, if the print range is a rectangle at 12 cm by 12 cm and
you set a manual scale of 1:12, then the printed range appears as 1 cm by 1 cm
on the printer paper.
If you want a 1:1 drawing of the current sheet scale, you can set the paper
length to 1 and the design length to 1.
Tip
If you type values in the Paper Length and Design Length boxes,
the red, blue, and black boxes in the Preview area change to reflect
the values.
Paper Length - Specifies the paper length for the document you want to print.
Design Length - Specifies a design length.
Origin - Adjusts the location of the effective print area on the printer paper.
Center - Positions the print area center to the center of the printer paper. If
you do not set this option, then the paper positions at bottom left to bottom
left.
X - Sets a shift in the X direction from the origin.
Y - Sets a shift in the Y direction from the origin.
Tip
If you click Manual Scale and enter values in the Paper Length

and Design Length boxes, the red, blue, and black boxes change to
reflect the values.
Drawing Basic Elements: An Overview
An element is any line, circle, or other part of the drawing. The Draw toolbar
on the left side of the drawing sheet contains most of the buttons that you can
use to draw any type of basic geometric elementfreeform shapes, lines, arcs,
circles, and so forth.
You can place most basic elements with just a few clicks. For example, if you
want to place a line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw
toolbar. Then, you click two points to indicate where to start and finish the
line. If you do not want to place another line, you can right-click to end the
operation.
Tip
Right-clicking ends most operations in the software.
You can also place the line by clicking Line/Arc Continuous and then
clicking and dragging the pointer. When you release the mouse, the line
appears on the drawing sheet. With this method, you drag the pointer as if it
were a pen. You can draw most elements, such as rectangles, circles, and arcs,
with this method, sometimes called mouse-down drawing. The mouse-down
method is typically used to place most elements in conceptual sketching and
modification.
If you want to place a precise line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous, type
values into the ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You can then click
on the drawing sheet to place the line. This method, sometimes called mouseup drawing, is typically used for precision placement and when you want to
draw elements that are related to each other.
In some cases, you might want to click points on the drawing sheet and type
values in the ribbon to place an element. For example, you can click Line/Arc
Continuous and then type 3.0 in the Length box on the ribbon box and press
Enter to lock the length value.
When a line that is three inches long appears next to the pointer, you can click
anywhere on the drawing sheet to indicate where to place one end of the line.
Then, you move the line around and click again to set the line's orientation
angle.
If you do not like the results of what you drew, you can click Undo on the
Main toolbar. If you want to repeat an action, click Redo on the Main
toolbar.
Using SmartSketch Templates: An Overview
Using SmartSketch Templates:

An Overview
Templates are used as a starting point in creating a document. A template is a
file that provides tools such as text, formats, geometry, dimensions, units of
measurement, toolbars, and styles that are used to produce a new document
that uses a specified format. You can either use one of the pre-defined
templates SmartSketch provides or you can create your own.
SmartSketch Industry-Specific Templates

SmartSketch provides an extensive selection of templates on which you can
base your documents. The template that you use depends on the type of
information you want to put in the document. For example, if you want to
create a drawing that contains a schematic of an electrical component, you can
use an electrical schematic template.
When you select a specific template, tools are available that allow you to
create either a schematic diagram or a precision drawing.
Schematic diagrams are primarily created using symbols,

connectors, and text at a 1:1 scale. Schematic diagrams do not
represent a logical flow. The Schematic toolbar is available when
you select a template designed to create a schematic diagram.
Precision drawings represent physical elements such as lines, arcs,

curves, and rectangles that you draw precisely with the Draw
toolbar. Precision drawings are created at real-world scale, and you
can maintain relationships between elements in precision drawings.
Additionally, when you base a document on a particular template, that

template automatically points to the symbols that you would most likely use
for that type of document. The Symbol Explorer displays the appropriate
symbol set for the task.
To base new documents on a template, choose New on the File menu and
select the template from the list. You can also open the template and save the
document under another name.
Saving a Document as a Template

If you find it necessary to use the same document settings over and over in
different drawings, you may want to use a copy of that drawing to use as a
starting point for other drawings.

Note
Document settings might include drawing sheet settings, scales,

actual elements that you draw, and a background sheet.
In these cases, you can use the drawing to create a template to use as a starting
point for many different drawings. Use Save As Template on the File menu
to save the current document as a template. This command saves the
document in the TEMPLATE directory located in the directory where you
installed the software. A different file extension in the name of the document
is not necessary.
Tip
You can change the directory where templates are saved by

you want on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
Using General Diagramming

Templates: An Overview
SmartSketch provides General Diagramming templates for mapping, basic
diagrams, network diagrams, flowchart diagrams, workflow diagrams, and
office layout diagrams.
The general diagramming templates provide the following:
Imperial templates-These templates have imperial units in decimal

inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI or ASA dimensioning, and Arial,
ANSI, or Architectural text.
Metric templates-These templates have metric units in millimeters,

ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial or ISO text.
Note
The dimensioning and text standard will vary with each template.
For example, the Atlas Mapping Imperial template provides ANSI
dimensioning and Arial text, while the Office Layout Imperial
template provides ASA dimensioning and Architectural text.
General diagramming template symbols are provided in the Symbol

Explorer. Also, tools to create drawings using the general diagramming
templates are available on the Draw toolbar.
Atlas Mapping Templates

You use these templates to produce maps.
Imperial TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal

inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and Arial text.
Metric TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters,

ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and Arial text.
Atlas Map symbols for the United States are available in the
Symbol Explorer for these templates. The Draw toolbar
containing tools to create maps appears on the left of the drawing
window.
Mapping Workflow

Tip
You can create maps with Maintain Relationships set on or off.
1. Set up the sheet.

Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1.
8. Draw the map.
Place map symbols by using the mouse to drag from the Symbol
Explorer. While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow
keys on the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement.
Use the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol
before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the
alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement
with grid snap or visual alignment.
You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same symbol:
Holding down the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the
template. When you release the right mouse button to place the
symbol, you are prompted with two options. Click Stamp Here,
and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the
symbol.
Press Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button.
Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down the Ctrl.
Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release the Ctrl
key and use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the
symbol.
When you drag and pause a symbol over an existing map symbol drop
point, a tool tip appears, identifying the state to be placed adjacently.
Dropping the symbol on the drop point ensures that the state boundaries
match perfectly.
9. Place text.
Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol. The active
text settings in the file are used.
To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the
pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and
select the numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the
highlighted text to edit properties.
To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Move the
text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of
the sheet scale.

10. Finish the drawing.
Finish the map by drawing details, adding text, or modifying the symbols
to enhance the map.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing maps.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH United States Map symbols. These

\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING
symbols have drag points as well as
special behaviors for enhanced
\ATLAS MAP\US STATES
placement and modification.
Basic Diagramming Templates

You use these templates to produce business diagrams.

inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and ANSI text.

ISO sheet sizes, ISO dimensioning, and ISO text.
Basic diagramming symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these
templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create diagrams appears
on the left of the drawing window.
Setting Up a Basic Diagram

Tip
You can create business diagrams with Maintain Relationships set

on or off.

Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space to
draw. The default scale is 1:1.
11. Prepare to draw.
Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings,
Grid Display, and Grid Snap.
For more grid options click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set
the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the
preferred grid spacing.
These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the

workflow while you draw. To create clean diagrams, use Grid
Snap with a static grid displayed.
Placing symbols and connectors on a static grid produces high

quality results.
You can set grid display and snap by right clicking.
Simple Diagramming Workflow

1. Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer.
2. Use Connector to connect symbols.
3. Double-click each symbol to add text.
Optimal Diagramming Workflow

1. Place basic diagramming symbols by using the mouse to drag from the
Symbol Explorer.
While dragging a symbol, use the left/right arrow keys to rotate the
symbol dynamically during placement.
before placement.
If you press Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are
temporarily disabled, allowing you to place a symbol using grid snap or
visual alignment.
symbol.
Place the first instance of the symbol while holding down Ctrl.
Once you have placed the first symbol, you can release Ctrl and
use the left mouse button to place multiple copies of the symbol.
12. Connect the symbols by using Connector.

When drawing connectors, you should set Clearance. Type the minimum
distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the
connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual
consistency of connectors that make right-angle turns just before they
attach to a symbol.

When you draw a connector to a symbol, approach the symbol from the
direction you want the connector placed. As the pointer intent zone nears
the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear.
The connector end point can be located on a target or any other symbol
geometry.
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal drawing mode
will be temporarily activated, allowing the connector to be drawn at any
angle with or without grid snap.
13. Place text.
Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.
The active text settings in the file are used.
To highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the
select the numbered box that represents the text.
Right-click on the highlighted text to edit properties.
the sheet scale.
14. Finish the diagram.
Use color to modify the symbols and connectors to enhance the drawing.
The following symbol sets are aid in drawing diagrams.
Content
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH
\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \BASIC
Description
Common business diagramming
symbols. You can double-click
these symbols to place text. These
symbols also have special
behaviors for enhanced placement
and modification.
Directional Mapping Templates

You use these templates to produce directional maps.


Directional Map symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these
templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create maps appears on the
left of the drawing window.
Directional Mapping Workflow

Tip
You can create maps with Maintain Relationships set on or off.

Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1.
15. Draw a directional map.
Draw transportation routes first using Line/Arc Continuous or Curve on
the Draw toolbar. Select a linestyle such as Rural Road or Railroad.
When you use Line/Arc Continuous, press Shift+A to draw an

arc. To turn line mode back on, press Shift+L.
When you use Curve, press the left mouse button as you draw.
You can label transportation routes by double-clicking the line and

typing the name of the road or railroad. The text automatically
aligns to linear elements.
16. Place symbols.

Place directional map symbols to represent landmarks by dragging from
the Symbol Explorer.
symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to
select different drag points on the symbol before placement. If you press
Alt during symbol placement, the alignment indicators are temporarily
disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual alignment.
symbol.

17. Place text.
Double-click symbols or lines to place text.
The active text settings in the file are used. To highlight existing text for
repositioning or editing text properties or moving properties, pause the
select the numbered box that represents the text.
Right-click the highlighted text to edit properties.
the sheet scale.
18. Finish the map.
Draw details and modify the color or linestyles of the symbols to enhance
the map.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing directional maps.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH Directional Map symbols have

special behaviors for enhanced
\DIRECTIONAL MAP
placement and modification.
Flowchart Templates
You use these templates to produce flowcharts and diagrams.

inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning and Arial text.

Flowchart, Audit, Dataflow, and TQM symbols are available in the Symbol
Explorer for these templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to
create flowcharts and diagrams appears on the left of the drawing window.
Setting Up a Flowchart
Tip
You can create flowcharts and diagrams with Maintain

Relationships set on or off.

2. Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allows enough paper space
to draw. The default scale is 1:1.
3. Prepare to draw.
Set the drawing aids to your preferences using the SmartSketch

Settings, Grid Display, and Grid Snap.
For more grid options, click the View tab after you click Options
on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static,
and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.


quality results.
Drawing a Simple Flowchart and Diagram

Drawing an Optimal Flowchart and Diagram

1. Place flowchart and diagram symbols by dragging from the Symbol
Explorer.
While dragging a symbol for placement, use the left/right arrow keys on
the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement.
before placement. If you press Alt during symbol placement, the
alignment indicators are temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement
with grid snap or visual alignment.
symbol.

When drawing connectors, set the clearance using Clearance. Type the
minimum distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in
the connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual
attach to a symbol.
geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal
drawing mode will be temporarily activated, allowing the connector to be
drawn at any angle with or without grid snap.
20. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbols.
properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the
PickQuick indicator appears.
Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Rightclick on the highlighted text to edit properties. To move the highlighted
text, click the green lock to unlock.
Then with the pointer drag the text to a new position. Note that text is
entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale.
The following symbol sets are provided to aid in drawing diagrams.
Content
Description
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH Flowchart, Audit, Dataflow, and

TQM symbols. You can doubleclick these symbols to place text.
\FLOWCHART
These symbols also have special
and modification.
Network Diagram Templates

You use these templates to produce network diagrams.

inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ANSI dimensioning, and ANSI text.

Network Diagram symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these
templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create network diagrams
appears on the left of the drawing window.
Network Diagram Workflow

Tip
You can create network diagrams with Maintain Relationships

set on or off.

Select an appropriate sheet size. The network symbols are accurately
scaled to 1/10th of their true size so you should leave the sheet scale at
1:1, the default.
Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options click the View tab
after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either
dynamic or static. Set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.
These settings provide visual feedback to you to improve the workflow
while you draw.
Simple Network Diagram

Optimal Network Diagram

1. Place network diagram symbols by dragging from the Symbol Explorer.
symbol dynamically before placement. Use the up/down arrow keys to
select different drag points on the symbol before placement.

temporarily disabled, allowing symbol placement with grid snap or visual
alignment.
symbol.
Some network symbols mount into the rack or chassis symbols when you
drag the symbol into a rack or chassis. When you pause over a drop point
in a chassis or rack, a tool tip appears; for example, Attach Module.
When you move a symbol, all associated symbols follow. To
independently move an associated symbol, select the symbol and click the
green lock. This frees the symbol from the element. A symbol is not
associated to an element if a green lock is not displayed when you select
the symbol.
23. Add attributes to the network symbols by selecting the symbol and editing
fields in the Attribute Viewer.
24. Connect the symbols by using Connector, or by dragging in Cable
symbols and then connecting the endpoints to network symbols. The result
is a symbolized connector with attribution.
When drawing connectors, you should set Clearance. Type the minimum
distance from the symbols that you would like the first turn in the
connectors to occur. This action allows you to control the visual
attach to a symbol.
the symbol, suggested targets for the connector appear. The connector end
point can be placed on a target or any of the symbol vector geometry. If
you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is temporarily
invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled.
Note the connect points display a tool tip when the connector end point is
drawn or modified over a port on the network symbol.

You can edit attribute information on the connector and the network
symbols in the Attribute Viewer.
SmartLabels are provided for network symbols and cables. These
SmartLabels appear in the Symbol Explorer in the network symbol
directories. When you drag a network SmartLabel over the drag point
(usually the lower left corner) of a network symbol, the label associates to
the symbol and accesses the symbol attribute information.
The description attribute data is displayed in the label. The cable labels
display the type and the speed-type of the cable.
25. Place text.
Double-click on the symbols to place text below the symbol or connector.
The active text settings in the file are used.
Right click on text to edit properties.
To move the text, select and highlight the text.
Click the green lock to unlock; then with the pointer, drag the text to a
new position. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the
sheet scale.
26. Report on the network diagram.
Drag a report from the Symbol Explorer on to the sheet and follow the
instructions. An Excel spreadsheet is updated from the attributes of all the
network symbols in the file.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing diagrams.
Content
\NETWORK DIAGRAM
Description
Network diagram symbols that
include Cables, Chassis, Cards,
Modules, Input-Output Devices,
Intelligent Network Devices,
Network Accessories, Nonintelligent Network Devices,
Physical Plant, and Servers and
Storage devices. These symbols
have attribution and special
and modification.
Office Layout Templates

You use these templates to produce Office Layout drawings.

inches, ANSI sheet sizes, ASA dimensioning, and Architectural
text.

Office layout symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these
templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create office layout drawings
Office Layout Workflow

Tip
You should create office layout drawings with Maintain

Relationships set on.

Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the design.
The default scale is 1/4" = 1' for the Imperial template and 1:50 for the Metric
template.
Set the drawing aids to your preferences using SmartSketch Settings, Grid
Display, and Grid Snap.
For more grid options, click the View tab on the Options dialog box to set the
grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred
grid spacing.


quality results.

Tip
You can begin by drawing the office walls or by referencing or

opening a floor plan drawing.
28. Draw walls. Click Place Doubleline on the Draw toolbar and set the
thickness of the walls to be drawn in the ribbon.
Click the appropriate button on the ribbon to indicate whether you draw from
the center of the wall or one of the edges (primary line buttons).

Draw the walls first.
Next use Trim, Trim Corner, and Extend to Next for any intersection
cleanup.
If you press Alt while drawing, the alignment indicators are

temporarily disabled.
When you draw the walls, you may want to select a neutral gray
for the line color. After you draw the walls, you can avoid cleaning
the intersections by color filling the walls with a solid fill of the
same neutral gray color.
Use the door and window symbols to complete the floor plan.
These symbols automatically align to the wall and can be mirrored,
scaled and rotated after placement.
Tip
You can also use Place Doubleline for drawing office partitions,
along-wall working surfaces, counter tops, work benches,
stockroom shelves, custom bookcases, custom desks, and cat
walks. If you press and hold Shift while drawing with Place
Doubleline, the end caps do not automatically merge into another
section of doubleline. This feature is useful for drawing partitions
perpendicular to walls. You can use Fillet to round the corners of
counter tops.
29. Reference or open an existing floor plan.

Reference a floor plan by using Object on the Insert menu or by dragging the
existing file into the drawing window. Or click the Open command on the
File menu to open an existing floor plan file.
Tip
You can reference or open any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr

document.
30. Place office layout symbols.

Drag symbols from the Symbol Explorer. While dragging a symbol, use the
left/right arrow keys to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use
the up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before
placement.
alignment.
Office Layout symbols can be physically associated to walls or other symbols.

When you move a symbol or a wall, all associated symbols follow.
To independently move an associated symbol, select the symbol and click the
green lock to unlock the association. A symbol is not associated if a green
lock is not displayed when the symbol is selected.
symbol.
31. Annotate the drawing.

Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. To label,
double-click symbols, walls, or other drawn elements. The active text settings
in the file are used for labels that you double-click.
To edit existing text properties, right-click text and select properties from the
pop-up menu. To move text, click to select; then click the green lock to
unlock.
Move by dragging the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in paper
units regardless of the sheet scale.
32. Finish the drawing.
Change the color of symbols to enhance furniture or identify existing and new
equipment. You can also use connectors to enhance the drawing by adding
communication and computer networking lines.
The following symbol sets aid in creating office layout drawings.
Content
Description
Office Layout symbols have special
\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \OFFICE behaviors for enhanced placement and
LAYOUT
modification.
Organizational Chart Templates

You use these templates to produce organizational charts.


Org Chart symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates.
The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create organizational charts
Automated Organizational Chart Creation

1. Load the add-in.
On the Main toolbar, click Add-Ins on the Tools menu and check the box
for Org Chart Wizard.
33. The Wizard of Org.
On the Main toolbar, click Org Chart Wizard on the Tools menu and
follow the instructions to continue.
This wizard creates an organizational chart with or without personnel data.
The completion of the wizard results in a new sheet added to the open file
containing your chart. You can edit the resulting symbols and connectors
interactively as if the chart had been drawn manually.
Organizational Chart Workflow

Tip
You can create organizational charts with Maintain Relationships

set on or off.

Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab
after you click Options on the Tools menu to set the grid style to either
dynamic or static, and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.


quality results.
Simple Workflow Diagram

Optimal Workflow Diagram

1. Place Org Chart symbols by dragging them from the Symbol Explorer.
the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the
up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before
placement.
alignment.
These symbols automatically expand to the size of the text. You can also
size them by using the yellow handles.
Tip
You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same
symbol:
symbol.

When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance:
to the minimum distance from the symbol where the first turn in the
connector appears.

geometry. If you press the Alt key while drawing a connector, the
diagonal mode is temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are
temporarily disabled, allowing the connector to be drawn with or without
grid snap.
36. Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.
editing properties, pause the pointer over text until the PickQuick indicator
appears.
Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Rightclick the highlighted text to edit properties.
Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale.
37. Finish the organizational chart.
Use color to modify the symbols and use connectors to enhance the
drawing.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing organizational charts.
Content
Description
\SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING \ORG
CHARTS
Organizational Chart symbols.

You can double-click these
symbols to place text. These
symbols also have special
and modification.
Workflow Diagram Templates

You use these templates to produce workflow diagrams.


Work flow symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these templates.
The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create workflow diagrams appears
on the left of the drawing window.
Schematic Workflow
Tip
You can create workflow diagrams with Maintain Relationships

set on or off.

Grid Display, and Grid Snap.
For more grid settings, click the View tab after you click Options on the
Tools menu to set the grid style to either dynamic or static, and set the
static grid to the preferred grid spacing.


quality results.
Drawing a Simple Workflow Diagram

Drawing an Optimal Workflow Diagram

1. Place symbols.
Place symbols by using the pointer to drag symbols from the Symbol
Explorer.
symbol dynamically before placement.
before placement.
temporarily disabled, allowing you to place a symbol using Grid Snap or
visual alignment.

symbol.
Press the Ctrl as you drag in a symbol with the left mouse button.
39. Connect the symbols.

Use Connector. When you draw a connector that is not straight, you
should set Clearance on the ribbon to the minimum distance from the
symbol where the first turn in the connector occurs.
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the diagonal mode is
temporarily invoked and the alignment indicators are temporarily disabled,
allowing the connector to be drawn with or without grid snap.
40. Place text.
Double-click symbols to edit text labels at the bottom of the symbols. To
highlight existing text for properties editing or moving, pause the pointer
over text until the PickQuick indicator appears. Then click and select the
numbered box that represents the text. Right-click on the highlighted text
to edit properties.
the sheet scale.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing workflow diagrams.
Content
\WORKFLOW DIAGRAM
Description
Workflow Diagram symbols.
These symbols have special
and modification.
Using AEC Solutions Templates: An

Overview
SmartSketch provides AEC templates for use with its AEC Solutions module.
You must install this module before you can use the AEC templates. After
installing the AEC Solutions module, you will be able to use the AEC
templates with any AutoCAD, MicroStation, DXF, or IGR reference file.
The AEC templates are precision templates designed according to accepted
industry standards. The templates have imperial units in feet and inches, as
well as metric units in meters and centimeters. ANSI and architectural and
ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders and Architectural fill styles
are also provided with the AEC templates.
The AEC template symbols are based on AIA, ASHRAE, and ISO standards
for residential and commercial designs. The AEC templates also provide
ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards.
Architectural Templates
You use these precision templates to produce architectural designs and
drawings according to accepted industry standards.
Architectural (Imperial)This template has imperial units in

feet and inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders,
architectural fill styles, and provides symbols based on AIA
standards for residential and commercial designs.
Architectural (Metric)This template has metric units in meters

and centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders,
architectural fill styles, and provides symbols based on AIA
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available
in these templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears,
containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Floor Plans

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the AIA
standards.
Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the

design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average
plan on a D-Size sheet.
42. Select a border or create one.
The Architectural templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the
borders from Sheet Setup on the File menu so that they appear in the
current design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to
display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics
appropriately in the border.
Tip
The borders were designed from guidelines from the Construction

Specifications Institute (CSI).
43. From the View tab on the Options dialog box, set the grid settings to Grid
style to Static, Grid spacing to 1, and Grid index to 1.
44. Draw the perimeter walls.
Workflow A:
Draw the approximate perimeter walls of the floor plan, using Place
Doubleline and SmartSketch. Use Trim, Trim to Corner, and Extend to
Next for any intersection cleanup between elements where walls overlap or do
not intersect cleanly.
Workflow B:
Verify on the Tools menu that Maintain Relationships is set on. Draw the
approximate perimeter walls of the floor plan, using Place Doubleline,
SmartSketch Settings, and PinPoint. Then adjust the distance between walls
(doubleline graphics) usingSelect Tool on the Draw toolbar to make precision
distances with PinPoint. Use Trim, Trim Corner, and Extend to Next for
any intersection cleanup between elements.
Short cut keys F9 and F12 for PinPoint are useful when you draw
walls.
Avoid trimming for openings, doors, or windows.
Press and hold Shift while using Place Doubleline; this action
prevents a beginning or end cap from being placed. (Pressing and
holding Shift while using Place Doubleline is useful for tracing.)
1. Draw the interior walls.

2. Using the same techniques and commands you used to draw the perimeter
walls, add the appropriate interior walls and adjust accordingly.
3. Place door and window symbols.

Using the Symbol Explorer, select the Doors folder from the Plan
Symbols folder in the tree view. Drag the door symbols onto the
represented wall elements, and use the bold parameters that appear in the
Attribute Viewer to change the size of the door and the handles that appear
to orient the door to the position you want. Repeat the same steps you used
to place doors for placing windows and all other types of symbols.
symbol.

Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. Text is
entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label windows and
doors, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you
double-click them. Or use labels provided in the Label directory in the
Plan Symbols directory.
The following symbol sets aid in production drafting.
Content
Description
Elevation Symbols
Symbols of typical elevation view content based on

AIA standards and other common designs.
Symbols of typical plan view content based on AIA
standards and other common designs. Some symbols
such as doors and windows can be modified by
parameters that appear when the symbols are placed.
Plan Symbols
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions

module.
HVAC Templates
You use these precision templates to produce HVAC designs and drawings

according to accepted industry standards.
HVAC (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and

inches, ANSI and Architectural sheet sizes and borders, and
Architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on ASHRAE
and ISO standards for residential and commercial designs.
HVAC (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and

centimeters, ISO standard Architectural sheet sizes and borders,
and Architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on
ASHRAE and ISO standards for residential and commercial
designs.
in these templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears,
Production Drafting Workflow for Double Line Duct

Layout
standards.
Tip
To produce a fairly complex production drawing, you should set

Maintain Relationships off.

design. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is appropriate for the average
plan on a D-Size sheet.
46. Reference a floor plan or open one.
Reference a floor plan by using the Object command on the Insert menu
or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or click File on the
Open menu to open (translate) the file.
Tip
Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, DXF, or IGR document can be a

reference file.
47. Place duct symbols.

Using the Symbol Explorer, select the Double Line Duct folder from
the HVAC folder in the tree view. Drag the duct symbols over the
reference file, connecting one to another. Use the bold parameters that
appear in the Attribute Viewer to change the size of the duct.

Tips
You can use two methods to place multiple copies of the same
symbol:
symbol.

Use text and dimensioning commands to annotate the drawing. Text is
entered in paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label double line
ducts, use the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you
double-click them.
The HVAC templates are delivered with ten border sizes.
Select the borders with Sheet Setup on the File menu so that they appear
in the current design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet
to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the graphics
appropriately in the border.
Tip

Content
Description
HVAC (Intergraph)
HVAC symbols designed to best fit Double Line

Duct and Single Line Duct Layout workflows.
Several of these symbols are designed with special
behaviors and parametric properties.
HVAC symbols designed to ASHRAE standards.
HVAC (ASHRAE)
Important

module.
Landscape Templates
Use these precision templates to produce landscape designs and drawings
Landscape (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet

and inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders, and
architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based AIA standards
for residential and commercial designs.
Landscape (Metric)This template has metric units in meters

and centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders,
and architectural fill styles. It provides symbols based on AIA
in these two templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar
appears, containing tools to help you create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Landscape Designs

standards.
Tip


Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale for the design. The default
scale is inches = 1 foot, which is appropriate for the average plan on a D
Size sheet.
Reference a floor plan by using Object on the Insert menu or by dragging
and dropping in the reference file. Or use Open on the File menu to open
(translate) the file.
Tip
Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document can be a

reference file.
51. Create a foot print.

If you reference the plan, using the drawing tools on the Draw tool bar,

you can trace the outer perimeter of the reference plan to create the outline
shape of the building. Either delete or move the reference file to a layer
and turn it off.
52. Place symbols.
Drag the landscape symbols into the document in the appropriate
positions.
symbol.
53. Annotate the drawing

Use text and dimensioning to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in
paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label landscape symbols, use
the labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click
them.
The Landscape templates are delivered with ten border sizes.
Select the borders with Sheet Setup so that they appear in the current
design. On the Background tab, select the background sheet to display
with the working sheet.
Use Select Tool to position the graphics appropriately in the border.
Tip

55. The following symbol sets aid in production drafting.

Content
Description
Elevations Symbols
Provide AIA and Intergraph standard elevation

symbols for commercial and residential Landscape
Plan Symbols
design.
Provide AIA and Intergraph standard plan symbols
for commercial and residential Landscape design.
Important

module.
Site Templates
You use these precision templates to produce site designs and drawings
Site (Imperial)This template has imperial units in feet and

inches, ANSI and architectural sheet sizes and borders, and
architectural fill styles. It also provides symbols based on AIA
Site (Metric)This template has metric units in meters and

centimeters, ISO standard architectural sheet sizes and borders, and
architectural fill styles. It also provides symbols based on AIA
The ANSI, DIN, BSI, ISO, and JIS dimensioning standards are
also available in these two templates. When you open these
templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you
create precision drawings.
Production Drafting Workflow for Site Designs

standards.
Tip


Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1/4" = 1', which is
appropriate for the average plan on a D-Size sheet.
Reference a floor plan by using the Object command on the Insert menu
or by dragging and dropping in the reference file. Or click the Open
command to open (translate) the file.

Tip
Any MicroStation, AutoCAD, dxf, or igr document can be a

reference file.
57. Create a foot print.

If you reference the plan, using the drawing tools on the Draw toolbar,
you can trace the outer perimeter of the reference plan to create the outline
shape of the building. Either delete or move the reference file to a layer
and turn it off.
58. Place symbols.
Drag the landscape symbols into the document in the appropriate
positions.
symbol.

Use text and dimensioning to annotate the drawing. Text is entered in
paper units regardless of the sheet scale. To label site symbols, use the
labels that automatically appear on symbols when you double-click them.
The Site templates are delivered with ten border sizes. Select the borders
with Sheet Setup so that they appear in the current design. On the
Background tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the background
sheet to display with the working sheet. Use Select Tool to position the
graphics appropriately in the border.
Tip

61. The following symbol sets aid in production drafting.

Content
Description
Elevations Symbols
Plan Symbols
Provide AIA and Intergraph standard elevation

symbols for commercial and residential Site design.
Provide AIA and Intergraph standard plan symbols
for commercial and residential Site design.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the AEC Solutions module.
Using Electrical Diagramming

This collection of industry-specific templates (both Imperial and Metric)
includes task-specific toolbars and industry-standard symbols that allow you
to quickly and easily create sophisticated electrical schematics.
Using simple drag-and-drop methods, you can easily position electrical
components into their appropriate locations on the drawing sheet. With
intelligent routing - the Connector command you can connect components
at each symbol's connect points, or you can drag-and-drop components onto
the connectors you've already placed. Many inline components such as
resistors, batteries, capacitors, diodes, and switches auto-align and glue when
dropped onto a connector.
Drawing annotation is easy: simply double-click a component or connector,
then type the text. Many symbols (such as resistors, batteries, and capacitors)
have predefined SmartLabels that can be edited with a double-click selection.
There is also an annotation symbol directory with drag-and-drop auto-sizing
text boxes.
This module delivers 250 electrical symbols, including:
Circuit Protectors
Contacts and Relays
Electron Tubes
Fundamental Items
High Voltage
Logic Gates
Qualifying Symbols
Rotating Mach
Semiconductors Diodes, Thyristors, Transistors
Signaling
Switches
Terminal & Connectors
Transformers & Inductors
Transmission Path
The Control Loop Diagram template includes more than 200 control loopspecific symbols. The symbols are grouped into logical categories and include
Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators, Recorders, Switches, Temperature
Elements, Terminal Strips and Transmitters.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Electrical

Diagramming module.
Control Loop Templates

You use this schematic template to produce control loop diagrams using
Intergraph supplied symbols according to accepted industry standards.
Imperial TemplateThis template defaults to a B size sheet. The

sheet background consists of two sections divided into two
categories. The main sections are Field and I/O Building.
The Field section is divided into Instrument and Junction Box

categories.
The I/O Building is divided into Termination Rack and I/O Cabinet
categories.
Tip
If you need a different configuration for the background, click

Background Sheets on the View menu, and select a sheet and
modify as needed. Then click Working Sheets on the View menu.
The working sheet displays the changes that were made in the
background sheet.
Control Loop Workflow

Tip
You should create schematic drawings with Maintain

Relationships cleared.
1. Set up the sheet. Select an appropriate sheet size. The default sheet size is
B with a scale of 1:1.
2. Place symbols.
The Symbol Explorer defaults to the Control Loop symbol set. The set is
divided into logical components such as controllers, recorder, terminal
strips, transmitters and others. Select a component and drag it to the
location you want.

Tip
A typical configuration might be as follows: FieldInstrument

Thermocouple, Junction Box- 3 Wire Terminal Strip; I/O
BuildingTermination Rack3 Wire Terminal Strip w/ground
and I/O CabinetElectrical Recorder.
62. Click Connector and connect the components together as you want.
Connect points have been placed on each component where typical
connections can be made.
63. Edit attributes.
Some components have attributes associated with them that change the
text associated with them. Select the component, and change the attributes
you want to change in the Symbol Explorer. The text labels are updated
to display the input values.
The following symbol sets to aid in control loop diagramming.
Content
Description
Control Loop Diagrams
Control Loop symbols categorized into the

following groupings: Controllers, Flow Elements,
Indicators, Positioners, Recorders, Switches,
Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips,
Transmitters and Valves.
Important

Diagramming module.
Electrical Schematic Templates

You use these schematic templates to produce electrical drawings according to
accepted industry standards.
Imperial TemplateThis template is defined with ANSI sheet

sizes and borders. The default sheet size is C with a 1:1 scale.
Metric TemplateThis template is defined with ISO sheet sizes

and borders. The default sheet size is A1 with a 1:1 scale.
Both templates point to the electrical symbol sets. The electrical symbols
include main classifications of the following: Circuit Protectors, Contacts and
Relays, Electron Tubes, Fundamental Items, High Voltage, Logic Gates,
Qualifying Symbols, Rotating Mach, Semiconductors, Signaling and Readout

Devices, Switches, Terminals and Connectors, Transformers and Inductors,
and Transmission Path.
Tip
You should design schematic drawings with Maintain

Relationships set off (default setting).
Electrical Workflow 1
Select an appropriate sheet size and scale.
64. Place an initial symbol correctly rotated.
65. Route a connector from that symbol to form a rough outline of the circuit.
66. From the Symbol Explorer, select the type of symbol or component
needed, and drag the component onto the sheet and over the connector.
The connector is highlighted when the pointer moves over the element.
Most of the components automatically align to the connector.
Drop the symbol, and it is placed, associated to the connector. Or, if the
orientation of the symbol is not correct, use the left or right arrows to
rotate the symbol to a new orientation. When the symbol is dropped, it
maintains the orientation.
67. Enter any attribute information that you want in the Attribute Viewer.
When the information is changed in the viewer, the text information on the
symbol also changes. If you do not want the attribute text, you can select
the text box and delete text from the symbol.
68. Continue adding or modifying connectors and adding components until
the circuit is complete.
Electrical Workflow 2
Select an appropriate sheet size and scale.
69. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the component onto the sheet to the
location you want.
Or, if the orientation of the symbol is not correct, use the left or right
arrows to rotate the symbol to a new orientation. When the symbol is
dropped, it maintains the orientation.
70. Enter any attribute information that you want in the Attribute Viewer.
When the information is changed in the viewer, the text information on the
symbol also changes. If you do not want the attribute text, you can select

the text box and delete text from the symbol.
71. Continue dragging and dropping components as needed to complete the
circuit.
72. Using Connector, connect the individual components.
73. Continue adding components and connecting them together until the
circuit is complete.
Differences in Workflow 1 and 2
Workflow 1 places the symbol or component on the connector or

wire. It does not break the wire. It only masks out the connector
beneath it. In this case the components are glued to the connector.
To modify the circuit in such a case, you move the connector, and
the symbols follow it to the new location.
Workflow 2 places a connector or wire between the components

that are placed. Workflow 2 is more of a real-world flow. In this
case, you can select and move the components, and the connector
or wires move to adjust to the new component location.
You can combine the workflows. You must, however, remember

which is the parent and which is the child when you combine the
two.
The following symbol sets aid in electrical schematic creation.

Content
Description
Electrical Symbols
Circuit Protectors Contacts and Relays Electron Tubes

Fundamental Items High Voltage Items Logic Gates
Qualifying Symbols Rotating Mach & Comp
Assembly Semiconductors Diodes Thyristors
Transistors Signaling & Readout Devices Switches
Terminal & Connectors Transformers & Inductors
Transmission Path
Important

Diagramming module.
Using Mechanical Engineering

SmartSketch provides tools that let you create part drawings and assembly
drawings that provide information for manufacturinga product. Part drawings
(or detail drawings) show each part contained in a product. Assembly
drawings show how all the parts fit together. These drawing templates (Metric
and Imperial) are available with the GD&T (Geometric Dimension and
Tolerancing) and Weld Symbols module. GD&T and Weld Symbols are
symbol sets that let you create and place GD&T and Weld Symbols into
SmartSketch drawings. The symbols are placed through a simple drag-anddrop operation from the Symbol Explorer. You can also place Text Fields that
build up the symbols via this same drag-and-drop operation. Several of the
symbols feature multiple representations that you can easily access with a
simple right-mouse click on your placed symbol. Once you see the
representation you like, you simply left-mouse click it to change the display of
the symbol in your drawing.
GD&T symbols include input fields - such as tolerance value - which are
easily accessed with a simple double-click of your mouse; you can then edit
the input field to change its value. You can access these symbols when you
open one of the Mechanical templates in SmartSketch.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the GD&T and Weld
Symbols module.
Mechanical Templates
ANSI TemplateThis template has imperial units in decimal

inches, ANSI sheet sizes and borders, implements the ANSI Y14.5
dimensioning standard, and provides ANSI Y14.5 GD&T and
American Welding Society (AWS) Weld symbols.
ISO TemplateThis template has metric units in millimeters,

ISO sheet sizes and borders, implements the ISO dimensioning
standard, and provides ISO GD&T and Weld symbols.
The DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two
templates.
When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to
help you create precision drawings.
Part Design Workflow

Tip
You should design individual parts with Maintain Relationships

turned on.

Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1:1, which is
appropriate for small parts.
74. Sketch the part.
75. Draw the elements, using the tools from the Draw toolbar and the
SmartSketch Settings command. As you draw, relationships are
established that capture your design intent.
Tip
As an example the system remembers when you draw a line

horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains
that information when you modify the drawing. You do not need to
give much attention to the exact size of the part; it is often easier to
dimension the part and change the dimensions later.
76. Dimension the part.

Use SmartDimension and the other dimensioning tools to dimension the
part. These dimensions drive dimensions that can be changed to iterate
your design. Redundant dimensions are shown through the driven
elements.
77. Refine the drawing.
Select individual dimensions and change the values to iterate your design.
If you plan to use the part in a mechanism or assembly, then select all of
the geometry and create a symbol with an appropriate name.
Mechanism Modeling Workflow

Tip
You can design mechanisms, using rigid body symbols.
You should set Maintain Relationships to On in the mechanism

file.
1. Prepare the parts.

You must save each part in the mechanism as a symbol and turn Allow
Rotation by Relationships on, using the Symbol Authoring tools, so the
parts can act as a rigid body in the mechanism.

78. Start a new drawing.
You should create the mechanism in a new drawing with an appropriate
sheet scale for the whole mechanism. Set the symbol browser to the
location of the components.
79. Drag the parts.
Drag the parts into their rough location on the sheet, but do not give much
attention to precision placement or orientation.
80. Connect the parts.
Use the tools on the Relationship toolbar to establish the relationships
between the parts in the mechanism. Connect allows you to connect a
specific location on one part to a specific location on another part. Use
relationship indicators to determine the connection type, such as end point
to center point or end point to midpoint. You can also use specific tools to
establish other relationships, such as tangent, parallel, perpendicular,
colinear, concentric, and others.
81. Create driving dimensions.
Use SmartDimension or other dimensioning tools to establish the
controlling dimensions for the mechanism.
82. Move the mechanism.
Select a driving dimension and change the value to move the mechanism
into a specific configuration.
Production Drafting Workflow

You can produce full sets of production drawings according to the ANSI
standards.
Tip
To produce a fairly complex production drawing, set Maintain

Relationships off.

Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to draw the part.
The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for small parts on an A-Size
sheet.
83. Draw the views.
Draw a principle view of the part using the draw tools (with precision keyin values on the ribbon), SmartSketch Settings, and PinPoint. Draw
other views using SmartSketch Settings to align key edges from each
view.

Use the text, dimensioning, GD&T symbols, and weld symbols to
annotate the drawing. Note that text is entered in paper units regardless of
the sheet scale.
The following symbol sets are provided to aid in production drafting.
Content
Description
Geometric Dimensioning
and Tolerancing (GD&T)
Symbols
Datum and feature control frames are provided

according to the ANSI Y14.5 or ISO standard.
Components of each frame are provided as
symbols with appropriate drag points to fit into
the frames.
The weld reference line and components are
provided according to the American Welding
Society (AWS) or ISO standard.
Weld Symbols
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the GD&T and Weld
Symbols module.
Using Process Diagramming

SmartSketch provides industry-specific templates, task-specific toolbars, and
industry-standard symbols that let you produce 2D process diagrams,
schematics, and precision drawings. With the included report macros, you can
easily create component reports.
Using simple drag-and-drop actions let you quickly position major
components of a process system into their appropriate locations in the drawing
area. With SmartSketch's intelligent routing - the Connector command together with predefined linestyles to represent pipes and instrumentation
lines, you can connect components at each symbol's connect points. You can
place other inline components, such as valves, directly on a pipeline or
instrumentation line.
Process application templates (both Imperial and Metric) present industrystandard sheet sizes and properties so that you can produce:
Control Loop Diagrams This template includes more than 200

control loop-specific symbols. The symbols are grouped in logical
categories such as Controllers, Flow Elements, Indicators,
Recorders, Switches, Temperature Elements, Terminal Strips and
Transmitters.
Process Block Diagrams This template includes 24 typical

block diagram symbols. Each symbol has a double-click text action
that lets you enter the text needed for each particular process in the
diagram.
Ortho Piping Diagrams This template delivers more than 850

ortho piping symbols, grouped by size and function. Each size
contains 150# and 300# valves and valve assemblies, flanges,
elbows, tees, and actuators. By using pre-defined line and doubleline styles that depict the sizes and types of pipes, you can create
both associative and non-associative piping layouts.
PFDs and P&IDs The Process Flow and P&ID templates are
grouped by ANSI, ISO, and Intergraph symbol standards. The
ANSI symbol set contains approximately 150 symbols; the ISO
symbol set contains approximately 240 symbols; the Intergraph
PFD symbol set contains more than 370 symbols, and the
Intergraph P&ID symbol set contains more than 860 symbols.
Many Intergraph process symbols have a set of pre-selected
attributes that can be edited via the Attribute Viewer (you can add
additional attributes to any symbol). Every pipeline,

instrumentation line, and symbol can have SmartLabels applied to
add and display attribute information. Based on these attributes,
reports- such as Vessel Reports, Pump/Compressor Reports, Heat
Exchanger Reports, and Stream Reports- can be easily generated
using delivered report macros. You simply drag-and-drop these
macros into the diagram just as you would any other symbol in the
Symbol Explorer.
Plot Plans This template delivers 36 parametric symbols, which

include Annotation, Equipment, Roads, Site, and Vehicles
directories. When used with the ImageScape LT module for
SmartSketch LE, raster images can then be referenced and scaled
to the correct size and orientation, and vector graphics can be
drawn on top to accurately represent the new facilities.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions

module.
Ortho Piping Templates

You use this precision template to produce orthographic piping drawings,
using common sized components and pipes.
Ortho Piping TemplateThis template has imperial units in feet

and inches, with a precision of 1/32. The sheet scale is set to 1/2
= 1.
ANSI, ISO, DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are available in the
template. The default dimension type is ANSI. When you open this template,
the Draw toolbar appears, containing tools to help you create precision
drawings.
Ortho Piping Workflow 1 (Small Layouts)
You can create small layouts with Maintain Relationships set on.
Select Midpoint from SmartSketch Settings.

Select an appropriate sheet size. The default scale is 1/2 = 1.
85. From the Symbol Explorer, select the size of piping to be placed. A list of
folders containing appropriate components for that size of pipe is
displayed.
86. Place a line.

87. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous. On the ribbon, select the
appropriate line style. Click to place the line.
88. Drag one of the piping components into the document close to the end of
the pipe where it is placed. Example 150# Gate Valve with flanges. If the
orientation of the valve is not correct relative to the pipe, use the left or
right arrow keys to rotate as needed. Click the symbol.
89. To display the Relationships toolbar, click Relationships on the Main
toolbar
90. On the Relationships toolbar, click Connect.
91. Identify the center on one end of the valve as the first point to connect to.
You can see the midpoint indicator as the pointer moves over the center of
the end of the valve.
92. Identify the end of the line placed previously as the other end to connect.
The valve moves to the end of the pipe. If Maintain Relationships is set
on, the valve remains connected when modifications are made.
93. Place another line from the other end of the valve. Select the midpoint of
the end of the valve from which to start. Place the line an approximate
length.
94. From the 4 Els directory select the 90 degree elbow and drag it into the
file. Use the rotate keys to rotate to a correct orientation. Connect the
midpoint of the elbow to the end point of the 4 line.
95. Repeat the process as needed until the layout is complete.
96. Place dimensions between key components of the layout.
Tip
Workflow method 1 is recommended for small layouts because the

constraints needed to handle a large piping layout may make the
system too slow for practical use.
Ortho Piping Workflow 2 (Large Layouts)
You should create large piping layouts with Maintain

Relationships set off.
Be sure to select Midpoint from SmartSketch Settings.
1. To set up the sheet, select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow
you to draw the piping layout. The default scale is 1/2 = 1.
2. From the Symbol Explorer, select the size of components to be placed. A
list of folders containing appropriate components for that size of pipe is
displayed.
3. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous. Draw a single line,
centerline, layout of the piping system to be drawn. Placing centerlines on
a different layer is recommended.

4. From the Symbol Explorer, select the proper sized components to be
placed, and drag the components onto the line.
5. When the components are placed in their proper locations, turn off the
centerline layer.
6. Select Place Doubleline, a flyout on the Line/Arc Continuous. Set the
placement option on the toolbar to Center Primary Line; then select a
width.
7. Use relationship indicators to locate the midpoint of one of the
components, and click the left mouse button. Use midpoint to locate the
end of the next component that has been placed, and right-click. A
doubleline representing the size of the pipe is placed.
8. Continue connecting components in this manner until all components are
connected.
Tip
To show pipes crossing, the doubleline representing the pipe on

top can be filled or patterned with a blank color. The pipe that is to
be displayed below can be selected and pushed to the bottom in the
display. To select and push the pipe to the bottom, click Send to
Back on the Change toolbar.
You can place pipes using the method in Workflow 1 with

Line/Arc Continuous instead of using Place Doubleline.
The following symbol sets aid in Ortho Piping layouts.

Content
Description
Orthographic Piping Symbols Each Size contains the following: 150# Valves
Sizes 1,2,3,4,6,8,10,12 Inches 300# Valves Actuators Annotation Els Olet
Reducers Welds
2. and 2 Inch sizes also
include 600# and
800# valves.
Important

module.
PFD and P&ID Templates

You use these schematic templates to produce process flow diagrams
PFD (Intergraph) TemplateThis template is set up to be a

schematic template to create process flow diagrams. The default
symbol set is a subset of the Intergraph SP2D symbol set. The
delivered set draws most PFDs. If you need other Intergraph
symbols, you can copy them from the P&ID (Intergraph) symbol
set.
PFD ANSI TemplateThis template is set up to be a schematic

template to create process flow diagrams based on ANSI Process
Flow Standards. ASA Z32.2.3-1949.
PFD ISO TemplateThis template is set up to be a schematic

template to create process flow diagrams based on ISO Process
Flow Standards. (General RulesFlow Diagrams for Process
Plants - ISO 10628)
P&ID (Intergraph) TemplateThis template is set up to be a

schematic template to create process flow diagrams and P&ID
diagrams. The symbol set is the Intergraph SP2D symbol set,
consisting of approximately 1000 symbols. You can reconfigure
the symbol locations and directories to your specification for easy
location.
PFD and P&ID Workflow

Tip
You should create schematic drawings with Maintain

Relationships cleared.

schematic drawing. The default scale is 1:1, which is appropriate for the
symbol sizes.
97. Place symbols.
Drag in the major components of the PFD and place them at locations on
the sheet.
These components usually include vessels, pumps, and heat exchangers.
symbol.

98. Enter attribute information for the individual components.
To enter data in the attributes, select the symbol and add the information
in the Attribute Viewer.
99. Attach nozzles to major equipment.
Nozzles are automatically aligned and can be placed anywhere on the
major equipment.
100.
From the Schematic toolbar select Connector.
Connect the major components together at the locations you want on each
symbol.
Each symbol has predefined connect points; however, the

connector can connect to any graphic location on the symbol.
The connector routes itself away from the original symbol and
toward the target symbol.
You can attach connectors to connectors.
A connector being placed or modified can have its starting or

ending point anywhere along another connector.
101.
Set connector flow direction at any time.
There are two methods to set the flow direction:
When you place the connector, you can use the options on the
connector toolbar to select the starting and ending terminator for
the connector.
You can drag an arrowhead symbol from the browser and connect
it to the end of the connector.
102.
Drag inline symbol components such as valves onto the
connectors.
The valve symbols have automated aligning turned on. This means that the
valve automatically aligns to the direction of the connector.
Note that the valve is placed on top of the connector and hides the portion
of the connector that the valve covers.
103.
To associate a text box with a symbol that does not already have
associated text, first double-click the symbol, and then type in text.
Moving the symbol causes the text to move and maintain its
relative location to the symbol.
If a symbol already has associated text, double-clicking the symbol

allows you to edit the text.
104.
After you have placed components and connectors, you can modify
the symbols and/or connectors by selecting and dragging them to a new
location.
You can select and drag multiple symbols to a new location.
You can select and modify single connectors.
You can adjust segments of connectors to new locations or move

and reattach endpoints.
The following symbol sets aid in schematic drawings of PFDs and P&IDs.
Content
Description
P&ID (Intergraph)
Intergraph Symbol set containing symbols needed

for creating PFDs, P&IDs, and Material Handling
drawings.
Symbol set that is a subset of the P&ID
(Intergraph) set. Symbols are adequate to create
most PFDs. Other symbols from P&ID or other
symbol sets can be copied to the PFD directory and
are displayed for selection.
Symbol set based on the ISO 10628 standard.
General rules for flow diagrams for process plants.
Symbol set based on ASA Z32.2.3-1949 ASME
Y32.2.2.3 Graphical symbols for pipe fittings,
valves and piping.
PFD (Intergraph)
PFD (ISO Standard)

PFD (ANSI)
Important

module.
Plot Plan Templates

You use these precision templates to produce plot plan and equipment layout
drawings.
Plot Plan (Imperial) TemplateThis template has imperial units

in decimal inches, ANSI sheet sizes and borders.
Plot Plan (Metric) TemplateThis template has metric units in


millimeters, ISO sheet sizes and borders, and implements the ISO
dimensioning.
The DIN, BSI, and JIS dimensioning standards are also available in these two
templates. When you open these templates, the Draw toolbar appears,
Plot Plan Workflow

Tip
You can draw plot plans associatively or non-associatively. The

default behavior is non-associative. To draw the plot plan
associatively, set Maintain Relationships on.

Select an appropriate sheet size. The default sheet scale is 1 in:100 ft. for
imperial and 1mm:1000mm for metric.
105.
Sketch the layout.
Draw the geometry for roads, buildings or equipment, using the tools from
the Draw toolbar and SmartSketch Settings. As you draw, relationships
are established that capture your design intent. As an example, with
Maintain Relationships set on, the software remembers when you draw a
line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that
information when you modify the drawing.
106.
Drag any symbols that are needed for the drawing.
You can place symbols precisely, relative to other components using

PinPoint or the precision Move.
107.
Dimension the part.
Use SmartDimension and the other dimensioning tools to dimension the

layout. If Maintain Relationships is set on, these dimensions are driving
dimensions that can be changed to iterate your design. Redundant
dimensions are shown through the driven elements.
108.
Finish the drawing.
Select individual dimensions and change the values to iterate your design.
The following symbol sets aid in construction of plot plan drawings.
Content
Description
Plot Plan
Assorted symbols to aid in the construction of Plot Plans.

Symbols include direction arrow, buildings, vessels,

tanks, vehicles, and others. Some of the symbols are
parametric and can be changed in the content explorer.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions module.
Process Block Diagramming Templates

You use these templates to produce process block diagrams.


Basic Diagramming symbols are available in the Symbol Explorer for these
two templates. The Schematic toolbar containing tools to create diagrams
Setting Up a Process Block Diagram

Tip
You can create block diagrams with Maintain Relationships set

on or off. It is suggested that you accept the default, Maintain
Relationships set off.

Choose an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow enough paper space
to draw. The default scale is 1:1.
109.
Prepare to draw.

Grid Display, and Grid Snap. For more grid options, click the View tab
on the Options dialog box to set the grid style to either dynamic or static,
and set the static grid to the preferred grid spacing.


quality results.
Drawing a Simple Diagram


Drawing an Optimal Diagram

1. Place basic diagramming symbols by using the pointer to drag from the
Symbol Explorer.
Place multiple copies of a symbol by using the right mouse button to drag
and by selecting Stamp Here.
the keyboard to rotate the symbol dynamically before placement. Use the
up/down arrow keys to select different drag points on the symbol before
placement.
alignment.
110.
Connect the symbols by using Connector.
When you draw a connector that is not straight, you should set Clearance:
to the minimum distance from the symbol so that the first turn in the
connector appears.
geometry. If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the alignment
indicators are temporarily be disabled, allowing the connector to be drawn
with or without grid snap.
111.
Double-click symbols to place text in the center of the symbol.
properties editing or moving, pause the pointer over text until the
PickQuick indicator appears.
Then click and select the numbered box that represents the text. Rightclick on the highlighted text to edit properties.
To move the highlighted text, click the green lock to unlock. Then with
the pointer drag the text to a new position. Note that text is entered in
paper units regardless of the sheet scale.
112.
Finish the diagram.

Use fills and modify the elements in symbols and connectors to enhance
the drawing.
The following symbol sets aid in drawing diagrams.
Content
Process Block Diagrams
Description
Common Basic diagramming symbols. You can
double-click these symbols to place text. These
symbols also have special behaviors for
enhanced placement and modification.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Process Solutions module.
Technical Drawing Templates: An Overview

You use these templates to produce technical drawings, sketches, and
illustrations.


A set of simple drawing elements is also available in the Symbol Explorer

for these templates. The Draw toolbar containing tools to create precision
drawings appears on the left of the drawing window.
Drawing/Sketching Workflow
Tip
You can create technical drawings with Maintain Relationships

set on or off.

Select an appropriate sheet size and scale that allow you to enough paper
space to draw. The default scale is 1:1.
113.
Draw elements.
Use the tools on the Draw toolbar and SmartSketch Settings, or drag
symbols available in the Symbol Explorer.
Place multiple copies of symbols by using the right mouse button to drag
and by selecting Stamp Here, or by pressing Ctrl while dragging a
symbol from the Symbol Explorer.
If Maintain Relationships is set on, relationships between drawn objects

are established. As an example the system remembers when you draw a
line horizontally, vertically, or parallel to another line and maintains that
information when you modify the drawing.
You can use Trim, Extend to Next, and Fillet to efficiently modify drawn
geometry.
114.
Annotate the drawing.
Use text, dimensioning, and labels to annotate the drawing. Doubleclicking on any drawn object (except fills, dimensions, and leaders)
creates an associative text box. Note that text is entered in paper units
regardless of the sheet scale.
115.
Finish the drawing.Use patterns and fills and modify the symbols
to enhance the drawing.
Content
Description
\ProgramFiles\
Commonly drawn elements such as line,
SmartSketch\Symbols\Drawing rectangle, ellipse, circle, and others are
provided to quickly begin a drawing. These
symbols become drawing elements when
placed so they are easily edited along with
drawn elements.
Create a Template
1. Click File > New.
2. On the File New dialog box, select the Template to use as the basis for
your new file.
3. Click OK to create the new file.
4. Complete any changes to be included as part of the template.
Save a Document as a Template

1. Click File > Save As Template.
2. In the Save As Template dialog box, specify the directory in which to
save the new template.
3. In the File Name box, type a unique name for the new template. The
template will be saved in the TEMPLATE directory located in the
directory where you installed the software.

Tip
You can use the extension .igr. It is not necessary to use a different
file extension for templates.
Notes
You can change the default directory where templates are saved by
you want on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.

Save as Template Command (File Menu)
Saves a document as a template. The template is stored in the TEMPLATE
directory located in the directory where you installed the software.
Organizational Chart Wizard (Tools Menu)

Creates an organizational chart with or without personnel data. Adds a new
sheet to the open file containing your chart. You can edit the resulting
symbols and connectors.
Drawing Basic Elements: An

Overview
An Error! Hyperlink reference not valid. is any line, circle, or other part of
the drawing. The Draw toolbar on the left side of the drawing sheet contains
most of the buttons that you can use to draw any type of basic geometric
elementfreeform shapes, lines, arcs, circles, and so forth.
You can place most basic elements with just a few clicks. For example, if you
want to place a line, you can click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw
toolbar. Then, you click two points to indicate where to start and finish the
line. If you do not want to place another line, you can right-click to end the
operation.
Tip
Right-clicking ends most operations in the software.
appears on the drawing sheet. With this method, you drag the pointer as if it
were a pen. You can draw most elements, such as rectangles, circles, and arcs,
with this method, sometimes called mouse-down drawing. The mouse-down
method is typically used to place most elements in conceptual sketching and
modification.
values into the ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You can then click
on the drawing sheet to place the line. This method, sometimes called mouseup drawing, is typically used for precision placement and when you want to
draw elements that are related to each other.
In some cases, you might want to click points on the drawing sheet and type
values in the ribbon to place an element. For example, you can click Line/Arc
Continuous and then type 3.0 in the Length box on the ribbon box and press
Enter to lock the length value.
When a line that is three inches long appears next to the pointer, you can click
anywhere on the drawing sheet to indicate where to place one end of the line.
Then, you move the line around and click again to set the line's orientation
angle.
If you do not like the results of what you drew, you can click Undo on the
Main toolbar. If you want to repeat an action, click Redo on the Main
toolbar.
Drawing Lines: An Overview

If you want to place a line, you click Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw
toolbar. Then, you click a point on the drawing sheet to indicate where to start
the line. You click a second point to indicate where to end the line. If you do
not want to place another line, right-click to end the operation.
appears on the drawing sheet.
values into the ribbon that appears, and then press Enter. You then click on
the drawing sheet to place the line.
You can also use a combination of clicks and ribbon input to place the line.
For example, you can type a line length in the ribbon box to lock the length
value and then set the line's orientation angle graphically. You can set the
color and line type by clicking a style in the Style list box.
Draw a Line
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous.
2. Click the point where you want the line to begin.
3. Click the point where you want the line to end. This action defines the
length and rotation angle of the line.
Right-click to end the line.
To draw a series of connected lines, click at the point where you

want each line segment to end, and then right-click.
Tip
If you close the shape, the command restarts so you begin drawing
again.

Notes
Instead of clicking to draw the end points, you can type values on
the ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and
ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw a line, you can

drag the pointer to draw a line.
You can press Esc to end a line or a line segment.
You can use the options on the ribbon and the commands on the
shortcut menu to edit a line.
Draw a Point
Note
Point is available only if you use Customize to place it on a

toolbar or menu.
1. On your customized toolbar, click Point
2. Click to place a point.

Notes
Instead of clicking to place the point, you can type values in the
coordinate boxes on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of
graphic and ribbon bar input.
The coordinate origin is located at the bottom left corner of the

window.
shortcut menu to edit a point.

Toolbar)
Draws one line or a series of connected lines. When you draw a series of lines,
the second point of one line is the first point of the next line.
You can also draw a continuous series of lines and arcs that can be
perpendicular or tangent to each other. You can create an open or closed shape
by drawing lines and arcs in any combination. The last point of the line or arc
is the first point of the next line or arc.
Note
The Line/Arc Continuous command starts in line mode by

default. If you want to start by drawing an arc, press Shift+A.
While drawing, you can toggle between the two modes by pressing
Shift+A for arc mode or pressing Shift+L for line mode.
Line Ribbon
Tip
To find out the name of an option on the ribbon, pause the pointer
over an option and read the ToolTip.
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the drawing style.
Line Color - Sets the drawing color. You can click More to define
custom colors with the Colors dialog box.
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width.
Line - Switches the drawing mode from arc to line.

Arc - Switches the drawing mode from line to arc.
Length - Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values.
Angle - Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values.
A positive value is counterclockwise from the x axis, and a negative value is
clockwise from the x axis.
Point Command
Draws a point. The point is displayed as a filled rectangle.
Tip
Point is available only if you use Customize to place it on a

toolbar or menu.
Point Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
X - Sets a value for the x coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with
the Y option.
Y - Sets a value for the y coordinate. You can use this option by itself or with

the X option.
Drawing Connectors: An Overview

You can use a connector to join two elements together. The Connector tool,
located on both the Schematic and Draw toolbars, provides a convenient way
to draw schematic diagrams and other types of drawings.
Connector allows you to place connectors anywhere that you need them. You
can connect lines, circles, symbols, or points in free space.
Some symbols are created with connect points. When you attach a connector
to a connect point, the connector automatically attaches to the point at a
predefined angle. Otherwise, the connector locates and attaches to a keypoint
or point along any elements in the symbol.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as
gray circles with Xs.
You can also modify the connector after you place it by inserting or moving a
line segment, inserting or moving a vertex, or moving an element with a
connector.
There are special connector styles that you can use in your diagram. On the
Connector ribbon, you can click the style that you want in the Style box. You
can then draw a connector that displays the line style that you selected. For
example, in documents based on the Process Block Diagram template, you
can select Future and Phantom in the Line Style box on the ribbon. When
you select Future and draw a connector, the connector appears as a dashed
line.
When you select Phantom and draw a connector, it appears grayed out; the
connector is highlighted when you point to it.
Besides line styles, you can also select line start and line end terminators on
the Connector ribbon. The following connectors display some of the
different types of terminators that you can apply.
Place a Connector
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector
116.
Click to begin drawing the connector or move the pointer over the
element to highlight the potential key points or connect points.
The connect points appear as red circles with Xs. The keypoints appear as
gray circles with Xs. The active point along the element is a filled red circle.
You can connect to any point on the element.
Tip
If you press Alt while drawing a connector, the connector attaches

to a connect point at any angle.
117.
After you select a starting point, the direction in which you move
from that point determines the angle at which the connector is drawn.
The following picture shows that the pointer has been moved away from the
initial point in a downward direction.
You can generate two or more line segments with each click.
When the pointer crosses the current line segment, the software
automatically generates another segment.
The following graphic shows a connector with three line segments

although you clicked only once.
To switch between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments

or drawing diagonal line segments, click Diagonal Mode (Alt).
If the element itself is rotated, the takeoff angle is adjusted

appropriately so that the connector is perpendicular to the element.
If you are connecting to a symbol, the connect point may have a

pre-defined angle to which the connector must connect.
To create a connector path
After you select a point to move from, you can click points to force
a connector to go to a certain path.
To end the connector

You can end a connector in the following ways:
After you place one or more connector line segments, right click to
end the connector.
To attach the connector to another element, move the pointer over

the element to display the potential connect points. However, you
can connect to any point on the element.
When the point closest to the pointer is highlighted, you can click to define
the end of the connector. The pointer snaps to connect points.
Notes
The software calculates the angle for the ending the connection
point, based on how you approach the element.
If the calculated angle is not correct when you move the pointer

away from the point, you can move the pointer back over the point
and try again.
As you drag connected elements or symbols, the connections are

maintained.
Modify a Connector
To modify a connector, select the connector, using the Select Tool.

You can then change the connector in several ways.
To insert a line segment
To insert a line segment into the connector, click Insert Segment

Mode (Shift) on the ribbon, or press Shift.
The pointer changes to a directional arrow when the command is in Insert

Segment mode, and the pointer is positioned over a connector segment.
Drag the pointer diagonally to define the shape of the segment.
The following graphic shows the connector dynamics display as you drag the
pointer (A).
When you release the drag, the segment is inserted as part of the
connector.
To move a line segment
To move a line segment, first move the pointer over a horizontal


line segment or a vertical line segment. Then click the segment and
drag it to the location you want.
To insert a vertex
To insert a vertex, first click Diagonal Mode (Alt) on the ribbon,

or press Alt.
Move the pointer over a horizontal line segment or a vertical line

segment to which you want to add the vertex, and drag the segment
to a new location. The pointer changes to a directional arrow. As
you drag the segment, the software inserts a vertex.
In the following graphic a vertex has been inserted in a horizontal line

segment.
To move a vertex
To move a vertex, move the pointer over the vertex. Then drag the
vertex to move it.
When Diagonal mode is not active, you can move the vertex only
in a horizontal or vertical direction. The following graphic shows
that moving the vertex (A) results in line segments that are
horizontal or vertical.
When Diagonal mode is active, you can move the vertex in any
direction. This action means that connector line segments are not
limited to horizontal or vertical orientation.
The following graphic shows that moving the vertex (A) results in line
segments that are no longer horizontal or vertical.
To move an element with a connector
To move an element that is connected, select the element with the

connector and move it. The connector moves with the element.
Tip
To find out how to move an element, click Related Topics.
To modify end points
You modify end points to move a connector from one connect

point to another or to move a connector point to another location.
To move a connector, first select the connector. Then click the

connector and drag it to a connect point or another location.

Tip
After you connect a point, you can drag it to another connect point.
Format a Connector
1. Select a connector.
118.
On the Connector ribbon, set the options you want.
Notes
On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Element

Properties dialog box, set the options you want.
You can also format a connector before you attach it by setting

options on the ribbon.
Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties

dialog box overrides the line style formats.
To change a line style, click the Style list on the ribbon, and select
a style.
To change clearance, type a value in the Clearance box on the

ribbon.
Attach a Connector to an Object

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Connector.
119.
In the Connector ribbon bar, set the line start and end terminators.
120.
Pass the pointer over the target object to highlight the potential
keypoints or connect points.
Tip
The connector can attach at keypoints on the symbol or predefined

connect points. The connect points appear as red circles with Xs.
The keypoints appear as gray circles with Xs.
121.
Click the symbol to place the connector.
Tip
The connector attaches to the connect point that is nearest to the

point that you clicked. Otherwise, the connector attaches to a
keypoint or any point along the elements in the symbol.
Merge Connectors
1. Select two connectors.
Important
The first connector selected drives the manner in which the merge
occurs such that the properties of the first connector selected will
be applied to the second connector.
on the Connectors ribbon. The

2. Click the Merge Connectors button
connectors merge into a single connector.
Notes:
If more than two connectors are selected, the Merge Connectors command is
disabled on the Connectors ribbon.
Split a Connector
1. Click a connector.
2. Click the Split Connector button
on the Connector ribbon.
3. Click the point at which to split the connector.

Notes
When you click within the range of a symbol on the connector, the
software trims the two resulting connectors to the symbol's range.
If the symbol has connect points, the software attaches the
resulting connectors to the symbol at the connect points. This
command displays the connect points located on a symbol.
Split connector should not be used to trim a single connector to the

edge of a symbol. In this instance, the connector should be
modified directly with its end handles.
The Clearance value on the Connector ribbon will determine the

shortest length of a connector. Thus, if one end of a split connector
is shorter than the clearance value, that segment length will be
increased to match the value.

Connector Command (Draw Toolbar)
Connects two elements together.
Using a connector, you can connect to an element by connecting to:
Key points. Hollow gray circles indicate potential key points (such
as endpoint, midpoint, and others) on an element, when the
element is located by the pointer.
Connect points. Hollow red circles indicate potential connect

points on a symbol.
Any point on an element. A solid red filled circle is displayed

when the pointer locates an element at a point other than its key
points.
Note
You must click the Connector command before you see the points
for connecting on the element.
You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.
Connector Ribbon
When you click Connector on the Draw toolbar, you can place a connector.
When you select a connector, you can change it.
Most of the options on the Connector ribbon are the same whether you are
placing or modifying a connector. The only difference is when you select a
connector for modification. When you modify a connector, an additional
option is available to insert a segment into the selected connector. This last
option is Insert Segment Mode (Shift).
Ribbon Bar Options

Style - Sets the line style for the connector.
Line Color - Sets the line color for the connector. You can click More to

define custom colors with the Colors dialog box.
Line Type - Sets the connector line type and style.
Line Width - Sets the line width for the connector.
Line Start Terminator - Sets the terminator for starting the connector.
Line End Terminator - Sets the terminator for ending the connector.
Tip
Terminators are compatible with any of the linear styles.

Diagonal Mode (Alt) - Allows you to either place or modify a connector.
Placing a Connector
Switches the connector placement between drawing horizontal and vertical
line segments or drawing diagonal line segments when you place a connector.
Tip
To alternate between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments

or drawing diagonal line segments, you can also press Alt.
Modifying a Connector
Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the connector when you are modifying a
selected connector.
Tip
This option is active only when you click Diagonal Mode (Alt), or
when you press Alt.
Insert/Move Vertex (Alt) - Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the

connector when you are modifying a selected connector.
Tip
You can also activate this option by selecting a connector and

pressing Alt.
Insert Segment Mode (Alt + S) - Inserts line segments into the connector.
This option is available only when you are modifying a connector.
Tip
You can also activate this option by selecting a connector and

pressing Shift.

Split Connector Mode - Splits a selected connector at a point defined by
a mouse click.
Note
The Split Connector button also allows you to identify a symbol

and split the connector based on two points on that symbol.
Merge Connector Mode - Takes two connectors and merges them into
one.
Note
This command only works when two connectors are selected. If

more than two connectors are selected (or no connectors are
selected) the command is disabled on the ribbon.
Clearance - Specifies the amount of space that is maintained between the

connector and the connected element. (Also known as range avoidance.)
Placing a Connector
Switches the connector placement between drawing horizontal and vertical
line segments or drawing diagonal line segments when you place a connector.
Tip
To alternate between drawing horizontal and vertical line segments

or drawing diagonal line segments, you can also press Alt.
Modifying a Connector
Inserts a vertex in a line segment of the connector when you are modifying a
selected connector.
Tip
This option is active only when you click Diagonal Mode (Alt), or
when you press Alt.
Insert Segment Mode (Shift) - Inserts line segments into the connector. This
option is available only when you are modifying a connector.
Tip
This option is active when you click Insert Segment Mode (Shift),
or when you press Shift.
Drawing Doublelines: An Overview

You can use Place Doubleline to place a doubleline as you draw and clean
corners as you place the lines. This command is very useful in drawing an
architectural floor plan for a house or a factory.
Place Doubleline also miters joints and trims as it you draw. It puts endcaps
on single lines.
On the Place Doubleline toolbar, you can define the thickness of the
doubleline and whether you draw the doubleline from the left, right, or center.
Draw a Doubleline
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline
122.
Click the point to begin the doubleline.
123.
Click the point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length
and rotation angle of the doubleline.
124.
Do one of the following:
Right-click to end the doubleline.
To draw a series of connected doublelines, click the points to end

each doubleline segment, and then right-click.
Tip
again.
Notes
PinPoint, in conjunction with Place Doubleline, allows you to

place the doubleline relative to a known point.
You can use driven dimensions to determine distances between

doubleline elements.
the ribbon to place precise lines. You can also use a combination
of graphic and ribbon input.
You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships

between the endpoints of the lines.
If Maintain Relationships is set, you can use Selection to select

portions of the drawing to be moved while the relationships are
maintained.
When you use Point On, you can draw a doubleline tangent to two
curved elements. First, click the curved element, then move the
pointer through the tangent intent zone on the first element. Use
the software to establish a tangent relationship to the other
element.
Tip
If you do not use the tangent intent zone, the line connects to the
elements, but is not tangent to them.
You can use the software to make an end point of a doubleline

tangent or perpendicular to the key point or end point of another
element.
shortcut menu to edit a doubleline.

Place Doubleline Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws a doubleline or a series of connected doublelines. When you draw a
series of lines, the second point of one line is the first point of the next line.
This button is most effective if you use it in a document based on one of the
architectural templates in the AEC category.
Tip
This button appears on a set of fly-out buttons. If you cannot locate

this button, click and hold Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw
toolbar.
Place Doubleline Ribbon

Tip
Ribbon Options
Line Type - Sets the drawing line type.
Left Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from
the left side.
Right Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline from
the right side.

Center Primary Line - Indicates that you are drawing the doubleline
from the center.
Length - Sets the length of a line. This box accepts only positive values.
Angle - Sets the angle of a line. This box accepts positive or negative values.
A positive value is counterclockwise from the x axis, and a negative value is
clockwise from the x axis.
Thickness - Determines the thickness of the doubleline. This thickness is the
distance between the doublelines. To change the width of each of the
individual lines, use Line Width.
Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses: An

Overview
If you want to draw a circle, you can click Circle By Center Point on the
Draw toolbar. Then, you click a point to define the center of the circle. To
place the circle, you click a second point to define the distance of the circle
radius from the first point. You can use other commands on the Draw toolbar
to place arcs, ellipses, and other types of circles.
Besides clicking the pointer, you can also place circles by clicking Circle By
Center Point and then holding the mouse button down and drawing freehand.
After you close the loop, the circle appears.
You can also place a precise circle by clicking Circle By Center Point and
then typing values into the ribbon. After you press Enter, a circle appears
around the pointer. You can then place the defined circle by clicking the point
you want on the drawing sheet.
Draw Circles
Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle By 3 Points
2. Click three points on the circumference of the circle.
Notes
Instead of clicking several different points to draw a circle, you can

draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a
circle.
Instead of clicking to define the circumference of the circle, you

can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of
shortcut menu to edit a circle.
Draw a Circle by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Circle By Center
2. Click the location where you want the center point.

3. Click to define the radius.
Notes
Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type values on the
ribbon bar. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon
input.

draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a
circle.
Draw a Circle Tangent to One or Two

Elements
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Circle
2. Move the pointer along an element until the software recognizes a point on
element relationship or a key point.
3. Click to make the circle tangent.
4. Do one of the following to define the radius:
Move the pointer until the circle is in the position that you want,
and then click.
Move the pointer until the software recognizes a tangent or key

point relationship with another element, and then click.
Notes
Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type values in the
input.


draw a diagonal line, and the software automatically changes it to a
circle.
You can define the radius first to make a circle tangent to the first
element, but not fixed in one position on it.
After you type a value in the Diameter or Radius box, move the
pointer along the element until the software recognizes a point on
element relationship, and then click. The circle is then displayed
dynamically, and you can move it along the element freely until
you make it tangent to another element or key point.

Circle by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)
Draws a circle using three points that define the circumference.

Toolbar)
Draws a circle using a center point and radius.

Draws a circle tangent to one or two elements.
Circle Ribbon
Sets options for placing circles.
Tip
Ribbon Options

Diameter - Sets the diameter of the circle.
Radius - Sets the radius.
Draw Arcs
Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by 3 Points
2. Click the location to begin the sweep of the arc.

Click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc, and then
click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc.
Click the location that you want to end the sweep of the arc, and
then click the location that you want as midpoint of the arc.
Tip
Use the intent zones at the first and second points to specify if the
third point is between the first two or beyond one of the first two.
Notes
Instead of clicking to define the sweep and the midpoint, you can
type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of
graphic and ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can

draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to
an arc.
shortcut menu to edit an arc.
Draw an Arc by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc by Center Point
2. Click the point where you want the center point.

3. Click where you want to begin and end the sweep of the arc.
Tip
You can change the arc direction by moving the pointer.
Notes
Instead of clicking to define the radius, you can type a value on the
input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw an arc, you can

draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to
an arc.
You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the
Draw an Arc Tangent to Two Elements
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Tangent Arc
2. Click an element to which you want the new arc to be tangent. You can
click the end point of a line or curved element, or any point on the
element.

3. Move the pointer through one of the intent zones displayed at the position
you just clicked.
If the command dynamics show an arc perpendicular to the existing element,
move the pointer back to the intent zones and exit through a different
quadrant.
125.
When the command dynamics show an arc that is tangent to the
first element, move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes
the tangent relationship with another element and then click.
Notes
Instead of clicking to define the radius and sweep of the arc, you
can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous
This command starts in line mode by default. If you want to start by drawing
an arc, press Shift+A.
126.
Click the location to begin the line or arc.
127.
Click the location to end the line or arc. You can use intent zones
to specify if you want to draw a tangent or perpendicular arc.
128.
If you are drawing an arc, click a point on the arc to define the
radius.
Tip
After you draw an arc, the command switches back to line mode
automatically. You can switch back to arc mode if you want to
draw another arc.
129.
Continue drawing lines or arcs, pressing Shift+A to switch to arc
mode and Shift+L to switch to line mode.
130.
Right-click to finish.

Tip
again.
Notes
Instead of pressing Shift+L or Shift+A to switch modes, you can

use Line or Arc on the ribbon.
You can make the first line or arc tangent or perpendicular to an

element. First, move the pointer to the element to which you want
to be tangent. Click when the software recognizes a Point On the
relationship. Then use the intent zones to indicate if you want the
line to be tangent or perpendicular.
Instead of clicking locations on the drawing sheet, you can type

values on the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic
and ribbon input.
Using the ribbon boxes to type values does not affect the settings
of the Line or Arc modes.
Draw Connected Lines and Arcs with

FreeSketch
1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeSketch
2. On the ribbon, set the line and arc element types with Element Type, and
clear the other element types.
3. Drag to draw a line or arc. When you stop moving the pointer, do not
release the mouse button.
4. Drag to draw a series of line segments and arcs, continuing to hold the
mouse button as you draw each line and arc.
5. When you have finished, release the mouse button.
Notes
Use Adjust to adjust the geometry you draw.
When Adjust is off, the software interprets the exact movements

of your pointer.
When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal

or vertical and the arcs as tangent to the connected elements.
The software recognizes relationships at the start point and end

point of the line.
You can use the boxes on the ribbon and the commands on the
shortcut menu to edit a line or an arc.
Draw a Curve
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Curve
To draw an open curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to
Open.
To draw a closed curve, set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to
Closed.
131.
Click three or more points on the drawing sheet. These points
represent nodes on the curve.
Tip
You must place at least three points to draw a curve.
132.
Right-click to end the curve.
Notes
You can drag the pointer to draw the shape of a curve. Instead of
clicking several different points to draw a curve, you can draw a
diagonal line and the software automatically changes it to a curve.
The nodes at the start point and end point of a curve are always
smooth.
You can use Insert Node on the shortcut menu to add nodes to a
curve.
You can use Delete Node on the shortcut menu to delete nodes
from a curve.
shortcut menu to edit a curve.
Insert a Node into a Curve

1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Insert Node.
3. Position the pointer at the location to add a node.
133.
Click to insert the node.
Notes
from a curve.
Delete a Node from a Curve
1. Locate the curve and right-click to display the shortcut menu.

2. On the shortcut menu, click Delete Node.
3. Select the node you want to delete.
Notes
You can use the arrows on the ribbon to select a node.
curve.
Change the Curve Type

1. Select the curve.
To change an open curve to a closed curve, set the Curve Type

box on the ribbon to Closed.
To change a closed curve to an open curve, select the node you

want to open, and then set the Curve Type box on the ribbon to
Open.
Tip
If you do not select a node, the software opens the curve at the
node that was automatically activated when you selected the curve.
Notes
curve.
from a curve.
Change the Node Type

1. Select the curve.
2. Select the node you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, click the button for the node type you want to change the
node to: Smooth, Symmetric, or Cusp.
Notes
curve.
from a curve.

Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines an end point. You can
then either define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point
and then a point on the arc. The end points are not tangent or perpendicular to
other elements.

Toolbar)
Draws an arc using three points. The first point defines the center of the arc
and the next two points define the sweep.

Draws an arc tangent or perpendicular to one or two elements. The first point
defines one end of the arc. If you place the first point on a key point of an
element you want the arc to be tangent or perpendicular to, then the second
point defines the sweep.
If you place the first point in free space, then this command works like Arc by
3 Points. In this case the first point defines an end point. You can then either
define a point on the arc and then the end point, or the end point and then a
point on the arc.
Tip
While in dynamics for the second point, you can set the orientation
of the arc by passing the pointer through one of the four quadrants
of the first point's intent zone.
Arc Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Sweep - Sets the sweep angle.
Curve Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws a smooth, open or closed curve. A series of curves can have smooth,
symmetric and cusp nodes. The node at the start point and the node at the end
point of a curve are always smooth.
Curve Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options

Open - Sets the curve type to open.
Closed - Sets the curve type to closed.
Important
The following options appear on the Curve ribbon only when a

curve or curve element is selected.
Previous Node - Activates the previous node on the curve. This button is
available only when you have selected a curve to edit.
Next Node - Activates the next node on the curve. This button is
Symmetric - Gives a curve the same curvature on each side of the
selected node. This button is available only when you have selected a curve to
edit.
Smooth - Gives a curve a different curvature on each side of the selected

node. The start point and end point of a curve is always a smooth node. This
button is available only when you have selected a curve to edit.
Cusp - Makes a curve bend sharply at the selected node. This button is
Draw Ellipses
Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse By 3 Points
2. Click the location to begin the primary axis.
134.
Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the
length of the primary axis and the rotation angle.
135.
Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action
defines the secondary axis.
Tip
The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.
Notes
Instead of clicking to define the primary and secondary axes of an

ellipse, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a
combination of graphic and ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you

can draw a diagonal line, and the software automatically changes it
to an ellipse.
shortcut menu to edit an ellipse.
Draw an Ellipse by Center Point

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Ellipse by Center
2. Click the location for the center of the primary axis.

3. Click the location to end the primary axis. This action defines the length of
the primary axis and the rotation angle.
4. Click a location on one side of the primary axis. This action defines the
secondary axis.
Tip
The primary axis can be shorter than the secondary axis.

Notes
Instead of clicking to define the axes and rotation angle of the

ellipse, you can type values on the ribbon. You can also use a
combination of graphic and ribbon input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw an ellipse, you

can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it
to an ellipse.
shortcut menu to edit an ellipse.

Toolbar)
Draws an ellipse using the center point and two edge points. The center point
and the next point define half the length of the primary axis and the rotation
angle. The last point defines the secondary axis.

Toolbar)
Draws an ellipse using three edge points. The first two points define the length
of the primary axis and the rotation angle. The last point defines the secondary
axis.
Ellipse Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Primary - Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is based

on the primary axis.
Secondary - Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is
perpendicular to the primary axis.
Angle - Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero degrees is
horizontal to the x axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Drawing Squares and Rectangles: An

Overview
To draw a rectangle or square, you click Rectangle on the Draw toolbar.
Then, you click two different points to define the rectangle. If you want to
precisely define the dimensions of the square, you can type values into the
ribbon and press Enter.
If you place dimensions on a rectangle, these are always driven dimensions.

This means that if you edit the dimensional value of the dimension, the
rectangle does not change. You need to edit the values on the rectangle ribbon
to change the rectangle. Also, you cannot ungroup a rectangle into individual
lines.
Tip
If you want to place a rectangle that has driving dimensions, you

need to place four separate lines in the shape of a rectangle by
selecting Line/Arc Continuous on the Draw toolbar.
Draw a Rectangle or Square

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Rectangle
2. Click the location for one corner of the rectangle or square.

3. Click to define the rotation angle and the width of the rectangle or square.
To draw a rectangle, click to define the height.
To draw a square, hold the Shift key, and then click. The
command automatically makes the height equal to the width.
Notes
Instead of clicking to draw the rectangle or square, you can type

values in the Width, Height, and Angle boxes on the ribbon. You
can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon bar input.
Instead of clicking several different points to draw a rectangle, you

can draw a diagonal line and the software automatically changes it
to a rectangle.
shortcut menu to edit a rectangle or square.
If you place dimensions on a rectangle, they are always driven

dimensions.
You cannot ungroup a rectangle into individual lines.
Draw a Rectangle or Square with

FreeSketch
2. On the ribbon, set the rectangle Element Type and clear the other
Element Type buttons.
3. Drag the pointer to sketch the diagonal of the rectangle.
Notes
Adjust allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.

of your pointer.
When Adjust is on, the software interprets the diagonal as a

rectangle or square.
You can use the buttons on the ribbon and shortcut menu to edit a
rectangle or square.

Draws a rectangle using three points. The first two points define the width and
rotation angle of the rectangle, and the third point defines the height. You can
also draw a square with this command.
Rectangle Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Width - Sets the width of the rectangle or square.
Height - Sets the height of the rectangle or square.
Angle - Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to
the x axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
Drawing FreeForm Shapes: An

Overview
As you draw, you can place precisely defined lines, arcs, and circles by
clicking and typing values in the ribbon. You can also use tools to quickly
sketch a design and let the software convert it into a precision drawing.
FreeSketch and FreeForm allow you to quickly place fluid lines and let the
software convert these into precision shapes. FreeSketch draws lines, arcs,
circles, and rectangles, and FreeForm draws curves (splines).
You can begin sketching anywhere on the drawing sheet. You can draw in
free space or use key points or end points of elements as reference points.
How FreeSketch and FreeForm Work

As you drag the pointer, a rough sketch of your design appears. When you
release the pointer, the software recognizes the shapes in your sketch and
turns the sketch into a precise drawing. You can control the accuracy of the
shape recognition using the ribbon options.
FreeSketch and FreeForm Options

FreeSketch Adjust controls how closely FreeSketch interprets mouse
movements. When Adjust On is set, the software interprets all lines as either

horizontal or vertical, and all arcs as tangent. The first figure shows how the
software interprets a rough sketch when Adjust On is set.
The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when
Adjust Off is set.
FreeForm Smoothing controls how closely the software interprets mouse

movements when drawing curves. The first figure shows how FreeForm
interprets a rough sketch when Smoothing On is set.
The next figure shows how the software interprets a rough sketch when
Smoothing Off is set.
Draw a Line with FreeSketch

2. On the ribbon, set the Line element type and clear the other element type
buttons.
3. Drag to draw a line or a series of connected lines.

Notes

of your pointer.
When Adjust is on, the software interprets the lines as horizontal

or vertical when you finish drawing.

point of the line.
When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw
connected lines and arcs.
shortcut menu to edit a line.
Draw a Circle with FreeSketch
Tip
Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog box must be

set to draw circles that are tangent to other elements.
2. On the ribbon, set the Circle element type and clear the other element type
buttons.
3. Drag to sketch the shape of the circle or the diameter of the circle.
Notes

of your pointer.
When Adjust is on, the software interprets your pointer

movements as a circle.
Draw an Arc with FreeSketch
Tip
You must set Point On or End Point on the SmartSketch dialog

box to draw arcs that are tangent to other elements. You can set
these options by clicking SmartSketch Settings on the Tools
menu.
.
2. On the ribbon, set the Arc element type and clear the other element type
buttons.
3. Drag to draw an arc.
Notes

of your pointer.
When Adjust is on, the software interprets arcs as tangent to the

connected elements.

point of the arc.
When you set the Line and Arc element types, you can draw
connected lines and arcs.
Draw a Curve with FreeForm

1. On the Draw toolbar, click FreeForm
2. Drag to draw a curve.

Notes
Smooth allows the software to adjust the geometry that you draw.
When Smooth is off, the software interprets the exact movements

of your pointer.
When Smooth is on, the software creates smooth, symmetric, or

cusp curves.
You can begin or end your drawing using the end point or key
point of an element.
curve.
from a curve.
shortcut menu to edit a curve.

Draws lines, arcs, rectangles, and circles by converting a sketch into a
precision drawing. You can specify which of these elements you want to draw
using the ribbon.
FreeSketch Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Adjust On - Draws all lines recognized in the rough sketch as horizontal
or vertical in the precision drawing, and draws all arcs recognized in the rough
sketch as tangent in the precision drawing.
Adjust Off - Does not adjust the orientation of lines and arcs in your
rough sketch.
Line - Draws lines in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the
rough sketch.
Arc - Draws arcs in the precision drawing by recognizing them in the
rough sketch.

Circle - Draws circles in the precision drawing by recognizing them in
the rough sketch.
Rectangle - Draw rectangles in the precision drawing by recognizing
them in the rough sketch.
FreeForm Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws freeform curves, or splines.
FreeForm Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Smoothing On - Draws cusp, smooth, and symmetric curves in the
precision drawing by recognizing these shapes in the rough sketch.
Smoothing Off - Draws elements that closely resemble the movements
of your pointer, without smoothing them into cusp, smooth, and symmetric
curves.
Creating Isometric Drawings: An

Overview
If you want to create 2D drawings that represent 3D elements, such as cubes,
you can create an isometric drawing. An isometric drawing is not a true 3D
drawing, because you cannot view the drawing in perspective or from another
angle. However, you can create a 3D effect by aligning the elements and
objects in a drawing along three major axes.
The software supplies several tools to create these types of documents:
Isometric Rectangle
Isometric Circle
Isometric Line
Segmented Styles button

Tip
To access these commands, you must place them on a toolbar or

menu with Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of
the Customize dialog box, click Draw.
You can also access dimension styles that you configure to appear at an angle
for isometric drawings. These styles are available for any type of dimension,
except for chained dimensions and angular dimensions. You can create a
document based on one of the Technical Drawing templates and access these
dimension styles. Special fonts for isometric drawings are also available in
any template. These fonts are displayed at an angle. The fonts are stored in a
resource file in the following location: <Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH\TEMPLATE\STYLES\ISOFONTS.RSC. You must
set the location for these fonts on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog
box.
Draw an Isometric Circle
Tip
To access this command, you must place the command on a

toolbar or menu usingCustomize on the Tools menu. On the
Toolbars tab of the Customize dialog box, click Draw.
1. Click Isometric Circle
2. Click a point to define the center point of the isometric circle.

3. Click a second point to complete the circle.
Caution
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the circle.

Notes
You can set the plane on which to place the circle by setting
Draw an Isometric Line

Tip
To access this command, you must place it on a toolbar or menu

with Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the
Customize dialog box, click Draw.
1. Click Isometric Line
2. Click a point to start the line.

3. Click a point to complete the line.
Caution
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the line.

Notes
You can set the angle for placing the line by setting options on the
ribbon bar.
Draw an Isometric Rectangle
Tip

using Customize on the Tools menu. On the Toolbars tab of the
1. Click Isometric Rectangle
Caution
To confirm that the isometric rectangle consists of lines that

remain connected when you relocate them using the Select Tool
command, turn on Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If
this option is not on, Isometric Rectangle creates a rectangle
composed of four separate lines that do not stay connected if you
move each line.

136.
Click a point to start defining the rectangle base.
137.
Click a second point to complete the rectangle base.
138.
Click a third point to complete the rectangle.
Caution
You cannot drag the pointer to draw the rectangle.

Notes
To set the plane on which to place the rectangle, you can set

Isometric Circle Command
Allows you to draw an isometric circle. You can use this button to create 2D
circles that look like 3D circles.
Tip

Isometric Circle Ribbon

Ribbon Options
Top - Allows you to draw the circle on the top plane.
Left - Allows you to draw the circle on the left plane.
Right - Allows you to draw the circle on the right plane.
Diameter - Sets the diameter of the isometric circle.

Radius - Defines the radius of the isometric circle.
Isometric Line Command

Allows you to draw lines that appear at 30, 60, or 90 degrees in an isometric
drawing. This command creates 2D lines that look like they are in a 3D plane.
Tip

Isometric Line Ribbon

Ribbon Options
Length - Sets the length of the isometric line.
Angle - Sets the angle of the isometric line.
Isometric Rectangle Command

Allows you to draw an isometric rectangle. You can use this command to
create 2D rectangles that look like 3D rectangles.
Tip

Isometric Rectangle Ribbon

Ribbon Options

Top - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the top plane.
Left - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the left plane.
Right - Allows you to draw the rectangle on the right plane.
Width - Sets the width of the isometric rectangle.

Height - Sets the height of the isometric rectangle.
Selecting, Moving, & Copying Elements: An Overview
Selecting, Moving, & Copying

Elements: An Overview
SmartSketch provides several simple methods for utilizing existing elements.
You can quickly move or copy an existing element or group of elements onto
a drawing sheet. Moving or copying elements saves you time by eliminating
the need to re-create information, as well as help you maintain accurate
graphic data throughout a project.
Selecting Elements
You can select individual or multiple elements using the Select Tool on the
Draw toolbar. When you click the Select Tool, the pointer changes to an
arrow with a locate zone indicator at the end. As you move the pointer, any
element that the locate zone passes over is displayed in the highlight color.
When an element is highlighted you can click to select it.
You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool
and then holding the Shift or Ctrl key as you click the elements you want to
select. Or, you can click the Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence
elements.
You can also use a tool called PickQuick to select elements that overlap. To
use it, you should move the Select Tool pointer over the elements, and pause
the mouse. When an ellipsis displays you can left-click or right-click to
display the number of selectable elements. You can move the pointer over the
numbers; when the element that you want highlights, you can click on the
corresponding number to select it.
Moving Elements
SmartSketch provides several methods for moving elements. You can drag an
element with the Select Tool or specify precision points with Move on the
Change toolbar. You can also use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an
element a precise distance in X and Y relative to a known position on your
drawing.
Copying Elements
You can copy elements with one of many methods:
You can select an object and click Copy on the Main toolbar. The
selected item is placed on the Clipboard. Then, when you click
Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on the drawing sheet.
The element will not change from its original form.
You can copy one or more elements by clicking the Select Tool on

the Draw toolbar. After the pointer changes to show that the
element can be copied, hold the Ctrl key and drag the copy to its
new location.
Formatting, such as line weight, line color, and line style, can be
copied from selected objects and applied to other objects as they
are selected using Format Painter on the Main toolbar.
You can make several copies of elements that are the same by
selecting the element and clicking Rectangular Pattern or
Circular Pattern on the Change toolbar.
You can also click Offset, Move, Scale, or Rotate on the Change
toolbar to create copies.
Cutting and Deleting Elements

You can cut an element by clicking Cut on the Main toolbar. The element is
placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to place the element in the
current document or into other documents.
Important
If you do not Paste the element after cutting, it will be

permanently removed from the document.
You can permanently remove an element by selecting the element and

pressing Delete on your keyboard. You can also permanently remove an
element by clicking Edit on the Main toolbar and then selecting Delete.
Selecting Elements: An Overview

To select an element, you must use Select Tool at the top of the Draw toolbar.
You can select lines, arcs, or annotations, such as dimensions or fills. You can
also select element groups, embedded or linked objects, symbols, or handles
on elements that indicate relationships.
Selecting Single Elements

To select an element, you can click the Select Tool on the Draw toolbar
When you click Select Tool, the pointer changes to an arrow with a locate
zone indicator at the end. As you move the pointer, any element that the locate
zone passes over is displayed in the highlight color. When an element is
highlighted, you can click
to select it.
When you select an individual element, the following things happen:
The element changes to the selection color. You can change the
selection color using Options on the Tools menu.
The element's handles are displayed. Handles are solid squares at

significant positions on a selected element, such as end points and
center points. Handles allow you to directly modify the element
drag a handle to change the element's shape. Although you can
select more than one element at a time, only one element can have
handles at a time.
The element's important properties are displayed on a ribbon.
If the element is linked or embedded into the current document,

selecting it allows you to double-click it for editing.
When you select multiple elements or grouped elements, they change to the
selection color.
Selecting Multiple Elements

You can select more than one element at a time by clicking the Select Tool
and then holding the Shift or Ctrl key as you click the elements you want to
select. Or, you can click the Select Tool and then drag the mouse to fence
elements.
You can use the ribbon to select whether you want only elements completely
enclosed by the fence to be selected or any element that is partly enclosed by
the fence. Many manipulation commands, like delete, move, copy, and rotate,

act upon all elements in the selection set.
Selecting an Element That Overlaps Other Elements

If you want to select an element that overlaps other elements, and you cannot
highlight the element you want by moving the pointer over it, you can use a
tool called PickQuick. To use it, you should move the pointer over the
elements and pause the mouse. When the software displays an ellipsis, or
three small circles, by the pointer, you can left-click or right-click to display a
small toolbar that shows the number of selectable elements. You can move the
pointer over the numbers; and, when the element that you want highlights, you
can click on the corresponding number to select it.
Deselecting Elements
To deselect an element or group of elements, you can click any point on the
drawing sheet.
Select an Element
1. On the Main toolbar, click Select Tool.
To select one element, click it.
To select more than one element hold the Shift or Ctrl key and
click each element.
To select more than one element at once, drag to fence the objects.
To select one of several overlapping elements, use PickQuick
Tip
You can also right-click and click Select All.
To select an element with PickQuick

PickQuick helps you to select elements that overlap each other.
1. Position the pointer over the element you want to select and pause the
pointer there.
139.
When the pointer changes to an ellipsis (three dots), click. The
software displays the PickQuick toolbar near the pointer, with a button for

each selectable element.
140.
Move the pointer over PickQuick without clicking to highlight the
corresponding elements.
141.
When the element you want to select is highlighted, click the
corresponding button on the PickQuick toolbar.
To clear a selection
Click in free space.
Right-click in free space.
Select another element without holding the Shift or Ctrl key.
To clear the selection of one element and leave other elements selected, click
the element while holding the Shift key.
Notes
When the Select Tool is active, selectable elements highlight as


you pass the pointer over them. When the element you want to
select is highlighted, click to select it.
You can use the ribbon commands to set element selection options.
You can change the element highlight and selection colors with
Options on the Tools menu.
Undo Actions
To undo the most recent action, on the Main toolbar, click Undo
.
To undo more than one action, click the down arrow next to Undo
on the Main toolbar, and select the actions you want to undo.
Tip
You can do this action only if you have placed Undo List on the
Main toolbar. You can place the button by clicking Customize on
the Tools menu.
Notes
You cannot restore broken links with Undo.
Redo Actions
To redo the most recent action, on the Main toolbar, click Redo
.
To redo more than one action, click the down arrow next to Redo
on the Main toolbar, and select the actions you want to undo or
redo.
Tip
You can do this action only if you have placed Redo List on the
Main toolbar. You can place the button by clicking Customize on
the Tools menu.

Select Tool (Draw Toolbar)
Changes the pointer to the arrow-shaped selection pointer so that you can
select, modify, and manipulate elements. The circle at the end of the pointer
arrow is the locate zone.
Select Tool Ribbon

The default selection ribbon is displayed only when nothing is selected. Once
you select an object, the selection ribbon is replaced with a ribbon bar for
editing the selected object.
Tip
Ribbon Options
Inside - Specifies that elements inside the fence are selected.
Overlapping - Specifies that elements overlapped by the fence are
selected, as well as elements inside the fence.
Top Down - Specifies that groups of elements are located as opposed to
individual elements in a group.
Bottom Up - Specifies that individual elements in a group are located as
opposed to the whole group.
Expand - Displays another ribbon depending on the items that
you selected on the drawing sheet. This button appears when you select ten or
more items on the drawing sheet. When you click it, another ribbon appears.
The options that appear depend on the types of elements that you selected. For
example, if you select eleven lines, then the Line ribbon appears. If you select
several types of items, then only the common properties for those types of
elements appear on the Select Tool ribbon. For example, if you select nine

lines and a circle, then the ribbon displays the Style, Line Type, Width, and
Color options. For more information about the options that appear, see the
Help topic for the selected element's ribbon.
If the items that you selected have no common properties, then no options will
appear if you click Expand. For example, if you select a dimension and ten
lines and then click Expand, a ribbon does not appear.
Select All Command (Edit Menu)

Selects all visible elements in a window.
Tip
You can also access this command when you position the pointer
in the document and right-click.

Reverses an action. You can change the number of actions that can be undone
using Options. You then click the General tab on the Options dialog box.
Tip
You can place Undo List or Redo List on the Main toolbar by
clicking Customize on the Tools menu.
Redo Command (Edit Menu)

Repeats the most recent action taken or reverses the most recent Undo.
Tip
You can place Undo List or Redo List on the Main toolbar by
clicking Customize on the Tools menu.
Moving Elements: An Overview

You can move elements on the drawing sheet with one of several methods:
Dragging elements with the Select Tool.
Specifying precision points with Move on the Change toolbar.

Tip
You can also click Scale and Rotate on the Change toolbar to
move elements.
Using the Select Tool

To move an element, you must first select it with Select Tool on the Draw
toolbar. You can drag the selected element to move it without changing its
shape.
Tip
The element's handles do not need to be displayed for you to move

it. If they are displayed, and you want to move the element and not
modify it, position the pointer so it is not over a handle.
You can move an element with precision if you use the relationships
indicators.

When you modify a drawing, elements with maintained relationships
automatically update to honor the relationship. For example, if you move an
element that shares a maintained parallel relationship with another element,
the other element moves as needed to remain parallel. If a line and an arc
share a maintained tangent relationship, they remain tangent when either is
modified.
Moving Elements by Specifying Precision Points

You can move a line that shares a tangent relationship with an arc if you select
the line and click Move on the Change toolbar. As you move the line, the line
moves without maintaining the relationship with the arc. You can then specify
a from point and a to point by clicking on the drawing sheet or by entering
values in the ribbon. You can move any element by specifying precision
points with Move.
Move an Element
1. Select one or more elements.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Move
142.
If you want to copy the elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
143.
Click to define the from point.
144.
Click to define the to point. After the elements move, the
relationships with other elements are not maintained.
Notes
You can click Move before you select elements to move.
You can use drag to move elements. Select the elements, then drag
them to their new location and drop.
Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy elements, you can

hold Ctrl while you click to position the elements.
You can use the ribbon boxes to specify the to point. The values
are relative distances along the x and y axes. You must click to
specify to which quadrant you want to move or copy the selection
set.
When you move or copy elements, the to point becomes the next
from point.
The software maintains relationships within the select set if they

are still applicable after you have moved or copied the elements.
You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom,

Fit, and Pan, while you are using Move.
When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you
to Move at the point where you left off.
Move an Element with the Select Tool

2. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's
handles.
3. Drag the element to its new position.
To move an element with precision

2. Position the pointer over the element you want to move, at a location
where the software recognizes a key point.
3. Begin to drag the element.
4. Release the element when the software recognizes the key point of another
element, or a relationship between the element you are moving and
another element.
Notes
If you want to move a selected element, make sure to position the

pointer away from any of the element's handles. Dragging a handle
modifies the element instead of moving it.
Move an Element Precisely

You can use PinPoint with the Select Tool to move an element a precise
distance in X and Y relative to a known position in your drawing.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool
145.
On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint
146.
Click the location that you want for the PinPoint target point to be.
147.
Using the Select tool, point to the element that you want to move.
Relationship indicators appear next to the pointer to indicate keypoints on
the element.
148.
When the relationship indicators identify the key point that you
want, drag the element. PinPoint displays the distance between the pointer
and the reference point as you drag.
149.
Release the mouse button when the element is where you want it.

Moves elements from one location to another. You can specify the locations
by clicking on the drawing sheet or by entering values in the ribbon. You can
move one or more elements at a time, and you can move element groups.
Move Ribbon
Specifies the from point and to point when you move objects or elements.
Tip
Ribbon Options
the Y option.
the X option.
Copy - Copies the elements in the selection set.
Step Value - Increments or decrements the value displayed in the ribbon
boxes. For example, typing a step value of 0.25 and moving the pointer away
from the from point would increment the distance from 0.25 to 0.5, 0.75, and
so forth.
Copying and Pasting Elements: An

Overview
You can copy any element, dimension, or object by selecting it and clicking
Copy on the Main toolbar. Copying places the selected item on the
Clipboard. When you click Paste on the Main toolbar, the item is placed on
the drawing sheet.
You can also copy an element with the Select Tool. You click the Select Tool
on the Draw toolbar, select the element, and press Ctrl as you drag the
element across the drawing sheet. You can also copy several selected elements
in the same manner.
When you copy elements that have relationships, the relationships are copied
and retained when possible. For example, if you make a copy of two related
lines, the relationship is also copied. However, if you copy one of two lines
that are related to each other, the relationship is not copied.
Tip
You can also click Offset, Move, Scale, or Rotate on the Change toolbar
to create copies.
Copy an Element
1. Select an element.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Copy
Notes
After you copy an element and its relationships, they are placed on
the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste them into the
current document, or into other documents.
When you paste the element, it is pasted on top of the element you
copied. To see the pasted element, you must drag it.
Copy an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool

3. Position the pointer over the element, but not over any of the element's
handles. The pointer changes to show that the element can now be copied.

4. Hold the Ctrl key and drag the copy to its new location.
Copy a Format
1. Click the object with the formatting you want to copy.
2. Click the Format Painter button
3. Click another object to apply the new formatting.

Notes
If a connector with a line terminator is selected as the object from

which to copy, the terminator will be added to any other linear
geometry selected with the Format Painter. This is the only way
to apply terminators to linear geometry that is not a connector.
You can apply format changes to multiple objects by dragging a

fence around the desired objects.
When copying a format from text to geometry, or vice versa, only

the color is applied.
Paste an Element
You can place elements on the Clipboard with Copy or Cut, then paste the
elements into the current document or another document.
1. Open the document in which you want to paste the contents of the
Clipboard.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Paste
Tip
You can also right-click and click the Paste command.

Notes
The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use

Copy or Cut again.
You cannot run Paste if the Clipboard is empty.
You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste.
Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste.
Paste an Element with a Different Format

1. Cut or copy the element you want to paste.
2. Click Edit > Paste Special.
3. To embed the information, click Paste.
4. To link the information, click Paste Link.
5. In the As box, select the format that you want to use to paste the
information
6. To paste the information into the lower left corner of the current
document, click OK.
Notes
The contents of the Clipboard remain unchanged until you use

Paste Special again.
You cannot run Paste Special if the Clipboard is empty.
If you select an element as the insertion point and that element

cannot be replaced, the Clipboard contents are not pasted at the
insertion point.
You can use Undo to reverse the results of Paste Special.
You can use Redo to repeatedly paste the contents of the

Clipboard at the insertion point.
If the Clipboard contains data, and you have selected data in the
document, the software replaces the selected data with the contents
of the Clipboard.
Pasted text and elements remain selected after you use Paste
Special.
Offset Elements
You can select elements to be offset before you use Offset. Or you can select
Offset before you select the elements.
1. On the Change toolbar, click Offset
2. Click the element or elements that you want to offset.

3. In the Step Distance box on the ribbon, type the distance that you want to
offset the selected elements.
4. Click to define the direction in which you want to offset the elements.
Notes
If the Change toolbar is not displayed, click Change on the Main

toolbar.
To select a chain of connected elements, select Offset Chain.

Copies selected elements and their associated relationships to the Clipboard.
When you use this command, it replaces the previous contents of the
Clipboard with the new contents.
When you copy more than one element at a time, all relationships shared
among the elements are also copied. However, when you copy an element that
shares a relationship with an element that you are not copying, the relationship
is not copied.
Format Painter Command (Main Toolbar)

Copies formatting, such as line weight, color and line style, from a selected
object and applies it to other objects as they are selected. The two objects do
not have to be similar.
Format Painter will format all objects including text, dimensions, and groups;
however, it will not re-format symbols
Paste Command (Edit Menu)

Inserts the Clipboard contents at the same coordinates the elements had in the
source document. The command is not available if the Clipboard is empty.
Paste Special Command (Edit Menu)

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format.
Paste Special Dialog Box

Inserts the Clipboard contents into a document using a selected format.
Tip
To get Help for various items on the dialog box, click the Question
in the upper right corner of the dialog box and click the
Mark
control that you want information about.
Offset Command
Draws an offset copy of an element or a set of contiguous elements. This
command copies elements while maintaining characteristics such as the angle
of lines and the center point of arcs and circles.
Offset copies the original element at a specified distance. Offsetting outside
the perimeter of the original element creates a larger element. Offsetting
inside the perimeter of the original element creates a smaller element.
Elements are transitioned as necessary during the offset operation.
Offset Ribbon
Ribbon Options
Select Chain - Selects a chain of continuous elements. If this option is
not selected, Offset selects only an individual element.

Step Distance - Sets the distance from the base element to the offset copy.
Cumulative Offset - Sets the total distance of the current offset graphic
element from the original graphic element.
The following graphic illustrates the difference between step distance (A) and
cumulative offset (B).
Creating Patterns: An Overview

Patterns are useful if you want to create several elements quickly that are the
same without using several commands. You can create patterns by selecting
one or more elements and making several copies of it with Rectangular
Pattern or Circular Pattern on the Change toolbar.
To modify individual members of the pattern, you can select an individual

member of the pattern and change it the way you would any other element.
Draw a Circular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.
150.
On the Change toolbar, click Circular Pattern
151.
Click where you want the center of the circular pattern to be.
152.
Use the ribbon boxes and the Circular Pattern Options dialog
box to define other characteristics of the pattern, such as the number of
pattern members and rows.
153.
To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.
Notes
If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can click Undo on
the Main toolbar.
Draw a Rectangular Pattern

1. Select one or more elements to pattern.

154.
On the Change toolbar, click Rectangular Pattern
155.
To define a rectangular area for the pattern, click Pattern Options
on the ribbon.
156.
On the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box, select Fit to
Rectangle.
Tip
Use the ribbon boxes and the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog
box to define other characteristics of the pattern, such as the
number of pattern members and rows.
On the drawing sheet, click to identify one corner of the pattern

and click to identify the opposite corner of the pattern.
To finish creating the pattern, click Finish on the ribbon.
Notes
If you do not like the results of the pattern, you can click Undo on
the Main toolbar.

Circular Pattern Command (Change
Toolbar)
Arranges selected elements in a circular pattern on the drawing sheet.
Circular Pattern Ribbon

Tip
over an option and read the Tool Tip.
Ribbon Options
Options - Displays the Circular Pattern Options dialog box.
Count - Sets the number of copies in the pattern.
Rows - Sets the number of arc-shaped rows in the pattern. This option is
available only when Rows on the Circular Pattern Options dialog box is set
to Multiple Inward or Multiple Outward.
Angle - Sets the angle of the pattern. This box sets the sweep angle between
pattern members when Pattern Control on the Circular Pattern Options
dialog box is set to Incremental Array. This box also sets the total sweep
angle when Pattern Control is set to Fit To Arc.
Row Spacing - Sets the distance between adjacent arc-shaped rows in the
pattern, as measured from the bottom of one row to the bottom of the next.
The bottom is the side closest to the center point of the circular pattern.
Circular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options
Pattern Control - Specifies how the pattern is constructed.

Incremental Array - Draws a pattern with a set sweep angle between
members.
Fit To Arc - Draws a pattern by evenly spacing members along an arc.
Rows - Controls how pattern rows are arranged.
Single Row - Draws a single row of pattern members.
Multiple Inward - Draws multiple rows, each one closer to the pattern center
than the last.
Multiple Outward - Draws multiple rows, each one farther away from the
pattern center than the last.

Toolbar)
Copies selected elements in a rectangular pattern on the drawing sheet.
Rectangular Pattern Ribbon

Tip
Ribbon Options
Options - Displays the Rectangular Pattern Options dialog box.
X Count - Sets the number of pattern members along the x axis of the pattern
rectangle.
Y Count - Sets the number of pattern members along the y axis of the pattern
rectangle.
X Offset - Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured
along the x axis of the pattern rectangle.
Y Offset - Sets the distance between adjacent rows in the pattern, measured
along the y axis of the pattern rectangle.

Angle - Sets the rotation angle of the pattern rectangle.
Finish - Completes the pattern. When you click this button, the pattern is
created on the drawing sheet and you can select other elements.
Rectangular Pattern Options Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options
Pattern Control - Specifies how the pattern is constructed.
Incremental ArrayDraws a pattern with a set offset between members.
Fit To RectangleDraws a pattern by evenly spacing members along the x
and y axes of the pattern rectangle.
Stagger - Controls whether pattern members are arranged in a straight matrix,
or whether every other row or column is offset from its default position.
Options are None, for a straight matrix, Rows, to offset alternate pattern rows,
and Columns, to offset alternate pattern columns.
Stagger - Sets the row or column stagger distance to the specified distance.
Stagger = 1/2 Offset - Sets the row or column stagger distance to half the X
Offset or Y Offset value.
Include Last Column - Controls whether to include the last staggered column
in the pattern or to exclude the last column.
Cutting or Deleting Elements: An

Overview
You can delete elements by selecting them and clicking Cut on the Main
toolbar or by pressing Delete. Clicking Cut allows you to paste the element in
another location. Pressing Delete removes the element permanently.
Relationships that are no longer applicable after you delete an element are
automatically deleted. For example, if you delete one of a pair of parallel
lines, the parallel relationship is deleted from the remaining line.
Cut an Element
2. On the Main toolbar, click Cut
Notes
After you cut an element and its relationships from a document,

they are placed on the Clipboard. You can then use Paste to paste
them into the current document, or into other documents.
When relationships exist between elements, cutting the elements

from a document deletes the relationships. If there is a relationship
between a selected element and an unselected element, you can do
one of the following:
Cut and paste only the selected element.
Cut and paste both elements and their relationship.
Cut and paste only the selected element and the relationship, then
reconnect the relationship to another element.
Delete an Element

2. Click Edit > Delete or press Delete.
Tip
When you delete an element and its relationships, the

relationships are not pasted to the Clipboard and cannot be
reinserted. However, you can restore an element and its
relationships by immediately using Undo.

Cut Command (Edit Menu)
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard.
The selected elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.

Deletes the selected element and any relationships and dimensions that have
been placed on it. You cannot reinsert or paste elements deleted with this
command. However, you can retrieve the data by immediately clicking Undo.
Adding Text to Documents: An Overview
Adding Text to Documents: An

Overview
You can add text to documents using different types of tools:
Annotations, such as text boxes and balloons.
Labels, such as text labels and SmartLabels.
You also can add text using a drag-and-drop operation. For example, you can
drag an Excel spreadsheet to a document to create a bill of materials.
Placing Annotations: An Overview

An essential part of the drawing process is adding text, notes, and annotations.
Annotations are text and graphics that give information about a drawing. You
can add this information quickly and easily with the text and annotation
commands in the software.
To place annotations in a document, you can click one of the following
buttons:
Text Box on the Draw toolbar
Balloon on the Dimension toolbar
Tip
For more information about adding associative text to a document,
click Related Topics.
Annotations with Leaders

When you create a balloon, you can place it with a leader by setting options
on the ribbon. The leader can point to another element or be placed in free
space. Annotations with leaders have the following components:
(A) Leader line

(B) Break line

(C) Terminator
(D) Annotation
You can manipulate the annotation by selecting the leader and moving parts of
it. You can control the display of a leader break line and terminator and insert
or delete vertices on a leader.
Adding Leaders
You can add a leader to an annotation using Leader. An annotation can have
more than one leader. The terminator end of the annotation can point to an
element or be placed in free space. The annotation end of a new leader must
connect to an annotation or the leader on an annotation.
You can create a callout by placing a text box and adding a leader to it with
Leader.
Annotations and Associations

Annotations can be associative or non-associative. An associative annotation
moves when its associated element moves. Text boxes differ from the other
annotations in that they are always non-associative.
If you attach the terminator of a leader to an element, the annotation moves
with the element.
If you point the terminator of a leader to free space, the annotation is not
associative to any element in the drawing. To make an annotation associative,
you can select the terminator of the leader and drag it to an element.
Formatting Annotations
You can format an annotation several ways. If you want several annotations to
look the same, you can apply a style by selecting it on the ribbon. You can
apply dimension styles to balloons, but not text boxes. You can apply text
styles to text boxes.
Tip
If you want to format an existing balloon, you must click the

balloon leader to select the balloon. Then, you can change the
formats of the balloon.
If you want annotations to look unique, you can select an annotation and edit
its properties with the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.
Place a Text Box

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Text Box
2. To place a text box, drag to define the location and size of the text box. To
see the text box, begin typing text.
When you place text by this method, the width measures exactly between the
two points. Text is wrapped, if necessary.
The height measures at least the height between the two points. If necessary,
the height of the text box increases to fit all of the text.
Notes
To place a text box, you can also click a point, and begin typing
text.
When you place text by this method, the height and width are set to Auto

mode. The size of the text box increases automatically to contain all of the
text. The text does not wrap.
You can also place a text box by double-clicking any element. A

blinking pointer appears below or in the center of the element.
You can press Enter to create a new line in a text box.
When you are in edit mode, a border appears around the text box.
To place a callout, you can add a leader to the text box using
Leader on the Dimension toolbar.
Place a Balloon
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Balloon
2. On the ribbon, set the options you want. In the Balloon Text box, type the
text that you want to appear in the balloon.
3. To place a balloon with a leader, click where you want to place the
terminator end of the leader. The terminator end can be on an element or a
point in free space.
157.
Click where you want to place the balloon end of the leader.
Notes
To place a balloon without a leader, click on an element that you

want to attach the balloon to. You can also click a point in free
space.
Move an Annotation
1. Select an annotation to display its handles. As you move the pointer over
the parts of the annotation, the pointer changes to show whether you are
on a part of the annotation or a handle.
158.
Click a handle and drag the leader or annotation to its new
location.
159.
The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to
move an annotation. The following descriptions explain how to move
specific parts of an annotation.
To move a terminator
When a terminator is connected to an element, drag the terminator

handle to a new location along the element. If you drag the handle
off the end of an open element, such as a line, an extension line
automatically appears. The annotation and break line do not move.
When a terminator is connected to an element, disconnect the

terminator by holding the Alt key while you drag the terminator
handle. The terminator type automatically changes to the active
setting for a terminator in free space.
To reconnect a terminator to an element, drag the terminator

handle to an element. The terminator type automatically changes to
the active setting for a terminator connected to an element.
To move a leader line
Click a leader line and then drag the break line of a leader. The
break line and annotation move and the leader line changes in
length, but not orientation.
If a leader was placed with the Leader command, you can move
the leader away from the annotation and attach it to another
annotation or element. Click the leader line and then drag the
handle to the annotation or leader that you want to connect to.
To move a handle
1. Click a leader line and do one of the following:
Drag the handle closest to the annotation to move the annotation.
Drag the handle on a break line to move the leader line and
annotation.
Drag a vertex handle to a new location.
Move a Text Box
Drag the text box to the location that you want.

Notes
If handles of the text box are displayed, drag the highlighted border
of the text box (or anywhere inside of the text box) to move it
dragging one of the solid square handles resizes it.
Delete Text in a Text Box

1. Select the text that you want to delete in the text box.

2. Press Delete on the keyboard.
Use Spell Checker

1. Click Tools > Spelling.
The Spelling dialog box appears when the first word not found in the
Microsoft Word main dictionary is found. The Suggestions box lists
recommended replacements.
To leave the word unchanged:
Click Ignore or click Ignore All.
To change the word not found:
If necessary, click the desired word in the Suggestions list.
Click Change or Change All.

Tip
You can also type your replacement text in the Not in Dictionary
box and then click Change or Change All.
To leave the word unchanged, and add it to the custom dictionary:
Click Add.
To leave the word unchanged and add it to the AutoCorrect list:

1. Click AutoCorrect.
2. Click OK when notified that the spell check is complete.
Tips
You can click Cancel to close the spell checker at any time.
If you need information on any of the spell checking options, click

to display Microsoft Word Help.
Important
This feature requires Microsoft Word 2000; otherwise, the spelling

option is disabled.
Clicking the Options button in the Spelling dialog box will open
the Spelling and Grammar dialog box; however, you can only
edit the options for specifying the custom dictionary or the rules
Word uses to check spelling. Word's grammar-check capabilities

are not functional in SmartSketch documents.
Notes
If no spelling errors are found, the Spelling dialog box will not
display.
The Spell Checker will check text boxes and double-click labels. It
does not check SmartLabels, text embedded in symbols, or text
inside a leader.
Apply a Border to a Text Box

1. Select the text box to which you want to apply a border.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Properties.
3. On the Border and Fill tab of the Text Box Properties dialog box, set the
options for the type of border that you want.
Notes
You can also apply a border by selecting a text box and clicking
Border on the ribbon.
To see a text box border that is greater than 2 mm, set Display As
Printed on the View tab of the Options dialog box.
Edit a Text Box

1. Select the text box that you want to edit.
2. Double-click the box.
3. Point to the location to edit the text and type the text that you want.
Resize a Text Box

1. Click a text box to display its handles.
2. Drag a handle until the text box is the size you want.
Tip
You cannot drag hollow handles.
Insert a Font Character into a Text Box

1. On the Draw toolbar, click the Text Box button and place a text box

2. On the Dimension toolbar, click Character Map
3. On the font character chart, click the character you want to insert.
4. Click Select.
5. Continue to click the characters you want, clicking Select after you click
each character.
6. On the Unicode Character Map dialog box, click Copy to copy the
characters to the Clipboard.
7. Click inside the text box where you want to paste the characters.
8. Press Ctrl-V to paste.
Add a Leader
1. On the Dimensions toolbar, click Leader
2. Click a text box, callout, or another leader to place the annotation end of
the leader.
160.
Click any element to place the terminator end of the leader, or
click in free space.
Notes
You can place either end of a leader first.
After you place one end of the leader, the command only allows
you to select an element that is valid for placing the other end of

the leader. For example, if you add the annotation end of the leader
to a text box, the command then allows you to select only elements
that are valid for placing the terminator end of a leader. You could
select a circle, but not another text box.
If you want to add a leader to a balloon, you can set an option on

the Balloon ribbon. To select an existing balloon, you must click
the leader of the balloon.
Insert a Vertex in a Leader
1. Select a leader to display its handles. As you move the pointer over the
leader, the pointer changes to show whether you are on a leader or a
handle.
161.
Position the pointer over the leader where you want to insert a
vertex.
162.
Hold the Alt key and click.
163.
Drag the handle to position the new vertex.
Notes
You cannot insert a vertex on the horizontal break line of a leader.
Delete a Vertex from a Leader

1. Select the leader that has the vertex you want to delete. This displays its
handles. As you move the pointer over the leader, the pointer changes to
show whether you are on a leader or a handle.
164.
Position the pointer over the vertex you want to delete.
165.
Hold the Alt key and click the handle on the vertex.

Places a text box in a document.
You can find this command in the following locations:
Draw toolbar
Schematic toolbar
Text Box Ribbon

Formats a text box.
Tip
Ribbon Options
Style - Lists and applies the available styles.
Font - Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font Size - Applies a text size.
Text Color - Sets the color of the font.
Bold - Makes text bold.
Italic - Italicizes text.
Underline - Underlines text.

Paragraph Alignment - Positions the paragraph to the left, center, or
right of the text area edges in edit mode.
Tip
You can also align the paragraph after you select text.
Border - Displays three options for setting borders. These options allow
you to either display no border, display a border, or display a border with a
shadow.
More - Displays more options on the ribbon.
Height - Sets the height of the text box.
Width - Sets the width of the text box.
Notes
If you select text in the text box, Height and Width are not
available because the text is driving the dimension.
If you select a text box and Height is not available, the text is
driving Height with Auto Save. The same is true for Width.
If you place a text box with a single point, both Height and Width
are not available. If you drag a text box, Width is not available.
Angle - Sets the angle of the text box.

Horizontal Text Orientation - Specifies that the text is oriented
horizontally on or in the document.
Vertical Text Orientation - Specifies that the text is oriented vertically
on or in the document.
Left To Right - Specifies that the characters in a text box are displayed
from left to right, as you would see in an English paragraph.
Right To Left - Specifies that the characters in a text box are displayed
from right to left, as you would see in an Arabic or Japanese paragraph.
Text Box Properties Dialog Box

Formats the font, paragraph, borders, or shading of a text box.
Border and Fill Tab

Tab Options
Border - Specifies the appearance of a border around a text box.
Show Border - Displays the outline of the text box.
Line Style - Sets the linestyle for the text box.
Border Color - Sets the color of the border.
Line Width - Specifies the width of the border in paper or world units of the
text box.
Shadow - Places a shadow around the borders of text in a text box.
Shadow Offset - Specifies a distance to offset the shadow in paper or world
units of the text box.
Fill Color - Displays the color of a solid fill on an element boundary. This
value overrides the style of the fill. Transparent is the default. When you set
the fill color to transparent, no fill is visible on the boundary. You can also
apply a fill color option with a fill pattern. Filled elements always cover other
elements when they overlap. A fill color always appears behind the fill pattern
when you apply both to the same boundary.
Info Tab
Tab Options
Sheet - Shows the drawing sheet for an element.
Layer - Shows the layer on which an element appears in a drawing sheet.
Origin - Specifies the coordinates, or location, of a text box along the x and y
axes.
Tip
All metrics on the text box are either in paper units or world units
except origin. Origin is always in world units.

Width - Sets the width of the text box to either At Least (at least the value
you specify), Auto (the text drives the width), or Exactly (exactly at the value
you specify) in the At: field.
Height - Sets the height of the text box to either At Least (at least the value
you specify), Auto (the text drives the height), or Exactly (exactly at the
value you specify) in the At: field.
Angle - Sets the angle of the text box.
Tip
The text box always rotates about the origin.
Text Orientation - Sets the orientation of the text either horizontally or

vertically.
Units Space - Sets the text box units to either paper units or to world units.
Paper units represent units on an actual sheet of paper. Paper units are set in
inches. Other units are also available.
World units indicate real world distances, but can be scaled down to fit a sheet
of paper.
Note
Within the SmartSketch drawing environment, world units is

synonymous with the term model units found in other CAD
packages.
Text Flow - Determines the direction in which the characters are displayed in
a text box.
Left To Right - Specifies that the characters in a text box are displayed from
left to right, as you would see in an English paragraph.
Right To Left - Specifies that the characters in a text box are displayed from
right to left, as you would see in an Arabic or Japanese paragraph.
Justification - Specifies the placement relationship between the origin and the
shape (text box) according to the horizontal and vertical components.
The inside text area is an area that the margins of the text box define. That is,
margins are inside the outside edges of the text box.
The following graphic illustrates top (1), right (2), bottom (3) and left (4)
margins around the text box for horizontal justification (A) and vertical
justification (B).
The maximum cap height of the first formatted text line of each line defines
the text area capline, even if the line has been clipped out of the text box.
The line baseline is a font metric that describes an imaginary line for location
of characters. The largest descender for any font on the line defines the
baseline. Therefore, the largest descender of the fonts used on the last line
defines the text area baseline, even if the line is clipped out of the text box.
The following graphic illustrates text cap area (a) and text baseline (b) for
horizontal justification (A) and vertical justification (B).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together. These

components apply to both single-line and multi-line text. For multi-line text,
the cap height of the first line is used for the capline of the text, and the
descender of the last line is used for the baseline of the text.
Horizontal - Specifies horizontal placement at six options based on shape
(text box), text area, and the text within the text box at left, center, and right
positions.
Vertical - Specifies vertical placement at 10 options based on shape (text
box), text area, and the text within the text box.

Text Baseline - Specifies the text area baseline.
Text Top - Specifies the top of the text area, which begins at the bottom of
the top margin.
Text Capline - Specifies the text area capline.
Text Half Ascender - Specifies half the distance from the text area baseline
to the top of the text area.
Text Half Cap - Specifies the distance half way between the text area capline
and baseline.
Text Center - Specifies the center of the text area.
Text Bottom - Specifies the bottom of the text area.
Shape Top - Specifies the top edge of the shape.
Shape Center - Specifies center of the shape.
Shape Bottom - Specifies the bottom of the shape.
Text Alignment - Specifies the placement of formatted text within the shape
(text box).
You must define horizontal and vertical components together.
Horizontal - Specifies how each paragraph is aligned within the block of
formatted text. Values for horizontal alignment include Left, Center, and
Right.
If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment
properties for all paragraphs within the text box. (These properties appear in
the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties.
(These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
Vertical - Places the block of formatted text at Top, Center, Bottom, or
Justify area of the text box.
If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify the shape alignment properties.
(These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.)
If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify all the paragraph alignment
Horizontal Paragraph Alignment Properties


Left - Places the edge of the first line of text at the left of the text area.
Center - Places the formatted text in the center of the text area.
Right - Places the formatted text in the right of the text area.
Vertical Paragraph Alignment Properties

Top - Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area.
Bottom - Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area.
Shape Alignment Properties

Positions the text within the text area.
Top - Places the edge of the first line of text at the top of the text area.
Bottom - Places the formatted text in the bottom of the text area.
Justified - Places the first line of the first paragraph at the top of the text area.
Places the last line of the last paragraph at the bottom of the text area.
Places remaining paragraphs at equal distance between the first and last
paragraphs.
Margins
Sets the distance between the edge of the shape and the edge of the text area.
Margins are in the same units as the text box.
Top - Sets the distance between the top edge of the shape and the top edge of
the text area.
Bottom - Sets the distance between the bottom edge of the shape and the
bottom edge of the text area.
Left - Sets the distance between the left edge of the shape and the left edge of
the text area.
Right - Sets the distance between the right edge of the shape and the right
edge of the text area.
Paragraph Tab
Tab Options
Text Style - Displays the style for a text box.
Font - Lists and applies the available fonts.
Font Size - Applies a text size.
Font Style - Lists the available font styles.
Underline - Underlines text.
Language - Lists and applies a language for text in a text box. If you use text
characters from more than one language in a text box, the option you specify
in this box determines the way the lines wrap in the paragraph.
Units Space - Sets the paragraph to paper units or to world units. You can
change this control only when you are creating new styles from the Format
Styles or Format Text Box dialog boxes. When you view this control from
the Properties dialog box, it is read-only. You can change the control from
the Info tab because all paragraphs contained within a text box must exist in
the same units.
Note
Within the SmartSketch drawing environment, world units is

synonymous with the term model units found in other CAD
packages.
Text Color - Sets the color of the font.

Spacing - Determines the amount of space between lines and paragraphs in a
text box.
Text Alignment - Specifies alignment for each paragraph within the block of
formatted text. Values for horizontal alignment include Left, Center, and
Right.
If Text Orientation is horizontal, you modify all the paragraph alignment
If Text Orientation is vertical, you modify the shape alignment properties.
(These properties appear in the Text Alignment area of the Info tab.
Line spacing - Lists and applies the amount of vertical space between lines of
text.
Single sets the line spacing for each line to display the largest font
in the line.
1.5 sets the line space for the line to one-and-a-half that of single
lines.
Double sets the line spacing for the line to twice that of single
lines.
Paragraph Spacing - Specifies the amount of space before and after

paragraphs. No spacing exists before the first paragraph and or after the last
paragraph.
Before - Adds space before a paragraph. This value is set in the current
working units, not in points.
After - Adds space after a paragraph. This value is set in the current working
units, not in points. You can set the units using Units on the Format menu.
User Tab
Tab Options
Attribute Set - Names a group of attributes. You can type a name in the box
and press Enter.
Save - Places the attribute set on the element that you selected.
Remove - Removes the attribute set from the element that you selected.
Attributes - Sets the name, type, and value of the attribute set. You can type a
name in the box and press Enter.
Name - Sets the name of a unique attribute in the attribute set.
Type - Sets the type for the attribute, such as double, text, number, money, or
date.
Value - Sets the value for the attribute. The value that you can enter is based
on the type that you selected in the Type box.
Add - Adds an attribute to the attribute set. After you click Add, the attribute
appears in the table.
Delete - Removes an attribute from the attribute set. You can select an
attribute by clicking a row in the table.
Balloon Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Places a balloon containing text. You can use balloons to refer to an element
or a point in free space. You can set options for controlling the size and shape
of the balloon, text presentation, and leader display.
Balloon Ribbon
Determines the size and shape of the balloon and the text within the balloon.
Tip
Ribbon Options
Dimension Style - Lists and applies the available styles.
Leader - Displays the leader line.
Break Line - Places a break line on the leader.
Height - Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a ratio of
the text height defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the balloon
is the value you enter multiplied by the dimension text height.
Text - Specifies the text you want inside the balloon.
Shape - Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of
available shapes.
Sides - Specifies the number of sides for the balloon. This option only
appears when you select an N-sided shape in the Shapes box on the ribbon.
Balloon Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a balloon.
General Tab
Tab Options
Balloon Text - Enters text in the balloon.
Balloon Height - Specifies the height of the balloon. The value you enter is a
ratio of the text height defined in the dimension style. The actual height of the
balloon is the value you enter multiplied by the dimension text height.
Balloon Shape - Specifies which balloon shape you want from the list of
available shapes.
Number Of Sides - Sets the number of sides of an n-sided balloon shape. You
must click N-Sides in the Shape list to use this option. You can then type the
value you want.
Text and Leader Tab

Tab Options
Text - Specifies how the text appears in a balloon annotation.
Font - Specifies the font to use for the text in the balloon annotation.
Font Style - Specifies the font style to use, such as bold or italic, for the text
in the balloon annotation.
Font Size - Displays the text size. You can type a size in the box.
Leader And Projection Line

Specifies how the leader and projection line are displayed.
Break Line - Displays a horizontal break line where the leader line meets the
annotation text. For example, when break line is set to 1, the break line looks
like the following picture.
Element Gap - Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the
element you want to attach the leader to. This value is a ratio of the font size.

Extension - Sets the distance that the leader line extends beyond the
dimension. This value is a ratio of the font size.
Color and Width

Color - Sets the color of an annotation.
Line Width - Sets the line width of all lines in an annotation.
Terminator - Specifies how the terminator is displayed on the leader.
Type - Sets the terminator type. Click different parts of the following picture
to find out which terminator type you want to use.
Length - Sets the length of the terminator. This value is a ratio of the font
size. For example, in the following picture, the length is set to three times the
size of the font.
Spelling Command (Tools Menu)

Uses the Microsoft Word spell checker to identify misspelled words and

unknown words (that is, words that are not in Word's dictionary). You can
choose the correction you want to make, or you can make your own changes.
Spelling Dialog Box

Displays possible spelling errors within the SmartSketch document and offers
suggestions for correcting the errors.
Dialog Box Options

Not in Dictionary - Displays a possible error, such as a misspelled word or a
duplicated word. The possible errors appear in highlighted text. You can edit
the text in this box and then click Change to accept the correction.
Suggestions - Lists suggested corrections for the highlighted text in the Not in
Dictionary box. Spelling error replacement word suggestions are from the
main dictionary and open custom dictionaries.
Ignore - Leaves the highlighted text unchanged and finds the next spelling
error.
Ignore All - Leaves all instances of the highlighted text unchanged
throughout the document and continues to check the remainder of the
document.
Add - Adds the highlighted word in the Not in Dictionary box to the custom
dictionary.
Change - Accepts the current selection in the Suggestions box or accepts the
edited text you have entered in the Not in Dictionary box.
Delete - Deletes a duplicated word.
Note
If the error is a duplicate word, the Change button becomes a Deletebutton.
Change All - Changes all instances of an error in the active document.
AutoCorrect - Adds a spelling error and its correction to the AutoCorrect list
so that the misspelled word will automatically correct as you type.
Options - Opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog box.
Important
Word's grammar-check capabilities are not functional in

SmartSketch documents. Consequently, you can only edit the

options for specifying the custom dictionary or the rules Word uses
to check spelling.
Undo - Reverses the most recent spelling check actions.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without making any changes to the active
document.
Close - Closes the dialog box after a change has been accepted.
Note
After a change has been accepted, the Cancel button changes to a Close
button.
Character Map Command (Tools Menu)

Inserts a character into a text box using a different font. You can also insert
special characters that do not have corresponding keys on the keyboard. You
can use this command when you type or edit text in a text box.
Tip
If you are running Windows 95 or a higher version and this

command is not available, you must install the Character Map
accessory. You can add it by clicking the Control Panel icon and
then the Add/Remove Programs icon. While adding the software,
you can find the Character Map software in the Accessories
category. For detailed instructions on how to add the Character
Map accessory, see the Windows 95 on-line Help for Add/Remove
Programs.
Unicode Character Map Dialog Box

Selects special characters for inserting into a text box.
Dialog Box Options

Font - Lists the available fonts.
Subset - Lists the subsets for a particular font.
Next - Displays the next subset in the Subset list for a font.
Previous - Displays the previous subset in the Subset list for a font.

Characters To Copy - Displays selected characters to copy to the Clipboard.
Select - Copies selected characters to the Characters To Copy box.
Copy - Copies the selected characters from the Characters To Copy box to
the Clipboard.

Adds a leader to an annotation or to another leader. You can place either end
of the leader first: the annotation end or the terminator end.
You can attach the annotation end of a leader to one of the following:
Text box
Balloon
Another leader on a dimension or annotation
You can place the terminator end of a leader in one of the following ways:
Attach it to an element.
Place it in free space.
Leader Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options

Dimension Style - Lists and applies the available styles.
Break Line - Displays a horizontal break line at the annotation end of a
leader.
Leader Properties Dialog Box

Edits the properties of an element to which you have added a leader using
Add Leader.
Labels: An Overview
Technical drawings often have many labels that display important information
about the objects or elements in the document. There are two types of labels:
text labels and SmartLabels.
Text labels are associated with an element or object. If you move the element
or object, the text label moves with it. You can create text labels in a
document by double-clicking an element or object. A text label appears near
the element so that you can type text. The label appears at the location where
the element is double-clicked, except for closed elements, such as a circle or
rectangle. The label position on closed elements is the center of the element.
When you enter the text that you want, the text label orients itself with the
element.
Another kind of label, a SmartLabel, can be associated to an object or

element's text attributes. A SmartLabel is often distinguished by a question
mark in the display.
A SmartLabel displays the attributes of the element or object as text in the

document. You can drag SmartLabels from the Symbol Explorer into the
current document. SmartLabels have an .sym extension. As you change an
element's or object's attributes in the Attribute Viewer or the Properties
dialog box, the SmartLabel's text displays those changes.
If an element or object has no attributes, and you drag a SmartLabel to it, the
element or object picks up the attributes of the SmartLabel. For example, you
might want to assign attributes to a heat exchanger, such as pressure and
material type. If the SmartLabel has the pressure and material type defined,
and the heat exchanger does not, the SmartLabel's pressure and material type
are copied to the heat exchanger.
If an element already has existing attributes, a SmartLabel placed on the

element displays the values for the existing attributes. For example, if the heat
exchanger already has values for pressure and material type attributes, the
values of those attributes are filled in for a SmartLabel placed on the heat
exchanger.
Tip
Not all SmartLabels assume the text attributes of an element or

object. Some SmartLabels contain shapes that grow automatically
if you add text to the SmartLabel.
Create a Text Label

1. Double-click an element or object. A small, blinking pointer appears
below the element or object. For a closed element, the pointer appears in
the center of that element
2. Type the text in the label.
3. Click outside the label to complete it. The text label rotates to align with
the element or object to which it is associated.
Notes
You can edit a text label like a text box.
Edit a Text Label

1. Double-click the label.
2. Type the text in the label.
3. Click a point outside the label to complete the operation. The text label
rotates to align with the element or object to which it is associated.
Notes
You can format a text label like a text box. Select the label and
right-click. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Text Properties.
Move a Label
If a text label or SmartLabel is associated with an element or

object, drag the element or object. The label moves with the
element or object.
If a label is not associated with an element or object, drag the label.
Place a SmartLabel
1. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer
2. Browse to the directory.

3. Drag the SmartLabel into the document. If you place the SmartLabel near
an element in the document, the SmartLabel is associated with that

element.
Place Multiple Labels

1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar.
2. Double-click the symbol that you want to add a label to. A cursor appears
below the symbol.
Tip
Double-click the symbol away from any existing labels.
166.
Type the text.
167.
Right-click your mouse to deselect the text command.
Notes
The associated label will move with the symbol.
The symbol label text can be edited by double-clicking on the

label.
The associated label can be moved by selecting it, unlocking it,

and moving it to the desired location.
Tip
A small green lock represents a lock handle. You click the lock
handle to unlock the symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a
symbol away from the element to which the symbol is associated.
Edit a SmartLabel
1. Double-click an element or object.
2. In the Attribute Viewer, type the values that you want for the label.
Notes
You can edit the properties or parameters of a SmartLabel.
You can also edit the properties of the elements or text in the
SmartLabel. Select the SmartLabel and then click Edit Graphic
Properties or Edit Text Properties on the shortcut menu.
If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you

cannot select or open the SmartLabel to edit it like most symbols.
You must create a new SmartLabel.
Engineering Fonts
The engineering fonts delivered with the software contain industry-specific
fonts, special characters, and symbols that you can use to annotate engineering
drawings. These fonts include degree symbols, diameter symbols, and other
special characters and symbols that are not usually included in a typical word
processing package.
Your choice of font should be based on the industry for which you are
creating engineering drawings.
The software provides TrueType fonts; with TrueType fonts, what you see
on the screen is what appears on the printed page. The screen display of the
document closely matches the printed document.
When you open a .dwg or .dgn document, the software provides a default
mapping to determine which TrueType font will be assigned to which
AutoCAD or MicroStation font. You can make changes to this mapping to
define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with Options on the
Tools menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click the appropriate Options.
Drawing with Relationships: An Overview
Drawing with Relationships: An

Overview
As you move the pointer, the software automatically updates values in the
ribbon, giving you constant feedback on the size and position of the element
you are drawing. As you draw, the software shows a temporary, dynamic
display of the element you are drawing by the pointerthis feedback is called
a relationship indicator. This temporary display shows the look of the
elements if you place the element at the current location.
The software gives you more information about the element that you are
drawing by displaying relationships between the temporary, dynamic element
and the following items:
Other elements in the drawing
Horizontal and vertical orientations
Origin of the element that you are drawing
When the software recognizes a relationship, it displays a relationship

indicator at the pointer. As you move the pointer, the software updates the
indicator to show new relationships. If a relationship indicator appears by the
pointer when you click to draw the element, the software applies that
relationship to the element.
Relationship
End point
Midpoint
Intersection
Horizontal
Vertical
Relationship Indicator

Point On Element
Perpendicular
Parallel
Tangent
Center
For example, if the horizontal relationship indicator appears when you click to
place the second end point of a line, then the line is exactly horizontal.
Relationships
You can set the types of relationships you want the software to recognize
usingSmartSketch Settings on the Tools menu. The software can recognize
one or two relationships at a time. When the software recognizes two
relationships, it displays both relationship indicators at the pointer.
Locate Zone
You do not have to move the pointer to an exact position for the software to
recognize a relationship. The software recognizes relationships for any
element within the locate zone of the pointer. The circle around the pointer
crosshair or at the end of the pointer arrow indicates the locate zone. You can
change the size of the locate zone with SmartSketch Settings on the Tools
menu.
Infinite Elements
The software recognizes the Point On Element relationship for lines and arcs
as if these elements were infinite. In the following example, the software
recognizes a Point On Element relationship when you position the pointer
directly over an element and also when you move the pointer off the element.
Using Relationships as You Draw: An

Overview
You can use relationships to capture and remember your design intent as your
sketch. You can make your drawings associative by applying those
relationshipsor you can sketch designs that do not use relationships.
How Relationships Affect a Drawing

You can move and change an element that does not use relationships in
various ways without affecting other parts of the design. For example, when
no relationships exist between two lines, you can move and change each line
without affecting the other.
When you modify a part of a drawing that has a relationship to another part of
the drawing, the other part updates automatically. For example, if you apply a
perpendicular relationship between the two lines and move one line, the other
line moves with it. The software remembers the relationship between these
two elements and always maintains the perpendicular relationship between the
lines. You can manipulate either of the two lines and the software will move
or modify the line automatically to maintain the relationship.
Applying and maintaining relationships in the design simplifies changes to the
design later. In the following drawing, all the relationships were automatically
established as the design took shape on the drawing sheet. If you want to
change the design, you simply modify one segment of it and all the
relationships are maintained.
Applying and Maintaining Relationships

You can place elements that are related to each other as you draw. First, you
must set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. Then, as you click
commands on the Draw toolbar and place lines, arcs, and circles, you should
watch the relationship indicators that appear by the pointer. When a
relationship indicator appears by the pointer, you can click to apply that
relationship to the element that you are drawing.
Visualizing Maintained Relationships

When you apply relationships, relationship handles appear on the related
elements. The handles are symbols that show how elements are related. You
can display or hide the relationship handles in your drawings by setting or
clearing Relationship Handles on the Tools menu.
Relationship
Relationship Handle

Colinear
Connect
Concentric
Equal
Horizontal/Vertical
Tangent
Symmetric
Parallel
Perpendicular
Lock
For example, the following four lines appear with relationship handles (A)
turned off and with relationship handles (B) displayed.
Applying Relationships to Existing Geometry

You can apply relationships to geometry after you place it with the buttons on
the Relationship toolbar. These buttons include parallel, tangent, connect, and
so on. You can use relationships created with these buttons if you set
Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu.
Removing Relationships
You can quit using all the relationships that you have applied to the drawing if
you clear Maintain Relationships. You can also remove individual
relationships by selecting a relationship handle and deleting it. Clearing
Relationship Handles on the Tools menu hides the handles, but the
relationships are still maintained and used in the design.
When to Maintain Relationships

Maintaining relationships makes designing more productive and revisions
much easier. However, relationships can slow drawing and changes on large
data sets. You should decide whether to use relationships depending on the
speed of your computer and the importance of easy revision.
For conceptual sketching and diagrams, you might want to use relationships

by setting Maintain Relationships. This method allows you to quickly get
your ideas on paper and revise them easily using direct modification and
driving dimensions. The kinds of projects in which you might want to use
relationships include mechanical concepts, architectural details, layouts, and
schematic diagrams.
When to Design Without Relationships

For more complex projects where you initially need to draw with precision,
you should not use relationships in the document. You can then draw with
precision by using the PinPoint tool and entering values on ribbons. You can
still use relationships within symbols. The kinds of projects in which you
might want to draw without relationships include multiple-view drawings,
floor plans, maps, and detailed designs.
Tip
If you switch between using relationships and not using them while
you draw, you can receive confusing results.
Intent Zones
As you draw and modify elements, small quadrants called intent zones appear
next to the pointer. The software uses intent zones to interpret your intentions
as you draw. Intent zones allow you to draw and modify elements many ways
using few commands. You do not need to select a different command for
every type of element.
How Intent Zones Work

When you click to begin drawing certain elements, the software divides the
region around the clicked position into intent zones. By moving the pointer
into one of these intent zones on the way to your next click location, you can
tell the software what you want to do next.
The last intent zone you move the pointer into is the active zone. To change
the active intent zone, move the mouse pointer into the zone you want to use,
then move it to the position where you want to click next.
Drawing Tangent or Perpendicular Arcs

You can use intent zones to change the result of Tangent Arc. To draw an arc
tangent to a line, first click a point on the line to place the first end point of the
arc. Then move the pointer through the tangent intent zone and click to place
the second end point of the arc.
If you want to draw a perpendicular arc instead, you can move the pointer
back into the intent zone region and out through the perpendicular zone before
clicking to place the second end point of the arc. The arc is then perpendicular
to the line.
You can also use intent zones to define the arc direction.
Drawing Arcs by Three Points

When you use Arc by 3 Points, intent zones allow you to input the three
points in any order. You can also use intent zones to change the arc direction.
Drawing Lines Tangent or Connected to Curved

Elements
Using intent zones with Line/Arc Continuous, you can draw a line tangent to
a circle or arc. Or you can draw a line that is connected to the circle or arc, but
not tangent to it.
Draw with Relationships

1. Set the SmartSketch options so that the software recognizes the
relationships you want to use. You can set the options with SmartSketch
Settings on the Tools menu.
2. On the Draw toolbar, click a drawing command.
3. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet to find relationships.
4. Click when the software recognizes a relationship you want to use for the
element you are drawing. When you click with a relationship indicator
displayed at the pointer, the relationship is established in the drawing.
Notes
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places relationship

handles as you draw. These relationships are maintained when you
modify the drawing.
Suspend Relationships
1. Hold Alt. The software does not recognize any relationships while you
hold this key.
2. Release Alt to re-activate the software's ability to recognize relationships.
Establish a Relationship with the

SmartSketch Command
1. Click Tools > Maintain Relationships.
2. Draw as usual. The software automatically establishes recognized
relationships. For each relationship, a relationship handle is placed on the
related elements.
Notes
Relationships cannot be established in certain cases.
Delete a Relationship
Note
If the relationship handles are hidden, click Relationship Handles

on the Relationship toolbar to display them.
1. Select a relationship handle.

2. Press Delete.
Maintain Relationships
Click Tools > Maintain Relationships.
When Maintain Relationships is set and you apply relationships to new or

existing elements, the software places relationship handles on the elements.
Elements that share relationships are associative; when you move an element,
the other elements on the drawing sheet move according to the relationships
they have with the element that you moved.
Display or Hide Relationship Handles
Click Tools > Relationship Handles to turn on and turn off the
display of relationship handles.
Tip
If a checkmark appears next to Relationship Handles, the display

is on.
Note
You can also click Relationship Handles

on the
Relationship toolbar to toggle relationship handles on and off.
Lock an Element or Key Point
On the Relationship toolbar, click Lock
Click an element or key point to lock the element and prevent it from being
modified.
Insert a Detail View

1. Click Insert > Detail View.
2. Click the shape of the detail view, either Circular or Rectangular.
3. Click the Caption box and type a caption that the software places with the
drawing detail.
Tip
You can define the active font for the Detail View caption by using
Format > Text Box.
168.
Select a scale for the drawing detail in the Scale Factor box.
Tip
You can click the scale factor box and type a value instead of
selecting an available value from the pull down list.
169.
Select an existing sheet for displaying the detail view in the Place
detail on: combo box.
170.
Select the Display envelope check box to display the boundary of
the detailed view on the drawing.
Tip
When displayed, detail view boundaries (envelopes) can be moved

to a different location in the drawing to change the contents of the
detail view. To do this, click the detail view envelope in the
drawing. Then using the displayed center point, drag the envelope
to a new location in the drawing. The contents of the detail view
update to reflect the location of the envelope.
Notes
The detail view is a SmartFrame. You can edit its properties by

selecting the detail view and displaying the shortcut menu.
The envelope, labels, and detail view can all be moved to different
locations at any time. Labels can be edited at any time.
The contents inside a detail view cannot be edited; however, if the

contents inside the envelope are modified, changes are reflected in
the detail view once the screen is repainted.
If the detail view is deleted, the envelope and associated labels are
also deleted. However, if the envelope or any labels are deleted,
the detail view will remain.

Relationships Command (Main Toolbar)
Displays the Relationship toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar
to create relationships between two drawing elements.
Tip
To maintain the relationship between elements when you modify

either one of the elements, you must set Maintain Relationships
on the Tools menu.
Alignment Indicator Command (Tools Menu)

Displays dashed lines to show horizontal or vertical alignment while you draw
or modify elements. Alignment indicators work similarly to relationship
indicators. If you click when a horizontal or vertical indicator line is
displayed, the element you are drawing or modifying will be horizontally or
vertically aligned with the element the indicator line leads to.
SmartSketch Settings Command (Tools

Menu)
Sets up what relationships are recognized by the software. The relationships
selected on the SmartSketch dialog box are recognized as you draw.
SmartSketch Dialog Box

Customizes the operation of the software in recognizing and placing
relationships. You can set pointer behavior and specify which relationships
are recognized as you draw.
Relationships Tab
This tab allows you select the relationships that are recognized by the software
as you draw. Set the relationships you want to recognize, and clear the
relationships you do not want to recognize. Clear all relationships so that the
software does not place relationship handles.
Cursor Tab
Tab Options
Cursor Setup - Sets the sizes of the Locate Zone and Intent Zone around the
pointer.
Locate Zone - Sets the size of the locate zone radius. The locate zone is a
region around the pointer.
The software recognizes relationships based on elements within the locate
zone so that you do not have to move the pointer to an exact position. For
example, if part of an element is within the locate zone, the software
recognizes a Point On relationship.
The size of the locate zone is indicated by a circle around the center of the
pointer crosshair. Values from 3 to 12 pixels are valid.
Intent Zone - Sets the size of the intent zone radius. Intent zones allow
drawing commands to interpret your intentions as you draw. Values from 3 to
12 pixels are valid.
Preview - Shows the size of the locate zone and the symbol for the selected
relationship.
Maintain Relationships Command (Tools

Menu)
Places relationship handles as you draw. When this option is set, the software
places relationship handles for relationships that the software recognizes, and
for relationships that you apply using the commands on the Relationship
toolbar.
Relationship Handles Command (Tools

Menu)
Displays any relationship handles on elements.
Lock Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Controls elements so they cannot be modified. When you use this button, you
can lock the length, angle, radius, or position of an element. You can also lock
keypoints on elements, such as endpoints of a line or the center of a circle, in
their absolute positions.
Detail View Command (Insert Menu)

Places either a circular or rectangular detail view into your drawing.
Tip
Detail View is available only if you use the Customize command

Detail View Ribbon

Places a detail view based on graphics inside a user-defined envelope. This
command is accessed via the Insert menu.
Ribbon Bar Options


Circular detail - Places a detail with a circular envelope and detail view
shape.
Rectangular detail - Places a detail with a rectangular envelope and detail
view shape.
Caption - Specifies the label for the envelope and detail.
Scale Factor - Specifies the factor to which the detail view is scaled.
Tip
You can either select a value from the drop-down list, or type a
value of your own.
Place detail on - Specifies the sheet in the document in which the detail is to
be placed.
Display envelope - Turns on or off the display of the detail envelope.
Sample Workflows
Draw a Line Connected to Another Line
You can use relationships to connect an element you are drawing with an
existing element. You can apply a connect relationship as you draw the lines,
or draw the line without a connect relationship.
1. Click Tools > SmartSketch Settings.

2. On the Relationships tab, set End Point, and click OK.
4. Move the pointer to the end of a line in the application window. The
software displays the End Point relationship indicator at the pointer.
5. While the software displays the relationship indicator, click to place the
first end point of the new line. This end point is connected to the end point
of the previous line.
171.
line.
Click where you want to place the second end point of the new
172.
The new line and the previous line have connected end points.
Notes
If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software

places a connect relationship handle at the point where the two
lines connect.
If you do not want to place a connect relationship, you can follow

the same procedure with Maintain Relationships cleared. The end
points of the two lines will still be exactly coincident when you
draw them.
Tip
Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with Relationship

Handles on the Tools menu.
Draw a Line
2. Click where you want a new line to begin.
173.
Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. Notice that the line
follows the movement of the pointer. At the same time, the pointer
recognizes any relationships it encounters, such as a horizontal
relationship. When the pointer finds a relationship, a relationship indicator
appears at the pointer.
174.
Click to place the end point of the line according to the displayed
relationships.
175.
Continue clicking to draw additional line segments, or right-click
to end the command.
Draw an Arc
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc By Center Point
2. Click where you want to place the center point.

176.
Move the pointer horizontally, to a position where the software
recognizes step angle alignment with the center point.
177.
Click where you want the sweep to begin.
178.
Move the pointer to a position where the software identifies the
step angle you want to use for the sweep.
179.
While the step angle relationship indicator is displayed at the
pointer, click to define the end of the sweep.
Draw a Horizontal Line

You can use relationships to draw a line that is exactly horizontal. You can
apply a horizontal relationship as you draw the line, or draw the line without a
horizontal relationship.

2. On the Relationships tab, select Horizontal Or Vertical, and then click
OK.
4. Click where you want to place the first end point of the line, anywhere in
the application window.
180.
Move the pointer around in the window. Notice that the dynamic
line display always extends from the end point you just placed to the

current pointer position. You may also see relationship indicators
displayed at the pointer.
181.
Move the pointer to make the dynamic line approximately
horizontal.
182.
When the horizontal relationship indicator is displayed at the
pointer, click to place the second end point.
Notes
If Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu is set, the software

places a horizontal relationship handle on the new line.
If you do not want to place a horizontal relationship, you can

follow the same procedure with Maintain Relationships cleared.
The line will still be exactly horizontal when you draw it.
Tip
Relationship handles can be displayed or hidden with Relationship

Handles on the Tools menu.
Case Where a Relationship Is Not

Maintained
Relationships cannot be maintained in certain cases, as in the following
example.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Arc By 3 Points
2. Click where you want the sweep of the arc to begin.
183.
Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes a


point on element relationship with a line on the drawing sheet.
184.
When the Point On relationship indicator is displayed at the
pointer, click to define the second input point for the arc.
185.
Move the pointer past the line and click. The position of this input
point defines it as the end of the sweep, making the point in the middle a
key point that cannot have relationships. The software recognizes this, and
does not maintain the point on element relationship.
Notes
If the third input point for the arc had been between the first two
points, then it would have been interpreted as the arc midpoint,
making the second input point one end of the arc sweep. In this
case, the point would have been constrainable, and the software
would have maintained the point on element relationship.
Connect Points While Drawing a Line

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Line/Arc Continuous .
2. Click where you want the line to begin.

186.
Move the pointer to a position where the software recognizes the
end point of a line on the drawing sheet.
187.
When the point on relationship indicator is displayed at the pointer,
click to define the end of the line.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship

handle where the two lines meet.
Connect Points While Modifying a Line

1. Select the line you want to modify.
188.
Position the Select Tool over the handle at the end of the line you
want to modify. The pointer changes to a plus (+) shape to indicate that
you have located the handle.
189.
Drag the handle to a position where the software recognizes the
end point of another line on the drawing sheet.
190.
Release the mouse button to place the end point of the line you are

modifying at the end point of the stationary line.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a connect relationship

handle where the two lines meet.
Establish More Than One Relationship

2. Click where you want the line to begin.
191.
Move the pointer to recognize point on element and tangent
relationships with a circle on the drawing sheet.
192.
While the point on element and tangent relationship indicators are
displayed at the pointer, click to define the end point of the line.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a relationship handle for

each recognized relationship.
Drawing Precisely: An Overview

Engineering and architectural diagrams and drawings require accurate
measurements and precise positioning of elements and symbols. SmartSketch
provides a variety of positioning and dimensioning tools that are easy to use
but powerful enough for the most complex drawings.
Many types of drawings require a drawing scale that makes it possible to
represent very large or very small objects on a sheet of paper. You can set up
your SmartSketch drawings with the drawing scale and measurement units
you need to create a wide range of drawings.
When you are positioning elements and symbols on a drawing sheet, speed
and precision count. You can easily align symbols with other symbols or with
locations indicated by guides, rulers, and grids. You can also position symbols
at exact x-and y-coordinates in your drawing.
You can also display the dimensions of elements in your drawings. With
SmartSketch's measurement and dimensioning tools, you can calculate and
display linear and angular dimensions. When you resize an element that has
attached dimensions, the dimensions update automatically.
Placing Elements in Precise Locations:

An Overview
PinPoint is a tool that helps you draw and modify elements relative to known
positions in a drawing. You can place a target point and then the software
dynamically displays the horizontal and vertical distance between the pointer
and the target point. You can use PinPoint with all element drawing
commands. You can run PinPoint from the Tools menu or the Main toolbar.
How PinPoint Works

PinPoint allows you to provide coordinate input to commands as you draw.
The x and y coordinates are relative to a target point that you can position
anywhere in the window. You can change the location of the target point at
any time by clicking Reposition Target on the ribbon and then clicking a new
position in the window.
As you move the pointer around, PinPoint dynamically displays the horizontal
and vertical distance between the pointer position and the target point. Help
lines show the PinPoint X and Y axis and the PinPoint orientation.
Locking and Freeing Values

You can lock the x coordinate or the y coordinate using the X and Y boxes on
the ribbon. When one coordinate value is locked, you can position the other
coordinate by clicking a position in the window. Or you can set both values
using the ribbon boxes. If you want to free the dynamics for a locked value,
you can clear the value box by double-clicking in the box and pressing
Backspace or Delete.
PinPoint Orientation
In its default orientation, PinPoint's x axis is horizontal. You can re-orient the
x axis to any angle by setting the angle on the PinPoint ribbon. The figure
shows the PinPoint angle set to 20 degrees.
Draw with PinPoint

1. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint
2. Click where you want the target point to be.

3. Run any drawing command. As you move the pointer, PinPoint displays
the coordinates of the current mouse location in relation to the target point.
To provide precision input to the current command, click when the
coordinate display indicates that the pointer is in the correct position or
type coordinate values in the X and Y ribbon boxes.
Caution
You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if

you are using Grid Snap.
Notes
When the pointer reaches a distance from the target point that is a
multiple of the Step Value set on the ribbon, the related coordinate
value and help line become bold.
If you know the exact x and y distances from the target point that
you want to use as command input, you can type the values in the
X and Y ribbon boxes.
You can type a known x or y value into the X or Y ribbon box to

lock one axis position, then graphically define the coordinate for
the other axis.
You can move the target point at any time. Click Reposition on
the ribbon, then click where you want the target point to be.
You can re-orient the PinPoint x axis. Type a positive value in the
Angle box on the PinPoint ribbon to rotate the axis
counterclockwise, or a negative value to rotate the axis clockwise.
Reposition the PinPoint Target Point

On the PinPoint ribbon, click Reposition. The target point is

attached to the pointer. Click where you want the target point to be.
Press F12. The target point moves to the current pointer location.
Re-Orient PinPoint
The default PinPoint orientation is with the PinPoint x axis horizontal. To reSmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide 327

orient the PinPoint x axis, type an angle in the ribbon Angle box. A positive
value rotates the horizontal axis counterclockwise. A negative value rotates
the axis clockwise. The y axis is automatically repositioned to remain
perpendicular to the x axis.

Helps you draw elements with precision by displaying coordinate data at the
pointer. The displayed coordinates are relative to a target position that you set
and can reset at any time.
Using PinPoint, you can draw elements at known locations on the drawing
sheet, draw elements known distances apart, and so forth. You can use
PinPoint with all drawing commands
Caution
You cannot place elements with PinPoint on the Main toolbar if

you are using Grid Snap.
PinPoint Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Display On/Off (F9) - Displays or hides the PinPoint help lines and
distance values.
Reposition Target (F12) -Attaches the target point to the pointer so that
you can reposition the target point. Click where you want the target point to
be.
Relative Tracking - When toggled on, PinPoint is in relative mode such
that the PinPoint target moves to the last point clicked during a drawing
command.
Define PinPoint Origin - Activates the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon
bar containing fields for X & Y values which define a document origin for
PinPoint.

Note
To save this origin, you must select the Save PinPoint Origin
button on the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.
Reposition Target to Origin - Moves the PinPoint target to the X,Y

position that was saved using the Save PinPoint Origin button on the Define
PinPoint Origin ribbon bar.
Angle - Specifies the angle of the PinPoint x help line relative to its default
horizontal orientation. Positive values rotate the horizontal line
counterclockwise. Negative values rotate the horizontal line clockwise.
Step - Specifies the PinPoint step value. The step value is an incremental
distance along the PinPoint coordinate axes. When the distance between the
target position and the current pointer location is an increment of the step
value, the related coordinate value and help line become bold.
Define PinPoint Origin Ribbon

When you click the Define PinPoint Origin button on the PinPoint ribbon
bar, the Define PinPoint Origin ribbon bar is displayed.
Tip
Ribbon Options
Save PinPoint Origin - Saves the currently displayed X and Y values to
the document.
Target X - Locks the horizontal distance between the target point and the
current pointer location to the value you type.
Target Y - Locks the vertical distance between the target point and the
current pointer location to the value you type.
Placing Elements with a Grid: An

Overview
The grid and its grid lines allow you to place elements in the document by
aligning them with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines. You
can use the grid if you want the elements to line up at regular intervals in the
document.
The grid is an invisible set of lines in the document. When you set Grid Snap
on the View menu, elements always align with the grid lines or nearest
intersection of the grid lines. You can view the grid by clicking Grid Display
on the View menu. The grid lines do not print.
You can change the display of the grid from static to dynamic by setting
options on the View tab of the Options dialog box.
When you zoom in or out, the grid lines for a dynamic grid are generated
dynamically. You can set dynamic grid lines to appear at fine, medium, or
coarse levels. The grid lines appear at common major measurement
increments. A dynamic grid displays index lines that intersect with the darker,
solid grid lines.
A static grid displays solid grid lines that do not move as you zoom in or out.
You can set up the increment settings on the View tab of the Options dialog
box.
Place Elements With a Grid

1. Click View > Grid Display.
Tip
This step is optional. You do not have to display the grid to align
elements with it.
193.
On the View menu, select Grid Snap.
194.
Place the elements that you want with the grid.
Notes
You can change the grid display by setting options on the View tab
of the Options dialog box.
When you perform Step 3, a red crosshair will appear at the

pointer showing where an element's points are placed. Elements
align with the grid lines or nearest intersection of the grid lines.
Grid snap does not work while you identify elements that are
aligned along grid lines. To override this, press the Alt key while
identifying these elements.
Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You

can suppress the indicators by pressing Alt.

Grid Display Command (View Menu)
Displays a grid so that you can place elements with precision. The grid is not
part of the document and does not print.
Tip
You can also access Grid Display by right-clicking. You can

change the grid display from static to dynamic by setting options
on the View tab of the Tools Options dialog box.
Grid Snap Command (View Menu)

Allows you to align elements with the grid. The grid is an invisible set of lines
in the document that helps you align elements. When you set Grid Snap, the
software always aligns elements with the grid lines or nearest intersection of
the grid lines. Grid lines do not print.
Tip
You can also access Grid Snap by right clicking. You can change
the grid display by setting options on the View tab of the Tools
Options dialog box.
Relationship and alignment indicators override the grid snap. You can
suppress the indicators by holding down Alt.
Dimensioning Drawing Elements: An

Overview
Dimensions supply information about the size, location, and orientation of
elements, such as the length of a line, the distance between points, or the angle
of a line. Dimensions are associative to the elements they refer to, so you can
make design changes easily.
You can use the commands on the Dimension toolbar to place the following
types of dimensions:
(A)
Linear dimensions
(B)
Angular dimensions
(C)
Diameter dimensions
(D)
Radial dimensions
(E)
Dimension groups
Dimension commands on the Dimension toolbar have a ribbon that sets

options for placing the dimension. When you select a dimension in the
drawing, the same ribbon options appear. You can use the options to change
the selected dimension.
Placing Dimensions
To dimension elements, you can use a dimension command on the Dimension
toolbar, such as SmartDimension, and then select the elements you want to
dimension.
As you place dimensions, the software shows a temporary, dynamic display of
the dimension you are placing. This temporary display shows what the new
dimension will look like if you click at the current pointer position. The
dimension orientation changes depending on where you move the pointer.
For example, when you click Distance Between on the Dimension toolbar
and select an origin element and an element to measure to, the dimension
dynamically adjusts its orientation depending on where you position your
pointer.
Because you can dynamically control the orientation of a dimension during

placement, you can place dimensions quickly and efficiently without having
to use several commands. Each of the dimension commands uses placement
dynamics that allow you to control how the dimension will look before you
place it.
Placing Dimensions with the Dimension Axis

Axis on the Dimension toolbar sets the orientation of the dimension axis on
the drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension axis, rather than the default
axis of the drawing sheet, while you are using Distance Between or
Coordinate Dimension. You must set Explicit on the Dimension ribbon to
place dimensions that are perpendicular or parallel to new dimension axis.
Dimensioning While You Draw


To dimension elements as you draw them, you can set Dimension Keyin
Values Automatically with Options on the Tools menu. Although placing
dimensions as you draw is convenient, it might be necessary to delete
unneeded dimensions when you have finished your design.
Tip
Dimensions placed with this option are only driven dimensions.
Using Dimensions to Drive Elements

You can place a dimension that controls the size or location of the element to
which it refers. This type of dimension is known as a driving dimension. If
you use the ribbon to change the dimensional value of a driving dimension,
the element updates.
Dimensions that are not driving dimensions are called driven dimensions. The
value of a driven dimension is controlled by the element it refers to. If the
element changes, the dimensional value updates.
Because both driving and driven dimensions are associative to the element
they refer to, you can change the design more easily without having to delete
and re-apply elements or dimensions when you update the design.
If you want to create a driving dimension, you must first set Maintain
Relationships on the Tools menu. When you are placing dimensions, an
option on the ribbon allows you to specify whether a dimension is driving or
driven. A driving dimension and a driven dimension are distinguished by
color. There are different colors for driving dimensions and driven dimensions
in a dimension style.
Not-to-Scale Dimensions
You can override the value of a driven dimension by editing its dimensional
value. This makes the dimension not-to-scale. For example, if you override
the dimensional value that is 15 millimeters to be 30 millimeters, the actual
size of the line that you see would still be 15 millimeters.
Formatting Dimensions
If you want two or more dimensions to look the same, you can select the
dimensions and apply a style with the ribbon. If you want to format
dimensions so that they look unique, you can select a dimension and edit its
formats on the ribbon or with Properties on the Edit menu.
Using Expressions in Dimensions

There are many instances when the dimensions of individual features in a
design are related. For example, the bend radius used to manufacture a sheet
metal part is usually a function of the stock thickness. You can define and
automate these types of design relationships with expressions. You can select
a dimension and then use the Variables command on the Tools menu to enter
a formula. When the formula is solved, the dimensional value changes to the
value that the formula calculates.
You might want to use dimensions with expressions for the following
purposes:
Drive a dimension by another dimension; Dimension A =

Dimension B
Drive a dimension by a formula; Dimension A = pi * 3.5
Drive a dimension by a formula and another dimension;

Dimension A = pi * Dimension B
Setting or Modifying Units of Measure

To set the units of measure for a dimension, you can use Properties on the
Edit menu. To set the units of measure for a document, you can click
Properties on the File menu and then click the Units tab.
Types of Dimensions
A linear dimension measures the length of a line or the distance between two
points or elements. You can place linear dimensions with the Distance
Between and SmartDimension commands.

An angular dimension measures the angle of a line, the sweep angle of an arc,
or the angle between two or more lines or points. You can place angular
dimensions with the Angle Between and SmartDimension commands.
A radial dimension measures the radius of elements, such as arcs, circles,
ellipses, or curves. You can place a radial dimension with the
SmartDimension command.
A diameter dimension measures the diameter of elements, such as circles and
ellipses. You can place a diameter dimension with the SmartDimension
command.
The components of a dimension are as follows:
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
Projection line
Dimension line
Dimensional value
Terminator
(E)
(F)
(G)
Break line
Symbol
Connect line
Dimension Groups
You can place dimensions in dimension groups with several commands. This
makes the dimensions easier to manipulate on the drawing sheet. All members
of a stacked or chained dimension group share the same dimension axis.
Stacked dimension group
Chained dimension group
A coordinate dimension group is another type of dimension group. Coordinate

dimensions measure the position of key points or elements from a common
origin. All the dimensions within the group measure from a common origin.
You should use coordinate dimensions when you want to dimension elements
in relation to a common origin or zero point.
When you are placing dimension groups with Distance Between or Angle
Between, the pointer position determines what type of dimension group will
be placed. After you place the first dimension in a group and click the second
element you want to measure, if the pointer is below the first dimension, then
the dimension group will be a chained group.
If the pointer is above the first dimension, then the dimension group will be a
stacked group.
You can place dimension groups with the following buttons on the Dimension
toolbar:
Distance Between
Angle Between
Symmetric Diameter
Coordinate Dimension
Place a Linear, Angular, or Radial

Dimension
You can place the following types of dimensions with SmartDimension:
Linear dimension
Angular dimension
Radial dimension
Diameter dimension
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click SmartDimension

2. Click an element.

Tip
The command determines the type of dimension to place,

depending on the type of element you select, and displays the
dimension dynamically so you can position it.
195.
Position the dimension, and then click a point to place it.
Notes
SmartDimension automatically determines the type of dimension

to place based on the element that you select, such as linear, radial,
or angular. However, you can specify a different dimension type.
For example, if you click SmartDimension and then select a
circle, the Diameter on the ribbon is active; you then place a
diameter dimension. If you want to place a radial dimension
instead, you can click Radial on the ribbon before you click to
place the dimension.
To place a driving dimension, you must set Maintain

Relationships on the Tools menu, select an element, and then
click a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar; the
dimension that you place is a driving dimension by default.
You can change a dimension to driving or driven by selecting it

and then clicking Driving/Driven on the ribbon.
To place a horizontal or vertical dimension between the end points

of an angled line, you must press Shift.
A connector is not considered to be a geometric element;

consequently, it cannot be dimensioned.
Place a Dimension Between Two Elements

or Key Points
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following buttons.
Distance Between
Angle Between
196.
Click an element or key point to identify the origin element.
197.
Click an element or key point to measure to.

198.
Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The
dimension dynamically follows the movement of the pointer.
199.
Click to place the dimension.
200.
If you want to place another dimension, click another element or
key point to select the next measurement element.
Tip
The origin element for this dimension is the element that you
selected in step 2.
201.
Click to place the next dimension.
Notes
After placing several dimensions, if you want to use a different

origin element for additional dimensions, right-click to start over.
After you click the two elements that you want to place the
dimension between, the orientation of the dimension changes
depending on where you move the pointer.
Before you place a dimension between two elements or keypoints,

you can use Axis to set the orientation of the dimension axis on the
drawing sheet. You can use the new dimension axis, rather than the
default axis of the drawing sheet, while you are using Distance
Between. After you define the dimension axis, you can place
dimensions that run parallel to or perpendicular to the dimension
axis.
A connector is not considered to be a geometric element;

consequently, it cannot be dimensioned.
Place a Dimension Group

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following buttons:
Distance Between
Angle Between
Symmetric Diameter
Coordinate Dimension
202.
Click an element that you want to measure.
203.
204.
Click another element that you want to measure.
205.
Click to place the dimension in the dimension group.

Notes
The first dimension that you place in a dimension group is the

origin dimension.
Coordinate Dimension places coordinate dimensions. Coordinate

dimensions can only be placed in a group. You can place
coordinate dimensions in any order and on any side of the elements
that you want to dimension.
Add a Dimension to a Dimension Group
1. Click the element that the dimension measures.
206.
Click a point for the dimension. This action adds the dimension to
the dimension group.
Notes
If you change a dimension group, the group updates automatically.
If you delete a dimension from the middle of a chained dimension

group, the group splits into two groups.
If you place a dimension group using Axis and then delete the first
or middle dimension from the group, this action deletes all the
dimensions after the removed dimension.
Place a Symmetric Diameter Dimension

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Symmetric Diameter
2. Click an element or key point. This element or key point is the origin.
207.
Click an element to measure or a key point to measure to.
208.
Move the pointer where you want to place the dimension. The
dimension dynamically follows the movement of the pointer.
209.
210.
To place another dimension, click another element to measure or
key point to measure to.
Tip
The origin element for this dimension is the first element or key
point that you selected.
211.
Notes
To use a different origin element for additional dimensions, rightclick to resume editing.
After you click the two elements that you want to dimension
between, the dimension changes depending on where you move the
pointer.
Turn on Half on the ribbon, and the dimensions appear as half.

Turn off Half on the ribbon, and the dimensions appear as full.
Set a Dimension Axis

1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Axis
2. Click an element to which you want the dimension axis to be parallel or

perpendicular.
212.
Choose distance between, then place a dimension. You can now
place a dimension that runs parallel or perpendicular to the dimension axis
that you have defined.
213.
To use the dimension axis that you set using Axis, click Distance
Between or Coordinate Dimension on the Dimension toolbar.
214.
On the ribbon, set Explicit in the Dimension Axis box. After you
define the dimension axis, you can place dimensions that run parallel to or
perpendicular to the dimension axis.
Set the Dimension Type

Dimension types control how the dimension is displayed. You can set the
dimension type before or after you place a dimension.
On the ribbon, click one of the options on the Dimension Type list
on the palette to set the dimension type.
Note
In the following picture, you can click each palette option to see
the type of dimension and an example of what the dimension will
look like.
Edit a Dimension Prefix

1. Select a dimension.
2. On the ribbon, click Prefix
3. On the Dimension Prefix dialog box, type the characters that you want to
appear as prefix, superfix, suffix, and subfix information in the appropriate
boxes.
Tip
While you type information in one of the boxes, you can also click
a symbol at the top of the dialog box to add symbols to the prefix,
superfix, suffix, and subfix information.

215.
Click Apply to change the dimension that you selected.
Notes
You can also use the Dimension Prefix dialog box while you
place a dimension.
You can change the prefix or suffix gap by selecting a dimension.

Then, you can click Properties on the Edit menu. On the Spacing
tab of the Dimension Properties dialog box, change the prefix or
suffix gap. You can also set the superfix or subfix gap on this tab.
Set the Dimension Units

1. Select a dimension.
3. On the Dimension Properties dialog box, click the Units tab.
4. Set the options you want to use for the dimension unit.
Notes
You can set the dimension units for a dimension that you are about
to place using Dimension on the Format menu.
You can save the dimension unit settings in a dimension style

using Style on the Format menu.
Move a Dimension
1. Click part of the dimension that you want to move.
2. Drag the dimension to a new location.
The previous procedure describes the general steps you can use to move a
dimension. The following descriptions explain how to move specific parts of a
dimension.
To move the dimension line
Click the dimension line and drag the dimension.
To move the dimension text

1. Click the dimension text. Drag the dimension to one of the following
positions:
216.
Drag the dimension to one of the following positions:
Along the dimension line
Outside of the dimension line
Outside of the projection line
To move the terminator

Click the terminator and drag it.
To move the projection line
Click the projection line and drag it.
Tip
You can lengthen or shorten the projection line.
To move the leader break line
For radial dimensions, you can move the break line of the leader
line. Click the dimension text. Then, drag the text while pressing
Shift.
Using Dimensions to Change Existing

Elements
You can change dimensions on the drawing sheet to change existing elements.
Driving dimensions have relationships that allow you to maintain
characteristics such as the size, orientation, and position of elements. When
you place a driving dimension on, or between elements, you can change the
element size by editing their dimensional valuesyou do not have to delete or
redraw elements at different sizes.
For example, dimensioning the radius of an arc shows its size. Editing the

value of the radius dimension changes the size of the arc.
To create dimensional relationships, select a dimension command and click

the elements, and key points you want to relate.
Tip
In order to generate driving dimensions you must set Maintain

Relationships on the Tools menu before creating your dimension.
Place a Driving Dimension

1. On the Tools menu, set Maintain Relationships.
3. On the Dimension toolbar, click one of the following commands:
SmartDimension
Distance Between
Angle Between
The dimensions that you place will be driving dimensions by default.

Notes
To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a

driving dimension and, on the ribbon, click Driving/Driven.
To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the
dimension and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then set the
options you want on the Properties dialog box.
Change a Driven Dimension to a Driving

Dimension
1. On the Tools menu, set Maintain Relationships.
2. Select the driven dimension you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, click Driving/Driven. The color of the dimension changes
to indicate a driving dimension.
Notes
To place a driving dimension, you must set Maintain

Relationships on the Tools menu, select an element, and then
click a dimension command on the Dimension toolbar; the
dimension that you place by default is a driving dimension.
To change a driving dimension to a driven dimension, select a

driving dimension and click Driving/Driven.
To set the colors for driving and driven dimensions, select the
dimension and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then set the
options you want on the Properties dialog box.
Return Dimension Text to the Actual Value

of the Element
When you override the value of a driven dimension by editing the dimensional
value, the resulting dimension is not-to-scale. For example, if you override the
dimensional value of 15 millimeters to 30 millimeters, the actual size of the
visible line remains 15 millimeters. Only the dimension text is changed; the
line remains unchanged.
To change the value of a dimension without changing the actual element:

1. Select a driven dimension.
Tip
A color that you set with Style on the Format menu indicates a
driven dimension. You can also set the color by selecting a

dimension and clicking Properties on the Edit menu.
217.
On the ribbon, delete the dimensional value from the Value box
and type a new value.
Notes
To restore the dimension value to the original value of the element

select a dimension, right mouse click and select Not to Scale on
the shortcut menu.
You can show dimensions that are not-to-scale by using Styles on

the Format menu. This option places a zig-zag or straight line
under the dimensional values that are not-to-scale.
To return the dimensional value to the value of the element it

actually measures, delete all the characters from the Value box on
the ribbon. You can also select a dimension and clear Not To
Scale on the shortcut menu.

Dimension Command (Main Toolbar)
Displays the Dimension toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to
place and modify dimensions and annotations.
Dimension Ribbon
Sets options for dimensions. Some options on this toolbar are not available
until you select an element on the drawing sheet.
Tip
Ribbon Options
Dimension Style - Lists and applies the available dimension styles.
Round-Off - Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the
unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values as appropriate for the
unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension being placed and contains
values as appropriate for the dimension.
Dimension Value - Sets the dimensional value.
Driving/Driven - Toggles the selected dimension between a driving and
driven state. If you want to set this option before you place a dimension, you
must setMaintain Relationships on the Tools menu.
Auto Center Mark - Places a center line crosshair at the center of the
radius of curvature being measured by the dimension.
Jog - Offsets the projection line of a coordinate or radial dimension. You
can use this option to prevent the projection line that you are placing from
overlapping other dimensions.
Dimension Axis - Sets the orientation of dimensions placed by Distance

Between or Coordinate Dimension. This option is not available until you
select one of those buttons. This option is not available after you select the
origin element.
When you click Default, the dimensions that you place are parallel
or perpendicular to the horizontal edge of the drawing sheet.
When you click Implicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel
or perpendicular to the element that you are dimensioning.
When you click Explicit, the dimensions that you place are parallel
or perpendicular to the element that you set the dimension axis to
with the Axis on the Dimension Toolbar. You can use Explicit when
the default horizontal and vertical axes are not appropriate for the
geometry that you are dimensioning.
Complement - Places an angular dimension at the 180 degree
complement.
Half/Full - Toggles between half and full. When you toggle this option,
the symmetric diameter appears as half or full.
The following options are available only if you click SmartDimension
button on the Dimension toolbar and select an element:
Length - Places a linear dimension for the following:
The length of a line
The arc length of an arc
The horizontal or vertical distance between the end points of a line
Angle - Places an angular dimension for the angle of a line or the sweep
angle of an arc.
Radius - Places a radial dimension for the following:
Arc
Circle
Ellipse
Curve
Diameter - Places a diameter dimension for an arc or circle.
Prefix - Opens or closes the Dimension Prefix dialog box for specifying
prefix, suffix, superfix, and subfix information.
Dimension Type - Specifies the dimension type and the related
tolerances.
Tip
In the following picture, you can click each palette option to see
the type of dimension and an example of what the dimension will
look like.
Upper Tolerance - Sets the primary upper tolerance value. This option is
available for tolerance or limits dimension types only.
Lower Tolerance - Sets the primary lower tolerance value. This option is
available for tolerance or limits dimension types only.
Class - Sets the tolerance class. This option is available for the class
dimension type only. You can set the deviation (letters) and the grade
(numbers).
Dimension Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a dimension or dimension style. You can point to a
dimension and right-click to access this dialog box from Properties on the
shortcut menu.
General Tab
Sets general properties for dimensions.
Tab Options
Color- Sets colors for a driving, driven, or error dimension.
Driving Dimension- Sets the color used for driving dimensions.
Driven Dimension- Sets the color used for driven dimensions.
Error Dimension - Sets the color for error dimensions. Error dimensions are
driving or driven dimensions that the software cannot recalculate correctly
after parametric attributes on driving dimensions are changed.
Scale Mode - Sets the scale mode to automatic or manual.
Automatic - Determines a correct dimensional value based on the scale set in
the drawing view.
Manual- Scales a dimensional value. The scale value determines the
dimensional value.
Important
Manual mode only works with dimensions that are set to Driven.
Units Tab
Sets the primary units for dimensions.
Tab Options
Linear - Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension.
Units - Sets the primary units for linear dimensions.
Unit Label - Sets the unit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a unit
label.
Subunit Label - Sets the subunit label. You can type up to 20 characters for a

subunit label.
Round -Off - Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the
unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the
unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension that you place and contains
values appropriate for the dimension.
Maximum Subunits - Sets the maximum subunits value. You can type a
value up to 18. This value applies to feet and inches. For example, if you type
13, the dimension appears as 13 inches and not 1 foot and 1 inch.
Angular - Sets the units for an angular dimension.
Units - Sets the primary units for angular dimensions. Options are Degrees,
Deg-Min-Sec, or Radians.
Round -Off - Sets the round-off for the value. This control is sensitive to the
unit setting (decimal or fractional) and contains values appropriate for the
unit. This control is also sensitive to the dimension that you place and contains
values appropriate for the dimension.
Zeroes - Specifies if a zero is on the left or right of the decimal in a
dimension.
Leading - Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear
to the left.
Trailing - Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros
placed is based on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the
dimensional value is .5, and the round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional
value appears as .5000.
Delimiter - Specifies the decimal delimiter for a dimension.
Period - Sets a period as the decimal delimiter.
Comma - Sets a comma as the decimal delimiter.
Space - Sets a space as the decimal delimiter.
Secondary Units Tab

Sets the secondary units for dimensions.
Tab Options
Linear - Specifies the unit settings for a linear dimension.
Units - Sets the secondary units in drawings with dual unit display. For

example, the primary unit can be inches, while the secondary unit can be
millimeters. When you place the dimension, it displays both units. The
software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary unit.
Unit Label - Sets the secondary units label in drawings with dual unit display.
You can type up to 20 characters.
Subunit Label - Sets the secondary subunit label in drawings with dual unit
display. You can type up to 20 characters.
Round -Off - Sets the round-off value for secondary units in drawings with
dual unit display.
Maximum Subunits - Sets the maximum subunits used for secondary
subunits in drawings with dual unit display.
Zeroes - Specifies if a zero appears on the left or right of the decimal in a
dimension.
Leading - Places a zero to the left of the decimal point if no numbers appear
to the left.
Trailing - Places zeros to the right of the decimal point. The number of zeros
placed is based on the active setting for Round-Off. For example, if the
dimensional value is .5, and the round-off setting is .1234, the dimensional
value appears as .5000.
Dual Unit Display - Selecting/Activating this checkbox displays secondary
units for dimensions in drawings. For example, the primary unit can be inches,
while the secondary unit is millimeters. Both units display when you place the
dimension. The software derives the secondary unit by converting the primary
unit.
Text Tab
Sets the text options for dimensions.
Tab Options
Text - Sets text options for a dimension.
Font - Sets the font type for the dimension text.
Font Style- Specifies the font style to use for the text in a dimension.
Font Size - Sets the size for text in a dimension.
Orientation - Sets the orientation for the text on a dimension. For example,
the dimension text looks like the following picture when you select Vertical.
Position - Sets the position where text appears in relation to the base line. The
base line is an imaginary horizontal line directly under a line of text. For
example, when you select Above, the dimension text looks like the following
picture.
Tolerance Text - Sets options for text in certain types of dimensions that have
related tolerances. You can set the dimension type on the dimension ribbon
bar.
Size - Sets the size of the text for tolerance text. The value is a ratio of the
dimension text size. For example, if you enter .5, the size of the tolerance text
will be half the size of the dimension text.
Limit Arrangement - Sets the text arrangement on limit dimensions.
Lines and Coordinate Tab

Tab Options
Dimension Lines - Sets options for dimension lines.
Connect - Controls if the dimension line extends between both terminators
when you place the dimension text and terminators outside the projection
lines.
Width - Sets the width of the dimension line.
Stack Pitch - Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a
ratio of the dimension text size.
Break Line - Sets the size of the break line for the dimension line. This value
is a ratio of the text size.
Coordinate - Sets options for coordinate dimensions.
Auto-Jog - Turns the jog control on or off on the Dimension ribbon. You can
use this option only when you place a coordinate or radial dimension. If you
set Auto-Jog and the distance between two dimensions is less than the value

set for Stack Pitch, then you can place the dimension with a jog in the
projection line.
Common Origin - Sets the symbol type for the common origin on coordinate
dimensions. You can set the symbol type to dot, circle, or none.
Text Position - Positions text in a coordinate dimension.
Stack Pitch - Sets the distance between stacked dimensions. The value is a
ratio of the dimension text size.
Projection Line - Sets options for the projection line of a dimension.
Display - Controls the display of projection lines on linear dimensions. You
can set the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or origin and
measurement. You can use this option to hide projection lines when they
overlap and you are using a pen plotter.
Element Gap - Sets the distance that the projection line is set back from the
element you want to dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension text
size.
Extension - Sets the distance that the projection line extends beyond the
dimension. This value is a ratio of the dimension text size.
Angle - Sets the slant angle of the projection lines on dimensions. This option
is useful when you need to place a dimension on isometric drawings.
Center Mark - Places a center line automatically when you dimension a
nonlinear element.
Extend Center Mark - Displays projection lines on center marks.
Align Groups - Sets the length of all projection lines in a dimension group to
equal the shortest projection line in the group.
Spacing Tab
Sets dimension spacing options. All options are a ratio of the dimension text
value.
Tab Options
Text Clearance Gap - Sets the space between the text and the dimension line.
Dual Display Vertical Gap - Sets the space between the primary and
secondary units when dual unit display is active. You can set Dual Unit
Display on the Secondary Units tab so that dimensions display two units.
Line Spacing - Sets the amount of space between the superfix or subfix and

the dimension text.
Dimension Above Line Gap - Sets the space between the dimension text and
the dimension line.
Horizontal Tolerance Gap - Sets the space between the dimensional value
and the tolerance on dimensions.
Vertical Tolerance Gap - Sets the space between the upper and lower
tolerance value on dimensions.
Vertical Limits Gap - Sets the space between the upper and lower
dimensional values on limit dimensions.
Symbol Gap - Sets the space between the symbol and the dimension line.
You can also set the space between the symbol and the dimension text.
Prefix/Suffix Gap - Sets the amount of space between the prefix or suffix and
the dimension text.
Horizontal Box Gap - Sets the space between the dimension text and the
horizontal edges of the box on dimensions.
Vertical Box Gap - Sets the space between the dimension text and the
vertical edges of the box on dimensions.
Terminator And Symbol Tab

Sets terminator and symbol options for dimensions.
Tab Options
Terminator - Sets options for terminators.
Type - Sets the terminator type for all terminators. Click the various
dimensions in the following picture to see the different types.
Freespace Type - Sets the terminator type for a dimension with a terminator
placed in free space.

Size - Sets the size of the terminator. The value is a ratio of the dimension text
size. For example, if you set Font Size on the Text tab to be .2 cm and Size to
be 2, the terminator is twice the size of the dimension text.
Origin Type - Sets the terminator type used on the origin of a linear
dimension.
Inside Limit - Sets the inside limit for the terminator. The value is a ratio of
the dimension text size. This setting controls when the terminators appear on
the outside of the projection lines according to the options that you set.
Datum Type - Sets the terminator type for datum frames. If you select
Normal, the datum frame uses the active terminator type for dimensions. If
you select Anchor, the datum frame uses an anchor terminator.
Display - Specifies which end of the terminator displays or if both ends
display. You can set the display to none (off), origin, measurement, or both
origin and measurement. The following picture shows the display when you
select Origin and Measurement.
Symbol - Sets options for symbols in dimensions.

Placement - Sets the placement position for the symbol on diameter and
radial dimensions and linear dimensions for an arc. You can place the symbol
before or after the dimension. You can also hide the symbol.
Suppress Diameter - Suppresses the diameter symbol on diameter
dimensions.
Not To Scale - Displays an underline, zigzag, or no indicator on driven
dimensions with overridden values. You can use the zigzag option only on
linear dimensions. You can override a driven dimension value by typing a
new value in the Edit Value box on a dimension ribbon.
Angle Between Command (Dimension

Toolbar)
Places a dimension that measures the angle between elements or key points.
You can place angular dimensions in stacked or chained dimension groups.
You can also add angular dimensions to existing dimension groups.
Axis Command (Dimension Toolbar)

Sets a dimension axis for a drawing. A dimension axis allows you to place
dimensions that are perpendicular to or parallel to an element.
The default axis in a drawing is perpendicular or parallel to the horizontal axis
of a drawing sheet. Dimensions placed along the default axis look like this:
After you set a dimension axis with Axis, you can now place a dimension that
runs parallel or perpendicular to the dimension axis that you have defined. To
use the axis that you have just specified, you must set the type of dimension
axis that you want to use on the dimension ribbon. You do this by clicking
Distance Between or Coordinate Dimension on the Dimension toolbar.
Then, you click Explicit in the Dimension Axis box on the ribbon so that you
can use the dimension axis that you set with Axis.
Coordinate Dimension Command

(Dimension Toolbar)
Places a dimension that measures the distance from a common origin to one or
more key points or elements. The coordinate dimensions that refer to the
common origin are members of a coordinate dimension group.
You can place coordinate dimensions in any order and on either side of the
origin with respect to the dimension axis. You can also add additional
coordinate dimensions to existing coordinate dimension groups.
Distance Between Command (Dimension

Toolbar)
Places a linear dimension that measures the distance between elements or key
points. You can place linear dimensions in stacked dimension groups.
You can place chained dimension groups.
You can also add linear dimensions to existing linear dimension groups.
Dimension Prefix Dialog Box

Adds prefix, suffix, superfix, and subfix text to a dimensional value. You can
use this dialog box while you place or edit a dimension.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(E)
Superfix
Prefix
Value
Suffix
Subfix
Dialog Box Options

Special Characters - Applies a font character to the dimension prefix. You
can use the buttons to apply font characters, such as a diameter, counterbore,
depth, and initial length.
Superfix - Specifies superfix information.
Prefix - Specifies prefix information.
Suffix - Specifies suffix information.
Subfix - Specifies subfix information.
Apply - Applies the prefix to the dimension.
Not To Scale Command (Shortcut Menu)

Returns a driven dimension to its actual value. You can use this command
only on a dimensional value that has been edited. Editing a dimensional value
overrides the original value and makes the dimension not-to-scale. For

example, if you override the dimensional value that is 15 millimeters to be 30
millimeters, the actual size of the line that you see would still be 15
millimeters.
Tip
must select a dimension.

Toolbar)
Places a dimension for the following:
Length and angle of a line
Radius and diameter of a circle
Length, angle, radius, and diameter of an arc
Radius of an ellipse or curve
Symmetric Command (Relationship

Toolbar)
Makes elements symmetric about an axis. The characteristics of the elements
on each side of the axis, such as size and position, are maintained by the
symmetric relationship.
Symmetric Diameter Command (Dimension

Toolbar)
Places a dimension that measures the distance between a center line and
another element or key point, multiplies the distance by two, and displays the
value as a diameter. You can place dimensions that measure the symmetric
diameter of elements in a dimension group.
You can also add additional symmetric diameter dimensions to an existing
dimension group.
Setting Paper and Model Units: An

Overview
Each document in the software is a container of sheets, where each sheet is a
virtual sheet of paper that displays model information.
The software supports measurements in two different spaces: paper space and
model space. The paper space units represent physical measurements on the
virtual sheet. The model space units represent real-world measurements
associated with the model.
Note
Within the SmartSketch drawing environment, model space is

synonymous with the term world space.
You can define the relationship between paper space and model space on the
Sheet Setup dialog box. The default relationship between the paper and
model spaces is 1:1. In other words, one unit of model space is equivalent to
one unit of paper space. For example, if a text box with a font size of 1 inch in
paper space is compared to a vertical line 1 inch in length, the text box and
line appear on the paper to have the same height. However, if you change the
drawing scale to 1:2, the line appears half as tall on the sheet as the text. If
you change the drawing scale to 2:1, the line appears twice as tall on the sheet
as the text. In either case, if you select the line, the length readout remains at 1
inch.
In the current software, you can place only balloons, leaders, and dimensions
in paper space. These graphics annotate objects in the model space but appear
in paper space. You can place text boxes in either paper space or model space.
Tips
If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet with
Insert > Object, the terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in
paper units relative to the source document. The dimension lines
and extension lines scale as though they are in real-world units.
This behavior can cause the dimensions and text to appear very
large or small in the container document. You can set or change
the size for dimension text and annotations by clicking Style on
the Format menu. On the Style dialog box, you select the type of
style you want to set or modify (dimension or text), and then click
New or Modify to set the font size for dimension text or a text
box. Changing the font size of dimension-text style or a text-box
style changes only the dimension text or annotations with the

modified style applied to them.
You can also set the font size for individual dimension text or
annotations by overriding the style that you applied. You do this by
selecting the dimension or text box and editing its properties with
Properties on the shortcut menu or from the Edit menu.
You can adjust how the model units fit within the printable sheet
area by clicking Sheet Setup on the File menu. On the Size and
Scale tab, you can select a scale setting by clicking an item on the
Select Scale dropdown list. The value that you select causes the
model to resize within the printable area, but neither the paper unit
information (dimensions and annotations) or model unit
information is scaled.
Fit a Sketch Drawn in Real-World Units on

the Drawing Sheet
2. On the Size and Scale tab of the Sheet Setup dialog box, select the sheet
size that you want. After you close the dialog box, the correct sheet size is
displayed.
3. Draw the elements that you want using real-world units. Do not worry if
the elements do not fit on the sheet.
4. On the File menu, click Sheet Setup to check the ratio of the sheet size to
the overall drawing size.
5. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, on the Size and Scale tab, click Custom.
You should use the ratio of the drawing to the drawing sheet to determine
the custom scale for the drawing sheet. After you close the dialog box, the
drawing scales to the scale that you selected. All dimensions appear in
real-world units.
Caution
If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the drawing sheet, the
terminators, spaces, text, and styles appear in paper units relative
to the source document. The dimension lines and extension lines
scale as though they are in real-world units. This behavior can
cause the dimensions and text to appear very large or small in the
container document.
Notes
If you select Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the drawing, the
dimensions are scaled to compensate for the change in size. Scale
changes the size of one set of geometry to another set of geometry

in the document. To change the overall size of the graphics with
respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup on the File menu.
Measuring Distances and Areas: An

Overview
You can also measure the length of a line or the diameter of a circle by
selecting the element and looking at the value on the ribbon. For more detailed
work, the software provides commands for measuring distances or areas in a
drawing. Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure
distances or areas with these commands.
Measure Distance measures the distance between points on

elements and points in free space.
Measure Area measures the area inside one or more closed

boundaries.
The distances are shown using the current units of measure for the document.
To set the units for measuring distances or areas, you can use Properties on
the File menu.
Measure an Area
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Measure Area
2. Click inside a closed boundary to measure its area.

The area measurement for the closed boundary appears next to the
pointer. The measured area appears as a gray fill.
Tip
As you click points, press Shift to display the total area by the
pointer.
Notes
If you are measuring multiple areas and want to clear a

measurement, click inside one of the filled, closed boundaries that
you have measured while pressing the Shift key.
When you are drawing elements or modifying a drawing, you can

measure an area with Measure Area at any time.
You can press Tab to move between the area and total area. You
can also press Ctrl + C to copy the value to the Clipboard. You
can then press Ctrl + V to paste the value to a text box or ribbon
field.
Measure a Distance
1. On the Dimension toolbar, click Measure Distance
2. Click in free space or click a key point. This identifies the point to
measure from.
218.
Click a point to measure to. The distance between the two points
appears next to the pointer.
219.
Click another point to measure to. The distance between the last
two points and the distance between the first point and the last point
appear next to the pointer.
Notes
When you move the pointer over a key point, the distance between
the current location of the pointer and the last point you clicked
appears, along with the delta values. The delta values are the
distances, as measured along the X and Y axes.
When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first
and last point that you clicked appears next to the pointer.
When you are in the middle of a task, you can use Measure
Distance at any time.
You can press Tab to move between the distance and total
distance. You can also press Ctrl + C to copy the value to the
Clipboard. You can then press Ctrl + V to paste the value to a text
box or ribbon field.
Set the Unit of Measure

2. On the Properties dialog box, click the Units tab. You can set the units
for the length, area, or angle of a drawing.
Tip
This setting does not set units for dimensions. To set the active

units for dimensions, click Style on the Format menu and set the
units for a dimension style. Active units control the format for
dimensions when they are placed. For existing dimensions, you
can click Properties on the Edit menu and set the units for
dimensions that you have selected.
220.
On the Units tab, set the options you want.
Bearing and Azimuth

You may want to orient your drawing in an environment with a specific
bearing and azimuth. This tool may be useful for applications such as civil
engineering.
Tip
Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize on

the Tools menu to place it on a toolbar or menu. On the Toolbars
tab of the Customize dialog box, click Tools to access the
command.
Set Bearing and Azimuth

1. From a customized toolbar, click Bearing and Azimuth
Tip
Bearing and Azimuth is available only if you use Customize to

221.
Click Default, Bearing, or Azimuth to select the orientation for the
drawing or element.
222.
When you select Azimuth, you can change the current settings of
Base Bearing and Direction.

Displays the most recently selected area of the boundary in the current units. It
also displays the total area of all selected boundaries in the current document
units. You press Shift to display this value.

Measures the distance between points in free space or between key points.
When you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using
Measure Distance at any time. When you move the pointer over a key point,
the distance between the current location of the pointer and the last point you
clicked appears, along with the delta values. The delta values are the
distances, as measured along the x and y axes.
When you click a third point, the cumulative distance between the first and
last point that you clicked appears next to the pointer.
Bearing and Azimuth Command

Allows you to determine how to display the angle for the selected element.
Tip

command.
Set Bearing Dialog Box

Controls the selection of Default, Bearing, and Azimuth angle settings. Also
controls the azimuth settings for Base Bearing and Direction.
Tip

command.
Dialog Box Options

Default - Sets defaults for bearing and azimuth.
Bearing - Determination of position to refer to an angle.
Azimuth - Horizontal direction expressed as an angle, progressing from a
fixed point, based on a circle.
Base Bearing - Direction (North, South, East, West) bearing to refer to an
angle.
Direction - Clockwise or counterclockwise indicator for the angle bearing.
Using the Variable Table: An Overview

You can use the Variable Table to define and edit functional relationships
between the dimensions of a design in a familiar spreadsheet format. The
Variable Table is accessed with Variables on the Tools menu. There are two
types of variables: dimensions displayed in the design and variables you
create directly in the Variable Table. Dimension variables directly control
elements of a design. A user variable must be set equal to a value or
mathematical expression; for example, PI = 3.14159.
You can use variables to do the following:
Drive a dimension with another dimension; Dimension A =

Dimension B
Define a constant; pi=3.14
Drive a dimension with a formula; Dimension A = pi * 3.5
Drive a dimension with a formula and another dimension;

Dimension A = pi * Dimension B
Drive a dimension with a formula that includes a function;

Dimension A = Dimension B + cos(Dimension C)
Drive a dimension with a value from a spreadsheet, such as a

Microsoft Excel document, by copying the value from the
spreadsheet into the Variable Table. Besides Excel, you can use
any other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects.
Accessing the Variable Table

Once you select Variables on the Tools menu, a table appears with the
following columns: Type, Name, Value, and Formula. Each row of the table
displays a variable.
Entering Data into the Variable Table

When you open the Variable Table in the document, all the dimensional
values for the dimensions on the drawing sheet appear in the columns. The
name that appears in the Name column is automatically generated by the
software. You can change the name to something more logical if you want.
Restricting the Display of Variables

You can restrict the display of variables in the table using Filter on the
Variable Table window:
You can display only the variables for dimensions that the software
created.
You can also display variables that are associated with elements in
the current document or the active window
You can also display a set of elements that you have selected in the
document.
Creating Expressions
The system provides a set of standard mathematical functions. The functions
can be typed in with the proper syntax or you can use the Function Wizard to
select and define the function. The Function Wizard is convenient when you
forget the proper syntax for a math function. You start the Function Wizard
by clicking Fx in the Variable Table. The function is written in the Formula
column of the selected row.
Examples
Suppose you draw a sheet metal bracket and you want to build a relationship
between the bend radius and stock thickness. You can use a formula in the
Variable Table to build and manage this relationship. The following example
illustrates how the Variable Table would look if you built a relationship that
changes the bend radius when the stock thickness changes.
Type
Variable
Name
Stock_thickness
Value
.25
Dimension
Bend_radius
.375
Formula
5
*
s
t
o
c
k
_
t
h
i
c

k
n
e
s
s
Here are some more examples of how you might set up the Variable Table:
Type
Variable
Name
c
Value
Formula
0
k
g
Variable
10.0 rad
Variable
20 mm
@c:\bearing.xls!sheet
1!R6C3
@c:\bearing.xls!sheet
1R!6C3
Argument Conventions
The following argument conventions are used in the Variable Table:
In the syntax line, required arguments are bold and optional

arguments are not.
Argument names should follow the rules for Visual Basic.
In the text where functions and arguments are defined, required

and optional arguments are not bold. Use the format in the syntax
line to determine whether an argument is required or optional.
Create a Variable with a Value or

Expression
1. Click Tools > Variables.
2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type for the
variables value. The default type is Distance, which means that any
expression created will be for a distance. For example, if you want to
create a variable to control an angular dimension, you mustselect
Angular.
Tip
To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list.
223.
In the Name column, click an empty cell.
224.
Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press Enter.

225.
In the same row, in the Formula column, do one of the following:
Type the value that you want for the variable.
Type a simple expression for the variable. A simple expression

consists of using basic mathematical operators to set up an
equation using values and other variables. For example, if
variables Var1 and Var2 already exist, you can type the following
formulas when creating a new variable:
Var1 * Var2
Var1 / 3.0
(Var2 + 5.0) * Var1
Var2 ^ 2
Tip
References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive.

For example, if you create the variable Var1, you cannot reference
it using var1.
226.
Click Enter to create the variable.
Edit an Existing Variable

1. In the document, select the dimensions that you want to appear in the
Variable Table.
3. The Variable Table automatically displays the dimensions that are
selected in the document. To see other dimensions and variables, click
Filter on the Variable Table window.
4. On the Filter dialog box, set the following options to specify which
variables or dimensions are displayed in the Variable Table. For example,
to see all the dimensions and variables in the Variable Table, set the
following options:
In the Type box, select Dimensions and User Variables.
In the Named By box, select Both.
In the Graphics In box, select File.
Tip
When you click OK, the settings are saved, so the next time you
use Filter, the last settings are used. A convenient method of

limiting the number of variables and dimensions displayed is to
name the ones you use frequently. Then, on the Filter dialog box,
in the Named By box, click Users to display the named variables
and dimensions.
227.
Once a variable is displayed in the Variable Table, you can
change any of its attributes, except its type and the unit type. On the
Variable Table, in the Value column of a variable, enter a new value to
change the variable.
228.
In the Formula column, click the cell and use one of several
methods to create a new formula.
Notes
To access Filters on the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in

the white area of the Variable Table and right-click.
Create a Variable Using a Function or

Subroutine
2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select the unit type. This is
the unit type for the variables value. The default type is Distance.
Tip
To store a value without units, select Scalar from the list.
229.
In the Name column, click an empty cell.
230.
Type a name for the variable that you want to create. Press Enter.
231.
In the same row, in the Formula column, click a cell.
232.
Click Function Wizard.
233.
box.
Click the function that you want in the Function Wizard dialog
234.
Enter the appropriate values in the dialog box. The Function
Wizard dialog box displays the available functions and appropriate input.
For example, if the variables Var1 and Var2 already exist, some valid
formulas using functions are as follows:
Sqr(Var1) * Sin(Var2)
Sqr( Var1^2 + Var2^2 )
Tip
References to existing variables in a formula are case-sensitive.

For example, if you create the variable Var1, you cannot reference

it using var1.
Notes
You can write external functions and subroutines in BASIC and

use them as variable formulas. You can write these functions in
Visual Basic, or any text editor, and save them in a .BAS file. The
Function Wizard steps you through the process of selecting the
BASIC module, the specific function, and the necessary input and
output.
If you type a function and you cannot remember the argument list,
press Ctrl + A after you have typed the equal sign, function name,
and opening parenthesis. This activates the Function Wizard with
the function already selected for you.
You can also enter expressions with functions directly in the cell in
the Formula column.
Create a Variable with a Link to a

Spreadsheet
You can use Microsoft Excel to link a variable to a spreadsheet. Besides
Excel, you can use other spreadsheet software that can link or embed objects.
Before you can link a variable to a spreadsheet, you must first create the
variables you want in the design document.
1. In another application, such as Excel, open the document that contains the
spreadsheet you want to link to. The spreadsheet should contain the
appropriate values for dimensional relationships.
Tip
You can edit this link with Links on the Edit menu.
235.
Open the design document that you want to link to and, on the
Tools menu, click Variables. Arrange the windows of the spreadsheet
document and the Variable Table in the design document so that you can
see the appropriate cells in both documents.
236.
In the spreadsheet, select the cell that you want to link to. It can be
a single cell or two adjacent cells, where the first cell contains the value
and the second cell contains the units.
A
1.
3.75
in
237.
Copy the selected cells. For example, if you are using Excel, click
Copy on the Edit menu.

238.
In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of
the variable that you want to link the spreadsheet to.
239.
On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.
Tip
To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white
area of the Variable Table and right-click.
Select Enter to accept the value you pasted. When you edit the
value in the spreadsheet, the variable in the Variable Table
updates as well. For example, when you link the dimensions in the
design document to an Excel spreadsheet, you can change the
dimensions of the design by editing the corresponding values in the
Excel spreadsheet. The design document automatically updates.
Notes
You can edit the links with Edit Links on the shortcut menu.
Edit a Formula Containing a Function

2. In the Variable Table, click a cell that contains a formula that has a
function.
3. Select a function that you want to replace.
4. Click Function Wizard. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the
function you selected.
5. Type a new function to replace the existing function.
6. Click Next.
7. Click Finish to replace the function in the formula.
Insert a Function Into a Formula

2. In the Variable Table, click the function cell in which you want to enter
the formula.
3. Click Function Wizard.
4. Click the function category and the function name.
5. Click Next. The Function Wizard dialog box displays the arguments for
the function.
6. Type the values for the arguments.

7. Click Finish to enter the completed function into your formula.
Notes
You can enter values, references, names, formulas, and other

functions into the boxes on the Function Wizard dialog box.
These entries must produce valid values for the argument.
If an argument is required, the word "required" appears in the display area
on the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box.
Format a Column
2. Drag the appropriate grid lines to adjust the column width.

Variables Command (Tools Menu)
Accesses the Variable Table, which operates much like a software
spreadsheet. The Variable Table allows you to define and manipulate
drawing variables and their values, as well as establish functional
relationships between the design variables. For example, you can use the
Variable Table to create expressions for dimensional values.
Tip
Variables is available only if you use the Customize command to

Variable Table Dialog Box

Displays, defines, and manipulates design variables and functional
relationships between the variables. This table operates much like a software
spreadsheet. The design variables can be dimensions in the document or
variables defined with the Variable Table. The table consists of the following
columns: Type, Name, Value, Formula. Each row of the table displays a
variable.
Dialog Box Options

Unit Type - Specifies the unit of measure for the variable entered in the
Variable Table. The box is located in the top left corner of the Variable Table.
The default type is distance which means that any expression created will be a
distance parameter. For example, if you want to create a variable to control an
angular dimensions, you should change the unit type to angular. Then, the
variable created will be an angular type, which can be used to control an
angular dimensional relationship.
Enter - Accepts the edits you have made in the cell.
Cancel - Clears the contents of the cell and returns the cell to its previous
value.
Filter - Access the Filter dialog box so that you can restrict the display of

variables in the Variable Table window.
Function Wizard - Accesses the Function Wizard dialog box.
Help - Activates online Help for the Variable Table dialog box.
The following items describe the columns in the

Variable Table:
Type - Displays the variable type, generally the type of a dimension, such as
DIM, VAR, SCALAR, and so forth. DIM refers to a dimensional relationship.
VAR refers to a variable that you have created. This option is read-only.
Name - Names the variable. By default, the software places the name of a
dimension in this column. These names can be renamed to a more logical one,
if you want. You must always name user-defined variables when you create
them. A variable must be named if you want to refer to it in the Formula
column of another row. You can change the name by editing the Name cell
and then selecting Check at the top of the Variable Table.
Variable names should meet the following requirements:
They must begin with a letter.
They must contain only letters, numbers, and the underscore

character; you cannot use punctuation characters and spaces.
They must be forty characters or less.
Value - Displays the current value of the variable. A variable always has a
value. You cannot edit the value of a variable that has formula. You can edit
driving dimensions with the Variable Table.
Formula - Displays the function or relation that defines the value of the
variable. You can enter a mathematical expression in a cell in this column to
calculate the value for a corresponding dimension. If the Formula cell is
empty, then the variable value is independent of other variables.
When using variable names within a formula, the names are case sensitive.
For example, the names var1 and Var1 reference two different variables.
If a value is defined by a formula, the formula appears in the Formula cell.
You can enter an algebraic expression in the formula cell to define the value
of the variable. The single line expression must be in standard Visual Basic
syntax. The formula can include any available function. The resulting value of
the formula is shown in the Value column of the variable.
The software provides a set of standard mathematical functions. You can also

select Visual Basic functions that you wrote and saved. The functions can be
typed in with the proper syntax or you can use the Function Wizard to select
and define the inputs to the function. If the function does not contain proper
syntax, the software displays a message indicating that there is an error in the
formula.
Alphabetical List of Functions

The following functions are available in the Variable Table. They are
referred to as math and trig functions.
ABS
ATN
COS
EXP
Returns the absolute value of a number

Returns the arctangent of a number
Returns the cosine of a number
Returns e raised to the power of a given
number
FIX
Returns the integer portion of a number.
INT
Rounds a number down to the nearest
integer
LOG
Returns the natural algorithm of a number
RND
Rounds a number to a specified number of
digits
SGN
Returns an integer indicating the sign of a
number
SIN
Returns the sine of the given angle
SQR
Returns the square root of number.
TAN
Returns the tangent of an angle
The following functions are also available in the Variable Table.
User, Visual Basic
Relates variables through a user function,

usually defined with Visual Basic.
Filter Command (Shortcut Menu)

Restricts the display in the Variable Table to variables that you select on the
Filter dialog box.
Tip
To select this command from the shortcut menu, you must first
select Variables on the Tools menu and then pause the mouse
pointer in the Variable Table window.
Filter Dialog Box

Controls which variables appear in the Variable Table.
Dialog Box Options

Type - Specifies the type of variables that are displayed in the Variable Table.
If you click Dimension, then only dimension variables are displayed in the
Variable Table; these variables directly control elements of a design. If you
click User Variables, then only logical variables that you created are
displayed. This variable type cannot directly control a design. A user variable
must be set equal to a value or mathematical expression; for example, PI =
3.14159. Variables can control dimensional relationships by setting the
dimensional relationship equal to the variable.
Named By - Controls the view in the Variable Table so that only named
variables are displayed.
User - Displays only variables that you have named.
System - Displays only variables, usually the dimensions, that the software
has created.
Both - Displays all variables that are named.
Graphics In - Displays variables that are associated with elements in the
current document, active window, or group of elements that you have
selected.
Last Selected Window - Displays variables that are associated with elements
in the active window.
Select Set - Displays variables that are associated with elements in a group
that you have selected in the document.
File - Displays variables that are associated with elements in the current
document.

Selects the function you want to enter.
Dialog Box Options

Function Category - Selects subsets of all available functions. If you click the
All in the Function Category box, all the available functions appear. If you
select any other category, only those functions that belong to that category

appear.
Custom functions that you define are included under their assigned categories,
or in the user-defined category if no other categories are assigned. See the
alphabetical list of functions.
Function Name - Lists all built-in and custom functions that are available in
the selected category. Also lists built-in and custom macro functions if a
macro sheet is active. The display area describes the selected function.
Next - Moves to the next dialog box of the Function Wizard. You should
click Next after you have selected the function you want to insert into the
Formula Bar or the selected cell. After you finish typing values into the
appropriate fields, the Function Wizard Step 2 Of 2 dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box appears first if you are entering a math and trig function.
Tip
If you select a function that you defined using Visual Basic, a

dialog box appears first that allows you to open the document that
contains the function. After you open the document, the Function
Wizard Step 2 Of 2 dialog box is displayed.
Finish - Inserts the function into the Formula Bar. If you do not enter an
argument, the software inserts the argument names as placeholders in the
formula.
Cancel - Closes the Function Wizard dialog box without entering anything
into the Formula Bar or into the selected cell.

Enters values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the fields.
The dialog box changes according to the function you select in the Function
Wizard Step 1 of 2 dialog box. Your entries must produce valid values for the
arguments. If an argument is required for the function to be entered
successfully, the word "required" appears in brackets in the display area.
Dialog Box Options

FuncName - Displays the name of the function.
FnSummary - Displays a summary of the function.
Number - Displays the number of the function.
First Arg - Displays the argument of the variable. In the Function Wizard
Step 1 of 2 dialog box, if the selected variable is a subroutine that you defined,

more than one box appears on the Function Wizard Step 2 of 2 dialog box.
The checkbox to the right of the field indicates whether the variable is an
input or output argument.
Back - Moves from the current Function Wizard dialog box to the preceding
one.
Finish - Enters the completed function in the Variable Table.
Open Source Command

Opens a spreadsheet in the Variable Table that has been linked to it with
Paste Link.
Tips
must select Variables on the Tools menu.
To access the Open Source command, right-click the Formula

box in the Variable Table. On the shortcut menu, click Edit
Links. Select a link, and then click Open Source.
Paste Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Links data in a document to a cell in the Variable Table.
Tip
must select Variables on the Tools menu.
Sample Workflows
Example: Draw a Line with PinPoint
You can use PinPoint to draw a line starting at a specific x and y distance
from a known position in your drawing.
1. On the Main toolbar, click PinPoint
2. Click where you want the target point to be.

3. Change the step value in the PinPoint Ribbon if it is not already set to a
value that is appropriate for the operation.
5. Move the pointer around on the drawing sheet. PinPoint displays at the
pointer its current x and y positions in relation to the target point.
6. Click when the pointer is positioned where you want the line to begin.
7. Click where you want the second point of the line to be, or type the length
and/or angle on the Line/Arc Continuous ribbon and then click to draw
the line.
8. If you are finished with the PinPoint command, click PinPoint on the
Main toolbar to dismiss the command.
Place a Doubleline Precisely

1. On the Tools menu, set the PinPoint option On.
Tip
You can click Reposition Target on the PinPoint toolbar or press

F12 to change the location of the target point to the current
position.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Place Doubleline.

2. Click a point to start the doubleline.
3. Click a point to end the doubleline. This action defines the length and
rotation angle of the doubleline.
4. To end the doubleline, right-click.
5. Pause over the doubleline, and press F12 to reposition the target point and
to precisely determine the starting point of the next doubleline.
6. Place the second doubleline relative to a known point on the first one.
Notes
You can also press F9 to set PinPoint on or off.
the ribbon. You can also use a combination of graphic and ribbon
input.
You can press Esc to end a doubleline or a doubleline segment.
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software creates relationships

between the endpoints of the lines.
You can use the software to create an end point of a doubleline

tangent or perpendicular to the key point or end point of another
element.
shortcut menu to edit a doubleline.
Measure the Length of a Line

Even when you are in the middle of a task, you can measure distances using
Measure Distance. For example, consider the following workflow.
1. On the Draw toolbar, select Line/Arc Continuous and draw a line.
240.
On the Tools menu, click Measure Distance and measure a
distance.
Tip
You do not need to exit Line/Arc Continuous before measuring a

distance.
241.
Right-click to exit Measure Distance. Line/Arc Continuous is
still activeyou can pick up where you left off and continue using
Line/Arc Continuous.
Dimension the Length of a Line

2. Click a line. SmartDimension dynamically displays a linear dimension.
242.
Position the dimension, and then click to place it.
Dimension the Diameter of a Circle

2. Click a circle. SmartDimension dynamically displays a diameter

dimension.
243.
Position the dimension, and then click to place it.
Using Variables to Calculate Dimensional

Values
You can use the Variable Table to create expressions that change dimensions
in the drawing when you change the expressions.
1. Open a drawing document.
2. On the Tools menu, click Variables. The Variable Table appears in a
window.
3. On the Variable Table window, click Filter and define which variables
you want to display in the Variable Table. For example, on the Filter
dialog box, if you select Dimensions in Type and then select Window,
this displays all the dimensions that appear in the active window.
4. In the Variable Table, click the Formula cell that displays the dimension
that you want to edit and type an arithmetic expression to calculate the
value of the dimension: V681/2. When you type an entry in the cell, the
entry also appears in the Formula Bar.
Type
Name
Value
Formula
Dimension
V680
4.25 mm
V681/2
Dimension
V681
3.00 mm
244.
On the Formula Bar, click Enter or press Enter to calculate the
result of the expression. In this example, when V681 is modified, V680 is
automatically updated to reflect the relationship.
Type
Dimension
Dimension
Name
V680
V681
Value
50 mm
3.00 mm
Formula
V681/2
Creating a Variable with an External

Function or Subroutine
The following example uses a following function and subroutine written in
BASIC. They are stored in a document called FUNCTIONS.BAS. To see the
syntax of the function and subroutine, click Function.
In FUNCTIONS.BAS, the function AddTwo takes two numbers as input,

adds them, and outputs a single value. A function can take any number of
arguments as input, but can only output a single value. When using a function
as the formula of a variable, the result of the function is the value of the
variable. The input to the function can be specific value or other variables.
The subroutine Normalize takes three values as input and outputs three

values. Output variables need to be specified by using the ByRef keyword.
Using ByRef specifies that the variable is being passed in as reference and can
be modified by the subroutine. Since a subroutine can have multiple output
values, it can be used as the formula for several variables.
To use the document FUNCTIONS.BAS in a Variable Table, you can take the
following steps:
1. On the Tools menu, click Variables.
2. In the Variable Table, in the Unit Type list, select Distance.
3. In appropriate cells, type the following entries to create three input
variables.
Type
Name
Value
Formula
Var
Var1
5.50 in
Var
Var2
3.25 in
Var
Var3
7.80 in
245.
In appropriate cells, type three more entries to create three output
variables with any value: X, Y, and Z.
Type
Name
Var
Var1
Value
Formula
5
0
i
n
Var
Var2
3.25 in
Var
Var3
7.80 in
Var
0.00 in
Var
0.00 in
Var
0.00 in
246.
Select any of the output variables (X, Y, or Z) and click Fx to start
the Function Wizard.
247.
On the Function Wizard - Step 1 of 2 dialog box, in the Function
Category list, select User Defined.
248.
it.
On the Open dialog box, select the functions.bas document to open
249.
On the Function Wizard - Step 1 of 2 dialog box, in the Function
Category box, click Visual Basic. In the Function Name box, click
Functions.Normalize to select the function that you want to use from the
functions.bas document.

250.
Click Next.
251.
On the Function Wizard - Step 2 of 2 dialog box, type the entries
shown to specify the value or variable that is to be used as input for each
input argument and the variable to be used for each output argument.
In this box
InX As Double
InY As Double
InZ As Double
ByRef OutX As Double
ByRef OutY As Double
ByRef OutZ As Double
252.
Click Finish.
Type this
Var1
Var2
Var3
X
Y
Z
The result within the Variable Table is shown below. The function is
assigned as the formula to all of the variable that were specified to be
output of the function. If any of the input values, (Var1, Var2, or Var3),
change, the function is automatically run and the output variables are
updated.
Type
Var
Var
Var
Var
Name
Var1
Var2
Var3
X
Value
5.50 in
3.25
7.80
0.55
Var
0.32
Var
0.77
Formula
Functions.Normalize(
Var1,Var2,Var3,X,Y,
Z)
Var1,Var2,Var3,X,Y,
Z)
Var1,Var2,Var3,X,Y,
Z)
Linking Variables to a Spreadsheet

Before you can link a variable to a spreadsheet, you must first create the
variables you want in the design document. You can link to a spreadsheet
created in Microsoft Excel or other spreadsheet software that can link or
embed objects.
1. In the current document, create a rectangle and dimensions as shown.
253.
On the Tools menu, click Variables to display the dimensions you
defined.
Type
Dim
Dim
Name
_V112
_V114
Value
30.00 mm
60.00 mm
Formula
Tip
Although the values that appear in the Name column are

automatically generated by the software, you can edit the names.
254.
In Excel, create and save a document that contains the spreadsheet
you want to link to. The spreadsheet should contain the appropriate values
for dimensional relationships as follows:
A
B
1.
height
35
2.
width
65
255.
Arrange the windows of the Excel document and the SmartSketch
document so that you can see the appropriate cells in both documents.
256.
In the Excel document, select the cell that you want to link to.
257.
On the Edit menu, click Copy to copy the selected cells.
258.
Click on the SmartSketch document so that it becomes the active
document.
259.
In the Variable Table, in the Formula column, click the cell of
the variable that you want to link the spreadsheet to.
260.
On the shortcut menu, click Paste Link.
Tip
To access the shortcut menu, put the mouse pointer in the white
area of the Variable Table and right-click.
261.
Click Enter to accept the value you pasted.
262.
Repeat the previous steps as needed for the other values. The
resulting Variable Table should update as follows:
Type
Dim
Name
_V112
Value
35.00 mm
Formula
@C:\variable\part1.xl

s!Sheet!R1C2
Dim
_V114
65.00 mm
@C:\variable\part1.xl
s!SheetR2C2
When you edit the value in the Excel document, the variable in the Variable
Table updates as well. When you link the dimensions in the SmartSketch
document to the Excel document, you can change the dimensions of the
SmartSketch document by editing the corresponding values in the Excel
document. The SmartSketch document automatically updates.
Transforming Elements: An Overview
Transforming Elements: An
Overview
Using the software tools, you can easily change the shape, size, angle, or
relationship of an existing element. The Draw, Change, and Relationship
toolbars contain most of the buttons that you can use to transform an element.
The Draw Toolbar

Element handles can be used to quickly transform elements. For example, you
can change an arc by clicking the element with the Select Tool on the Draw
toolbar and dragging the element's handles. The selected arc is transformed to
a straight line by dragging the mid point handle. The selected arc is
transformed to a circle by dragging an end point handle.
The Draw toolbar also provides options for extending or trimming elements.
You can click Extend to Next to extend an element, or you can click Trimor
Trim Corner to trim an element.
You can also add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the
Draw toolbar.
The Change Toolbar

Elements can be mirrored by clicking Mirror on the Change toolbar. The
software mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you
define. You can also mirror and copy elements.
You can rotate an element a precise angle about a specified point by using
Rotate on the Change toolbar. You can use the Rotate Ribbon to change
Step Angle, Rotation Angle, and Position Angle values.
You can also use the Change toolbar to scale elements. Scalable elements
include framed elements, such as text boxes. After clicking Scale on the
Change toolbar, you can use the Scale Ribbon to increase the Scale Factor.
Important
You cannot use Scale to scale or scale and copy elements in a

drawing view because a scale factor has already been applied to
the drawing view.
The Relationship Toolbar

You can also use the Relationship toolbar to transform elements. For
example, selecting Equal and clicking two elements will make the elements
equal in size.

The software will only allow you to select elements that are valid input for a
specific command. For example, if you use the Concentric button, only
circles, arcs, or ellipses can be selected.
Note
When you apply a relationship between elements, the elements are

modified to reflect the relationship. If Maintain Relationships is
set when you use the commands on the Relationship toolbar to
add relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be
maintained.
Changing the Shape of an Element: An

Overview
You can change the size, position, or orientation of an element with your
pointer. When you select an element with the Select Tool, its handles are
displayed at key positions.
You can change the shape of a selected element by dragging one of its
handles. The first figure shows the effect of dragging an end point handle. The
second figure shows the effect of dragging the mid point handle.
Modify an Element with the Select Tool

1. On the Draw toolbar, click Select Tool.
3. Position the pointer over one of the element's handles. The pointer
changes to show that the element can now be modified.
4. Drag the element handle to reposition it. You can use relationships to
position the handle precisely.

Notes
To retain the angle or aspect ratio of the element you are

modifying, hold the Shift key while you drag the element's handle.
To suspend the effect of relationship handles so that you can

modify the element more freely, hold the Alt key while you drag
the handle. The software maintains relationships as appropriate for
the modified element.
Rotating Elements: An Overview

Using Rotate on the Change toolbar, you can rotate one or more elements a
precise angle about a specified point.
You can first select the element and then click Rotate, or you can click the
button and then the element.
As you click to define the reference points for the rotation, the software
dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation. If you want to define a
precise location for the rotation, you can enter values in the ribbon. You can
enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to dynamically view the
results of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the rotation is
displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees so that the
rotation is fully dynamic.
The Rotation Angle box on the ribbon displays the angle of change between
the old and new positions with a positive value. The Position Angle box
displays an absolute angle of the new position of the rotation. You can type
values in both of these boxes and preview the results. You then click to
complete the rotation of the element.
By default, a copy is made of the element when you rotate it. If you do not
want a copy, you should clear Copy on the ribbon.
Rotate an Element
2. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate
3. If you want to copy the rotated elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Click where you want the center of rotation to be. The software
dynamically displays a reference axis for the rotation.
5. Click to define the other end of the reference axis. The software
dynamically displays the rotation axis and elements being rotated. The
location and position of the reference axis defines the rotation from point.
6. Position the elements where you want them and then click to define the
rotation to point.
Notes
To rotate by increments, type a value in the Step Angle box on the

ribbon.
You can click Rotate before you select elements to rotate.
You can use relationship indicators to define the rotation from and
to points.
Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to copy the rotated elements,

you can hold Ctrl while you click to define the to point.
Relationships between elements within the selection set are

maintained if the relationships still apply after the elements have
been rotated.
You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom

and Pan, while you are using Rotate.
When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Rotate at
the point where you left off.

Rotates one or more elements a precise distance or angle about a specified
point.
Rotate Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Copy - Creates a copy of the element that you are rotating. If you do not
want a copy of the rotated element, then clear this option.
Step Angle - Specifies the rotation step angle. The step angle specifies the
increments, in degrees, that an element rotates from a temporary axis. The
temporary axis is the line between the element's center of rotation (A) and the
point that you rotate the element from (B).
You can enter increments in the Step Angle box if you want to dynamically
view the results of the rotation. For example, if the box is set to 30.0, the
rotation is displayed in 30 degree increments. The default setting is 0 degrees
so that the rotation is fully dynamic.

Rotation Angle - Defines the rotation angle. The rotation angle is the angle
between the point that you rotate from and the point that you rotate to. In the
following picture, the center of rotation (A) is shown with the point that you
rotate the element from (B).
The rotation angle (C) is the angle of change between the old and new
positions of the rotated element. The value is always positive.
Position Angle - Displays the angle between the horizontal axis through the
center of rotation (A) and the point that you rotate from (B). Then, if you
rotate the element, the position angle (C) changes to become the angle
between the horizontal axis and the point that you rotate to. The position angle
is always a positive value that is measured counter-clockwise from the axis.
Mirroring Elements: An Overview

To mirror an element, you can click Mirror on the Change toolbar. The
software mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you
define. You can mirror with or without making a copy.
Mirror an Element
You can mirror elements by defining a mirror axis or by using a linear

element as a mirror axis. You can also mirror and copy elements.
To mirror about an existing mirror axis or linear element

2. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror
3. If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Locate a mirror axis. The mirrored elements are displayed dynamically on
the other side of the
Tip
If you locate a linear element, the element can be part of the

selection set.
263.
Position the pointer so that the mirrored elements are where you

want them, then click.
To mirror about a mirror axis that you define

2. On the Change toolbar, click Mirror.
3. If you want to copy the mirrored elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Define one end of the mirror axis by click in free space or by clicking a
key point. The software displays the mirror axis and mirrored elements
dynamically.
5. Move the pointer until the mirror axis and the mirrored elements where
you want them to be, then click.
Notes
If Maintain Relationships is set, the software places a symmetric

relationship when you mirror and copy elements. The mirror axis
is used as the symmetry axis.
Relationships within the selection set are copied to the mirrored

elements if they are still applicable.
You can click Mirror before you select elements to mirror.
Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to mirror and copy, you can
hold Ctrl while you click to position the elements.
Instead of positioning the mirror axis dynamically, you can use the
Position Angle box on the ribbon.
You can use relationship indicators to define a mirror axis.
You can use other view manipulation commands, such as Zoom

and Pan, while you are using Mirror.
When you finish manipulating the view, the software returns you to Mirror at
the point where you left off.

Mirrors one or more selected elements about a line or axis that you define.
You can mirror without copying, or mirror and copy.
Mirror Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Copy - Mirrors and copies the elements in the selection set.
Position Angle - Sets the angle of the mirror axis. The origin of the angle
measurement is the point you clicked for the beginning of the mirror axis.
Setting the position angle to 0 extends the axis horizontally to the right of the
screen, 90 extends the axis vertically to the top, 180 extends the axis
horizontally to the left, and 270 extends the axis vertically to the bottom.
Scaling Elements: An Overview

Scale on the Change toolbar reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale
factor that you define. The scale factor is the same along the x and y axes.
Scalable elements include framed elements, such as text boxes. You cannot
use Scale to scale or scale and copy elements in a drawing view because a
scale factor has already been applied to the drawing view.
Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the relationships are
still applicable after the elements have been scaled. If not, the relationships are
deleted.
To define the new scale, you can click points on the drawing sheet or you can
type a value in the Scale Factor box on the ribbon. You can also use the Step
box on the ribbon to make the Scale Factor increase or decrease
incrementally as you move the mouse.
Scale an Element
2. On the Change toolbar, click Scale
3. If you want to copy the scaled elements, click Copy on the ribbon.
4. Click where you want the scale origin to be. The software displays a
crosshair at the scale origin, and dynamically displays a line between the
scale origin and the pointer.
264.
Move the pointer until the elements are the size you want and then
click.
Notes
Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the

relationships are still applicable after the elements have been
scaled.
You can click Scale before you select elements to scale.
Instead of clicking to define the new scale, you can use the Scale
Factor box on the ribbon.
Instead of using Copy on the ribbon to scale and copy, you can
hold Ctrl while you click to define the new scale.
You can use relationship indicators with this command.
You can use the Step box on the ribbon to make the Scale Factor
increase or decrease incrementally as you move the mouse.
You can use the Reference box on the ribbon to change how the
command dynamics correspond to the Scale Factor.
To change the overall size of the graphics with respect to the paper
size, use Sheet Setup on the File menu.
Scale an Element with Its Handles

You can use handles to scale framed elements such as text boxes, symbols,
and linked or embedded objects.
2. Position the pointer over one of its handles.
3. Drag the handle to scale the element or object.
Notes
You can also click Scale on the Change toolbar to scale the

drawing; the dimensions are scaled to compensate for the change
in size. Scale changes the size of one set of geometry to another set
of geometry in the document. To change the overall size of the
graphics with respect to the paper size, use Sheet Setup on the File
menu.
Relationships within the selection set are maintained if the

relationships are still applicable after the elements have been
scaled.
Scale an Inserted Object Back to Its Original

Model Size
When you insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation document into a drawing sheet
using Object on the Insert menu, the object is automatically scaled to fit the
print area of the drawing sheet. The print area size changes depending on the
selected working sheet. In some cases, you might want to work in model
space and not paper space.
1. Click Insert > Object to insert an AutoCAD or MicroStation object.
2. Highlight the inserted object with the Select tool.
4. On the Info tab of the Properties dialog box, click Scale (1:1). After you
close the dialog box, the inserted object changes back to the original
model size.
Notes
If an inserted object was scaled before bringing it into the drawing

sheet, you might need to adjust the scale on the Properties dialog
box to get the results you want.
After inserting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document, if you

have not performed any other actions, you can click Undo on the
Edit menu to change the object back to the original model size.

Reduces or enlarges selected elements by a scale factor that you define. The
scale factor is the same along the X and Y axis. Scalable elements include
framed elements, such as text boxes. You can use Scale to scale, or to
simultaneously scale and copy.
Scale Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Copy - Scales and copies the elements in the selection set.
Step - Specifies the step value for the Scale Factor. The step value causes the
Scale Factor to be decreased or increased in increments as you move the
pointer toward or away from the scale origin. For example, if you set the step
value to 0.25, the scale increases in increments of 0.25 as you move the
pointer away from the scale origin.
Scale Factor - Specifies how much the software reduces or enlarges the
element. A scale factor between zero and one reduces; a scale factor greater
than one enlarges.
Reference - Specifies how long the dynamic line from the scale origin to the
pointer has to be in order to achieve a Scale Factor of 1.
For example, if you set Reference to 1, for every inch you move the pointer
away from the scale origin, the scale factor increases by one. If you set
Reference to 2, for every two inches you move the pointer away from the
scale origin, the scale factor increases by one.
Extending or Trimming Elements: An

Overview
You can trim or extend elements with buttons on the Draw toolbar. You can
also add fillets or chamfers by clicking Fillet or Chamfer on the Draw
toolbar.
Relationships are added or removed as necessary when you trim or extend an

element. For example, if you trim part of a circle and more than one arc
remains, concentric and equal relationships are applied between the remaining
arcs.
You can also draw a chamfer on two different elements with Chamfer on the
Draw toolbar. The elements must be linear, but do not have to intersect. The
elements cannot be parallel to each other.
When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by clicking the
corner and then moving the pointer in the distance that you want. A final click
on the drawing sheet places the chamfer (B).
To place a fillet, you can click Fillet on the Draw toolbar and then select the
elements you want to modify. As with any command, you can use a
combination of clicks and ribbon input.
Extend an Element
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Extend to Next
To extend one element at a time, click each element near the end
you want to extend.
To extend more than one element at the same time, drag the
pointer over the elements near the end you want to extend. When
you release the mouse button, all the elements are extended.
Notes
Before you select an element to extend, you can view the possible
results. When you move the pointer over elements, SmartSketch
displays the extension that will be drawn if you click.
If an element does not extend in the direction you want it to, move
your pointer closer to the end of the element you want to extend.
Trim an Element
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim
To trim one element at a time, click each element you want to trim.
To trim more than one element at the same time, drag the pointer
over the elements. When you release the mouse button, all the
elements are trimmed.
Notes
Before you click an element to trim, you can use PickQuick to see
which portion of the element will be trimmed. When you move the
pointer over the elements, PickQuick highlights the portion of the
element that will be trimmed if you click.
If you trim an element that does not intersect any other elements,
the command trims the entire element, effectively deleting the
element.
Draw a Corner by Trimming and Extending

Elements
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Trim Corner
Click each element you want to trim or extend.
Drag the pointer over one or more elements, then release the
mouse button. The parts of the element over which you dragged
the mouse remainother parts are trimmed or extended as
necessary.
Tip
You can draw only one corner at a time by dragging the pointer.
Draw a Chamfer
Tip
You can draw a chamfer only between linear elements.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Chamfer
2. On the ribbon, type a distance value in the Setback A box. The first linear
element will be set back this distance from the corner.
To define the setback distance for the second linear element, type a
value in the Setback B box on the ribbon.
To define the chamfer angle, type a value in the Angle box on the
ribbon.
265.
Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback A
value.
266.
Click the linear element to which you want to apply the Setback B
value or the chamfer angle value.

Tip
The lines that you select do not need to intersect, but they cannot
be parallel.
3. Click to draw the chamfer.
Notes
When two lines intersect, you can draw a chamfer simply by

clicking the corner and then moving the pointer in the distance that
you want. A final click on the drawing sheet places the chamfer.
You can draw a chamfer with equal chamfer angles. Click the two
linear elements you want to use. When the chamfer is displayed
dynamically, move the pointer until the setback distance you want
to use is displayed, then click.
You can switch the setback values for the linear elements. After
you click the linear elements you want to use, move the mouse
pointer to one side or the other of the temporary line display, then
click.
When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw
the chamfer in any of the quadrants. The software trims the
remaining elements at the end points of the chamfer.
You can easily draw more than one 45 degree chamfer with the
same setback distance. On the ribbon, type a value in the Setback
A or Setback B box. The value in the setback box is active until
you change it, so you can click one corner after another to draw
equivalent chamfers.
You can draw a chamfer by dragging the pointer over the two
elements that you want to draw the chamfer between. When you
use this method, the setback distance and angle boxes on the
ribbon are not active.
Draw a Fillet
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fillet.

2. On the ribbon, type a radius in the Radius box.
3. Click one of the elements that you want to draw the fillet between. You
can draw a fillet between arcs, lines, circles, ellipses, and curves.
4. Click the other element.
5. Click to draw the fillet.
Notes
You can draw a fillet without typing a radius. Click the two
elements you want to use. Then move the pointer to a position that
defines the radius, and click.
When the elements you want to use cross each other, you can draw
a fillet at any of the quadrants. The software trims the remaining
elements at the end points of the fillet.
You can draw a fillet at a corner with one click. On the ribbon,
type a value in the Radius box. Position the pointer over a corner,
then click.
The value in the Radius box is active until you change it, so you can click one
corner after another to draw fillets with the same radius.
You can draw a fillet by dragging the pointer over the two
elements that you want to draw the fillet between. When you use
this method, the Radius box on the ribbon is not active.

Extends one or more open elements until they intersect with the nearest
element in the active window. The extension direction is determined by the
position where you select the element to extend. For example, if you select a
horizontal line to the right of its midpoint, the line extends to the right.
If there is no possible intersection between the element you want to extend
and any other element in the view, the command does not extend the element.

Trims open and closed elements to the closest intersection in both directions.
Trim Corner Command (Draw Toolbar)

Draws a corner by extending and/or trimming two selected open elements.

Draws a chamfer, or bevel, between two linear elements. You can control the
chamfer angle and the setback distances for both elements.
Chamfer Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Angle - Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.
Setback A - Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the
chamfer on the first linear element you select.
Setback B - Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the
chamfer on the second linear element you select.

Draws a fillet between two elements. The elements can be arcs, lines, circles,
ellipses, or curves.
Fillet Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Radius - Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to
create the fillet.
Applying Relationships to Change

Existing Elements: An Overview
You can apply relationships as you draw and place elements by using the
relationship indicators that appear by the pointer. You can also apply
relationships to elements that you have already placed on the drawing sheet.
Applying Relationships to Existing Elements

To apply relationships to elements that you have already placed on the
drawing sheet, click a button on the Relationship toolbar and then select the
elements you want to relate. When you apply a relationship between elements,
the elements are modified to reflect the relationship. If Maintain
Relationships is set when you use the commands on the Relationship toolbar
to add relationships to your drawing, the added relationships will be
maintained.
For example, selecting Equal and clicking two circles makes the two circles
equal in size.
If a line and arc are not tangent, applying a tangent relationship modifies one
or both elements to make them tangent.
When you use commands on the Relationship toolbar, the software allows
you to select only elements that are valid input for that command. For
example, when you use Concentric, the command allows you to select only
circles, arcs, and ellipses.
Perhaps you begin designing with a few key design parameters. You would
usually draw known elements in relation to one another and then draw
additional elements to fill in the blanks.
As you draw and add elements to the drawing, the relationships are
maintained and additional relationships are applied.
Modifying Elements That Share Relationships

If two elements share a relationship, the relationship is maintained when you
modify either one of the elements. For example, if you move a circle that has
a tangent relationship with a line, the line also moves. The elements remain
tangent.
If you move a circle that does not have a tangent relationship with a line, the
line does not move.
Other elements that share relationships maintain them in the following ways:
If a line and an arc share a tangent relationship, they remain

tangent when either is modified.
If a line and arc share a connect relationship, they remain

connected when either is modified.
If two lines are horizontal, they remain horizontal even if you

change the position and length of one of the lines.
Deleting Relationships
You can delete a relationship as you would delete any other element. You
select a relationship handle, and then click Delete. Relationships are
automatically deleted when their deletion is necessary to allow a modification
to occur. For example, if you rotate an element that has a horizontal
relationship applied to it, the relationship is automatically deleted.
If you want to change an element by adding or removing a relationship, and
the element does not change the way you expect, it may be controlled by a
driving dimension. You can toggle the dimension from driving to driven, and

then make the change.
Make Elements Concentric

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric
2. Click an arc or circle.
267.
Click another arc or circle. One element moves to make the two
elements concentric.
Notes
The order in which you select the elements might determine which
element moves to a new location.
Make Elements Parallel

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Parallel
2. Click a line.
3. Click another line. One line moves to make the two lines parallel.
Notes
Make Elements Perpendicular

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Perpendicular
2. Click a line.

3. Click a line, arc, or circle. One line moves to make the two elements
perpendicular.
Notes
Connect Elements
1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Connect
2. Click an element at a key point.
268.
Click another element or key point. One element moves to connect
the elements.
Notes
Make Elements Tangent

You can make two elements tangent.
To make elements tangent where their end points meet

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Tangent
2. Click at a point where two end points meet. The elements are adjusted to
make the two elements tangent.
To make elements tangent that are not connected at an

end point
1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Tangent.
3. Click another element.
One element moves to make the two elements tangent.
Notes
Make Elements Equal

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Equal
3. Click another element. The elements become equal.
Notes
You can make the following elements equal: two lines, two arcs,
two circles, and an arc and a circle.
You cannot make a line equal to an arc or circle.
Make Elements or Key Points Horizontal or

Vertical
1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Horizontal/Vertical
To make a line horizontal or vertical, click the line.
To make two key points horizontal or vertical, click a key point,

and then click another key point.
Notes
The current orientation of the line determines how it is positioned


after you select it. For example, if a line is closer to a horizontal
orientation than a vertical orientation, the line becomes horizontal.
Make Elements Symmetric About an Axis

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Symmetric
2. Click a line that you want to use as a symmetry axis.

4. Click another element. The two elements become symmetrical about the
axis.
Notes

Change Command (Main Toolbar)
Displays the Change toolbar. You can use the commands on this toolbar to
manipulate elements.
Colinear Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes two lines colinear.
Concentric Command (Relationship

Toolbar)
Makes an arc or circle concentric with another arc or circle.
Connect Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Connects two elements or key points at one point. This command also
connects a key point on an element to a position that you select on another
element.
Equal Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes elements or dimension values equal. You can make the length of lines,
the radius of arcs and circles, and the values of dimensions equal.
Horizontal/Vertical Command (Relationship

Toolbar)
Makes a line horizontal or vertical, or horizontally or vertically aligns two key
points.
Parallel Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes two lines parallel.
Perpendicular Command (Relationship

Toolbar)
Makes two elements perpendicular. You can make two lines, a line and an arc,
or a line and a circle perpendicular.
Tangent Command (Relationship Toolbar)

Makes two elements tangent. You can make two circles or arcs tangent. You
can also make a circle, or an arc, and a line tangent.
Arranging Elements: An Overview
Arranging Elements: An
Overview
You can arrange elements so that they can be more easily manipulated on a
drawing sheet. Several features for arranging elements are provided in the
SmartSketch software.
The Group command on the Change toolbar allows you to group elements
that reside in the same document and drawing sheet together. The elements
can then be modified as a unit. You can ungroup elements by clicking
Ungroup on the Change toolbar.
You can also use Layers on the Main toolbar to arrange elements. Each time
you draw an element it is assigned to the active layer. You can use Layers to
see which layer is active or to change the active layer.
The Display Manager on the Tools menu allows you to control the way
elements appear on sheets or layers by changing settings such as, line type or
color.
Elements that overlap are displayed in the order they are drawn. A newly
created element is placed in front of all other elements because it has the
highest display priority. An element's display priority can easily be changed.
You can pull an element up one position, push it down one position, send it to
the back, or bring it to the front by selecting the appropriate command on the
Change toolbar.
Grouping Elements: An Overview

A group is a set of elements that you have selected. The set behaves like any
other select set. Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit.
For example, you could place the holes and center lines of a bolt hole pattern
into a group. This would allow you to move, copy, or delete the entire pattern
at once, as if it were a single element.
The following list describes some of the properties of groups:
An element can be a member of only one group.
Grouped elements must reside in the same document and be on the

same drawing sheet.
Any locatable element can be grouped.
Any combination of elements, such as lines, text, circles, and so

forth, can be grouped.
You can use Group to nest two or more entire groups within a larger group,
or you can nest individual elements and groups within a larger group.
Once elements are grouped, you can use Ungroup to ungroup all of the
elements at the same time. You can also use Ungroup and PickQuick to
remove one or more elements from a group.
Selecting Groups and Members of Groups

The options on the Select Tool ribbon allow you to select an entire group or
individual members of a group. If you set the bottom-up option, you can select
individual members. If you select the top down option, you can select all the
members.
You can also use PickQuick to select one or more group members or an entire
group.
Performing Tasks on Groups

Once you select a group, you can use a command or ribbon option on all of its
members. For example, when you move, copy, or delete a group, all of its
members are moved, copied, or deleted. You can move or apply relationships
to a member of a group and the changes do not affect the position of the other
members of the group.
When you copy an entire group, all of its members are copied, including
nested groups. The software creates a new group that contains all of the

members of the original group. When you copy one member of a group, only
that member is copied.
If you use PickQuick to select a member of a group, you can perform tasks on
the member individually, without affecting other members.
Group or Ungroup Elements

Grouping elements allows you to work with them as a unit. The elements must
reside in the same document and drawing sheet.
To group elements
1. Select two or more elements.
Tip
You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group.
269.
On the Change toolbar, click Group
To ungroup elements
1. Select a group.
270.
On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup
To remove one element from a group

1. Use PickQuick to select the element you want to remove from the group.
271.
On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup
Notes
You can nest groups by selecting two or more groups. You can
then ungroup the entire group or any of its members.
You can select a group and other elements and use Group to group
them.
You can perform tasks on all members of a group by selecting the

group and then selecting the command or ribbon option you want
to use.
You can use PickQuick to select and edit one or more members of
a group.
You can use the bottom-up selection method instead of

PickQuick, to select individual group members. Set Bottom Up
on the Select tool ribbon.
You can use the Properties dialog box to find out if an element is
part of a group. Select the element and then, on the shortcut menu,
click Properties.

Group Command (Change Toolbar)
Binds elements so you can locate, select, and manipulate them as a unit.
Grouped elements are usually related, such as the holes and center lines of a
bolt hole pattern. When you select a group, the Group ribbon is displayed so
you can edit the entire group or any of its members.
Group Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Style - Sets the style for all of the elements in a group.
Color - Sets the color for all of the elements in a group.
Line Type - Sets the line types and styles for all of the elements in a
group.
Width - Sets the line width for all of the elements in a group.
Name - Displays the name of the group. The software names the group when
you create it.
Properties - Accesses the Properties dialog box for the group.
Group Properties Dialog Box

Displays the properties of the selected group.
Info Tab
Tab Options
Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You can't edit any of these.
Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet the element is on. You cannot
edit the name of the drawing sheet.
Name - Displays the name of the group. The software names the group when
you create it.
Number Of Items - Displays the number of elements in the group. This label
updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements from the
group.
Is Nested Within Another Group - Shows whether the group is nested
within another group. This label updates automatically when you nest a group
using Group, or ungroup a group using Ungroup.
Contains Nested Groups - Displays whether or not the selected group
contains nested groups.
Closed - The Preview Box shows whether the members of the group are
primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves; whether the end points of
these elements are connected; and whether the members of the group form a
closed region.
This box updates automatically when you add elements to or delete elements
from the group.
End-Point Connected - The Preview Box shows whether the members of the
group are primitive elements, such as lines, arcs, and curves, and whether the
end points of these elements are connected. This label updates automatically
when you add elements to or delete elements from the group.
UnGroup Command (Change Toolbar)

Removes elements from groups that were defined using Group. You can

remove individual elements from a group.
Element Display Priority: An Overview

When 2-D elements overlap, their display priority determines which is in
front. The first element you draw is displayed behind all other elementsit
has the lowest display priority. A newly created element is displayed in front
of all other elementsit has the highest display priority.
For example, if you draw a circle, then an ellipse, and then a rectangle, the
circle is displayed in back. The ellipse is displayed between the circle and the
rectangle, and the rectangle is displayed in front.
Changing the Element Display Priority

You can change an element's display priority by pulling it up one position,
pushing it down one position, sending it to the back, or bringing it to the front.
One click on the striped box changes the display priority.
You can change the display priority of a group the same way. The display
priority of elements within the group does not change.
Bring an Element to the Front of the Display

Order
2. On the Change toolbar, click Bring To Front
Notes
When you select a single element, the element moves to the front
of the display.
When you bring more than one element or an element group to the

front of the display order, the elements retain their display order
within the selection set or group.
Send an Element to the Back of the Display

Order
2. On the Change toolbar, click Send To Back
Notes
When you select a single element, the element moves to the back
of the display.
When you send more than one element or an element group to the
back of the display order, the elements retain their display order
Pull an Element Up in the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Pull Up
Notes
When you pull more than one element or an element group up one
position in the display order, the elements retain their display order
Push an Element Down in the Display Order

2. On the Change toolbar, click Push Down
Notes
When you push more than one element or an element group down
one position in the display order, the elements retain their display
order within the selection set or group.

Bring to Front Command (Change Toolbar)
Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the front of the
display order.
Send To Back Command (Change Toolbar)

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups to the back of the
display order.
Pull Up Command (Change Toolbar)

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups up one position in the
display order.
If more than one element overlaps the selected elements, the selected elements
do not move all the way to the front. To quickly move elements to the front,
click Bring To Front.
Push Down Command (Change Toolbar)

Moves one or more selected elements or element groups down one position in
the display order.
If the selected elements overlap more than one other element, the selected
elements do not move all the way to the back. To quickly move elements to
the back, click Send To Back.
Using Layers to Arrange Elements: An

Overview
Layers and display settings can help you group elements so that you can
manipulate them more easily on a drawing sheet. Layers and display settings
also make it easier to keep track of different types of elements. Each drawing
sheet in a document can contain several layers.
When you draw an element, it is assigned to the active layer. To see which
layer is active, or to change the active layer, you can use Layers on the Main
toolbar.
Controlling the Display of Elements and Objects

After assigning an element or object to a layer, you can set display criteria to
control the way items appear in a window by using Display Manager on the
Tools menu. With this command, you can set display criteria for any sheet
and its associated layers in the current document. The display settings can
include the color or line type and line width of elements or objects.
Tip
If two windows are open for the same document, the display
settings that you select with the Display Manager dialog box
affect every window view of the drawing sheet.
Displaying Layers
To view elements on specific layers, you can turn on one or more layers by
selecting Layers. When you turn layers off, you cannot see the elements
assigned to the layers on the drawing sheet. For example, you can assign lines
to one layer and closed elements to another layer. Then, if you turn off the
layer for closed elements and turn on the layer for lines, you see only lines on
the drawing sheet.
You can still see relationships between elements that are assigned to different
layers on a drawing sheet. For example, suppose a line and a circle are tangent
and they are assigned to different layers. If the line's layer is displayed and the
circle's layer is hidden, you can still see the tangent relationship handle on the
line. If the line's layer is hidden as well, the tangent relationship handle is
hidden.
With Display Manager on the Tools menu, you can control the way elements
appear on sheets or layers by changing settings, such as the line type or color.
You can also create custom colors for the display.
Layers and Layer Groups

While layers provide a way to control the display of elements on a drawing
sheet, layer groups give you another way to control the display of elements on
drawing sheets. You can use Layer Groups on the Tools menu to define layer
groups.
Creating New Layers

You can create new layers using Layer Groups, or by typing a new layer
name on the ribbon. You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same
drawing sheet.
Assigning Elements to Layers

Although you can assign an element to only one layer, you can change the
layer to which an element is assigned. You can find out which layer an
element is assigned to by selecting it and using Properties on the Edit menu.
Control the Display of Elements in a

Window
1. Click Tools > Display Manager.
2. On the Sheets tab, set the options you want to use for displaying elements
in a window. The color, line type, and width settings are applied to all the

elements on the sheet.
Tip
To set the display for a specific layer on a sheet, select the sheet on
the Sheets tab. The layers that are in that sheet are displayed on the
Layers tab. You can specify display settings for each layer in a
sheet by clicking the Layers tab and setting the options you want.
Notes
If you want to quickly display or hide layers for the current

drawing sheet, you can click Layers on the Tools menu. Then, on
the Layers ribbon, you can click Layer Status to display or hide
layers.
Create a Color for Displaying Sheets or

Layers
When you use Display Manager to control the way elements or objects
appear in window, you can create custom colors for the display of sheets or
layers.
1. Click Tools > Display Manager.
2. On the Display Manager dialog box, click the row of the layer or sheet
you want to change the color of.
3. Click the cell in the Color column.
4. At the bottom of the palette, click More.
5. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the
options you want to create a new color.
6. Click Add to Custom Colors.
7. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for
the color you created. This name appears on the palette that you access
when you click a cell in the Color column.
Create a Layer
1. On the Main toolbar, click Layers
2. On the Layers ribbon, type the name of the new layer in the Layer box
and press Enter.
Notes
You can also create a layer using Layer Groups on the Tools

menu. On the Groups dialog box, you type the name of a new
layer in the Layers box and press Enter. The name of the new
layer is displayed at the bottom of the Layers table.
You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing
sheet.
You can create as many layers on a drawing sheet as you need.
Display or Hide Layers

1. On the Main toolbar, click the Layers icon or select Tools > Layers
2. On the Layers ribbon, click the Layer Status icon. The Layer Display
dialog box displays all layers available for the current drawing sheet. The
layers that appear in gray text are hidden or turned off. The layer that
appears in red text is the active layer.
3. Click a layer name to display or hide the layer on the drawing sheet.
4. Click Apply.
Notes
If you want to display or hide layers for drawing sheets other than
the current sheet, you can use Display Manager on the Tools
menu. On the Display Manager dialog box, Sheets tab, click the
sheet you want. Then, on the Layers tab, in the Layers column,
click the layers you want to display or hide. These settings override
the settings on the Layer Display dialog box.
Change the Layer of an Element

An element can be assigned to only one layer.
1. Select the elements whose layer you want to change.
3. On the Layers ribbon, click Change Layer.

4. On the Change Layer dialog box, in the Change All To list, click the
layer to change the elements to.
Notes
You can also change the layer of an element by selecting the

element and clicking Properties on the Edit menu.
Change the Active Layer

2. On the Layers ribbon, type or select the name of another layer in the
Layer box.
Notes
If you type the name of a layer that does not exist, a new layer is
created.
Create a Layer Group

1. Click Tools > Layer Groups.
2. On the Groups dialog box, in the Groups box, type the name of the new
group and press Enter.
3. In the Layers table, in the Grouped column, click each box to include the
layers in the group.
Notes
In the Grouped column, if the check box beside the layer name
already has a check mark, the layer is a member of the current
layer group.
You cannot give the same name to two layers on the same drawing
sheet.
Modify Layers in a Layer Group

2. On the Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, select the group you want
to change by clicking the button on the left side of the row. In the Layers
table, if the check box by the layer name is set, the layer is in the layer
group.
3. In the Layers table, set or clear the check box of each layer to add or
remove it from the layer group.
Delete a Layer Group

2. On the Groups dialog box, in the Groups table, click on the layer group
you want to delete.

3. Press Delete.
Change the Name of a Layer or Layer Group

2. On the Groups dialog box, click a group in the Groups table.
Tip
You should click directly on the Group name to change it. The
name then highlights and a blinking pointer appears, allowing you
to type the new name.
To change the name of a group, type the new name and press
Enter.
To change the name of a layer, click the name of the layer you
want to change in the Layers table. Then, type a new name and
press Enter.

Colors Dialog Box
Creates colors that you define by mixing a combination of hue, saturation, and
luminosity values or red, green, and blue values. After you click Define
Custom Colors, the easiest way to experiment with different colors is to drag
the pointer around on the color matrix.
After you create a color and close the dialog box, the Custom Color Name
dialog box appears, allowing you to save the custom color with a name.
To change the settings for a custom color, you can click a custom color box
and then specify a different color. To define a new custom color, click an
empty custom color box, specify a new color, and then click Add To Custom
Colors.
Tip
Question Mark
Layers Command (Tools Menu)

Displays or hides layers. This command also sets the active layer and changes
the layer of an element.
Tip
You can set display criteria for all the sheets and their associated
layers in the current document with Display Manager on the
Tools menu.
Layers Ribbon
Tip
Ribbon Options
Layer - Displays the active layer on the drawing sheet. You can change the
active layer by selecting from a list of all the layers on the active sheet.
Typing a new layer name creates a new layer.
Change Layer - Accesses the Change Layer dialog box so that you can
change the layer of elements. This option is available only when you have
selected a set of elements on the drawing.
Layer Status - Accesses the Layer Display dialog box. This dialog box
has a Layer list that you can use to display or hide layers on the drawing
sheet.
Layer Display Dialog Box

Sets display criteria for the layers in the current drawing sheet.
Note
You can set display criteria for all the sheets in the current
document with Display Manager on the Tools menu.
Dialog Box Options

Active Layer Only - Displays the active layer. If this option is set and the
active layer changes, then the new active layer is displayed and the previous
active layer is hidden.
Layers - Displays a list of layers on the active drawing sheet. Bold, black text
shows that the layer is displayed on the drawing sheet. Plain, gray text shows
the layer is hidden. Bold, red text preceded by a bullet shows that the layer is
active.
Occupied Only - Lists only layers containing elements. Empty layers do not
appear on the list.
Groups - Displays or hides the layer groups list on the dialog box. When you
click this button, the dialog box displays a list of all layer groups for the active
drawing sheet. You can select a group from the list to display or hide these
layers on the drawing sheet.
On - Displays the layers in the selected layer group.
Off - Hides the layers in the selected layer group.
Apply - Applies the current display settings to all windows. The dialog

remains displayed.
Close - Applies the current display settings to all windows and closes the
dialog.
Change Layer Dialog Box

Note
This option is available only when one or more elements are

selected.
Dialog Box Options

Current Layers - Lists the layers for all the selected elements.
Change All To - Lists all the layers for the active sheet. Selecting a layer
from the list changes the layer for all the elements in the selection set.
Layer Groups Command (Tools Menu)

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with
layers on the current working sheet.
Groups Dialog Box

Creates, modifies, or deletes layers and layer groups. You can only work with
layers for the active sheet in the active window. You cannot delete the active
layer or a layer that has elements placed on it.
Dialog Box Options

Layers - Displays a list of all the layers on the current drawing sheet, so that
you can create new layers. You can type the name of a layer in the Layers
box to create a new layer. You can also add or remove layers in a layer group
with the Layers table. When you select a group in the Groups table, the check
boxes in the Grouped column of the Layers table indicate the status of the
layers. If the check box is set, the layer is a member of the group that you
selected in the Groups table. If the check box is cleared, the layer is not a
member of the group.
Groups - Displays all layer groups for the current sheet. You can define a
new group by typing a name in the Groups box. You can select a group from
the Groups table to display the layers in the group in the Groups table. To
select a group, you must click the button on the left side of the row for a

group. You can use the Description column to add a description to the layer
group. Typing a name of an existing layer group makes that group active. You
can then add or remove layers in a group.

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing
sheets and their associated layers in the document.
Tip
You can quickly set display options (Layers on/off) for the current
drawing sheet on the Layer Display dialog box. You can access
the Layer Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools menu.
Display Manager Dialog Box

Specifies the way elements or objects appear in a window for all drawing
sheets and their associated layers in the document.
Tip
You can set display options (Layers on/off) for the current drawing
sheet on the Layer Display dialog box. You can access the Layer
Display dialog box using Layers on the Tools menu.
Sheets Tab
Controls the way elements or objects appear on a drawing sheet.
Tab Options
Row Button - Specifies at what level you want to display or hide items. When
you click a button to the left of a row, an arrow appears by that row.
Clicking this button selects the drawing sheet or element so that you can
modify its display. If you select a drawing sheet, any options you set on the
Layer tab of the Display Manager dialog box are applied to the sheet that
you selected.
Sheets - Displays a list of sheets in the current document. An arrow appears
by the current active drawing sheet. You can control the display of each sheet
by setting the options you want in the Display, Lock, Color, Line Type, or
Width columns.
Display - Display controls the elements listed on the Layers tab. If you set the
box next to the element, the element is displayed in the active document (if its
layer is displayed).
A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
You can set the box next to each element to display all the
elements.
On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock - Locks or unlocks elements and layers in a view to control whether the
software can locate them. If an element or layer is locked, you can still see it
on the screen, but you cannot locate it or perform actions on it. You cannot
lock the active layer.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears locked, you cannot

locate the element or layer in the active document or drawing

sheet.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears unlocked, the element or

layer is not locked and you can locate it.
Color - Overrides the color for a drawing sheet or element or applies another
color to an element. You can select a color from the list. You can click More
to define custom colors with the Colors dialog box.
Line Type - Overrides a line type for a drawing sheet or embedded object and
sets another line style for an element or linked object.
Width - Overrides a line width for all elements on a drawing sheet.
OK - Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Cancel - Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Apply - Applies the current display settings without closing the Display
Manager dialog box.
Clear - Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row
before you can click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a
time.
Help - Activates the online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.
Layers Tab
Controls the way layers and layer groups appear in a window.
Tab Options
Row Button - Indicates the layer being modified. The active layer cannot be
modified and is indicated by a solid filled check box in the display column.
Layers - Controls the display using layers and layers groups. The Layers
column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer groups for the active
drawing sheet.
Layer groups appear first in the list followed by individual layers. You can
control the display of each layer by setting the options you want in the
Display, Lock, Color, Type, or Width columns.
Display - Displays the elements listed on the Layers tab. If you set the box
next to the element, the element is displayed in the active document (if its
layer is displayed).
A check appears in each box when you first access the Layers tab.
You can set the box next to each element to display all the
elements.
On the Layers tab, you cannot turn the active layer off.
Lock - Locks or unlocks elements and layers in a view to control whether the
software can locate them. If an element or layer is locked, you can still see it
on the screen, but you cannot locate it or perform actions on it. You cannot
lock the active layer.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears locked, you cannot

locate the element or layer in the active document or drawing
sheet.
If the lock beside a sheet or layer appears unlocked, the element or

layer is not locked and you can locate it.
Color - Overrides the color for a layer or layer group or applies another color
to an element. You can select a color from the list. You can click More to
define custom colors with the Colors dialog box.
Width - Selects another line width for layer or layer group.
OK - Saves the changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Cancel - Ignores any changes and closes the Display Manager dialog box.
Apply - Applies the current display settings.
Clear - Removes all overrides from the selected row. You must select a row
before you can click this button. You can clear settings from only one row at a
time.
Help - Activates the online Help for the Display Manager dialog box.
Using Symbols in Documents: An Overview
Using Symbols in Documents:

An Overview
Symbols increase drawing productivity because they allow you to access
existing graphic data quickly and easily. With a symbol, you can place graphic
information repeatedly without re-creating it. Symbols save you time by
eliminating the need to re-create information, as well as help you maintain
accurate graphic data throughout a project. Symbols are contained in
documents with an .sym extension.
Parametric symbols are also available. You can modify these symbols by
changing a parameter value.
Creating Symbols: An Overview

A symbol is a document with an .sym extension. You can create a symbol by
selecting any geometry and clicking Create Symbol on the Draw toolbar.
You must then define the origin by clicking the point that you want in the
select set. After defining the origin, you can save the select set as a symbol
with the Save As dialog box.
Note
Symbols that you create display a 90-degree rotation angle as a

default behavior.
Create a Symbol
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Create Symbol
2. Select a set of elements on the drawing sheet.

Tip
When creating a symbol using different elements, press Ctrl while

choosing elements with the Select tool.
3. Click a point on the drawing sheet to define the origin of the symbol.
Caution
The Save As dialog box automatically appears at this point. You do

not need to use Save As on the File menu to open this dialog box.
4. On the Save As dialog box, select the directory where you want to save
the symbol.
5. Type the name that you want for the symbol. The software saves the
document with an .sym extension.

Create Symbol Command (Draw Toolbar)
Allows you to create a symbol.
Tip
This button is available only when you select elements.
The Symbol Explorer: An Overview

You can use Symbol Explorer to drag symbols from a directory to the current
document. You can also use Symbol Explorer to view document directories
on your computer or a network drive. Symbol Explorer can also display
HTML pages on the World Wide Web or your computer.
When you click Symbol Explorer on the Main toolbar
, Symbol
Explorer is displayed on the right side of the main window. The buttons on
the Symbol Explorer are similar to the ones in the Windows Explorer. For
example, you can click a Favorites button to go to one of your favorite web
sites.
If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to point to a directory, you see a
tree view, the contents of the directory, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set
the path to an HTML page, you see the contents of that page, if Microsoft
Internet Explorer 3.0 or later is installed. If Internet Explorer is not
installed, then the software prompts you to install it.
Placing Symbols

The main use of the Symbol Explorer is to drag symbols from a directory to
the current document. The Symbol Explorer acts much like the Windows
Explorer. To view symbols, you can type the name of the directory in the
Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer; or you can click the
Explore Elsewhere button and set the directory path that the Symbol
Explorer looks in.
If you click Home at the top of the Symbol Explorer, it displays the home
page for the symbols that are associated with the template on which the active
document is based. You can override this property by setting a new address
with Properties on the File menu. On the Properties dialog box, you click
the Browser tab to set the option.
After the Symbol Explorer displays the symbols, you can drag a symbol from
the Symbol Explorer to the current document.
Displaying HTML Pages

The Symbol Explorer can display HTML pages on the World Wide Web or
your computer. To view an HTML page in the Symbol Explorer, you must
enter the entire directory path and filename in the Address Box at the top of
To view HTML pages on the World Wide Web, you must type the HTTP
address in the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer. When you do
this, the Symbol Explorer displays the HTML page of the address you
entered. The Symbol Explorer can display any web site that you have
permissions to access.
Caution
HTML pages appear only if Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.0 or

later is installed.
Searching Document Directories

You can view the Symbols of any directory on your computer or the network
with the Symbol Explorer. You can type the path of the directory in the
Address Box; or you can click Browse and set the directory path on the
dialog box.
After the Symbol Explorer displays the symbols of the directory that you
want, you can double-click any document, much like the Windows Explorer,
and the software that created the document opens and displays the document
for editing.
You can drag any document created by software that supports OLE 2.0 into
the current document. These documents can include .igr, .dgn, .dwg, and .dxf
types.
Symbol Explorer Settings

When you set options for the Symbol Explorer, the current document stores
and uses these the next time you open the document. You can define a
different home page for each document in the Symbol Explorer with
Properties on the File menu.
On the Properties dialog box, you click Browser to set the option. When you
set the address for the home page on the Properties dialog box, the Symbol
Explorer goes to that address when you click the Home button at the top of
Tip
The address can be a directory on a local or network drive or an

HTTP address to a web page.
Open a Symbol Library

Before you place a symbol on the drawing sheet, you can set an option to link
or embed the symbol with Options on the Tools menu. On the Options dialog
box, click the Symbols tab to set the option.
Before you open a symbol library, you must either have installed the needed
symbols or place the CD-ROM for installing the software in the appropriate
drive.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Select a template or create a document.
Tip
For example, if you want to open a symbol library of architectural

symbols, you can click an architectural template to create a
document based on that template.
3. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer

automatically displays the symbols library associated with the template
.
4. Drag the symbols from the Symbol Explorer window into the document.
Notes
If you open or create a document while the Symbol Explorer is

open, you must click Home to display the symbol directory
associated with the current document or template.
You can also use links from a web page to navigate in a symbol

library. Sometimes a web page appears depending on the template
for the current document.
View a Web Page with the Symbol Explorer

opens on the right of the main window
2. In the Address Box at the top of the Symbol Explorer, type the name of
the HTTP address and press Enter. For example, you could type the
following: http://www.ingr.com. The World Wide Web page appears
inside the Symbol Explorer.
Tip
If you cannot see the entire Web page, you can double-click the
bar at the top of the Symbol Explorer to undock it. You can then
resize the Symbol Explorer window so that you can see the entire
page.
Notes
You can use many of the same tools to view web pages that are
available in the Windows Internet Explorer. For example, if you
click Back at the top of the Symbol Explorer, the Symbol
Explorer returns to the previous page.
If you open or create a document while Symbol Explorer is open,

you must click Home to display the symbols directory associated
with the current document.
View Documents with the Symbol Explorer

the directory to go to and press Enter. For example, you could type the
following: C:\DRAWING FILES.
Tip
You can also change the directory by clicking Browse at the top of
the Symbol Explorer to display the Modify Location dialog box.
You can then enter another directory for the Symbol Explorer to
look in.

Notes
You can filter the view of documents in the Symbol Explorer. If

you want to view just one type of document, such as symbols,
pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.
On the shortcut menu, click View, and then File Type.
If you double-click a document in the Symbol Explorer, the

software that created the document opens and displays the
document. For example, if you double-click the SYMBOL.sym
document, the software opens and displays the SYMBOL.sym
document. Or, if you double-click a document with an .htm
extension, the Microsoft Internet Explorer opens.

open, you must click Home to display the symbols directory
associated with the current document.
You can filter the view in the Symbol Explorer window to display
only certain types of documents, such as MicroStation, AutoCAD,
or other types. You can click View File Type on the shortcut menu
in the Symbol Explorer window.
For example, to display only AutoCAD documents, you can select the
AutoCAD option for .dwg documents. When you set this option, the
Symbol Explorer window displays only .dwg documents.
If you set the path of the Symbol Explorer to a directory, you can
see a tree view, a shell view, and the Attribute Viewer. If you set
the path to an HTML page, you can see the symbols of that page in
the style of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that
version is installed. If Microsoft Internet Explorer is not installed,
the software prompts you to install it.
Close the Symbol Explorer
On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer
Notes
You can also close the Symbol Explorer by clicking Toolbars on

the View menu. On the Toolbars dialog box, you should clear the
Symbol Explorer check box.
Open Documents from the Symbol Explorer

opens on the right side of the main window
the directory that you want to go to and press Enter. For example, you
could type the following: C:\PROGRAM FILES\DRAWINGS\.
Tip
You can also change the directory by clicking Browse at the top of
the Symbol Explorer to display the Modify Location dialog box.
You can then enter another directory for the Symbol Explorer to
look in.
3. Double-click a document in the Symbol Explorer. The software that

created the document opens and displays the document. For example, if
you double-click on the SYMBOL.sym document, the software opens and
displays the SYMBOL.sym document. Or, if you double-click a document
with an .htm extension, the Microsoft Internet Explorer opens.
Notes
If you double-click on a directory in the Symbol Explorer, a

separate window for the Windows Explorer opens. You must
click Browse to select a new directory for the Symbol Explorer.
You can drag any document that supports OLE 2.0 from the
Symbol Explorer to the drawing sheet.
the style of the Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that
then the software prompts you to install it.
Set the Home Page for the Symbol Explorer

2. On the Behavior tab of the Properties dialog box, type the HTTP
address of the home page that you want for the Symbol Explorer. In
the Symbol Explorer, when you click Home, the Symbol Explorer
displays the Web page for the address that you typed.
Tip
The address that you enter on the Behavior tab of the Properties

dialog box is saved with the current template and document.
Notes
You can also set the home page while the Symbol Explorer is
open. In the Symbol Explorer window, right-click and, on the
shortcut menu, select Set Document Home.
If you do not set the home page for the Symbol Explorer, the
Symbol Explorer displays the symbol directory that is associated
with the template that the active document is based on.

open, you must click Home to display the symbols directory
associated with the current document.
If you want to set the Symbol Explorer to always look at symbols

on your computer, you can type the following syntax in the
Address box: <application.path>\..\<path of symbols. For example,
you could enter <application.path>\..\symbols\arch.htm.
Move the Symbol Explorer

2. Double-click the bar at the top of the Symbol Explorer to display it as a

separate window from the main window. You can now drag the Symbol
Explorer and relocate it. You can also resize the Symbol Explorer
window.
Notes
If the Symbol Explorer is displayed as a separate window from

the main window, double-click the bar at the top to make it part of
the main window again. You can dock the Symbol Explorer at
any place in the window.
If you resize the Symbol Explorer and the double-click it to make

it part of the main window, the Symbol Explorer size remains the
same.
Show a List of Favorites in the Symbol

Explorer

appears on the right of the main window
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, on the shortcut menu, click Show

Favorites. A bar appears at the top of the bottom pane. You can click one
of these bars to go to a favorite document or directory.
Add to the Favorites List in the Symbol

Explorer
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, select the directory or document that

you want to add to a list of favorites.
3. In the Symbol Explorer window, right-click and then click Add To
Favorites.
A bar appears at the top of the bottom pane. You can click this bar to go to a
favorite document or directory.
Delete From a List of Favorites in the

Symbol Explorer
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, select the bar in the bottom pane that
you want to delete.
Tip
You can also select a favorite directory, HTML page, or file in the
Symbol Explorer window.
3. Right-click, and, then on the shortcut menu, click Delete Favorite.

Symbol Explorer Command (Main Toolbar)
Activates the Symbol Explorer window. The Symbol Explorer window
allows you to organize and manage documents and symbols. You can browse
document directories on the computer hard drive or the network. You can also
view HTML pages on the Internet, the computer hard drive, or CD-ROM
drive.
Symbol Explorer Window

Displays files in a directory or World Wide Web pages (HTML pages). You
can use the Symbol Explorer window just like you would the Windows
Explorer or Windows Internet Explorer. You can also use Symbol Explorer
to drag symbols (.sym) from the Symbol Explorer window to the current
document.
Tip
Within the Symbol Explorer window, you can access several

commands that allow you to change or filter the view in the
window. For example, you can change the window to show only
symbols. You can also add directories or web addresses to a list of
favorites. If you want to place several copies of a symbol, you can
click the Stamp Here command. To access these commands, place
the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.
Window Options
Back - Takes you backward to the previous location of the Symbol
Explorer, either a web page or a directory path.
Forward - Takes you forward to the previous location of the Symbol
Explorer, either a web page or a directory path.
Stop - Halts the loading of an HTML page.
Refresh - Reloads the current HTML page or directory.

Home - Takes the Symbol Explorer back to the home page that you set
with Properties on the File menu. If you do not set the home page with this
command, the Symbol Explorer opens the symbols directory associated with
the template that the active document is based on.
Address - Sets the current location for the Symbol Explorer. You can type in
a directory or a World Wide Web address and then press Enter. Some
examples of what you can type in are as follows:
http://www.ingr.com
C:\PROGRAM FILES\DRAWINGS\
Tips
If you want to view an HTML page on your hard drive, you must
enter the entire path and filename in the address box.
the style of Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.01 or earlier, if that
the software prompts you to install it.
Show Favorites Command (Shortcut Menu)

Shows bars in the Symbol Explorer window that point to documents or web
pages that you added to the list of favorites. When you click a bar, the Symbol
Explorer displays the associated documents or web pages.
Tip
To access this command, pause the pointer in the Symbol

Explorer window and right-click.
View File Type Command (Shortcut Menu)

Filters the view in the Symbol Explorer window according to the document
type that you select. For example, if you want to see only AutoCAD
documents, you could select the AutoCAD option for .dwg documents. When
you set this option, the Symbol Explorer window displays only .dwg
documents.
Tip
To access this command, pause the pointer in the Symbol


Explorer content window and right-click. Select the View option.
Delete Favorites Command (Shortcut Menu)

Deletes the selected bar from the Symbol Explorer window and removes the
item from the list of favorites.
Tip
To access this command, pause the pointer over the favorite

directory, HTML page, or file in the Symbol Explorer window
and right-click.
Discovering Symbol Behavior and

Handles: An Overview
Symbols can display different types of behavior depending on how the symbol
was created. When you drag a symbol into a document, you can check out
different characteristics of the symbol to see what it can do.
Depending on how the symbol was created, some symbols automatically
ungroup into individual elements in the document when you place the symbol.
For example, if you place a symbol that contains a circle and a rectangle in a
document, the symbol immediately ungroups. The parts of the symbol, the
circle and rectangle, act as a separate circle and rectangle, not a symbol.
Labels
Some symbols have a label that appears as a question mark under the symbol.
To change the text in the label, you can double-click the question mark. When
the Attribute Viewer appears, you can then edit the text in the Value column
and press Enter.
Commands on the Shortcut Menu

While the symbol is selected, right-click and look at the shortcut menu. Some
symbols have special commands on the shortcut menu that run custom
processes for the symbol. If the shortcut menu has Help, you can access a
Help file that displays special information about the symbol.
Commands on the shortcut menu can also activate different representations of
the same symbol. For example, you can access different representations of the
same valve symbol, with a flanged globe, a welded globe, and so forth.
Drop Points
You can move the symbol around in the document with the Select Tool. You
can discover special behaviors by dragging the symbol over an element or
another symbol.

Some symbols automatically connect to other symbols. These symbols were
created with drop points for symbol-to-symbol connections. When you click a
drag point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points
appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears when you exactly align the drag point
and drop point. You can then attach the symbol to the other at a precision
point.
ToolTips
If you pass the pointer over the drop points on a symbol, you might see
ToolTips. These ToolTips display special information about different parts or
points on the symbol. For example, the serial number for networking
diagramming equipment can appear in a ToolTip.
Custom Processes
Some symbols actually run special processes when you drag them, doubleclick them, or perform other actions. If you select the symbol and click the
right mouse button, you might also see special custom commands for the
symbol on the shortcut menu.
Displaying Attributes on an Element

Some symbols can display attributes that are assigned to an element. When
you drag the symbol to the element with attributes, the symbol automatically
displays the values of those attributes.
Handles
When you select a symbol, different handles appear on the symbol.
Some symbols have several different kinds of handles:
Black boxes on the outside corners of the range box lines represent
scale handles (A). You can drag a scale handle to resize the entire
symbol.
Yellow boxes in the middle of the range box lines represent

standard parametric handles (B). You can drag a parametric handle
to resize part of the symbol.
A green plus sign represents a mirror handle (C). You can drag a
mirror handle to create a copy of the symbol directly horizontal or
vertical to the original symbol.
A large green circle represents a rotate handle (D). You can drag
this handle to rotate the entire symbol. Specific increments are
displayed by the pointer while you rotate the symbol.
A series of small green circles represents drag points (E). You can
use these points to attach the symbol at a precise point to another
symbol or element.
A small green lock represents a lock handle (F). You can click the
lock handle to unlock the symbol. Unlocking allows you to move a
symbol away from the element to which the symbol was
associated.
Tip
A lock handle appears only if you drag the symbol to an element

with one of the drag points on the symbol. For more information
about the way these handles work, click Related Topics.
Associate a Symbol with an Element
Drag the symbol to a position near the target element. The symbol
automatically aligns itself with the element.
The symbol is now associated with the element. If you move the element, the
symbol moves along the element.

If you move the symbol, it moves along the element, but not away from it.
At this point, if you want to associate the symbol and target element again,
you can click the lock handle again. The symbol stays in the new position, but
is now associated to the target element again. If you select another element or
command after unlocking the symbol and moving it, you cannot re-establish
the association with the target element.
Notes
If you want to unlock the symbol from the element, you can select
the symbol and click the lock handle to unlock it. You can then
move the symbol away from the target element.
Placing Symbols: An Overview

To place a symbol, you can use single-click placement or drag the symbol
from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer into the current document.
Symbol Libraries
After starting the software, you can open a template or document. For most
standard templates, the Symbol Explorer automatically opens and displays a
default directory for all the symbols that would be appropriate to use with that
template. For example, templates in the Process category point to directories
with process diagram symbols.
Tip
To open the Symbol Explorer, you can also click Symbol

Explorer on the Main toolbar. You might need to click Home in
the Symbol Explorer. The Home path is stored on the Browser
tab of the File Properties dialog box.
When you click a symbol in the Symbol Explorer, the pointer attaches to the
origin of the symbol by default to drag it in. At that instance, the origin is the
drag point.
Some symbols contain more than one drag point. These appear as green dots
on the symbol. These drag points are useful if you want to place a symbol
using a particular part of the symbol. You can change to another drag point by
pressing the Up and Down arrow keys.
By default, every element in a symbol does not appear when you place the
symbol in a document. For example, if you place a symbol that contains
dimensions in a document, the dimensions are not displayed.
Place a Symbol
Tip
Before you place a symbol, you can set an option to link or embed
the symbol with Options on the Tools menu.

automatically displays the symbol library associated with the template or
document
Caution
For some documents, you might need to click Home in the


Symbol Explorer. The Browser tab on the File Properties dialog
box stores the Home path.
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, browse to the directory that contains the
symbols that you want.
3. Drag the symbol from the Symbol Explorer window into the active
document.
Notes
You also can place a symbol by clicking the symbol in the Symbol
Explorer, and then clicking the location to place the symbol in the
document. This single-click placement allows you to place
multiple symbols in document without dragging each copy of the
symbol. Single-click placement also allows you to change attribute
and parameter values for the symbol before placement, including
Lookup Table values.
You can filter the view of documents in the Symbol Explorer. If

you want to view just one type of document, such as symbols,
pause the pointer in the Symbol Explorer window and right-click.
On the shortcut menu, click View, and then click File Type.
If you use a certain symbol library for many different documents,

you can access the library quickly by adding it to your list of
favorites in the Symbol Explorer. Point to the Symbol Explorer
window, right-click, and click Add To Favorites.
To place several copies of a symbol, you can click Stamp Here on

the shortcut menu.
You also can place a symbol by dragging it from Windows

Explorer. You can set the default option to link or embed the
symbol when you drag it with Options on the Tools menu. You set
the option on the Symbol tab of the Options dialog box.
If you press Ctrl while you drag a symbol, the symbol is

embedded. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the symbol is linked.
Tip
Pressing the keys overrides the option that you set for dragging
symbols on the Options dialog box.
Sometimes when you place a symbol that contains dimensions in a

document, the software does not display the dimensions. This
behavior depends on options that you set when you created the
symbol. However, if you open the symbol to edit it, the dimensions
appear.

open, you must click Home to display the symbol directory
associated with the current document or template.
Place Copies of a Symbol

Using Single Click Placement
document
Caution
For some documents, you need to click Home in the Symbol

Explorer. You can edit the Home value by clicking the Browser
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, go to the directory that contains the

3. Click on the symbol in the Symbol Explorer window.
4. Click the desired location in the active document to place the symbol.
Tip
While in single-click placement mode, you can place multiple

copies of the selected symbol with each additional mouse click. To
cancel single-click placement mode, press the Esc key or click the
right mouse button.
Using Mouse-Down Mode (Dragging)

document
Caution
For some documents, you need to click Home in the Symbol

Explorer. You can edit the Home value by clicking the Browser
2. In the Symbol Explorer window, go to the directory that contains the

3. Select a symbol while pressing the right mouse button.
4. While pressing the right mouse button, drag the symbol into the document.
5. On the shortcut menu, click Stamp Here.

6. Click a point in the document to place the symbol
7. Click another point in the document to place a copy of the symbol. You
can click as many points as you want to place multiple copies of the same
symbol.
Notes
If you decide that you do not want to place several copies of a

symbol, you can click Place Here on the shortcut menu. This
places one instance of the symbol.

Place Here Command (Shortcut Menu)
Places one instance of a symbol as you drag a symbol into a document.
Tip
You can access this command by dragging and dropping a symbol

into a document with the right mouse button.
Stamp Here Command (Shortcut Menu)

Places more than one instance of a symbol as you drag a symbol into a
document. This command allows you to copy a symbol quickly and easily as
you place it.
Tip
You can access this command by dragging a symbol into a

document with the right mouse button.
Editing Symbols: An Overview

You can edit a symbol by opening the .sym file directly. You can also edit a
symbol that you drag from the Symbol Explorer to place into a drawing.
After you drag the symbol, you can manipulate it by actions such as
mirroring, rotating, and sizing.
To edit a symbol, you should select it and click Open on the shortcut menu.
Tip
To display the shortcut menu, highlight a symbol with the pointer

and right-click.
You can also edit the properties and parameters of some symbols to change
the symbols. When you drag these special symbols into a document, the
Attribute Viewer automatically displays the properties and parameters. The
properties are in plain text. The parameters are identified with bold text. You
cannot edit the names of the parameters.
Tip
If the Symbol Explorer is closed, you can also access the

properties and parameters of a symbol by selecting it and clicking
Symbol Explorer.
Editing Embedded or Linked Symbols

If the symbol is linked, you can open the symbol and edit it. The symbol that
you placed on the drawing sheet updates automatically. Those same changes
are saved in the .sym document on the hard drive.
Embedding the symbol means that a copy of the symbol was placed in the
document. If you edit one instance of the embedded symbol in a document, all
copies of that symbol within the current document reflect those changes.
Tip
Before placing a symbol, you can set an option to link or embed

the symbol when you drag the symbol into the document. You can
do this by clicking Options on the Tools menu and then setting the
option you want on the Symbols tab.
Editing Parts of a Symbol

To edit parts of a symbol as individual elements on the drawing sheet, you can
convert the symbol to a group of individual graphics. To do this, you place the
symbol on a drawing sheet, select it, and then click Convert on the shortcut

menu to convert the symbol into an element group. To ungroup the elements
so that you can edit them individually, you can click Ungroup on the Change
toolbar. You can now edit the individual elements.
Tip
You must place a symbol in a document at the default scale (1:1) if

you want to use Convert.
Caution
If you convert the symbol into an element group, you cannot turn
the group back into a symbol.
Symbol Labels
To create a label, you can double-click the symbol. A blinking pointer appears
below, above, or in the middle of the symbol so that you can start typing the
text that you want.
Changing Parameters
You can change the parameters of a symbol with the Parameters tab on the
Properties dialog box. You can change the value of the parameter, but you
cannot change the name of the parameter.
Edit a Symbol
The way that you edit a symbol depends on if the symbol is linked or
embedded. You can determine whether to link or embed the symbol by setting
an option with Options on the Tools menu before you place the symbol on the
drawing sheet.
To Edit a Symbol Document Directly

2. Select the symbol document that you want to edit. The document has an
.sym extension.
3. Edit the symbol.
Caution
You cannot edit the connect points, drag points, handles, or other
properties of a symbol directly.
Tip
If you want to quickly edit a symbol, you can open the Symbol

Explorer and double-click any symbol to for editing.
To Edit an Embedded Symbol

1. Select the symbol.
2. Click Open on the shortcut menu.
3. Edit the symbol.
4. Click File > Update. The software changes the symbol in the current
document.
5. Click File > Close to close the symbol document and return to the
document that contains the symbol.
Tip
If you change a linked symbol, the software also records those

changes in the source document on your computer and the instance
of the symbol in the current document.
To Edit Elements in a Symbol

If you want to edit individual elements of a symbol, you must convert the
symbol to elements in the current document.
1. Select the symbol on the drawing sheet.
2. On the shortcut menu, click Convert to convert the symbol to a group of
elements.
Tip
You must insert a symbol at the default scale (1:1) if you want to
use Convert.
3. On the Change toolbar, click Ungroup

to separate the elements so
that you can edit them individually. You can now edit the symbol
elements just like ones that you created with one of the drawing
commands.
Notes
If a symbol containing a SmartLabel is placed into a document,

you cannot select the SmartLabel and open it to edit it like most
symbols. You must create a new SmartLabel.
Edit Symbol Properties

1. Click a symbol in a drawing.
2. Click Edit > Properties.

3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want to use.
Tips
You can use the Attribute Viewer to view user properties and
parameters of a symbol. These properties include attributes,
parameters, and look-up table values. You can also select a symbol
and then click the Symbol Explorer on the Main toolbar. To see a
symbol's properties, simply select the symbol.
In the Attribute Viewer, the user properties appear in plain text.

The parameters appear in bold text. You cannot edit the names of
the parameters/attributes in the Name column. To change the
values, click the Value column, type the information that you
want, and press Enter.
Notes
You can use Attribute Viewer to view user properties and

parameters of a symbol. These properties include the dimensions
and other items. To open the Attribute Viewer, double-click a
symbol. You can also select a symbol and then click Symbol
Explorer on the Main toolbar.
In the Attribute Viewer, the user properties appear in plain text.

The parameters appear in bold text. You cannot edit the names of
the parameters in the Name column. To change the values, click
the Value column, type the information that you want, and press
Enter.

Symbol Properties Dialog Box
Defines the properties of a symbol.
Info Tab
Displays and allows you to set symbol placement options such as the symbol
angle, layer on which you want to place the symbol, and coordinates for the
symbol.
Tab Options
Name - Displays the name of the parent document of the symbol.
Layer - Specifies the layer on which you place the symbol. When you place a
symbol, it is placed on the active layer.
X Origin - Specifies the X coordinate of the symbol origin.
Y Origin - Specifies the Y coordinate of the symbol origin.
Angle - Displays the current angle of the symbol. You can specify a new
angle. The number of degrees increases in the counterclockwise direction. For
example, 90 degrees is at the top of the screen.
Parametric Tab
Displays information about the parameters in the symbol. The parameters that
appear on this tab are the same items that appear in the Attribute Viewer
when you select the symbol.
You can change the name of the value of the parameter, but not the name.
When you change the value, you must click Apply for the change to take
effect on the symbol.
User Tab
Displays and allows you to set property options for each symbol that you
place. This feature provides an administrative tool for tracking property
information, such as the serial number of label text, for each placement of a
symbol.
Tab Options
Name - Defines a property name.
Type - Specifies the property type you want to define for the symbol property
name. You can choose from character, number, money, or date.
Value - Specifies a value for the symbol. For example, you can assign a
manufacturer name, a serial number, or other descriptive information as a
value.
Properties - The properties table lists all the properties currently defined for
the symbol.
Add - Creates an attribute for the symbol.
Delete - Deletes the attribute that you select in the Properties box.
Convert Command (Symbols Shortcut

Menu)
Converts the selected object to another file format. For example, if you select
a symbol and click this command, the symbol is converted to a group of
elements on the drawing sheet.
Tip
You must place a symbol in a document at the default scale (1:1) if

you want to use Convert. If you scale the symbol, you cannot
convert the symbol to individual elements.
Scaling Symbols: An Overview

You can use scale handles on a symbol to resize it. Four black scale handles
are displayed on the corners of the range box of a symbol. You can drag any
of the four handles up or down.
You can also change the size of the symbol by clicking Scale on the Change
toolbar.
You can modify different parts of some symbols with parametric handles.
Standard parameter handles represent up to four driving dimensions that have
been applied to the graphics in a symbol. The four standard positions where
parameter handles can appear are top center, bottom center, left center, and
right center of a symbol's range box. Dragging a parameter handle changes the
value of the dimension by the length readout precision set on the Units tab of
the Properties dialog box when the symbol is created.
You can also scale a parametric symbol by selecting the symbol and then
editing the values in the Attribute Viewer. The Attribute Viewer
automatically appears when you select the symbol. For example, if you select
the Para Tower symbol, you can change the Top attribute from 7.29 to 9.00 so
that the height of the symbol increases.
Scale a Symbol
1. Click a symbol in the document.
2. Drag one of the scale handles that appear as a black box on each corner of
the symbol range box.
Notes
You can scale a part of a parametric symbol. Drag one of the

standard parameter handles. These handles appear as black boxes
in the middle of each side of the symbol range box. Note that only
one dimension of the symbol changes. For example, if you click
the lower parametric handle on a box, only the height changes, not
the width.
You can also change the size of a parametric symbol by selecting it

and right-clicking. On the Parametrics tab of the Symbol
Properties dialog box, enter the value that you want and click
Apply.
You can also change the size of a parametric symbol by selecting it

and changing the values in the Attribute Viewer.
Mirroring Symbols: An Overview

You can use mirror handles to mirror a symbol about its center. The mirror
handle appears at the right center of a symbol's range box. Dragging the
mirror handle across the center of a symbol's range box causes the symbol to
mirror about its center in dynamics. A center line for the X and Y axis appears
through the range box of the symbol. The axes appear as solid when the
pointer crosses one or both axes.
When you manipulate a symbol, you see the same behaviors unique to that
symbol that existed when you placed the symbol in the document.
Mirror a Symbol
1. Select a symbol in the document.
2. Click the mirror handle that appears as a green plus sign at the top right of
the symbol's range box.
3. Drag the mirror handle in the direction that you want to mirror the symbol.
Rotating Symbols: An Overview

You can rotate a symbol by using one of the following methods:
Clicking Rotate.
Selecting the symbol's rotate handle to turn it.
Using a rotation angle.
Using relationships applied to the symbol.
Rotate Button
To rotate a symbol, you can select the symbol and click Rotate on the
Change toolbar.
Rotation Angle
You can also rotate a symbol by the rotation angle. When you drag a symbol
or align it to an element, you can press the left or right arrow keys. This
rotates the symbol in 15 degree increments by default. Some symbols are
designed to rotate at different increments.
If the symbol is created with a rotation angle other than zero, you can rotate it
by the defined step angle using the left and right arrow keys.
Relationships
By default, when you rotate a symbol, it maintains its orientation on the
drawing sheet. In the following example, the line and symbol share a
dimensional relationship. The lower end of the symbol is set in place with a
lock relationship. When you edit the dimensional value of the driving
dimension, the symbol does not change its orientation. The driving dimension
changes to a driven dimension that is not to scale.
You can also allow symbols to change orientation on the drawing sheet
according to the relationships applied to them. This is handy if you want to
change the orientation of whole sets of geometry with one driving dimension
or relationship. In the example, when you edit the driving dimension between

the line and symbol, the symbol changes orientation on the drawing sheet,
maintaining the relationships applied to it.
For a symbol to rotate according to the relationships applied to it, you must
first set an option by opening the symbol document (.sym) directly. You can
open the document with Open on the File menu. Then, you must click
Properties on the File menu. On the Behavior tab, you must set the Allow
Rotation By Relationships check box. After saving and closing the symbol
document, you can drag the symbol into a document.
Rotate a Symbol
1. Select a symbol in the document.
2. On the Change toolbar, click Rotate
Notes
You can also rotate a symbol about its center with the appropriate
handle. Click the green circle at the right of the range box for the
symbol. Drag the rotate handle closer to or further from the center
of the range box for the symbol.
Select the symbol and press the left or right arrow keys to rotate
the symbol in predefined increments. The rotation angle can vary
depending on how you created the symbol.
Manipulating Symbols: An Overview

You can manipulate a symbol just like you would manipulate other graphics.
For example, you can edit symbol properties, apply relationships, move it, or
copy it. When you manipulate a symbol, it behaves as a single unit. You can
view properties for the symbol in the Attribute Viewer that appears at the
bottom of the Symbol Explorer.
You can click any part of a symbol to move it around in a document.
Some symbols are created with drag points that appear as green dots on the
symbol. When you move the symbol around in the document, the pointer
automatically attaches to the drag point that you used most recently. You can
change drag points by pressing the Up and Down arrow keys.
If you drag a symbol on an element in the document, the symbol is
automatically associated with that element. When the element moves, the
symbol moves with it. You must click one of the green drag points on the
symbol and then move the symbol to the element.
Tip
Some symbols cannot be associated with an element depending on

what options were set when the symbol was created.
Aligning a Symbol with an Element

Many symbols align automatically with elements in the document.
When associated with an element, these symbols display a green lock handle.
When the element moves, the symbol moves with it.
You can click the lock handle to free the symbol from the associated element.
When you unlock the handle, you can move the symbol away from the
element. If you move the element, the symbols stays in its original position.
You can use the lock behavior in many ways. For example, you can ensure
that a door symbol moves with the wall to which it is attached if the lock
handle on the door symbol is locked. If you want to move the wall, and not the
door, you must click the lock handle on the symbol to unlock the door symbol
from the wall. The door now remains in its current position when you drag the
wall away from it.
Aligning a Symbol with Another Symbol

Some symbols can be placed only on other symbols. These symbols are
created with drop points that allow you to align the symbol to a precise point
on another symbol. You cannot place a symbol with drop points on an

element, such as line, arc, or circle.
When a symbol has drop points, red dots appear to indicate the drop points
defined on the symbol. These drop points let you know where you can place
the symbol on the target symbol. When you click a drag point on a symbol
and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's
eye appears when the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned. You can
then attach the symbol to the other with precision.
Manipulate a Symbol
1. Click a symbol in the document.
2. Use any element manipulation command like Move, Copy, or Scale to
manipulate the symbol in the drawing.
Notes
You can edit a symbol by selecting the symbol and clicking Open
on the shortcut menu.
You can manipulate only the symbol, not its individual elements.
You can convert the symbol to individual elements on the drawing
sheet by selecting the symbol and clicking Convert on the shortcut
menu.
You can change the size of a symbol by selecting the symbol and
then dragging one of the handles.
Tip
If you cannot scale the symbol with this procedure, select the
symbol and click Properties on the shortcut menu. Then, on the
Behavior tab of the Symbol Properties dialog box, clear Lock
Scale.
Unlock a Symbol From an Element

1. Select the symbol.
2. Click the green lock handle to unlock the symbol.
3. Drag the symbol away from the element.
Notes
If you want to unlock the symbol from the element, you can select
the symbol and click the lock handle to unlock it. You can then
move the symbol away from the target element.
At this point, if you want to associate the symbol and target

element again, you can click the lock handle again. The symbol
stays in the new position, but is now associated to the target
element again. If you select another element or command after
unlocking the symbol and moving it, you cannot re-establish the
association with the target element.
Attach a Symbol to Another Symbol with

Drop Points
Using a drag point, drag a symbol to another symbol. The available

drop points appear as red dots.
Mechanism Modeling: An Overview

You can use mechanism modeling to check for clearances on moving parts.
Mechanism modeling is a set of elements that are related to each other so that
one group of geometry moves relative to another when the dimensions
change. You can use any kind of elements for mechanism modeling, but
symbols are the easiest elements to use.
Symbols are easy to use because they act as one piece of geometry when you
want to reposition them. For example, if you draw four lines that form a
rectangle, you might want to connect the lines so that the rectangle has
predictable behavior when rotated by a dimensional change. To do this, you
must connect every line. The length of each line, the connections of the end
points, and the angle between each line and its adjacent line must be defined
as shown in the picture.
If the same four lines were constructed and made into a symbol, the
orientation and length of each line would always remain constant regardless of
the orientation of the symbol. No relationships or dimensions for the geometry
making up the symbol would be necessary as shown in the picture. If you
change the angle from 90 degrees to 45 degrees, the geometry stays together
with the symbol as a rigid body.
The easiest way to create a mechanism is to use rigid body symbols and
constrain the symbols to move like you want. Symbols can have two
behaviors: rotating and non-rotating. The default behavior, non-rotating,
means that the symbol cannot be rotated. The other behavior, rotating, allows
rotation by relationships. This allows the symbol to rotate.
Example
The field pump mechanism serves as a good example of a kinematics
animation. The mechanism is made up of five symbols and only one
dimension to control the mechanism movement. If you select the dimension
and change the value of the dimension from 12 degree to 60 degrees, all the
geometry moves together. The other symbols that are connected to each other
move to their proper position based on the angle applied and relationships to
the symbols and the behavior applied to each symbol.
Sample Workflow
Create a Kinematics Animation
2. Select the Mechanical Imperial template.
Tip
Selecting the Mechanical Imperial template creates a document

with a C-wide sheet and a 1:1 scale.
3. On the Main toolbar, click the Symbol Explorer button
4. Browse to the directory with the field pump symbols.

5. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the foundation symbol in the lower left
area of the document.
6. From the Symbol Explorer, drag the pendulum, donkey head, beam rod,
and pump thread symbols so that these do not overlap each other or the
foundation.
To connect the parts

1. On the Tools menu, select Maintain Relationships. Your action confirms
that the relationships are maintained when you move parts of the drawing.
2. On the Relationship toolbar, click Lock
3. To lock the foundation, select one of the end points of the line on the
lower right side. This action keeps the foundation stationary when you
attach the other components or animate the movement.
To connect the pendulum to the motor on the foundation

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric
2. Select the circle on the left end of the pendulum arm as the first element.
3. Select the small circle on the motor as the next element. The pendulum
moves so that the circles align and are concentric.
Tip
The pendulum appears on top of the motor and the foundation. If

the pendulum does not do this, select the pendulum using Select on
the Draw toolbar. You can then click Bring To Front on the
Change toolbar. This action ensures that the pendulum is on top of
the motor and foundation.
To connect the donkey head to the top of the foundation

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Concentric.
2. Select the circle at the center of the donkey head for the first element.
3. Select the circle at the top of the A-frame of the foundation symbol for the
second element. The donkey head moves so it appears balanced on top of
the A-frame and the circles align.
To connect the beam rod to the pendulum

2. Select the lower circle on the beam rod for the first element.
3. Select the right-most circle on the pendulum arm for the second element.
This circle is almost centered on the pendulum. The rod moves and
connects with the pendulum.
To connect the beam rod to the donkey head

2. Select the circle on top of the beam rod for the first element.
3. Select the circle on the left side of the donkey head for the second
element.
4. The pendulum, donkey head, and beam rod now move so that the
connections are complete.
Tip
The beam rod appears on top of the pendulum. Otherwise, click

Select Tool on the Draw toolbar. You can then click Bring To
Front on the Change toolbar. This action ensures that the beam
rod appears on top of the other parts.
To connect the pump thread to the donkey head

1. On the Relationship toolbar, click Connect
2. Click the top of the line on the pump thread.

3. For the second element, select the endpoint of the small line embedded
along the right edge of the donkey head. The thread moves and attaches to
the head.
Tip
You can zoom on the edge of the head to find this line, because it
is very small. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area
To place a dimension on the pendulum for controlling

the rotation angle
2. On the Relationships tab of the SmartSketch dialog box, ensure that the
Midpoint check box is set.
3. On the Dimension toolbar, click Angle Between to place the dimension.
The dimension is driving, so it appears in black
Tip
To select the circle on the pendulum where it connects to the

motor, zoom in close enough to see the entire pendulum in full
view. On the Main toolbar, click Zoom Area.
Caution
You must select the right circle to ensure that a driving dimension is placed. If
you use the wrong circle, the dimension will be a driven dimension, shown as
green. If this should occur, delete the dimension and try again.
4. Pass the pointer over the circle where the pendulum connects to the motor.
You see three ellipses appear next to the pointer.
5. Click to see a box. This is PickQuick. The box has two numbers. This
PickQuick box indicates how many elements you can select at this
location in the window. In this case, you can select only two elements.
6. Click the number 2 square.
Tip
You can see three squares in the PickQuick box, depending on the
zoom distance when you see the ellipses. If you see more than two
squares, dismiss the PickQuick box by selecting the X in the upper
right, and then zoom in closer and try again. On the Main toolbar,
click Zoom Area. After you can see only two numbered squares in

the PickQuick box, select the number two square. This action
selects the circle associated with box number two as the first point
of the dimension.
If PickQuick does not appear, you can also click Bring To Front
and click the motor symbol to bring it to the front to try the
previous steps. You need to click Send To Back after you
complete the steps to bring the pendulum back to the front.
7. Pass the pointer over the line on the right end of the pendulum and move
slowly toward the mid-point of the line. When you see the midpoint
indicator, click for the second point of the dimension. Place the dimension
to the right of the pendulum. Location is not important. This dimension
drives the animation of the pump.
To drive the model
After you place the dimension, you can select the dimension with
the Select Tool and change the value in the ribbon. When the
dimension changes, the angle of the pendulum changes and all of
the other parts change accordingly.
Working with Attributes: An Overview
Working with Attributes: An

Overview
Attributes can help you work more efficiently by allowing you to enter and
edit values for a symbol, object, or element. Attributes can include such items
as the manufacturer, price, and other data. Attributes include user-defined
properties and parameters.
A user-defined property is an attribute assigned to an element or object that
defines a characteristic about that element or object. A property is usually in
the form of a text notation, such as cost, weight, color, and so forth. You can
change user-defined properties, but these changes have no affect on the
appearance of the element or object.
A parameter is a mechanism to change a property. A parameter is an attribute
assigned to an element or object, usually a numerical value representing a
dimension. Parameters are usually used in symbols to resize the length or
width of a symbol.
The Attribute Viewer displays the user-defined properties and parameters for
a selected item. The viewer also allows you to edit the values of the properties
or parameters.
Tip
User-defined properties also appear on the User tab of the

Properties dialog box. Parameters appear only in the Attribute
Viewer.
You cannot edit the names of attributes; you can edit only their values. The
viewer displays two columns, one for the name of the attribute and one for the
value. User-defined properties appear in plain text. Parameters appear in bold
text.

When editing attributes, you can only work on one element or object at a time.
When more than one item in the document is selected, no attributes are
displayed in the Attribute Viewer.
Display the Attribute Viewer

1. Select an object or element.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer. If the selected item has
assigned attributes, the Attribute Viewer opens and displays the
properties and parameters.
Notes
If the Symbol Explorer window is open, you can display or hide

the Attribute Viewer. To display or hide the viewer, place the
pointer over a toolbar at the top of the document window and rightclick. On the shortcut menu, select or clear Attribute Viewer.
You can drag the splitter bar between the Symbol Explorer and
the Attribute Viewer to display or hide the viewer.
If you close the Attribute Viewer, you can open it again by

pausing the pointer in the toolbar area, right-clicking, and clicking
Attribute Viewer on the shortcut menu.
Move the Attribute Viewer
Drag the title of the Attribute Viewer to move the viewer.
You can dock or undock the viewer inside the Symbol Explorer and place the
viewer at a different location.
Notes
To resize the Attribute Viewer like any document window, you

can double-click the title bar of the viewer to undock it. Then, you
can drag the sides of the viewer to resize.
The position of the Attribute Viewer does not stay the same if you
close the software and then start it again. The viewer appears
docked in the default position inside the Symbol Explorer.
Edit Cells in the Attribute Viewer

1. Click a cell in the Attribute Viewer.

2. Type new information or change existing information.
Notes
You can delete text in the Attribute Viewer by pressing Delete.
Double-click to highlight the whole word.
Drag to highlight the word.
You can use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to
scroll through Attribute Viewer values.
You can resize cells in the viewer by using the splitter bar between
each cell at the top of the viewer.
Edit Attributes
1. Select a symbol, object, or element.
2. On the Main toolbar, click Symbol Explorer
3. If the item that you selected has attributes, the Attribute Viewer appears
in the Symbol Explorer window.
Notes
You can use Attribute Viewer to view a symbol's user properties

and parameters. These properties include the dimensions of the
symbol and other items. To open the Attribute Viewer, doubleclick a symbol. You can also select a symbol and then click the
Symbol Explorer button on the Main toolbar.
In the Attribute Viewer, the user properties appear in plain text. The
parameters appear in bold text. You cannot edit the names of the
parameters in the Name column. To change the values, click in the Value
column, type the information that you want, and press Enter.
You can use the Up and Down arrow keys (or the Enter key) to
scroll through Attribute Viewer values.
If the Symbol Explorer window is open, you can display or hide

the Attribute Viewer. To display or hide the viewer, point to a
toolbar at the top of the document window and right-click. On the
shortcut menu, select or clear Attribute Viewer.
You can drag the splitter bar between the Symbol Explorer and
the Attribute Viewer to display or hide the viewer.
You can edit the parameters of a parametric symbol to

automatically change the dimensions of the symbol.
Edit Common Attributes Within a Select Set

1. Click the Select Tool on the Schematic toolbar.
2. Select the symbol set that you want to change.
Important
A symbol set is a group of identical symbols containing the same

attributes. Only symbols containing the same attributes can be
selected and changed simultaneously.
Tip
You can select more than one symbol at a time by clicking the
Select Tool and then holding the Shift or Ctrl key as you click the
symbols.
3. Make the desired changes in the Attribute Viewer window.

Notes
The Attribute Viewer displays user-defined properties and

parameters of a selected element, symbol, or object. User-defined
properties appear in plain text; parameters appear in bold text.
Once you have changed an attribute, the change is applied to all

symbols within the symbol set.
Create a Symbol Report

Caution
You must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your

computer.
1. Open the Symbol Explorer.

2. Drag symbols from one of the following directories into the document:
<drive letter>:\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\

SYMBOLS\PROCESS\PFD (INTERGRAPH).

SYMBOLS\PROCESS\P&ID (INTERGRAPH).

SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING\NETWORK.
3. In the Symbol Explorer, browse to one of the following directories,

depending on the symbols you placed in the document:

SYMBOLS\PROCESS\PFD (INTERGRAPH)\REPORTS.

SYMBOLS\PROCESS\P&ID (INTERGRAPH)\REPORTS.

SYMBOLS\DIAGRAMMING\NETWORK\REPORTS.
4. Drag a REPORT.sym document into the document.

The software prompts you to update the report and, if you click OK, the
software creates the report automatically.
Update a Symbol Report

Caution You must have Microsoft Excel 97 or later installed on your
computer.
Double-click the report to update it.
Reports
The software delivers some reports that you can update automatically when
you add symbols to a document. The reports work with symbols that have
specific attributes assigned to them. You must have Microsoft Excel 97 or
later installed on your computer. The software includes several sample
reports.
When you open a template, that specific template displays a default directory
of symbols in the Symbol Explorer. You can find reports in the Reports
directory of the default symbol directory. Examples that you can drag into
your document include the following reports:
Network ReportsIn the Network template, you can drag in

reports listing network equipment contacts and reports
inventorying equipment.
Process ReportsIn the Process Flow template, you can drag in

heat exchanger, pump and tower equipment reports and a stream
report.
Important
To use the Process Flow template, you must install the Process
Solutions module.
The software prompts you to update the report when you add it to a document.
After you add more symbols to the document, you can update the existing

report by double-clicking it.

Attribute Viewer Dialog Box
Displays user-defined properties and parameters of an element, symbol, or
inserted document. The viewer displays two columns, one for the name of the
attribute and one for the value. User-defined properties appear in plain text.
Parameters appear in bold text.
You can specify user-defined properties on the User tab of the Properties
dialog box for an element or symbol.
Dialog Box Options

Name - Displays the name of a user-defined property or parameter.
Parameters are displayed in bold text. The Name is read-only.
Value - Displays the value of a property or parameter. Parameters are
displayed in bold text. You can change the value.
Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors: An Overview
Managing Styles, Formats, and

Colors: An Overview
You can use color and style formats to make your drawing a more powerful
communication tool, or simply to make it more aesthetically appealing. The
software provides several different methods for formatting one or more
geometric elements, such as lines, arcs, and circles. You can also format
dimensions, annotations, and fills.
Styles
To make elements that are the same type look alike, you can use styles to
apply several formats at once. Styles are a collection of formats that are saved
under a name. Styles allow you to save several formats so you can use them
again and again. Using styles guarantees consistency in a drawing.
To make an element look unique, you can select it and then format it directly.
Formatting a few elements at a time takes more time than applying styles, but
gives you greater flexibility.
The software provides fills that you can apply to closed boundaries. A fill
floods a closed boundary with a solid color or pattern.
Besides fills, the software provides line types such as continuous, dash, chain,
continuous chain, double chain, dot, and end gap. New line types can be
created through Visual Basic Automation.
The software provides several other tools for consistent drawings. You can
save styles and background sheets in a template so that you can use them in
other drawings.
Properties and Parameters

You can edit the properties of an element, symbol, or object by selecting it
and then changing properties on the ribbon. You can also Select the Element,
right click, and select Properties on the shortcut menu.
A property is a unique characteristic of an element, object, symbol, or
document. You can display document properties in the Windows Explorer or
by clicking Properties on the File menu or Edit menu.
Properties for elements or objects can be classified by three different types, as
defined on the Properties dialog box:
Size properties, as specified on the Info tab affect physical

characteristics of the element, such as the length.
Style properties, as specified on the Format tab, affect the format

of the element.
User-defined properties, as created on the User tab. User-defined

properties are usually in the form of a text notation, such as cost,
manufacturer, and so forth. You can change user-defined
properties, but these changes have no affect on the appearance of
the element or object.
For example, a valve symbol's style properties can include color, line style,
and width. Other user-defined properties stored with the symbol can include
the manufacturer, cost, or material. User-defined properties are displayed in
the Attribute Viewer when you select the valve symbol.
Applying Formats with Styles: An

Overview
If you want elements that are the same type to look alike, you should use
styles, a collection of formats that can be applied to the following items:
Geometric elements
Dimensions
Annotations
Fills
Using styles ensures consistency. If you place or draw one or more elements,
the formats in the style are applied directly to the elements. You do not have
to spend time formatting as you draw. You can apply the formats in each style
again and again.
The software provides styles that you can apply to elements so that they
conform to an engineering standard, such as ISO or ANSI.
Managing Styles
Using Style on the Format menu, you can create several styles so that
elements in a drawing appear the way you want. You can use or modify the
styles delivered with the software, or you can set up new ones that conform to
your unique requirements. One or more styles can be stored in a template so
that you can use them in other drawings.
The software divides styles into types, such as text, dimension, line, and fill. A
style type contains one or more styles. You can create styles for each style
type.

When you create a new document based on a template, the template is copied.
The copy includes any styles that are in the template. Fonts are never copied
into a document. If you want someone to view the fonts, and that person's
system does not have the same fonts installed, you should give that person the
fonts along with the document.
Including Styles from Other Documents in a Template

If you want to make styles from other documents available in the current
document, you can reference the styles with style resource documents. You
can reference a style resource document to the active template or document by
clicking Resources on the Styles dialog box. The Style Resources dialog box
allows you to add style resource documents to the current template or
document. Style resource documents can be any .igr document or .RSC line
style file that contains styles native to that document.
If you create a document based on a template, any style resource documents
attached to the template are attached to the new document as well. When you
reference a style resource document from the current document or template,
the styles in the resource document are added to the Style dropdown list on
the active document's ribbon. When you apply one of the line, dimension, or
fill styles to an element on the drawing sheet, the style is copied from the style
resource document to the current document. The fonts are added to the
dropdown list on the ribbon as well, but are not copied into the current
document.
Applying Styles
The style type determines what type of item to which you can apply a style. A
text style can be applied to text within a text box. A fill style can be applied
to a fill. A line style can be applied to any geometric element such as a line,
arc, circle, or ellipse. A dimension style can be applied to a dimension or
balloon.
When you place dimensions or annotations, or draw elements, the formats
from their default styles are applied automatically. For example, if you click
SmartDimension on the Dimension toolbar, the ANSI style appears on the
ribbon. Each dimension that you place receives the ANSI style. To apply a
different style, you can change the style name on the ribbon before or after
you draw or place an element.
Applying Styles to More Than One Element

Selecting more than one element and then applying the same style to them
removes any previous formatsthe elements now all have the same formats
from the style that you applied. To do this, you must select elements that are
in the same style type, such as text, dimension, fill, or line. For example, you
cannot apply a line style to a dimension.
Apply a Style
1. Select the element you want to format.
2. Click Format > Style.
3. On the Style dialog box, in the Styles list, click the style you want to
apply.
4. Click Apply.
Notes
If you have formatted an element with Properties, or by setting

options on the active ribbon, these formats are removed when you
apply a style.
Apply a Style to a Group of Elements

1. Select two or more elements.
3. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Type box, click the style type that
you want.
Tip
If you have selected several elements from different style types,

the Style Type box is blank.
4. In the Style box, click the style that you want to apply to the elements.
5. Click Apply to change all the elements that you selected.
Notes
If you select different types of elements, you can apply a style only
to the elements that are in the style type that you selected on the
Style dialog box. For example, if you select several lines and
dimensions on a drawing, you can apply a line style only to the
lines. You cannot apply a line style to the dimensions.
Format Part of an Element

Tip

1. Click Segmented Style
.

2. On the ribbon, click the style or colors that you want to apply to part of an
element.
3. Click the element to which you want to apply the style. The format
extends to the next element that crosses or bounds the element to which
you are applying the line type or color.
Notes
Segmented Style does not recognize symbols as a bounding

element.
If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line
type or color by using Segmented Style.
Rename a Style
2. On the Style dialog box, in the Style Types field, click the style type you
want.
3. In the Style box, click the style you want to rename.
4. Click Modify.
5. In the Name box, type the new name for the style.
6. Click OK.
7. Close the dialog box.
Delete a Style
want.
3. In the Style box, click the style you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Confirm that you want to delete the style.
Create a Style Using a Formatted Element

2. Apply the formats you want to save as a style by setting the options you
want on the ribbon.
3. On the ribbon, click the Style box to select the current style name of the
element.
4. Type a new name to create a style using the formats applied to the
element.
5. Press Enter.
Tip
If you create a new style using the Style box on the ribbon, you
cannot base the new style on any other style.
Create a Style with the Style Command

want.
3. Click New to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked.
4. On the Name tab, in the Name box, type a name for the new style.
5. To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the
Based On field.
6. Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to
apply to the new style.
Change the Formats of a Style

want.
3. In the Style box, click the style you want to change.
4. Click Modify to open a dialog box based upon the style type you clicked.
5. To base the style on an existing style, click a style from the list in the
Based On field.
6. Click the other tabs on the dialog box and set the options you want to
modify.
After you close the dialog box, the software updates all elements formatted
with the modified style throughout the document.

Notes
If an element has a style, you can override the style by editing the
element's properties with the Properties command on the Edit
menu.
You can remove style overrides by re-applying a style.
You can modify one or more styles using Style on the Format
menu.
Save a Style to a Template

1. Open a document template.
3. On the Style dialog box, select the style you want to save to the template
of the active document.
4. Click New or Modify.
5. On the dialog box that appears, click the Name tab.
6. Type a name in the Name text box, and enter other information on the
dialog box, as needed.
7. Click OK to save the changes.
Add Styles to the Current Document

You can reference a style resource document from any template or document.
1. Click File > Open and open the document to which you want to add a
style resource.
3. On the Style dialog box, click Resources.
4. On the Style Resources dialog box, click Add.
5. On the Add Style Resources dialog box, select the name of the style
resources document that you want to add to the template, and then click
Open.
6. On the Style Resources dialog box, click OK.
7. Close the Style dialog box.
8. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to
indicate whether or not you want to save changes to the document.
The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or

document that you just saved. If you open a document that references a style
resource document, the styles in the style resource document will be available
on the Styles list of the current document's ribbon. If you open a document
that is based on a template with references to style resource documents, the
styles will also be available in the same manner. You can then apply the styles
in the style resource document to elements or annotations in the current
document.
Tip
The line styles are copied from the style resource document into
the current document. The font styles are not copied. So, if you
want another person to be able to view the same fonts in the
document and that person's system does not have the same fonts
installed, you should give that person a copy of the fonts along
with the document.
Notes
Sometimes you might attach several style resource documents that

contain styles with duplicate names. In these cases, the style in the
style resource document that is listed first in the Style Resources
list takes precedence and will be listed on the ribbon of the active
document.

Modifies, creates, deletes, or applies styles.
Style Dialog Box

Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other
options for working with styles.
Tip
You cannot create or modify a fill style with this dialog box. To
create a new fill style, you can type a name for a fill style in the
Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style is saved with the
current settings on the Fill ribbon.
The sample macro, PATTERN.DLL, allows you to browse through AutoCAD

.PAT files and add the patterns to the active document. You can place this
macro on a toolbar or menu using Customize on the Tools menu; or you can
access it by clicking Macro on the Tools menu. The PATTERN.DLL macro
is located in the \SMARTSKETCH\CUSTOM\BIN\OLESVR.
Tip
If you cannot find the CUSTOM directory, you must run the Setup
program again. In the Setup program, you must select the Custom
setup.
Dialog Box Options

Style Type - Specifies the style type. If you are placing a new element, you
can specify the style by clicking the appropriate style type in this box and then
clicking the style that you want in the Styles box. You can also change the
style of an existing element by selecting the element and then clicking Styles
on the Format menu to set these options.
Styles - Specifies the style. Before selecting an item on this list, you must first
select the appropriate style type in the Style Type box.
List - Specifies which styles appear in the Styles list. You can list only the
styles in use, styles that you defined, or all styles.

Tip
The only styles that appear in the list are styles that are saved in the
current document. The styles saved in a styles resource document
are not listed. However, if you click New, you can select a style
from a style resource document to use as a base style for the new
style that you are creating.
Description - Displays a description of the settings in the style.

Apply - Applies the style selected in the Styles box to elements that you
selected. Applying a new style to elements that you selected removes the
current formats for the element.
New - Accesses one of the New Style dialog boxes so that you can create a
new style.
Modify - Accesses one of the Modify Style dialog boxes so that you can
modify the style that you selected in the Styles list.
Delete - Deletes the selected style from the document or template.
Resources - Allows you to add style resource documents to the current
template with the Style Resources dialog box.
New Line Style Dialog Box

Creates a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics. You can
also define a new dash definition.
Name Tab
Names a style when you create or modify a style. This tab appears only when
you click New or Modify on the Styles dialog box.
Tab Options
Name - Names the style. Style names can contain up to 253 characters
(including aliases and separators) and can include any combination of
characters and spaces, except the backslash character (\), semicolon (;), and
braces ({ }). Style names are case sensitive.
Based On - Displays the name of the style that the current or new style is
based on.
Description - Displays a description of the formatting options.
General Tab
Sets formats for a line.
Tab Options
Style - Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected
element.
Color - Sets the drawing color.
Width - Sets the line width.
Type - Defines how the line appears.
Description - Displays a description of the formatting options.
New Text Box Style Dialog Box

Specifies the name of the style, the formats defined for the style, and other
characteristics.
New Dimension Style Dialog Box

Creates a new dimension style.
Modify Line Style Dialog Box

Modifies a line style by allowing you to specify new characteristics or a dash
definition.
Note
For a detailed explanation of the tabbed options available on the

Modify Line Style dialog box, refer to the following section of the
SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors:
Applying Formats with Styles - Commands and Dialog Boxes New Line Style Dialog Box.
Modify Text Box Style Dialog Box

Modifies a style by allowing you to specify new characteristics.
Note

Modify Text Box Style dialog box, refer to the following section
of the SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and
Colors: Applying Formats with Styles - Commands and Dialog
Boxes - New Text Box Style Dialog Box.
Modify Dimension Style Dialog Box

Modifies a dimension style.
Note

Modify Dimension Style dialog box, refer to the following section

of the SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and
Boxes: New Dimension Style Dialog Box.
Segmented Style Command

Applies a line type, line weight, or color to part of an element. When you
apply the line type, line weight, or color, the format extends to the next
element that crosses or bounds the element to which you are applying the line
type or color. This is handy if you want to change the appearance of just part
of an element.
Caution
If you change the size of the element, you must re-apply the line
type or color using Segmented Style. Segmented Style does not
recognize symbols as a bounding element.
Tip

Reapply Style Dialog Box

Redefines a style according to the formatting of selected element, or returns
the formatting of selected element to that of the style currently applied to it.
Dialog Box Options

Style - Displays the name of the style that is currently applied to the selected
element.
Do You Want To Redefine The Style Using The Selection As An
Example? - Changes the formatting of the current style to the formatting
applied to the element that you selected.
Do You Want To Return The Formatting Of The Selection To The Style?

- Applies the formatting of the current style to the element that you selected.
Style Resources Dialog Box

Lists style resource documents that are available to the current document.
Resources can be any .igr document or MicroStation line style resource with
an .RSC extension. The styles in the style resource document are available for
use in the current document.
Dialog Box Options

Style Resource Files - Lists the style resource documents that are attached to
the current document. When you attach one of these documents to a template,
the styles in the document appear on the Style dropdown list of the ribbon in
the current document. A style is copied into the current document from the
style resource document when you select this style on the ribbon. A style is
also copied when you apply the style to an element or annotation on the
drawing sheet. For example, if you attach DIMENSION.igr to the document,
the dimension styles in DIMENSION.igr appear on the dropdown list when
you select a dimension on the drawing sheet of the active document. You can
then apply any of the styles to the dimension. The dimension style that you
applied is then copied from DIMENSION.igr into the active document when
you save it.
Add - Allows you to add a style resource document to the Style Resource
Files list with the Add Style Resource dialog box. This dialog box allows you
to select .RSC or .igr documents and add them to the Style Resource Files list
on the Style Resources dialog box.
Remove - Removes a style resource document from the Style Resource Files
list. You must first select a document in that list.
Applying Unique Formats: An Overview

At times, you may want to make geometric elements, dimensions, fills, or
annotations look different from other ones on the drawing. To do this, you can
edit the formats of the element directly. When you do this, the formats are
applied only to the selected element or the one you are about to draw. This
overrides whatever settings are applied to it by the style, without changing the
style.
Formatting Individual Elements

Before you place or draw an element, you can set unique formats with the
ribbon, without changing the style. The commands on the Format menu,

except for Style, can also be used to set an element's formats before you place
or draw it.
For example, if you click Text Box, a style appears in the Style box on the
ribbon. The style contains a format for bold fonts. If you turn Bold off on the
ribbon, the text box that you place will not display bold text.
You can also apply unique formats to an existing element, dimension, fill, or
annotation. You can select the element and then edit the formats with the
ribbon or Properties on the Edit menu.
For example, if you select a text box that has a style that displays borders, you
can remove the borders with Properties on the Edit menu. Since you are
changing the element's format, and not its style, the style of the text box still
contains borders. If you apply this style to any other text box, it will still
display borders.
Formatting More Than One Element

You can change the format of more than one element at a time by selecting
the elements and formatting them the same way you would format an
individual element. However, all the elements that you select must be of the
same type. For example, if you select several text boxes, you can apply
settings to all of them at once. You cannot apply the same settings to a
dimension and a text box by selecting both of them at once.
Format a Geometric Element

1. Select a geometric element, such as a line, arc, or circle.
On the ribbon, set the options you want.
On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Element

Notes
You can also format an element before you draw it by clicking

Line on the Format menu, or by setting options on the ribbon.
Changing the current style settings on the ribbon or Properties

dialog box overrides the line style formats.
You can change the definition of a line style with the Style dialog
box.
Format a Text Box

1. Select a text box.
On the ribbon, set the options you want. To apply several formats
at once, click a style on the ribbon.
On the shortcut menu, click Properties. Then, on the Text Box

Notes
You can format a text box before you place it by using Text Box
on the Format menu or by setting options on the ribbon.
To format a group of text boxes quickly and easily, select several

text boxes and apply a text style by clicking a style on the ribbon.
If you apply a text style, you can override the formats of the style
by setting options on the ribbon or Text Box Properties dialog
box.
To apply a border to a text box, click a border option on the ribbon.

To change the settings for the border, you must select the text and
then set options with Properties on the shortcut menu.
Format a Dimension or Annotation

1. Select a dimension or annotation.
3. On the Properties dialog box, set the options you want.
Tip
For more information about the options, click Related Topics.

Notes
You can format a dimension or annotation before you place it by

using Dimension on the Format menu, or by setting options on
the ribbon.
You can also set formatting options on the Dimension ribbon.
You can also change a dimension style using Style on the Format
menu. Dimension styles apply to dimensions and all annotations,
except text boxes and callouts.
If you want to format an existing balloon, you must click to select


the leader line of the balloon. Then, you can change the formats of
the balloon.

Edits the properties of a selected element, group, symbol, dimension, or
annotation. If you select a group of elements, you can edit only the common
properties of that group. You can also edit the properties of a border around an
inserted object, called a SmartFrame.
Tip
must locate an element and then right-click.
Edit Properties is available only if you use the Customize

Element Properties Dialog Box

Sets the display properties and user-defined properties for elements.
Info Tab
The contents of this tab varies depending on whether you selected or
highlighted one of the following types of elements:
Line
Arc
Circle
Curve
Ellipse
Point
Fillet
Chamfer
Rectangle
Connector
Line Tab Options

Type - Displays the type of the selected element. You cannot edit the type.
Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the element. You
cannot edit the name of the drawing sheet.
Layer - Sets the layer that contains the element.
Start Point - Sets the X and Y values for the start point of the element.
the Y option.
the X option.
End Point - Sets the x and y values for the end point of an element.
the Y option.
the X option.
Length - Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value.
Angle - Sets the angle of a line.
Arc Tab Options

Start Point - Sets the x and y values for the start point of the element.
the Y option.
the X option.
Center Point - Sets the x and y values for the center point of the arc.

the Y option.
the X option.
End Point - Sets the x and y values for the end point of an element.
the Y option.
the X option.
Start Angle - Displays the angle formed by the x axis and the first point of the
sweep angle. Zero degrees is horizontal to the x axis.
Sweep Angle - Sets the sweep angle.
Circle Tab Options

Center Point - Sets the x and y values for the center point of the circle.
the Y option.
the X option.
Diameter - Sets the diameter of the circle.
Circumference - Displays the circumference of a closed element. Although
you cannot edit the circumference, the box automatically updates when you
edit the geometry.
Area - Displays the area of a closed element. Although you cannot edit the
area, the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Curve Tab Options


Curve Type - Displays the type of curve (open or closed). You cannot edit
this field.
Order - Displays the order of the curve. Higher order curves are more
accurate or precise than lower order curves. All curves drawn with the curve
command will be 4th order curves.
Vertices - Sets the coordinates of the nodes on the curve.
Nodes - Lists the nodes on a selected curve. When you select a node from the
list, its x and y values are displayed so you can edit them. The node type is
also displayed.
the Y option.
the X option.
Length - Displays the length of a curve. You cannot edit this value.
Area - Displays the area of a closed curve. Although you cannot edit the area,
the box automatically updates when you edit the geometry.
Ellipse Tab Options

Center Point - Sets the x and y values for the center point of a closed
element.
the Y option.
the X option.

Primary Axis - Sets the length of the primary axis. The ellipse orientation is
based on the primary axis.
Secondary Axis - Sets the length of the secondary axis. The secondary axis is
perpendicular to the primary axis.
Rotation Angle - Sets the angle of the primary axis of the ellipse. Zero
degrees is horizontal to the x axis. The angle increases in the
counterclockwise direction.
edit the geometry.
Point Tab Options

Coordinate - Sets the x and y values for an element.
the Y option.
the X option.
Fillet Tab Options


Radius - Specifies the radius between the two elements you want to use to
create the fillet.
Chamfer Tab Options

Angle - Measures the angle between the chamfer and the first linear element.
Setback A - Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the
chamfer on the first linear element you selected.
Setback B - Specifies the distance from the corner to the beginning of the
chamfer on the second linear element you selected.
Rectangle Tab Options


Centroid - Defines the exact center of the rectangle with X and Y
coordinates.
Height - Sets the height of the rectangle or square.
Width - Sets the width of the rectangle or square.
Angle - Sets the orientation angle of the element. Zero degrees is horizontal to
the x axis. The angle increases in the counterclockwise direction.
edit the geometry.
Connector Tab Options

Start Point - Sets the x and y values for the start point of the connector.
the Y option.
the X option.
End Point - Sets the x and y values for the end point of a connector.
the Y option.
# Vertices - Sets the number of vertices for a connector.
Format Tab
Tab Options
Color - Sets the drawing color.
Width - Sets the line width.

Type - Sets the drawing line type and style.
Line Command (Format Menu)

Formats a new line as you place it.
Format Line Dialog Box

Sets options for placing lines. You can access this dialog box by clicking Line
on the Format menu. You define line styles by clicking Style on the Format
menu.
Note
For a detailed explanation of the tabbed option available on the

Format Line dialog box, refer to the following section of the
SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and Colors:
Applying Formats with Styles - Commands and Dialog Boxes New Line Style Dialog Box.
Text Box Command (Format Menu)

Formats a new text box as you place it.

Formats a new dimension as you place it.
Format Dimension Dialog Box

Sets options for placing dimensions. You can access this dialog box with
Dimension on the Format menu. You can define dimension styles with Style
on the Format menu.
Note

Format Dimension dialog box, refer to the following section of
the SmartSketch User Guide - Managing Styles, Formats, and
Boxes: New Dimension Style Dialog Box.
SmartFrame Properties Dialog Box

Sets properties for a frame, called a SmartFrame, that provides a border for
an object when you insert or paste the object into the current document. You
can scale the object by dragging one of the handles on the frame. Or, you can
crop the object by pressing the Shift and dragging one of the handles.
Info Tab
Provides information about frames around objects, such as raster images or
drawings from other applications.
Tab Options
Type - Displays the category of the selected element. You cannot edit the
type.
Sheet - Displays the name of the drawing sheet that contains the selected
element. You cannot edit the sheet.
Layers - Sets the layer that contains the selected element.
Origin- Specifies the coordinates, or location, of an element along the X and
Y-axes.
Link - Determines the way that the object links with a SmartFrame. This
option is available only for linked objects.
As Part of the Model (Public)- Allows the linked object to publicly appear in
any document that links to the current document. Therefore, if you link an
object to the current drawing and then link to the current drawing from
another document, the current drawing and the linked object appear in the
other document. For example, this setting is useful if you link comments from
a Word document to the current drawing and you want other documents to
appear in the current drawing with the comments.
As Reference Only (Private)- Restricts the linked object from being
displayed in any document that links to the current document. If the current
drawing is linked to another document, the linked object does not appear in
the other document. For example, this setting could be useful if you want to
link comments from a Word document to the current drawing and you want
other documents to display the drawing, but not the comments.
Scale (1:1) - Sets the drawing scale to a 1:1 ratio. This means that the
representation of the objects on the drawing sheet is the same size as the realworld object being described.

For a 2:1 ratio, the 2 represents the size of the drawing and the 1
represents the size of the real-world object.
Tip
Fit to Sheet determines a drawing sheet scale that fits the

reference file within the sheet, but allows you to specify where to
insert the file by clicking the drawing sheet.
Custom- Defines a custom or scale ratio. The first value defines the distance
on the drawing sheet and the second value defines this distance in a real-world
value.
Format Tab
Allows you to format frames around objects, such as raster images or
drawings from other applications.
Tab Options
Show Border - Displays the frame border around the object.
Frame Shape - Sets the frame shape around the object.
Rectangular - Sets the shape as rectangular.
Elliptical - Sets the shape as an ellipse.
Boundary - Sets the shape as user-defined. This option allows the user to
create a customized shape that represents the SmartFrame boundary. The
customized shape can consist of circles, lines, arcs, etc, which create a closed
shape.
Applying Colors and Patterns to Closed

Boundaries: An Overview
You can fill a boundary with a pattern or a solid color using Fill on the Draw
toolbar. A fill is like other elements in that you can format it and move it
around, but the fill is always associated with a boundary. The boundary can be
made up of more than one element, but it must be closed on all sides. The
following figure shows a pattern fill and solid fill.
The software provides styles for fills for various engineering standards, such
as ANSI, ISO, and AIA.
Modifying Fills
A fill is associative, which means it maintains its original orientation to an
element regardless of the way you manipulate the element. For example, if
you move the boundary, the fill moves with it. If you change the boundary,
the fill changes to conform to the new boundary area.
A fill can exist only inside a closed boundary. If you drag a fill to another
region, the fill assumes the shape of the region where you dragged it. If you
open a closed boundary, the fill changes color to indicate that it is disabled. If
you close the boundary again, the fill changes color to show that it is now
active.
Formatting Fills
Formatting a fill is similar to applying formats to an element. You can apply
unique formats to fills using Properties on the Edit menu or by setting
options on the ribbon. To make several fills look the same, you can apply a fill
style by selecting the style on the ribbon.

Tip
The blank color on the Fill ribbon takes on the background color of
the document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an
element on which the symbol is placed. Incorporating a fill with
blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to
mask out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the
symbol.
You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new fill style by
typing a new name in the Style box on the Fill ribbon. The new style uses the
settings on the ribbon as the formats for the style.
Tip
If you want to copy a fill style from document to another, just

create a fill, apply a style, and then copy the fill to a new
document. The fill style appears in a dropdown list on the Fill
ribbon in the new document.
Place a Fill
You can place a fill only inside a closed boundary.
1. On the Draw toolbar, click Fill
2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings you want.

3. Click inside one or more closed boundaries that you want to fill.
Notes
When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element,

the fill does not automatically update to fit the new boundary. You
can refill the new boundary by selecting the fill handle, then

clicking Redo Fill on the ribbon to apply the fill to the new
boundary. You can also refill an area by dragging the handle to the
new area.
To fill a boundary quickly, you can zoom in on it first using Zoom

Area on the View menu.
You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new
fill style by typing a new name in the Style box on the Fill ribbon.
The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats for the
style.
Format a Fill
1. Select a fill.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click the settings that you want to update the fill.
Notes
You can format a fill before you place it by setting options on the
ribbon or using Properties on the Edit menu.
You can apply several formats at once by clicking a new fill style
in the Style list box on the ribbon.
You cannot modify an existing fill style, but you can create a new
fill style by typing a new name in the Style list box on the Fill
ribbon. The new style uses the settings on the ribbon as the formats
for the style.
If you want to copy a fill style from document to another, just

create a fill, apply a style, and then copy the fill to a new
document. The fill style appears in a dropdown list on the Fill
ribbon in the new document.
The blank color on the Fill ribbon takes on the background color of
the document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an
symbol.
Create a Fill Color

When you change a fill by setting options on the ribbon, you can create
custom colors for the fill.
1. Select the Fill command.

Note:
The existing fill will be replaced by the pattern and color you
select.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click Solid Color or Pattern Color.

Note
Pattern Color will not be selectable when Solid Color is selected.
3. At the bottom of the palette, click More

4. On the Colors dialog box, click Define Custom Colors and set the
options you want to create a new color.
5. Click Add to Custom Colors.
6. On the Custom Color Name dialog box, type the name that you want for
the color you created. This name appears on the palettes for Solid Color
or Pattern Color on the Fill ribbon.
Refill a Modified Boundary

When you change a filled boundary by drawing another element, the fill does
not automatically update to fit the new boundary.
1. Select the fill handle inside the fill.
2. On the Fill ribbon, click Redo Fill to apply the fill to the new boundary.
Notes
You can also refill an area by dragging the fill handle to the new
area.

Places a fill inside a closed boundary. You can modify fill properties with the
Fill ribbon.
You can also access this command on the Schematic toolbar.
Fill Properties Dialog Box

Sets the properties of a fill.
Fill Ribbon
Displays the active settings for a fill.
Tip
Ribbon Options
Style - Lists and applies the available styles. To define a new fill style, you
can type a name in the box. The new style uses the current settings on the
ribbon.
Pattern Color - Applies a pattern line color for pattern fills. If you select
none, the background will be transparent. Filled elements cover other
elements when they overlap. You can click More to define custom colors with
the Colors dialog box.

Solid Color - Applies a system color to set the background color for the
fill. If you select none, the background will be transparent. Filled elements
cover other elements when they overlap. You can click More to define
Tip
The blank fill color takes on the background color of the

document. This is useful for creating symbols that can cover an
symbol.
Redo Fill - Re-applies a fill to a filled area when the boundary changes.
A fill can become disabled, and change color, if you modify its boundary by
drawing another element or moving part of the existing boundary. If you click
Redo Fill, the area surrounding the fill handle is filled again.
Angle - Sets the angle of the fill in the active unit. Zero degrees is horizontal
to the x axis, and the angle (A) increases in a counterclockwise direction with
zero on the positive side (B) of the x axis. If you type a negative value, the
software displays the equivalent positive value.
Spacing - Sets the spacing between the pattern lines.
Custom Color Name Dialog Box

Saves a color that you created with a name. This dialog box appears after you
create a color with the Colors dialog box.
Dialog Box Options

Color Name - Specifies the name of the color that you created on the Colors
dialog box. After you save the custom color with a name, the name appears on
the color palette.
Sample Workflows
Formatting a New Drawing
You can use styles to make new drawings conform to your company's
standards. For example, the software provides line styles with names such as
Normal. You have decided to apply the Normal style to hidden lines. The
Normal style has a line type that looks like a dashed line.
Your company standard may require that a hidden line look like a dotted line.
To change the Normal line style to conform to your companys standards,

you can follow these steps:
2. On the Style dialog box, click the line style type in the Style Type box.
3. In the Styles list box, click the Normal line style.
4. Click Modify to access the Modify Line Style dialog box.
5. On the General tab, in the Type box, select the line type that looks like a
dotted line.
All the lines that you draw while the Normal style is selected on the ribbon
will conform to your companys standards: hidden lines will appear as dotted
lines. You can save the style to a template with Style on the Format menu.
This allows you to use the style again in other drawings.
Formatting an Existing Drawing

You can use styles to make existing drawings conform to your company's
standards. Suppose you receive a drawing from another company, and all the
hidden lines are continuous.
Your company standard indicates that hidden lines should be a line type that is
dashed. You have been using a line style, called Dashed, to conform to the
standards used by your company.
To change the hidden lines in the drawing quickly and efficiently, you can

follow these steps:
1. Open the drawing that you received from the other company.
2. Select all the lines that you want to change.
3. On the ribbon, select Dashed in the Style box to change all the lines that
you have selected. All the lines now appear as dashed lines instead of
continuous lines.
Working with OLE Objects: An Overview
Working with OLE Objects: An

Overview
SmartSketch supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to provide a
flexible and efficient means of inserting and working with external objects.
An object is data created in another application and inserted in a SmartSketch
drawing. Part of the power OLE provides is the ability to update objects
automatically if they've been modified in their source document, or edit
objects in place.
SmartSketch is fully compatible with OLE-compliant software, such as
Microsoft Office. You can transfer text, numbers, sound bites, or intelligent
graphics between documents that were created with SmartSketch and other
Microsoft Office applications. For example, you can use Microsoft Word to
create a materials report and then display the report in your SmartSketch
document. You can also link a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet to the Variable
Table in a SmartSketch document. You can then use the value in the
spreadsheet to control the dimensions in the SmartSketch drawing. You can
even create a document that contains a drawing created by SmartSketch, notes
from Microsoft Word, a spreadsheet created by Excel, and an image created in
Photoshop.
You can insert objects into your SmartSketch drawings using any of the
following methods:
Linking
Embedding
Cutting/Copying-and-Pasting
Linking
Linking takes data that's stored in one location (referred to as the source
document) and places a reference to it in another location (referred to as the
destination document). Linking allows you to use consistently updated
versions of an object in multiple SmartSketch drawings. You can edit the
linked object only by opening the source document and making your changes
there. When you change the original data, the linked data automatically
updates. You can link an object in a SmartSketch drawing by inserting the
information with Object on the Insert menu.
Relative Paths for Linked Objects

Linked objects placed in a SmartSketch drawing are saved as relative links.
You can think of a relative link as being a "child" of the SmartSketch drawing
in which it is inserted. A relative link points to the location of the linked file in

relation to the "parent" drawing. For example, a link to
Building\Doors\door1.igr points to a file called door1.igr, which is located in
the Building/Doors subdirectory inside the directory or folder where the
parent drawing is located. The use of relative links in your SmartSketch
projects enables you to create drawings that are portable, meaning you can
copy or move an entire directory structure to another location without
updating the file paths.
Important
The parent drawing must already exist as a saved file prior to

inserting the linked object; otherwise, there is no "relative"
location.
Embedding
Embedding takes data from the source document and stores a copy of the
information in the destination document. The copy becomes an independent
version of the original information. Although editing the data in the original
application has no effect on the copied version, you can edit the embedded
object in-place from within the SmartSketch drawing. You can embed an
object inside a SmartSketch drawing by inserting the information with Object
on the Insert menu.
Linking and Embedding with Copy/Cut-and-Paste

You're not limited to using the SmartSketch Insert menu to link or embed
files. You can move information between documents or between locations
using Cut, Copy, and Paste on the Edit menu in any OLE-compliant
software.
You can also move information between SmartSketch and other software by
selecting the information in a document or a document in the Windows
Explorer and dragging it to another location or another document. With this
method, you simply select the information that you want to move, press the
left mouse button, and drag the document to a location inside SmartSketch or
another Office application. To finish the operation, release the left mouse
button.
Note
If you want to copy the information, and not move it, press Alt
while dragging the object.
When you drop the information, a shortcut menu appears beside the pointer.
The options on the shortcut menu allow you to select how you want to place
the information in the destination document, such as pasting, linking, and so
forth.

If the software that you are copying or pasting to cannot edit the information,
it will automatically store, or embed, the information in the document. You
can then edit the embedded information with the software that created it. If
you cannot edit the information, the information is displayed as a static
picture.
When Do I Link or Embed?

Choosing whether to link or embed depends, in large part, on how you intend
to use your SmartSketch drawing. Linking is useful when you want to share
information in many different places and have that information update
automatically. For example, if you want to display a SmartSketch drawing in
several different documents, you can link the drawing inside each document.
Then, later, when you edit the drawing, each document automatically displays
the results of the drawing updates. Another consideration is file size. Because
linking only adds a reference to a file, the data does not significantly increase
the size of the SmartSketch drawing. If you want to keep the document's size
small, considering linking the data.
If the document's size is not an important factor, then you might want to use
embedding. Because an embedded object becomes part of the SmartSketch
drawing, it will increase the file size. Embedding is also useful when you want
to keep your data in one file, or if you want to distribute the data among
several people who may not have access to the source application. For
example, if you want to send out several drawings for review, you can embed
your drawing document into a Word document and mail the Word document
to each reviewer.
Embedding information is also a good choice if the information does not
require frequent updating.
Important
If you want to embed an object or edit an embedded object, you

must have access to the software that created it.
How Embedding Works: An Overview

When you embed data from another program, the object becomes part of the
SmartSketch drawing. When you double-click the embedded object in
SmartSketch, the software in which the object was created opens so that you
can edit it. When you go back to SmartSketch, the object updates
automatically with the changes that you made. The changes, however, exist
only in the current SmartSketch drawing
You can embed existing information or create a new object and then embed
it.
Embedding an Object
Suppose you want to use Word to add comments to a SmartSketch drawing.
First, you click Object on the Insert menu. On the dialog box, click Create
New and then click Microsoft Word in the list. After you click OK, Word
opens so that you can edit the object. If Word is already open, the new
document creates a new window in Word. After you type your notes, you
click Update on the File menu in Word. You should then switch back to the
SmartSketch document or drawing. A box the size of the object appears
beside the pointer. You can then click on the drawing sheet to place the Word
object and display your notes on the drawing sheet. You can use this same
process with any documents created with Office-compatible or OLE-aware
software.
If you want to insert some notes that you already have in a Word document,
you can use Object on the Insert menu. On the dialog box, you should select
Create From File and then enter the name of the Word document to insert the
entire document into the SmartSketch document.
Tip
If you want to embed the object, you should make sure the Link
check box is not set.
You can also embed information that you copied from another document.
Copy the information and then switch to the SmartSketch document. Use
Paste Special to paste the information as an embedded object.
If you want to use a mouse to embed objects, you can select the information in
the source software and then drag it into another document. You can also drag
the document that you want to embed from the Windows Explorer or
SmartSketch Explorer into a SmartSketch document. The object is placed
with the mouse drop point at the center of the object.
When dropping SmartSketch documents, you can place the object coincident

with the coordinate system of the container document. To do this, select
Coincident on the Reference Files tab of the Options dialog box.
Editing an Embedded Object

To edit an embedded object, you can double-click the object to open the
software that created the object. The menus and toolbars of the current
software are temporarily replaced by the menus and toolbars of the software
that just opened.
Tip
The software that created both documents must support OLE.
You can also click commands on the shortcut menu to activate the software
that created the object. To get the shortcut menu, select the embedded object
and then right-click.
Embed an Object
To Embed a New Object
1. Click Insert > Object.
2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create New.
3. In the Object Type box, click the type that describes the software in
which you want to create the object, and then click OK.
The contents of the list depend on which applications installed on your
computer support linking and embedding.
4. To return to SmartSketch, do one of the following:
If the object was created in another application that is in a separate

window, click Exit or Update on the File menu in that application.
If a message appears asking if you want to update the document,
click Yes.
If the software temporarily replaces some of the SmartSketch

menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded object.
When you return to SmartSketch, a box the size of the object

appears beside the pointer. You can click on the drawing sheet to
place the object that you edited or created.
Tip
While the box appears beside the pointer, if you hit ESCAPE, the
object will be placed at the default location. You can set the default

location with Options on the Tools menu. You enter the location
on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
To Embed an Existing Object

2. On the Insert Object dialog box, click Create From File.
3. In the File Name box, type or click the name of the object you want to
embed, and then click OK.
Tip
If you do not see the file that you want to embed, click a different
drive or volume, directory or folder.
4. A box the size of the object appears beside the pointer. You can click on
the drawing sheet to place the object that you edited or created.
Tip
While the box appears beside the pointer, if you hit ESCAPE, the
object will be placed at the default location. You can set the default
location using Options on the Tools menu. You enter the location
on the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box.
Notes
If you are working in the source software, you can embed an

existing object using Paste Special on the Edit menu.
You can also embed an object by dragging and dropping a

document from the Windows Explorer into a SmartSketch
document.
If you insert SmartSketch document into the current document, the

container document.
Edit an Embedded Object with the Source

Software
1. Double-click the embedded object.
2. Edit the object.
If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click


either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to SmartSketch.
If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces

the menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the embedded
object to return to SmartSketch.
Notes
If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click

either Exit or Update on the File menu to return to SmartSketch.
If you are editing the object in software that temporarily replaces

the SmartSketch menus and toolbars, click anywhere outside the
embedded object to return to SmartSketch.

Object Command (Insert Menu)
Inserts objects into a document through linking and embedding. The
difference between linking and embedding is how data is stored and updated.
The Object command inserts any OLE 2.0 enabled object, such as a Word
document, .AVI document, or CAD document. The inserted object can then
be edited by double-clicking it.
When you link an object to a document, the document stores

information about where the object is locatedthe object is not
stored in the document. When you embed an object in a document,
a copy of the object is stored in the document.
When you make changes to a linked object, all documents that

have links to that object update. When you make changes to an
embedded object, only the copy of the object that is stored in the
document updates.
Insert Object Dialog Box

Create New - Creates a new object to insert into the file that is currently open.
After you insert the object, you will be able to automatically enter information
into it.
Create from File - Inserts an entire document into the file that is currently
open. You will be able to edit the inserted object with the program used to
create the file.
File - Provides a space to type the file name you want to insert into your
document.
Browse - Provides a dialog box for locating the file you want to insert into
your document.
Link - Allows you to choose whether you want to link or embed your file.
Result - Shows the type of file you are inserting. This information changes
depending on the type of file you are inserting.
Tip

Question Mark
in the upper right corner of the dialog box, and
then click on a dialog box control.
How Linking Works: An Overview

Suppose you are sketching a drawing with SmartSketch and you want to
include it in an engineering change request that was created in Word. You are
going to update the drawing several times and want the change request to
reflect the latest updates. A good way to keep the updates current is to link the
drawing to the Word document and then periodically update the link.
Creating a Link
You can create links between documents as easily as you cut and paste
information. To create a link to an entire document, you can insert information
into the destination document with Object on the Insert menu. This is
convenient when you do not want to switch away from the document in which
you are currently working.
You can also link information by dragging and dropping the document from
the Windows Explorer or the SmartSketch Explorer into a SmartSketch
document. You must press Ctrl + Shift while dragging and dropping the
document. If you do not press the keys, the document is embedded.
To create a link to just part of a document, you can copy the information in
the source document and then use Paste Special in the destination document
to create the link. You must save the document before the link is established.
The software that created both documents must support OLE.
Reconnecting or Changing a Link

When you move a document or rename the source document, the links in the
destination document are broken. To reconnect the link to the source
document or change the link to another document, you can click Links on the
Edit menu.
Updating a Link
Suppose you linked revision notes in a Word document to your SmartSketch
drawing. You have revised your notes in Word since you first created the link.
You must now update the link in the SmartSketch document so that it displays
the latest revisions to your notes. You can specify whether the updates happen
automatically when you change the Word notes or if you must manually
update the link in your original document. First, click Links on the Edit menu
and then, on the Links dialog box, select the link that you want to set. You
can then click Automatic or Manual. With Automatic set, SmartSketch
updates the links every time you open the document. With Manual set,
SmartSketch updates the links only when you click Update Now on the Links
dialog box.
Editing Linked Information

The best way to edit linked information is to change it in the source document,
not in the destination document where the information is displayed. To edit
the linked information, double-click on the linked object.
Breaking a Link
If you do not need to automatically update the information displayed in the
destination document, you can break the link using Links on the Edit menu.
Once the link is broken, the information still appears in the destination
document, but you cannot update the information or reconnect the link. You
must create a new link instead.
Link an Object
Make sure that you save the source document before you link the information.
To create a link to another document

1. In the software in which the information you want to link was created,
open the source document and then select the information that you want to
link.
2. Click Edit > Copy.
3. Switch to your original document.
4. Click Edit > Paste Special.
5. Click Paste Link.
Tip
This option is available only if the software that created the

document supports OLE.
6. Under As, click the option that you want.
To create a link to another document without leaving the

software
2. Click Create From File.
3. In the File Name box, type or select the name and directory path of the
document to which you want to link.
4. Click the Link To File check box.
Tip
With this procedure, you can create a link only to an entire

document; you cannot link to a selection in a document.
Notes
SmartSketch creates links as automatic links by default.

SmartSketch updates automatic links each time you open the
document and each time the data in the source document changes,
whereas it updates manual links only when you specify. To change
the way the software updates links, see Update a Link.
You can also link information by dragging and dropping a

document from the Windows Explorer or SmartSketch Explorer
onto the drawing sheet. You must press Ctrl + Shift while
dragging and dropping to link the information. If you do not press
a key, the information will be embedded.
If you insert an .igr or .sym document into the document, the

container document.
Open an OLE Object for Editing

1. Select an OLE object.
If the object is linked, right-click to display the shortcut menu and

click Edit Object > Open to open the application in which the
object was created.
If the object is embedded, double-click the object to edit it.
Edit a Link
1. Click Edit > Links.
2. On the Links dialog box, click the link you want to edit.
3. If the link does not appear in the list, click Change Source and use the
Change Source dialog box to search for the link you want to edit.
4. Click Open Source.
5. Make the changes you want in the source file.
6. Click File > Save to save the changes in the source file.
Change a Link
2. Click the link you want to change.
Tip
To click multiple links, hold down Ctrl while you click on each
link.
3. Click Change Source.

4. In the File Name box, type or click the name of the file to which you want
to change the link.
Notes
If you do not see the file you want to open, click a different drive,
directory, or folder.
If you have other links to the same source file, make sure you
change all links from the previous source file to the new source
file.
Break a Link
2. In the Source File box, click the link or links you want to break.
3. Click Break Link, and then when the software prompts you to confirm
that you want to break the link, click Yes.
4. Click Close.
Close an Object's Document and Save the

Changes
Close and Return are available only after you double-click an object and edit
it.
Click File > Close > Return. The changes you made to the object
are saved to memory.
Notes
When you use Close and Return, you are not asked to save the
document until you exit SmartSketch.
You can use Revert to close the document without saving your

changes.

Links Command (Edit Menu)
Edits or updates links to objects in another document.
Links Dialog Box

Displays information about links in a document including file name, file
location, and whether the link is automatically or manually updated.
Links - Displays the current links in the document including the link type and
the update status.
Source - Displays the source of the linked file.
Type - Displays the linked file type.
Update - Allows you to choose whether your link is updated automatically or
manually. If you select Automatic, whenever you change the linked
information in the original document, this document will be updated. If you
select Manual, you will need to click Update Now to update information in
your document.
Tip
Question Mark
Customizing SmartSketch: An Overview
Customizing SmartSketch: An
Overview
Customization allows you to modify and enhance the software to meet your
specific needs. You can use your favorite standard Windows programming
tools and languages that are OLE-aware, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.
There are several ways to customize the software:
You can add built-in commands or macros to the toolbars and

menus delivered with the software.
You can go a step further and create your own macros in Visual
Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Macros can
automate a series of tasks and speed up your work.
Customizing with Built-In Commands

You can add built-in commands or macros to the toolbars and menus
delivered with the software.
You can also add button commands to a menu or a menu command to a
toolbar. For example, you can place Sheet Setup on the Main toolbar as a
button.
To add a button to a toolbar or a command to a menu, you click Customize on
the Tools menu. From there, you can click the Menu or Toolbars tab and
click the options that you want.
If you want to create a new toolbar that does not exist in the software, you can
start by clicking Toolbars on the View menu. You then click New and type
the name of the new toolbar on the New Toolbar dialog box. After you click
OK, the Customize dialog box automatically appears so that you can add
buttons to the new toolbar.
Tip
When you add commands or buttons to the menus or toolbars in

the software, the changes that you made appear only if a document
is open.
Customizing with Macros

Not only can you add built-in commands or buttons to the software, you can
also create your own macros that can be added to the menus and toolbars in
the same manner. Customize on the Tools menu allows you to add macros to
software's standard menus and toolbars. You can also run the macros directly
by clicking Macro on the Tools menu and selecting the macro.

You can create the macros in Visual Basic or other OLE-aware programming
applications. Some of the OLE-aware programming applications are VBA
(inside Excel), Visual C++ Delphi, Visual Basic, and so forth.
A type library is delivered with the software containing all the objects,
properties, and methods available with the product. On the Help menu, click
Programming with SmartSketch to access the programming Help. In the
Table of Contents, you can also get a complete reference to the objects,
methods, and properties. You can view the type library with Visual Basic's
type library browser or the browser for an OLE-aware programming
application. Practical examples of macros are also delivered with the software.
Custom Command Macros Delivered with the Software

The software provides custom command macros whose source can be viewed
in the \SMARTSKETCH\CUSTOM directory. These macros have been
compiled into the \SMARTSKETCH\CUSTOM\BIN directory. There you
will find stand-alone .EXE files and a subdirectory called OLESVR that
contains OLE-server .EXE files and .DLL files. The files in the OLESVR
directory can executed directly from within the software. A README.TXT
document located in the source directory for each macro explains how to run
them.
Tip
If you did not install the macros and macros source during
installation of the software, you must run the Setup program again.
In the Setup program, you must select the Custom setup.
For example, you can run the EXTEND.EXE custom command macro inside
the software. This sample was written in Visual Basic and compiled as an
OLE-server executable program. A README.TXT document for each
custom command macro provides more details on compiling as an OLE
server. You can find the README.TXT for each custom command macro in
a specific directory: \PROGRAM FILES\Smartsketch\CUSTOM<SAMPLE
MACRO NAME>\README.TXT. For example, the README.TXT
document for EXTEND.EXE is found in \PROGRAM
FILES\Smartsketch\CUSTOM\EXTEND\README.TXT.

The following add-ins are included with the software and are located in the
\Addins directory or one of its subdirectories. If you cannot locate the add-in
on your hard disk or network drive, you can select Macro Library or other
add-in option in the Setup program to install these add-ins.
Add-in
Description
Auto Save
The Wizard of ORG
Automatically saves open documents at the

interval you specify.
Creates organization charts quickly and
easily.
Customize the Software with the Options

Command
You can use Options on the Tools menu to customize the software. You can
change such things as the screen appearance, document location, and display
colors.
2. On the Options dialog box, select the tab containing the information you
want to customize.
3. Use the controls on the Options dialog box to make the appropriate
changes.
Create a New Toolbar

1. Click View > Toolbars.
2. On the Toolbars dialog box, click New.
3. On the New Toolbars dialog box, type the name of the new toolbar. When
you click OK, the Customize dialog box appears so that you can add
buttons to the new toolbar.
4. On the Toolbars tab, click the category containing the command that you
want to add.
5. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar.
Tip
When you create a new toolbar, the changes that you made appear
only if a document is open.
Add a Button to a Toolbar

1. Click Tools > Customize.
2. On the Toolbars tab, click the category that contains the command you
want to add.
3. Drag the command button from the Buttons display area to the toolbar.
Remove a Command from a Toolbar

2. On the Toolbars tab, drag the button you want to remove from the toolbar
and drop it outside the toolbar boundary.
Tip
When you remove commands from the toolbars, the changes that
you made appear only if a document is open.
Restore a Customized Toolbar to Default

Settings
If you customize a toolbar, you can restore the toolbar to the original settings.
1. Click View > Toolbars.
2. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the toolbar you want to restore.
3. Click Reset.
4. Click OK.
Run a Macro
1. Click Tools > Macro.
2. On the Run Macro dialog box, click the macro you want to run.
3. Click Run.
Notes
You can create macros with any programming tool that supports
OLE automation, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.
Create a New Menu

2. On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the
Categories box.
3. In the List box, click the name of an existing menu.
4. Click Add Menu. The new menu is added after the existing menu.
Tip
If you want to add a menu to an existing menu, set the Place Into

Selected Menu check box before you click Add Menu. You can
add commands to the new menu later to create a cascading menu.
5. In the List box, type the name of the menu and click anywhere away from
the name to enter it.
Tip
When you create menus, the changes that you made appear only if
a document is open.
Add a Command to a Menu

2. On the Menu tab, click the command category that you want in the
Categories box.
3. In the Commands/Macros box, click the name of the command that you
want to add.
4. In the List box, double-click the name of an existing menu that you want
to add a command to. The List box expands to show the commands on the
existing menu.
5. Click the name of the command that you want the new command to
appear after.
6. Set the Place Into Selected Menu check box.
Caution
If you want to add the new command to the main menu bar, do not
set the Place Into Selected Menu check box. The name of the new
command will be added to the main menu bar after the existing
menu that you selected in the List box.
7. Add Command. The new command is added after the existing command.
Tip
When you add buttons to the menus, the changes that you made
appear only if a document is open.
Delete a Command From a Menu

2. On the Menu tab, double-click a menu in the List box. The List box
expands to show the commands on the existing menu.
3. Click the name of an existing menu or command that you want to remove
from the menu or the main menu bar.

4. Click Remove.
Tip
When you delete a command from a menu, the changes that you
made appear only if a document is open.
Restore All Built-in Menus to the Original

Settings
2. On the Menu tab, click Reset All.
Notes
If you remove Customize from the Tools menu, you can restore it
by positioning the pointer over a toolbar and, on the shortcut menu
and clicking Customize.
Installing Additional Tools

Add-ins are commands or functions that add special capabilities the software.
To install an add-in, choose Add-Ins from the Tools menu. After you install
an add-in, its commands or functions become an integrated part of the
software until you remove the add-in.

The following add-ins are included with the software and are located in the
\Addins directory or one of its subdirectories. If you cannot locate the add-in
on your hard disk or network drive, you can select Macro Library or other
add-in option in the Setup program to install these add-ins.
Add-in
Description
Auto Save
Automatically saves open documents at the

interval you specify.
Creates organization charts quickly and
easily.
The Wizard of ORG
Install or Remove an Add-In

1.
Click Tools > Add-Ins.
2. To install an add-in, select the associated check box.


Tip
The add-ins you install are active until you remove them.
Notes
To remove, clear the check box associated with the add-in. The
software removes the add-ins the next time you start this
application.
If the add-in you want to install is not listed in the Add-Ins dialog
box, choose Browse and locate the drive, directory, and filename
for the add-in.

Add-Ins Command (Tools Menu)
Allows you to select add-ins that are automatically available and ready to use
when you start the software. With Add-Ins, you can install or remove:
Add-ins that come with the software.
Add-ins that you create.
Add-Ins Available
Lists the available add-ins. You can select or clear the add-in check boxes to
install or remove add-ins in the software.
Browse
Lists the available drives and directories from which you can select an add-in
to install in the software
Customize Command (Tools Menu)

Allows you to customize toolbars or menus to fit your workflow.
Customize Dialog Box

Customizes toolbar buttons and menus.
Menu Tab
Adds or removes commands from menus or the main menu bar. You can add
a command to an existing menu or build a custom menu with the commands
that you want.
Tab Options
Categories - Sets the category that you want to select a command or macro
from to add to the menu or main menu bar. When you select the title of a
group of commands in this box, you can click the title of a command in the
Commands/Macros box. When you select Macros in the Categories box,
you can click a macro document in the Commands/Macros box.
Commands/Macros - Sets the command or macro that you want to add to the
menu. If you select a macro, you can also click Browse and change the
directory for macros. When you change the directory, the macro list in the
Commands/Macros box displays a list of macros in the current directory.
List - Lists the menus. Double-click on a menu name to see all the commands
on a menu. When you click Add Command, Add Menu, Place Into Selected
Menu, or Remove, the changes show up on this list. This list also changes to
allow you type in a name for the new menu that you want to add.
Place Into Selected Menu - Places a command or macro that you selected in
the Commands/Macros box on the menu that you selected in the List. If you
do not set this option, then the macros or commands that you are adding are
placed before or after the command or menu that you selected in the List box.
Reset All - Restores all menus and the main menu bar to the original settings.
Add Command - Places a command on a menu or the main menu bar. This
button is available only when you select a command or macro in the
Commands/Macros box.
Add Menu - Places a menu on an existing menu or the main menu bar. When
you add a menu with this option, you can add commands to the new menu
later. If you add a menu to an existing menu, this creates a cascading menu.
After you click this button, you can type the name that you want in the List
box and then click away from the name to enter it.
Remove - Removes the command or menu that you selected in the List box.

Description - Displays a description or result of the options that you selected
before you apply them to a menu.
Browse - Changes the directory for macros with the Select Macro Directory
dialog box. Browse appears only when you click Macros in the Categories
box. The Select Macro Directory dialog box changes the directory for listing
macros on the Customize dialog box. When you change the directory and
click OK, the Commands/Macros box lists the macros for the directory that
you selected.
Tip
Question Mark
Toolbars Tab
Adds or removes commands from toolbars.
Tab Options
Categories - Specifies the category that you want to customize.
Buttons - Specifies which button from the active category you want to add to
a toolbar.
Description - Describes the selected button displayed in the Buttons box.
Toolbars Command (View Menu)

Creates new toolbars and displays or hides selected toolbars. You can also
change toolbar color schemes and button sizes.
Toolbars Dialog Box

Sets options for displaying, hiding, or changing toolbars.
Dialog Box Options

Toolbars - Lists the available toolbars. You can select the box next to the
toolbar you want to display, hide, or change.
Toolbar Name - Displays the name of the toolbar that you have selected.
New - Accesses the New Toolbar dialog box in which you can specify a
name for the new toolbar.
Customize - Adds buttons to or removes buttons from built-in toolbars with
the Customize dialog box.
Reset - Resets the selected toolbar to the original icons.
Color Buttons - Adds color to the toolbar buttons. If this option is cleared,
toolbar buttons are black and white.
Large Buttons - Enlarges toolbar buttons so that they are easier to see.
Show ToolTips - Displays on-screen descriptions of a toolbar button when
the pointer pauses over it.
OK - Saves changes and dismisses the dialog.
Cancel - Ignores any changes and dismisses the dialog.
Help - Displays the Help topic for this dialog.
Macro Command (Tools Menu)

Runs a macro.
Tip
Macro is available only if you use the Customize command to

Run Macro Dialog Box

Selects the macro that you want to run.

Tip
Question Mark
Sample Workflow
Customizing a Toolbar
Using Extend to Next on the Draw toolbar, you can extend one line to the
next line. This command is easy and intuitive to use. However, sometimes you
might want to extend a line a specific distance that does not depend on the
location of another element.
1. In the document, place two lines that are not connected, but are
perpendicular.
2. On the Tools menu, click Customize.
3. On the Customize dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.
4. In the Categories box, click Macros.
5. Click Browse.
6. On the Select Macro Directory dialog box, click EXTEND.EXE in the
\PROGRAM FILES\SMARTSKETCH\CUSTOM\BIN\OLESVR
directory.
Tip
If you cannot find the Custom directory, you must run Setup again
and select Custom.
7. Click OK.
8. On the Customize dialog box, in the Macros box, drag the
EXTEND.EXE filename out of the dialog box.
9. On the Custom Button dialog box, in the Buttons box, click the yellow
happy face button.
10. Click Assign.
11. The new button appears on a separate floating toolbar. Drag this toolbar
over to the top of the window and place it beside the Main toolbar.
12. On the new toolbar, click the happy face.
13. On the Extend by Distance dialog box, in the Distance box, type 10 and
press Enter. The dialog box automatically converts whatever you type
into the units of measure that are set for the current document. You can set
the units using Properties on the File menu.
14. In the document, drag the mouse over the line that you want to extend. A
preview of what the line will look like shows up in a red color.
15. Click the line to set the distance.

16. On the Extend by Distance dialog box, click Close.
You can write your own applications that are very similar to the
EXTEND.EXE file and run them from within the current document. Click
Programming with SmartSketch on the Help menu to get more information
about creating your own macros.
Image Integration: An Overview

SmartSketch's Image Integrator provides integrated tools for viewing and
manipulating images in a vector/raster drawing environment. You can
manipulate all or part of an image using such edits as cut and move, copy and
move, tint, paint, or erase. You can adjust contrast and brightness, or invert
the pixel values to negative or positive. You can even scale and rotate images
to match vector drawings or maps using source and target registration points.
Image Integrator supports popular binary grayscale, indexed color, and true
color image formats including .GIF, .JPG, .BMO, .TIF, .CAL, .PC, .RLE,
.COT, .CIT, .TG4, .CRL, .CMP, and .RGB.
Notes
When you install the Image Integrator module in conjunction

with the CAD Translators module, you can import hybrid
raster.vector files into and exported from AutoCAD and
Microstation files while maintaining all reference data.
When you install the Image Integrator module in conjunction

with the Web Publishing module, you can export hybrid
raster/vector files that contain hyperlinks to ActiveCGM format
and viewed web pages while maintaining hyperlink integrity.
Working with Raster Images

Images created by lines of pixels are called raster images, and the code that
represents the pixels in the raster image is called raster data. The format of the
raster data in the document determines how the pixels are arranged when the
image is displayed.
Raster data is unintelligent. A line segment in a raster image cannot be
manipulated as a line segment. Rather, it must be manipulated as the
collection of pixels that form the line segment.
A vector data document is a collection of coherent, geometric elements.
Vector data is intelligent. A line segment in a vector file can be manipulated
as a line segment.
A vector data object is an indivisible entity. A raster image, by contrast, is
composed of pixels, arranged to give the appearance of lines, shapes, and
characters. When zoomed out, a raster image appears as contiguous lines and
shapes. However, if you zoom in, it becomes apparent that a raster image
consists of individual foreground pixels, represented as small squares on the
screen.
Displaying Raster Images

Image Integrator allows you to display and manipulate raster images along
with the vector data on the drawing sheet. When you save the current
document, which contains vector graphics, you can save a link to a raster
image along with it.
This structure can be useful in many ways. For example, if a shopping center
is planned for a piece of property, and proposals are sought for the design of
the shopping center, an aerial photograph may be taken of the property. The
photograph can then be converted into a raster image. Proposals can be
submitted as vector documents that each contain a link to the original raster
image. In this way, different proposals for the shopping center can be easily
evaluated, with each proposal starting from the same raster image of the
property.
Inserting an Image
To insert a raster image, you must first install Image Integrator using AddIns on the Tools menu. If you do not see the add-in listed in the Add-In
Manager, you must run the Image Integrator Setup to install the add-in.
After installingImage Integrator, you can then insert the raster image using
the Imagecommand on the Insert menu. You can only link the image; you
cannot embed it. To edit various properties of the image border, you can select
the image and click Properties on the shortcut menu. You can also insert
raster images, edit their properties, and make other modifications using the
commands on theImage Integrator ribbon.
Positioning an Image
After you insert a raster image into a document, you can use Position to align
the image with a vector element or a group of elements. You can move, scale,
rotate, and skew a source image to match a target image or vector frame. All
alignment modifications are made by placing up to three source points and
three target points. You can define source points by clicking and dragging or
by a single click on the source image. To use Position, select an image and
then click Position on the Image Integrator toolbar.
Defining Source and Target Points by Clicking and

Dragging
Clicking and dragging (on the image border or within the borders) allows you
to drag the image frame to the needed target location. When the image is
released the source image will reposition, and display a crosshair, representing
the location of the first source point. A second point will be required on the
source image to reposition (rotate and/or scale) the image. Click and drag on
(or within) the image border, move to the needed location and release. The

source image will be repositioned, scaled, and rotated about the two points.
The location where the source image is released represents the corresponding
target points. These target points can be another image file, a vector element,
or nothing at all. The source image will be skewed about the two points.
Defining Source and Target Points Using a Single Click

When you define source points using single clicks, you must also use single
clicks to define the target points. Depending on where the source and target
points are placed, you can use this method to move, scale, rotate, and skew the
source image to match a target image.
Insert a Raster Image

1. Click Insert > Image.
2. In the Look In field, select the directory containing the raster image you
want to insert.
3. In the File Name field, type the name of the raster image or select it from
the list of raster images.
Notes
You can only link an image; you cannot embed one.
You can also insert a raster image using the Insert Image
command on the Image Integrator toolbar.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Image Integrator

module.
Position an Image by Dragging:

1. Click the image for source point one (on or within the image border).
2. Drag the displayed outline to the appropriate position and release the
mouse button at target point one.
3. Click the image again for source point two (on or within the image
border).
4. Drag the mouse to scale and rotate the image to the appropriate angle and
release the mouse button for target point two.
Tip
During a drag operation, hold down the Ctrl key to restrict

movement to 45 degree increments for placing the second target

point. You can also hold down the Shift key to restrict movement
in placing the second target point.
Important

module.
Position an Image by a Single Click:

1. With the Select Tool
2. Select the Position
active, select the raster image.

command from the Image Integrator toolbar.
3. Single click the source image to select source point 1.

4. Single click the target location to place target point 1.
5. Single click the source image again to select source point 2.
6. Single click another location on the target to place target point 2.
Notes
When you use single clicks, the image is not moved into position
until the second target point is defined.
You can to exit the command by right-clicking the mouse or by

pressing the Esc key.
Important

module.
Select a Rectangular Area of an Image

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images on which you want to
define a select area.
2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Rectangular Select Area
3. Drag to define the rectangular select area on the image. When you drag the
crosshair to define a rectangular select area, a solid rectangular outline
dynamically appears as you drag.
Tip
You can use the Alt, Shift, and Space Bar keys to modify the
default behavior of the Rectangular Select Area command.
4. Release the mouse button to end the rectangular select area. When you
complete the rectangle, the solid select area outline becomes a dotted
outline.
Note
As you create a select area with the Rectangular Select Area

command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the
default behavior of your selection:
Keyboard Modifier
Shift
Alt
Space Bar
Space Bar + Alt
Shift + Alt
Shift + Space Bar
Shift + Space Bar + Alt
Result
Constrains the select area to a square with
the same aspect ratio.
Adds a new area to an existing select area
(union).
Subtracts the overlapping area from the
existing select area (difference).
Designates the overlapping area as the new
select area (intersection).
Constrains the select area to a square and
adds a new area to the existing select area.
subtracts the overlapping area from the
existing select area.
designates the overlapping area as a new
select area.
Important

module.
Select a Polygon-Shaped Area of an Image

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images on which you want to
define a select area.
2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Polygonal Select Area
3. Click to define the first point of the polygon select area. When you select
the first point, a dynamically drawn solid line connects the first point to
the cursor.
4. Click to define additional points to define the shape of the polygon select
area. As you define additional points, the software dynamically displays a
solid outline of the polygon.
Tips
While drawing a polygon-shaped select area, you can back up a

point at a time using the Backspace key. When you press the
Backspace key, the last line segment in the solid outline is deleted,
and you can continue creating the select area from the previous
point. You can continue pressing the Backspace key until you are
at an appropriate point to begin defining the polygon again.
You can also use the Alt and space bar keys to modify the default
behavior of the Polygonal Select Area command.
5. Right-click to end the polygon. When you complete the polygon, the solid
select area outline becomes a dotted outline.
Notes
As you create a select area with the Polygonal Select Area

command, you can use the following modifier keys to change the
behavior of your selection:
Keyboard Modifier
Alt
Result
(union).
Space Bar
Space Bar + Alt
The Shift key is not a valid modifier for the Polygonal Select
Area command.
Important

module.
Adjust the Contrast and Brightness of an

Image
1. Select the image or images for which you want to adjust the contrast and
brightness.
Tip
You can select an area of an image using the Rectangular Select

Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image
Integrator toolbar after you select the image that you want.
2. Click Contrast and Brightness
on the Image Integrator toolbar.
3. In the Contrast and Brightness dialog box, make changes to the contrast
and brightness settings by dragging the sliders or clicking in the grid.
Tips
As you move the two slider bars in the grid, the corresponding
values in the Contrast and Brightness boxes change.
In the grid, the horizontal line represents the brightness of the

raster image, and the vertical line represents the contrast of the
image.
4. To review settings in the Preview window, click Preview Current

Settings.
5. To store the new contrast and brightness settings, click Store.
Notes
You can also change brightness and contrast values by typing the
values directly into the Contrast and Brightness boxes.
To change both the contrast and brightness at the same time, drag
the intersection of the sliders to a new position, or click the new
position in the grid.
By default, the intersection of the two sliders in the grid is always

the center of the grid. The two sliders appear in white. When they
are moved, a black non-editable outline appears to show the
sliders' default position.
To view only the original image in the Preview window, click

View Original Image.
To view the results of the last stored settings in the Preview

window, click Preview Stored Settings. This option is only
available if you stored gradation settings previously.

Important

module.
Fill an Image Area with Color

1. Select the image that you want to modify.
2. Select an area of the image using the Rectangular Select Area and
Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image Integrator toolbar. By
default, the entire image is selected.
3. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Fill
4. In the Fill dialog box, click Edit to select the color that you want to use to
fill the image area.
5. Under Opacity, drag the slider to define the level of transparency you
want for the fill color.
Tip
As you drag the slider, the opacity value in the Value box changes.
6. To fill the selected area with the selected color, click OK.
Notes
Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For

example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100%
contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is
5% transparent.
You can also define the opacity for the fill by typing the
percentage in the Value box.
Important

module.
Invert Colors in an Image

1. Select the image or images that you want to invert.
Tip
You can select an area of an image using the Rectangular Select

Area and Polygonal Select Area commands on the Image
Integrator toolbar after you select the image that you want.

2. Click Invert
inverted.
on the Image Integrator toolbar. Image pixel values are
Notes
Inverting the colors in a binary image swaps all foreground and

background pixel values.
Inverting the colors in a positive continuous tone image to a

negative converts the brightness values for all pixels to their
inverse values. For example, a value of 90% converts to 10%.
Inverting the colors in a negative continuous tone image to a

positive converts the brightness values for all pixels to their inverse
values. For example, a value of 10% converts to 90%.
Important

module.
View Image Properties

1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images for which you want to
view properties.
2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Image Properties
Notes
If you select multiple images, only the fields that have a common
property for all the selected images display information in the
Image Properties dialog box.
You cannot edit image properties.

Important

module.
Undo Changes to Images
To undo the most recent reversible change made to the image,

click Image Undo on the Image Integrator toolbar.
Note
The Image Undo command is unavailable when there are no edits

to undo or when edits made to the raster image cannot be reversed.

Important

module.
Redo Changes to Images
To redo the most recent reversed change to a raster image, click

Image Redo on the Image Integrator toolbar.
Notes
The Image Redo command only brings back the most recent
change that was reversed.
The Image Redo command is unavailable when there are no

commands that have been reversed using the Image Undo
command.
Important

module.
Save Changes to a Linked Image

When you make changes to a linked raster image, the software does not save
changes to the image source file when you save your document. If you want to
save changes to the image source file, you must use the Save Selected
Image(s) command on the Image Integrator toolbar.
1. On the drawing sheet, select the image or images that you want to save.
2. On the Image Integrator toolbar, click Save Selected Image(s)
Important
The software saves changes to the source files for the selected
images. Once you save changes to the image source file, you
cannot undo them.

module.
Save as Image
1. Click File > Save as Image.

2. In the Save as Image dialog box, define the file format and resolution for
the image.
3. To modify the compression factor for the selected file type, move the
Compression factor slider to the left or right.
4. To define a specific area of the sheet to save as an image, click Define
sheet area to save as image.
5. To rotate the image 90 degrees counterclockwise, click Rotate image 90
degrees.
6. To force the new image file to be linked to a new SmartFrame on a new
sheet, click Place image on new sheet.
7. To create the new image, click OK.
Important
If you clicked Define sheet area to save as image, click and drag to define
the area of the sheet that you want to save as an image.
8. Use the options in the Save As dialog box to provide the name and
location of the newly created image file.
9. Click Save to store the new image file.
Important

module.

Image Command (Insert Menu and Image
Integrator Toolbar)
Places a raster image into your document.
Tip
Insert Image is available only if you use the Customize command

Important

module.
Position Command (Image Integrator

Toolbar)
Positions a raster image in a document. You can move, scale, rotate, and skew
a source image to match a target image or vector frame. All alignment
modifications are made by placing up to three source points and three target
points. You can define source points by clicking and dragging or by a single
click on the source image.
Important

module.
Rectangular Select Area Command (Image

Integrator Toolbar)
Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a rectangle around pixels
that you define.

A select area is a user-defined area of individual pixels or groups of pixels
within an image. You can create a select area for editing purposes.
When you drag the crosshair to define a rectangular select area, a solid
rectangular outline dynamically appears as you drag. When you reach the
desired size, release the mouse button to create the select area. The solid select
area outline then becomes a dotted outline.
As you create a select area with the Rectangular Select Area command, you
can use the following modifier keys to change the default behavior of your
selection:
Keyboard Modifier
Shift
Alt
Space Bar
Space Bar + Alt
Shift + Alt
Shift + Space Bar
Shift + Space Bar + Alt
Result
Constrains the select area to a square with
the same aspect ratio.
(union).
adds a new area to the existing select area.
subtracts the overlapping area from the
existing select area.
designates the overlapping area as a new
select area.
Important

module.
Polygonal Select Area Command (Image

Integrator Toolbar)
Creates a select area in a raster image by drawing a polygon around pixels that
you define.
A select area is a user-defined area of individual pixels or groups of pixels
within an image. You can create a select area for editing purposes.
Following the first point, click the points to define the polygon. Points are
placed when you release the mouse button. To remove a point or back up,

press the Backspace key. Right-click to end the polygon. The solid select area
outline then becomes a dotted outline.
As you create a select area with the Polygonal Select Area command, you
can use the following modifier keys to change the behavior of your selection:
Keyboard Modifier
Alt
Space Bar
Space Bar + Alt
Result
(union).
Note
The Shift key is not a valid modifier for the Polygonal Select
Area command.
Important

module.
Contrast and Brightness Command (Image

Integrator Toolbar)
Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image. You can modify these
two attributes individually using the two-dimensional grid or the edit boxes in
the Contrast and Brightness dialog box.
The 2-D grid also allows you to modify contrast and brightness together by
clicking anywhere in the grid. The intersection of the two lines moves to the
point you click. You can also select the intersection of the two lines and
dragging it within the grid to adjust the brightness and contrast at the same
time.
Important

module.
Contrast and Brightness Dialog Box

Modifies the contrast and/or brightness of an image.
Dialog Box Options

Contrast and Brightness Grid - Allows you to modify the contrast and/or
brightness of an image by dragging the horizontal and vertical lines in the
grid. The horizontal line represents the brightness of the raster image, and the
vertical line represents the contrast of the image. You can also modify the
contrast and brightness at the same time by clicking anywhere in the grid to
move the intersection of the two lines. By default, the intersection of the two
sliders in the grid is always the center of the grid. The two sliders appear in
white. When they are moved, a black non-editable outline appears to show the
sliders' default position.
As you move the sliders, the values in the Contrast and Brightness boxes for
both attributes dynamically change.
Contrast - Specifies the contrast for the raster image. You can enter a value
directly in the Contrast box to change the contrast.
When you type a value, the Contrast slider in the grid automatically moves to
reflect the new value. If you move the Contrast slider or both sliders in the
grid, the value automatically updates in the Contrast box.
Brightness - Specifies the brightness of the raster image. You can enter a
value directly in the Brightness box to change the brightness. When you type a
value, the Brightness slider in the grid automatically moves to reflect the new
value. If you move the Brightness slider or both sliders in the grid, the value
automatically updates in the Brightness box.
View Original Image - Displays the image using original gradation value
settings in the Preview window.
Preview Current Settings - Displays the image using new gradation value
settings in the Preview window.
Preview Stored Settings - Displays the image using stored gradation value
settings in the Preview window. This option is only available if you stored
gradation values previously.
Store - Stores the current gradation value settings.
Important

module.
Fill Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)


Fills the select area with the selected fill color.
You can also set the opacity of the fill. Setting the opacity allows you to fill
the select area with a certain degree of transparency. For example, 100%
opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of
transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent.
Fill Dialog Box

Specifies the fill color and opacity for the fill.
Dialog Box Options

Fill color - Specifies the current fill color. You can change the fill color by
clicking Edit.
Edit - Allows you to select a new fill color. Clicking Edit displays the
standard Windows Color dialog box to allow you to select from existing
colors or define your own custom color.
Select opacity - Specifies the opacity for the fill color. To change the opacity,
drag the slider bar to the left or right. As you drag the slider, the opacity value
in the Value box changes. Opacity defines the degree of transparency of the
fill color. For example, 100% opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100%
contains some level of transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5%
transparent.
Value - Allows you to enter the opacity value for the fill color. If you enter a
value here, the Select opacity slider moves to reflect the new value. Opacity
defines the degree of transparency of the fill color. For example, 100%
opacity is a solid fill. Anything other than 100% contains some level of
transparency; for example, 95% opacity is 5% transparent.
Important

module.
Image Properties Command (Image

Integrator Toolbar)
Allows you to view the properties of a raster image. Image properties are not
editable.

If multiple images are selected, only the fields that have a common property
for all the selected images display information.
Important

module.
Image Properties Dialog Box

Specifies the fill color and opacity for the fill.
Important

module.
General Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box)

Tab Options
Source file - Specifies the name of the source file for the raster image.
Type - Specifies the image type, such as BMP, TIFF, JPG, and so on, and data
type of the image, such as binary, RGB, or grayscale.
Location - Specifies the storage location for the image source file.
Resolution - Specifies the resolution for the image source file in pixels/inch
or pixels/centimeter and microns.
Size - Specifies the file size of the image source file on disk.
Created - Specifies the creation date for the image source file.
Modified - Specifies the last modification date for the image source file. If
you make changes to the image in the product and click Save Image on the
toolbar, this modification date updates with the date you saved the image.
Important

module.
Details Tab (Image Properties Dialog Box)

Tab Options
Source file - Specifies the name of the source file for the raster image.
Width - Specifies the actual width of the raster image.
Height - Specifies the actual height of the raster image.
Number of lines - Specifies the number of lines in the selected image.

Pixels per line - Specifies the number of pixels per line in the selected image.
Orientation - The scanline orientation of the selected image, such as ULH,
URH, and so on.
Important

module.
Image Undo Command (Image Integrator

Toolbar)
Reverses the last change made to the raster image. The Image Undo
command reverses or purge raster data edits and raster transformations. The
Image Undo command is unavailable when there are no edits to undo or
when edits made to the raster image cannot be reversed.
Important

module.
Image Redo Command (Image Integrator

Toolbar)
Reverses the last change most recent undo command. The Image Redo
command only brings back the most recent change that was reversed. The
Image Redo command is unavailable when there are no commands that have
been reversed using the Image Undo command.
Important

module.
Invert Command (Image Integrator Toolbar)

Creates a negative image of the selected raster image, replacing each pixel

color with its opposite on the color wheel. You can invert both grayscale and
color images.
If an area is selected in the image, the invert conversion applies only to the
select area, and changes are applied directly to the image.
Important

module.
Save as Image Command (File Menu)

Saves the graphic data on the sheet as a raster image and, optionally, links the
new raster file to a SmartFrame on a new sheet. The Save as Image
command is useful in preparing a sheet for plotting.
The new sheet has the same properties as the sheet that you converted to a
raster image, with one exception: you can rotate the output by 90 degrees
counterclockwise, which may cause the new sheet to be a different size.
You can define an area of the sheet to convert to an image, instead of using
the default sheet area, by clicking Define Area and specifying the area to
include in the raster image by defining two points. Define two points by
clicking the first point and dragging the cursor to the second corner point.
Important

module.
Save as Image Dialog Box

Saves a snapshot of the graphic data on the active sheet as a raster file and
allows you to link the new raster file to a SmartFrame on a new sheet.
Dialog Box Options

File Format - Allows you to specify the graphic file type for the new image.
If you select JPEG as the file format, you can also customize the compression
factor, also called Q-factor, using the Compression factor slider or the Value
box.
Resolution - Allows you to modify the default resolution for the new graphic.
The default value is 400 dpi if the default units are not metric. If you set the
units of measure to metric, the default units for the resolution are pixels per

centimeter (DPCM).
Compression - Allows you to specify the compression type for the image.
Compression types vary based on the file format you select.
Compression Factor - Allows you to specify the quality of compression
versus file size for the image. The compression factor for an image is also
referred to as the Q-factor. To change the compression factor, move the slider
to the left to increase the file size and decrease compression. To create a
smaller, lower quality image, move the slider to the right. A compression
factor of 30 for JFIF and TIFF JPEG images provides optimal balance
between quality and compression. For Intergraph JPEG images, a
compression factor of 15 provides the optimal balance between quality and
compression.
Value - Specifies a numeric value for the compression factor of the image. As
you move the Compression Factor slider, the value in the Value box
changes.
Define sheet area to save as image - Allows you to define the area of the
sheet to be saved as an image. Select two points to define the area by clicking
the first point and dragging the cursor to the second corner point. If this option
is not selected, the software saves the current sheet as an image.
Rotate image 90 degrees - Rotates the image output 90 degrees
counterclockwise when the image is created.
Place image on new sheet - Creates a new SmartFrame and links the new
image file to the new SmartFrame when the image is created. The software
places the SmartFrame on a newly created sheet. The size of the new sheet is
the same as the source sheet unless you rotate the output, in which case the
size of the new sheet is B x A, where the size of the source is A x B.
Important

module.
Save Selected Image(s) Command (Image

Integrator Toolbar)
Saves changes you make to the raster image to the image source file. You can
select multiple images and then use this command to save changes to all their
source files.

Important

module.
Symbol Authoring: An Overview

As well as providing you with ready-to-use symbols, SmartSketch's Symbol
Authoring module gives you the flexibility to create your own.
There are several ways to create your symbols in SmartSketch. You can:
Draw a shape from scratch using the drawing tools, such as the
line, rectangle, ellipse, and freeform tools.
Merge a shape with other shapes to create a new, unique symbol.
Revise an existing SmartSketch symbol.

Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring

module.
Planning Your Symbol: An Overview

After you have determined the need for a symbol, you need to decide how you
want that symbol to behave. The goal is to create a symbol that acts the way a
user expects it to.
When you create a symbol, it displays the following default behaviors:
90 degree rotation angles
Automatic alignment with a target element or object when the

symbol is placed in a document
Automatic association with a target element or object.

Tip
You can change these default behaviors with commands on the

Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar
Checklist for Consideration

When planning your symbol, the first item to consider is what happens when
you add text to a symbol. Do you want to add text to the shape? If so, you
should consider the position and appearance of labels, text boxes, or balloons.
A SmartLabel can be associated with attributes that you define. You can also
define symbols that resize as a user adds text to the symbol.
The second item you should consider is what template will you want to use
with the symbol. The scale of the template affects how the symbol looks when

it is dragged in from the Symbol Explorer. For example, the scale for the
Architecture (metric) template is set to 1:100 mm on the Sheet Setup dialog
box. Some symbols that you drag into documents based on that template
appear small.
The next item for you to decide is what happens when you manipulate the
symbol. Should the symbol size, mirror, flip, and rotate freely? Do you want
the symbol to move with an element? You can set different options on the
Define Symbol Properties dialog box. You can create SmartPoints on a
symbol to determine how the symbol attaches to connectors, other symbols, or
elements in a document.
How smart should you make the symbol? You can create symbols that have
text and parametric attributes. You can create text attributes using SmartText
by clicking the SmartText button on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar.
You can create parametric attributes by adding driving dimensions to the
symbol and then adding the dimensions to the Parameters tab on the Define
Symbol Properties dialog box.
Controlling Display Properties

You can control display properties for symbols in various ways. You can
change the properties of various elements in the shape by applying styles or
setting options such as line weight and color on the ribbon bar. You can also
determine what handles appear on the symbol by setting options on the Define
Symbol Properties dialog box.
On this dialog box, you can also set options for how the symbol displays when
a user drags it into the document. For example, if you want the symbol to
display as separate elements, and not a unified symbol, you can click the
Discrete Objects option on the Behaviors tab of the Define Symbol
Properties dialog box.
Creating Flexible Symbols with Handles

Your symbol might need more control than users can implement by simply
selecting the symbol and dragging. You can add different types of handles to
give the user more control over the symbol.
Important

module.
Define Symbol Properties

1. Open a document with a .sym extension.
2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties

.
3. On the Define Symbol Properties dialog box, select the properties
that you want for the symbol.
Important

module.
Define Handles for a Symbol

1. Open a document with an .sym extension.
2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Properties
button
3. On the Behaviors tab, select the type of handles that you want.
Important

module.
Create a Parametric Symbol

Caution
To create a parametric symbol, you must take the following steps

in the order that they are listed. Before you begin, select the
Maintain Relationships option on the Tools menu.
Create a Symbol with Driving Dimensions

2. Draw the elements that you plan to use in the symbol.
3. On the Main toolbar, click the Dimension button
4. On the Dimension toolbar, click the SmartDimension button

Caution
On the ribbon bar, make sure that the Driving/Driven button is set,
if you have turned it off when previously placing dimensions.
Tip
You can use any of the dimension buttons on the Dimension

toolbar to place your dimensions.
Caution
Do not use the Angle button on the ribbon bar if you want users to
rotate the symbol.
6. Click to place a driving dimension.
Tip
Repeat this step to place up to four driving dimensions. These

dimensions are used to create the parametric handles for the height
and width of the parametric symbol. You can use up to four
dimensions for the parametric handles.
7. Select the elements that you want for the symbol and create a symbol. Set
Up Parametric Handles
8. Open the symbol document that you just created.
. The Parameters tab on the Define Symbol Properties
button
dialog box automatically displays the driving dimensions in the symbol
document.
10. On the Parameters tab, select a driving dimension in the table by clicking
the appropriate row. For example, for the dimension 30.000 mm, you
would want to select the row that displayed the value 30.000 mm.
Tip
If you move the Define Symbol Properties dialog box to one side
of the document window, you can see the dimension that you
selected on the Parameters tab highlighted in the document.
11. In the Symbol Parameter box, select a row to apply Top, Bottom, Left,
or Right to the row. For example, for the dimension 30.000 mm, you
would want to select Right.
Tip
You can also click Apply.
Selecting Top, Bottom, Left, or Right determines the place on the finished
symbol where the yellow parametric handles appear. For example, if you
select Top and Left, the parametric handles appear at the top center and left
center of the symbol range box.
Tip
While creating a parametric symbol that grows when text is added,

you must identify the two primary dimensions as TextHeight and
TextWidth, instead of selecting Top, Bottom, Left, or Right.
12. Repeat the previous two steps as necessary for the number of handles that
you want to appear on the symbol. You can identify up to four parametric
handles. In the current example, for the dimension 20.000 mm, you would
want to select Bottom.
13. Click File > Save. This procedure creates drag handles that appear as
square yellow handles on the symbol's range box. You can place the
symbol and use the drag handles to move the symbol in the document. In a
new document, drag the symbol that you created.
Notes
The parametric handles do no support grid snap. You cannot define

a step distance. Parametric handles change the represented
dimension by the precision units defined on the Units tab of the
Properties dialog box. You can access the Properties dialog box
by clicking Properties on the File menu.
Important

module.
Add a Symbol Attribute

3. Click the Attributes tab.

4. Type the attribute name in the Name box.
5. Select the attribute type from the Type list. The available attribute types
are Text, Date, Number, and Yes or No.
6. Type the attribute value in the Value box.
7. Click the Add button. The software adds the attribute at the bottom of the
attribute list.
Note
You can drag an attribute in the attribute list to change the order of
the attributes.
Important

module.
Modify a Symbol Attribute



4. Select an attribute in the attribute list.
5. Change the attribute data.
6. Click the Modify button. The software updates the attribute data in the
attribute list.
Notes
If you change the attribute name in the Name box, the Add button
becomes active, and the Modify button becomes inactive.
You can drag an attribute in the attribute list to change the order of
the attributes.
Important

module.
Remove an Attribute from a Symbol


4. Click an attribute in the attribute list.
5. Click the Remove button. The software deletes the symbol attribute.
Important

module.
Define Several Representations of a

Symbol in One Document
Before you begin, you must create a symbol document that contains all the
different elements that you would want to show up as several different
versions of the same symbol. For example, if you want a symbol to appear as
either a box, triangle, or circle, you must draw the box, triangle, or circle in
the document and create a symbol. You can add new elements and further
modify the symbol at any time during the next steps.

Tip
You cannot include the same element in different representations.

You must create a copy of that element in the document to allow it
to appear in different representations.
1. Click File > Open to open a symbol document (.sym).

2. Select two or more elements that you want to show up as a representation
of the symbol.
Tip
You cannot select an element that is already a member of a group.
3. On the Change toolbar, click the Group button
Caution
You cannot place one element in more than one group. To include
the same element in different representations, you must copy the
element and include it in a different group.
4. Define a separate group for each representation that you want to save in
the symbol document.
Tip
You can create the representation more easily if you keep each
group in a separate section of the document at this point in the
procedure. Do not allow the groups to overlap. You can define a
common origin for all the groups later in the procedure.
5. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol

Representation button
6. Select a group that you want to appear in the representation. The name of
the group automatically appears in the Object Name box on the Define
Symbol Representation dialog box. This name is automatically generated
by the software.
7. In the Name box, enter the name that you want. This is the name of the
representation that appears as a command on the shortcut menu when you
place the symbol in a document.
8. Click the Add button to enter the name in the table.

Tip
The order in which the names appear in the table is the order in
which the commands appear on the shortcut menu. You can insert
or delete names from the table at any time. For example, you can
enter the following names in the table in the following order so that
they appear in a certain order on the shortcut menu for the symbol:
Name
Object Name
Flanged Globe
Screwed Globe
Bell Spigot Globe
Welded Globe
Soldered Globe
Group 235
Group 236
Group 237
Group 238
Group 239
9.
Repeat these steps for each representation that you want to appear on the
shortcut menu.
10.
Select each group and move it to a position that is on top of the other
groups. You should position each group so that they share a common
origin.
Tip
You can adjust the symbol origin by clicking the Symbol Origin
button on the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar.
11.
Click File > Save.
Tip
You should close the symbol document before dragging and

dropping the symbol into a document.
Notes
After saving the symbol, you should test the different

representations that you defined. Close the symbol. Drag the
symbol from the Symbol Explorer into a new document. Select

the symbol and click the right mouse button. Make sure that the
names of the representations appear on the shortcut menu.
You can change the name of a group object by clicking a row in

the table, entering a new name in the Name box, and clicking the
Modify button.
The group object listed first in the table is the default thumbnail for
the symbol.
Important

module.
Redefine the Origin of a Symbol

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click the Symbol Origin button
.
3. Click a point to redefine the origin of the symbol. The symbol origin is the
point that the mouse cursor uses to drag the symbol into a document.
Important

module.
Define an Icon for a Symbol

2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Symbol Properties.
3. On the Icons tab, set the options that you want.
Important

module.
Managing Text in Symbols: An

Overview
You can add text to symbols by creating text boxes and balloons, placing text
labels, or creating SmartLabels with SmartText. SmartText defines the text
attributes for the symbol.
A label with SmartText attributes is intelligent: SmartLabels with SmartText
read and write properties from an element or object. A label with SmartText
can assume the attributes of an element if the attributes for the element have
the same name. Users can then edit the values of the text attributes in the
Attribute Viewer. Users cannot change the names of the attributes.
Not all labels assume the text attributes of an element or object. Some labels
contain shapes that grow automatically if you add text to the label. These are
called text-driven symbols.
Important

module.
Define Smart Text Attributes for a

SmartLabel
2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click Edit Text
3. Enter the information that you want into the Property, Value, and
Format boxes.
4. Click Insert Field.
Notes
If you want to remove a field, you can either select and edit the
field in the SmartText Editor box and press Delete or select the
label text on the symbol and delete it. You can also edit label text
directly on the symbol or redefine the fields in the Smart Text
Editor box. You cannot select individual characters between the
angle brackets of the SmartText field. You can select only the
entire field.
Important

module.
Edit SmartText Attributes for a Symbol

2. Double-click a label in the symbol.
3. Type the text that you want and press Enter.
Notes
If you place a symbol with a SmartLabel in a document, you can

edit the label by selecting it and making the necessary changes.
Important

module.
Define a Text-Driven Symbol

Caution
To create a symbol that resizes to fit any text, you must take the
following steps in the order that they are listed. Before you begin,
select the Maintain Relationships option on the Tools menu.
For a Symbol with a Circle, Rectangle, or Ellipse

1. In a symbol document, draw a rectangle, circle, or ellipse.
Caution
You cannot use connected elements such as a series of arcs or

lines.

3. Click the center of the rectangle, circle, or ellipse to place a text box.
4. On the Draw toolbar, click the Select tool
and select the text box.

6. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that indicate the directional
flow for text if you add characters to the text box. You can specify the
direction by the options that you click. For example, if you want the text in
the rectangle, circle, or ellipse to grow from the center of the element, you
can set the following options:
On the Info tab, set Horizontal in the Text Alignment group to

Center.
On the Info tab, set Vertical to Center.
On the Paragraph tab, set Alignment to Center.

button
8. On the Behaviors tab, select the Label checkbox.

9. Select the Graphics Fit to Text checkbox.
For a Parametric Symbol

1. Create a parametric symbol.
Tip
While creating the parametric symbol, you must identify two

primary dimensions as TextHeight and TextWidth.
2. Open the new symbol document that you just created.

.
4. Click the center of the symbol to place a text box.

5. On the Draw toolbar, click the Select tool
and select the text box.

7. On the Properties dialog box, set the options that indicate the directional
flow for text if you add characters to the text box. You can specify the
direction by the options that you click. For example, if you want the text in
the rectangle, circle, or ellipse to grow from the center of the element, you
can set the following options:
On the Info tab, set Horizontal in the Text Alignment group to

Center.
On the Info tab, set Vertical to Center
On the Paragraph tab, set Alignment to Center.

button
9. On the Behaviors tab, select the Label checkbox.

10. Select the Graphics Fit to Text checkbox.
Notes
If you want to create a symbol that has text associated to attributes,

you can define a SmartLabel that contains Smart Text for the
symbol. SmartLabels that contain Smart Text are associated with
text attributes for the symbol. When you attach a symbol with a
SmartLabel to an element or object in a document, the symbol

attributes assume the values of the element attributes. If the
element or object does not have attributes, then the element or
object assumes the attributes on the symbol.
Important

module.
Create a Leader for a SmartText Label

button
3. On the Behaviors tab, click Label.

4. Click Place Leader Line.
Important

module.
Integrating Programs with Your

Symbol: An Overview
You can kick off special processes from your symbol when a user performs an
particular action, such as double-clicking the symbol, dragging it, or even
modifying the symbol. The special process can be a .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file
that you created in other programming software. You can select an action
from the Standard Actions tab on the Define Symbol Properties dialog box.
You can also specify special processes that you can execute when you select a
symbol, click the right mouse button, and then click a custom command on
the shortcut menu. The command names of the processes that you define
appear at the top of the shortcut menu. You define these processes on the
Custom Actions tab of the Define Symbol Properties dialog box.
Important

module.
Add Commands to the Shortcut Menu

for a Symbol
Before you can take the following steps, you must create a .DLL, .OCX, or
.EXE in Visual Basic. You must place the executable file in the following
directory:
<Drive Letter>:\PROGRAM
FILES\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM
\ACTIONOVERRIDES\CUSTOMACTIONS\

button
3. On the Custom Actions tab in the Name box, type the command name
that you want to appear on the shortcut menu.
Tip
The shortcut menu appears when you select the symbol in a

document and then right click.
4. In the Command box, select the name and path of the .DLL, .OCX, or
.EXE file. This command runs when you place a symbol and select the
command on the shortcut menu.

Notes
You can also add commands to the shortcut menu by setting

options on the Standard Actions tab.
Important

module.
Run a Program That You Created from

a Symbol
Before you can take the following steps, you must create a .DLL, .OCX, or
.EXE in Visual Basic. You must place the executable file in one of the
following directories, depending on what action that you want to use to start
the executable file. For example, if you want a special process to run when
you drop the symbol in a document, you must place the executable file in the
DROPACTIONS subdirectory.
\ACTIONOVERRIDES\DOUBLECLICKACTIONS\
\ACTIONOVERRIDES\DROPACTIONS\
\ACTIONOVERRIDES\MODIFYACTIONS\
\ACTIONOVERRIDES\PROPERTYACTIONS\
\ACTIONOVERRIDES\RIGHTCLICKACTIONS\

button
3. On the Standard Actions tab, select the options that you want. For
example, if you want a special process to run when you drop the symbol in
a document, you must select the On Drop box. Then, you can select the
name of the .DLL, .OCX, or .EXE file from the list box beside the On

Drop checkbox.
Notes
If you want to create special commands for the shortcut menu that
appear when you select the symbol in a document, you can set
options on the Custom Actions tab.
Important

module.
Using Blank Color and Fill with

Symbols: An Overview
Symbols are actually groups of graphic elements with defined behaviors and
properties that are saved in an .sym document. You can enhance a symbol's
display and performance during symbol design and creation. Incorporating a
fill with blank color into the symbol allows the symbol, when placed, to mask
out elements such as lines or connectors that intersect the symbol. This gives
the appearance that the underlying lines have been broken at the edges of the
symbol. In reality, the lines still exist beneath the symbol.
You can apply a fill to any closed boundary. Placing many fills in a document
can significantly increase the size of the document. A single fill can be used
for the symbol by filling an area that represents the outer edges of the symbol
and displaying the detailed graphic linework on top of the fill.
The blank color can be used with any graphic object besides fill, so
experiment and you might find other uses for this masking capability.
Important

module.
Create a Symbol with a Fill for Masking

Before you begin, create a symbol with the outermost elements on a separate
layer. If the symbol has already been drawn, just select the elements that form
the outer edges of the symbol and move the select set to a new layer called
Boundary.
1. Turn off all other layers in the symbol document, except the layer
containing the boundary of the symbol.
2. Create a layer named Fill. This helps to organize the elements that make
up a symbol.
3. With the Fill layer active and the Boundary layer displayed, click the Fill
button on the Draw toolbar.
4. On the Fill ribbon bar, change the style to Solid, and then select the blank
color from the pallet.
Tip
The blank color is located in the lower right corner of the standard
color pallet.

5. Then, click inside the bounding line elements to place the solid blank
colored fill. You can see the blank fill when grid display is turned on.
6. Click to select the fill.
7. With the fill selected, click the Send To Back button on the Change
toolbar. This pushes the blank fill to the back of the symbol and allows the
detailed elements that make up the interior of a symbol to display on top
of the blank fill.
8. Turn on the display of the other layers containing interior graphics.
9. Save the symbol.
Important

module.
Defining SmartPoints: An Overview

SmartPoints are points that can serve up to three functions: connect points,
drop points, and drag points. The purpose depends on the symbol.
Connect points are points at which a connector attaches to a

symbol. You can place connect points in free space on any part of
the document or on an element.
Tip
You can attach connectors to symbols with the Connector button

on the Draw or Schematic toolbar.
A drag point is the point to which the pointer attaches for dragging
a symbol. This attribute, when combined with the drop point
attribute, allows precise attachment between symbols.
When you click a drag point on a symbol and drag it over another
symbol, the drop points appear as red dots. A bull's eye appears
when the drag point and drop point are exactly aligned. You can
then attach the symbol to the other with precision.
SmartPoint Graphics
The displays of connect points, drop points, and drag points have been
enhanced so each is more easily identified. Connect points display as a plain
red dot. For drag points, a number is displayed up and to the right of the dot.
Drop points display as a red dot inside a triangle.
Important

module.
Place a SmartPoint with Connect Point

Attributes
2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoints Properties
.
Note
Any existing SmartPoints will appear in the document.
3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Connect point check
box.
4. In the Connect point angles drop-down list, select the angle at which the
connector should attach to the SmartPoint.
Tip
You can also type a value in the Connect point angles box.
5. In the ToolTip box, enter the text that you want for the ToolTip that
appears when you attach a connector to the SmartPoint on the symbol.
6. Click Insert.
7. In the document, click on the symbol to place the SmartPoint.
8. Click Apply.
Important

module.
Place a SmartPoint with Drag Point

Attributes
.
Note
3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Drag point check
box.
4. In the Drag point order box, type a number to define the drag point order

for the SmartPoint.
5. Click Insert.
7. Click Apply.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to place additional SmartPoints with drag point
attributes.
Important

module.
Place a SmartPoint with Drop Point

Attributes
.
Note
3. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, click the Drop point check
box.
4. In the Drop point angles drop-down list, select the angle at which the
symbol should attach to another object.
Tip
You can also type a value in the Drop point angles box.
5. In the ToolTip box, enter the text that you want for the ToolTip that
appears when you attach an object to the SmartPoint on the symbol.
6. Click Insert.
8. Click Apply.
Important

module.
Edit SmartPoints for a Symbol


2. On the Symbol Authoring Tools toolbar, click SmartPoint Properties
.
Note
Any existing SmartPoints appear in the document.
3. In the document, click a SmartPoint. The SmartPoint's properties display

on the SmartPoint Properties dialog box.
4. On the SmartPoint Properties dialog box, modify the properties for the
SmartPoint as desired.
5. Click Apply.
Important

module.
Symbol Lookup Tables: An Overview

Symbol lookup tables allow you to drive parameters of a symbol using import
data from a spreadsheet, database, or any other ODBC data source. Lookup
tables are ideal for use with Ortho and Structural content. These imported
values save time, allowing you to use a single key column to specify
numerous attribute and parameter values for a symbol.
The Lookup Table command takes a snapshot of the specified data source
and generates an .xml file containing the information in the data source. When
you have generated the .xml file containing the data, you can select a
particular set of values for the selected symbols from a combo box in the
Attribute Viewer. This combo box contains the list of values in the key
column defined in the data source.
Important

module.
Set Up an ODBC Data Source

1. Click Start, point to Settings, and click Control Panel.
2. On the Control Panel dialog box, double-click ODBC Data Sources.
3. On the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click the User
DSN tab or the System DSN tab, depending on the type of data source
you want to use.
Note
Refer to Microsoft Windows NT Help for more details on the

different types of data sources.
4. Click Add.
5. On the Create New Data Source dialog box, select a driver for the data
source.
6. Click Finish. The system displays the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog
box.
7. Enter the necessary information on the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog
box.
Note
The ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box contains different

settings for each driver type.

8. On the ODBC Driver Type Setup dialog box, click OK to save the
changes and close the dialog box, or click Cancel to close the dialog box
without saving the changes.
9. On the ODBC Data Source Administrator dialog box, click OK to close
the dialog box.
Important

module.
Generate a Lookup Table

1. Set up an ODBC Data Source.
2. In SmartSketch, on the Symbol Authoring toolbar, click Lookup Table.
3. Select the option that you want from the Data Source list.
4. Select the option that you want in the Table list.
5. Drag columns from the Table list to the Driven By column in the Data
Map.
6. Double-click an entry in the Driven By column to specify it as the unique
Key Column.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Save. The software writes the contents of the selected table into an
.xml file.
Notes
Each entry in the Key Column list must be unique.

Important

module.

SmartPoint Properties Command (Symbol
Authoring Tools Toolbar)
Places SmartPoints on a symbol. SmartPoints are points that can serve up to
three functions: connect points, drop points, and drag points. The purpose
depends on the symbol.
Connect point attribute

Connect points are points at which a connector attaches to a symbol. You can
place connect points in free space on any part of the document or on an
element.
Tip
You can attach connectors to symbols with the Connector button

on the Draw or Schematic toolbar.
Drag point attribute

A drag point is the point to which the pointer attaches for dragging a symbol.
This attribute, when combined with the drop point attribute, allows precise
attachment between symbols.
Drop point attribute

Drop points allow for symbol-to-symbol connections. When you click a drag
point on a symbol and drag it over another symbol, the drop points appear as
red dots. A bull's eye appears when the drag point and drop point are exactly
aligned. You can then attach the symbol to the other with precision.
Important

module.
SmartPoint Properties Dialog Box

Dialog Box Options
Behaviors Tab
Connect point - Assigns the connect point attribute to the SmartPoint.
Connect point angles - Defines the angle at which the connector line attaches
to the connect point on the symbol.
Connect point ToolTip - Specifies the ToolTip that appears when you attach
a connector to a connect point on the symbol.
Drop point - Assigns the drop point attribute to the smart point.
Drop point angles - Defines the angle at which a dropped symbol attaches to
the SmartPpoint on the symbol.
Drop point ToolTip - Allows you to define the ToolTip that appears on the
drop point of the symbol when you place it. You can use a drop point when
you are placing a symbol on another symbol. The ToolTip is useful for
quickly displaying important information that you want a user to know about
the symbol.
For example, you could define a ToolTip for a network card symbol that
displays the words Network Card. If you attempt to drop the network card
symbol near a hub symbol, the ToolTip appears as a visual reminder of the
type of symbol that you are placing. In drawing network diagrams, you do not
want to connect a network card symbol to a hub symbol.
Drag point - Assigns the drag point attribute to the SmartPoint.
Drag point order - Allows you to define the order that the drag points attach
to the pointer when you drag the symbol. You can cycle through the drag
points when dragging the symbol by pressing the Up or Down arrow keys on
the keyboard.
Information and Format Tab

Style - Sets the style of the SmartPoint.
Color - Sets the color of the SmartPoint.
Width - Sets the size of the SmartPoint.
Layer - Sets the layer where the SmartPoint displays.
X - Specifies the x dimension of the SmartPoint.
Y - Specifies the y dimension of the SmartPoint.

Important

module.
Symbol Origin Command (Symbol

Defines the origin of the symbol that you are creating. The origin of the
symbol is the point that the mouse cursor uses to place the symbol in a
document. When you click Symbol Origin, the symbol origin appears where
it was originally placed. You can then click any position or key point on an
element to define the origin.
Important

module.
Symbol Properties Command (Symbol

Allows you to define properties for a symbol. These properties can include the
following items:
A special Help document for the symbol,
The types of handles the symbol displays,
Special custom macros that execute when you drag the symbol,
Custom behaviors that occur when you place the symbol in a

document.
Important

module.
Define Symbol Properties Dialog Box

Allows you to create properties for a symbol.
Important

module.
Attributes Tab
Allows you to add attributes to a symbol.
Name - Defines a name for the attribute.
Type - Defines the type of data you can use in the Value box. Select either
Text, Date, Number or Yes or No as the type of data displayed in the Value
box.
Value - Defines a default value for the attribute.
Add - Adds the attribute.
Modify - Writes the edits that you have completed for the Type and Value
boxes and updates the list of attributes to reflect the changes.
Remove - Clears the information displayed in the Name, Type, and Value
boxes and removes the attribute.
Behaviors Tab
Label - Select this check box if you are creating a SmartLabel. Selecting
Label also allows you the option of using the Graphics Fit to Text option
located on this form. See also SmartLabels
Mirror About Target Object - Allows the symbol to mirror about the
element or object to which you are attaching the symbol.
Glue to Target Object - Specifies that the symbol moves with the element or
object to which it is attached. When this option is enabled, you cannot convert
a symbol currently attached to an object. While the symbol may be opened
and modified, it cannot be dropped on individual components until it is no
longer glued to an object.
Align Parallel with Target Object - Ensures that the symbol aligns parallel
to the element or object to which the symbol is being attached, no matter
where you move the element or object.

Allow Rotation By Relationships - Allows a symbol to change its orientation
on the drawing sheet according to the relationships that you apply to it. If the
check box is cleared, the symbol does not change its orientation regardless of
the way you change its relationships.
The check box is cleared by default. When you clear it, a symbol maintains its
orientation to the drawing sheet when you move the related symbol or other
elements. In the following example, the line and symbol share a dimensional
relationship. The lower end of the symbol is grounded in place with a lock
relationship.
If you edit the dimensional value of the driving dimension between the line
and symbol to modify the position of the elements, the symbol does not
change its orientation on the drawing sheet. The driving dimension changes to
a driven dimension that is not to scale, as the underlined dimensional value
indicates.
When you set the Allow Rotation By Relationships checkbox, the symbol
changes orientation on the drawing sheet according to the relationships
applied to it. In the example, when you edit the dimensional value of the
driving dimension to change the position of the elements, the symbol changes
orientation on the drawing sheet, maintaining the dimensional relationships.
Honor layer display - Allows you to turn on and off the display of layers in a
symbol file. For example, if you create a symbol with multiple layers and
enable the Honor layer display check box, you can turn on/off any layer so
that the items on that layer will display/not display. Additionally, the layers
are created (if they do not exist) in the file in which you place the symbol.
Graphics Fit to Text - Allows you to define a symbol that stretches to fit the
text height and width of a text box in the symbol, when you edit the text. This
checkbox is available only when you select the Label checkbox. This
checkbox only affects parametric symbols or symbols created with one closed
shape that is a rectangle, circle, or ellipse. The parametric symbol must have
two driving dimensions defined as parameters on the Parameters tab. These
parameters must be identifed as TextHeight and TextWidth.
Scale Handles - Specifies that the symbol has scale handles. You can drag a
scale handle to resize the entire symbol uniformly in the X and Y directions.

Mirror Handles - Specifies that the symbol has mirror handles. You can drag
the mirror handle across the mirror line in the direction that you want to
mirror the symbol.
Rotate Handles - Specifies that the symbol has rotate handles. You can drag
this handle to rotate the entire symbol.
Split Element on Drop - Allows a symbol to split elements on which you
place the symbol. This behavior is intended primarily to split connectors when
placing an inline symbol, but also will split most other elements. When a
symbol is placed, the element is trimmed back to the range of the symbol.
Drop As - Defines the graphical output when you place a symbol in a
document.
If you select Symbol, the symbol remains and behaves as a symbol

when you place it in a document.
If you select Group, the symbol changes to a group of elements or

objects when you place it in a document.
If you select Discrete Objects, the symbol is broken up into

individual elements and objects that you can edit separately.
Step Rotation - Determines the increment for rotating the symbol when you
place it while pressing the Left and Right arrow keys on the keyboard. If you
enter 0 in the box, you cannot rotate the symbol with the Left and Right arrow
keys when you place the symbol in a document.
Double-Click Label Position - Allows you to define a label's location when a
user double-clicks a symbol to add a text label. For example, if you select the
Top radio button, you can double click to add a text label above the symbol.
Custom Actions Tab

Allows you to specify processes that you can execute when you select a
symbol, click the right mouse button, and then click a custom command on
the shortcut menu. The command names of the processes that you define
appear at the top of the shortcut menu. The command can be a .DLL, .OCX,
or .EXE file that you created.
For example, if you create a symbol for a heat pump, you might want to place
a Calculate Volume command on the shortcut menu. The shortcut menu
appears when you place the heat pump symbol in a document, select it, and
click the right mouse button. The Calculate Volume command appears on the
shortcut menu. When you click the Calculate Volume command, a Visual
Basic program appears that allows you to calculate the volume of the heat
pump.

Name - Specifies the name of the process that appears on the shortcut menu.
Programmatic identifier - Specifies which process is executed when a
specific command is selected on the shortcut menu.
Tip
Type the ProgID of registered files directly in the list box and press
Apply. The ProgID is assigned when you create the file. See the
documentation for Visual Basic for more information about
ProgID's.
Important

module.
General Tab
Help File - Specifies a special Help document (.HLP) that you can use to
display special information about the symbol that you create. For example,
you could use a Help file to explain different ways to place a door symbol.
Help Context - Defines a Help context identifier for calling a specific topic in
a Help file. The Help file must be compiled with the Help context identifier
mapped to the Help topic.
Tip
See Visual Basic documentation for information about how to

create a Microsoft Windows Help file.
Important

module.
Icons Tab
Defines the symbol icon that you see in the Windows Explorer or the
Symbol Explorer.
Automatic - Uses the elements and objects in the current document window
to create the symbol. This is handy if you want to see what the symbol looks
like without opening it.
Use Active Sheet - Allows you to save the latest changes in the symbol
document to the symbol icon.
Use Bitmaps - Allows you to select a bitmap document to display as the

symbol icon. You might want to assign the same icon to a group of symbols
that you are creating. For example, you can assign your company logo to an
entire library of symbols.
Small - Displays a small icon.
Large - Displays a large icon.
Parameters Tab
Automatically displays all the dimensions in the symbol document. You can
use this tab to create symbols that fit to text. You can also use this tab to
define drag handles for resizing when you place the symbol in a document.
Tab Options
Tip
The information that appears in the Value and Symbol Parameter

columns also appears in the Value and Name columns of the
Attribute Viewer. The Attribute Viewer displays this
information when you place or select a symbol in a document.
Name - Displays the name of the dimension or variable that you selected in
the table. You can select a row in the table by clicking the row.
If you want to see which dimension in the symbol corresponds to the row that
you have selected, you can move the dialog box to one side of the document
window. The corresponding dimension is highlighted in red.
Symbol Parameter - Displays the parameter that you assign to the dimension.
To assign the symbol parameter, you must first click a row in the table. You
can then type in your own name for a symbol parameter or select one from the
dropdown list.
If you want to create a symbol with parametric handles for resizing the
symbol, you must assign the following symbol parameters to dimensions in
the symbol document: Top, Bottom, Right, and Left.
Tip
Driven dimensions cannot have parametric attributes or parametric

handles for resizing the symbol. Driven dimensions appear greyed
out. You cannot select a driven dimension in the table.
Name Column - Displays the name of a dimensional value in the symbol

document.
Value Column - Displays a dimensional value or variable in the symbol
document.

Formula Column - Displays a formula for calculating the dimensional value.
Symbol Parameter Column - Displays the name of the parameter that you
assigned in the Symbol Parameter box below the table.
Important

module.
Standard Actions Tab

Allows you to define processes that can execute when you place a symbol in a
document and then perform actions on that symbol, such as dropping it
(during placement), double-clicking it, or clicking the Properties command
on the Edit menu.
Tip
Type the ProgID directly in the list box and press Apply. The
ProgID can be any valid executable (.dll, .exe, etc). Refer to the
documentation for Visual Basic for more information about
ProgID's.
Tab Options
On drop - Specifies a process that executes when you drag a symbol in a
document.
On double-click - Specifies a process that executes when you double-click a
symbol in a document.
On property change - Specifies a process that executes when you select a
symbol in a document and click the Properties command on the Edit menu.
You might want to select this and display a Properties dialog box that you
created, rather than the one that is delivered with the software.
Important

module.
Lookup Table Command (Symbol Authoring

Tools Toolbar)
Allows you to import data from an open database connectivity (ODBC) data
source to drive values for symbol parameters and attributes.

Important

module.
Lookup Table Dialog Box

Allows you to assign data sources and tables to use with the Lookup Tables
command, to save information to an .xml file, and to open existing .xml files
for editing.
Dialog Box Options

Select Data Source - Specifies the open database connectivity (ODBC) Data
Source.
Select a Table - Specifies the table from the ODBC Data Source.
Data Map - Specifies the parameters and attributes to use for the symbol.
Attribute/parameter - Lists the attributes and parameters for the symbol.
Driven by - Displays the column from the data source that drives an attribute
or parameter.
Drag columns to Driven by - Lists the columns in the specified table. You
can drag these column names to the Driven by column in the Data map.
Define Key - Defines the unique Key Column used to differentiate among the
various symbol parameter sets.

Clear Column - Deletes the selected value in the Driven by column.
Open - Opens an existing .xml file and displays the information in the
Lookup Table dialog box for editing.
Save As... - Saves the information from the data source to a new .xml file.
OK - Saves the information from the data source to an .xml file.
Cancel - Closes the Lookup Table dialog box without saving the
information.
Help - Displays Help for the dialog box.
Important

module.
Symbol Representation Command (Symbol

Defines different representations of the same symbol within one symbol
document (.sym). The names of the representations that you define appear on
the shortcut menu for the symbol when you drag the symbol into a document.
When you click the name of the representation, the symbol changes to display
the elements that you included in the representation.
For example, you can define different representations of a valve with different
types of actuators. When you drag the symbol into the document, you can
choose which valve that you want to display from the shortcut menu.
Important

module.
Define Symbol Representation Dialog Box

Allows you to define several different representations of a symbol in one
symbol document.
For example, you might want to place a valve symbol. But you might want the
actuator on the valve to display in several different positions. Rather than
create several different symbols, you can define representations of the same
symbol with the actuator appearing in different representations. After you
place the symbol in a document, you could choose the representation that you
want. You can choose it by clicking the right mouse button and selecting the
representation name from the shortcut menu. The position of the actuator
changes based on the representation that you selected.
Caution
You must define a group in the symbol document before you can
use this dialog box.
Dialog Box Options

Representation name Column - Displays the name of the representation that
you entered in the Name box below. You must select a group in the
document, enter a name in the Name box, and then click the Add button.
Group name Column - Displays the name of the group. The software
automatically assigns the name. You cannot change this value.
Representation name Box - Allows you to enter the name that you want for
the representation. You must select a group in the document before you can
enter a name for the group in the Name box. This is the name of the
representation that appears on the shortcut menu when you place the symbol
in a document.
Group name Box - Displays the name of the group that you selected in the
symbol document. The software automatically assigns the name of the group.
You cannot change this value.
Important

module.
SmartText Editor Command (Symbol


Allows you to place SmartText in a SmartLabel. SmartText allows a
SmartLabel to assume the text attributes of an element to which the
SmartLabel is associated.
Important

module.
SmartText Editor Dialog Box

Places and edits SmartText in a symbol. When you create SmartText in a
symbol, you are defining the text attributes for the symbol. When the symbol
is placed in a document, you can edit the values of the attributes in the
Attribute Viewer. Smart Text is typically used to create a SmartLabel.
Dialog Box Options

Existing text Box - Specifies the text that appears in the label. You can type
in plain text or enter a field by defining information in the Item, Property,
Value, and Format boxes. You must press the Tab on the keyboard to enter
the information that you type.
Font - Determines the format of the characters that you want to appear in the
SmartLabel. For example, you can select Arial Bold.
Item - Defines the type of object to which the SmartLabel is associated.
Property - Names the attribute value pair on the object that you want to label
Value - Identifies the value of the property based on what appears in the
Format box.
Format - Identifies the format of the property. The format is any format
supported by Visual Basic.
Insert Field - Enters the information that you specified in the Property,
Value, and Format boxes into the SmartText Editor box.
Tip
If you want to remove a field, you must select the field in the
SmartText Editor box and press Delete. Then you can define a
new field.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the Symbol Authoring module.
Using the Internet: An Overview

SmartSketch is an excellent tool for publishing on the Internet. While you
work on a document in the software, you can access the Internet and Intranet,
which allows you to share design information within and across organizational
boundaries.
Viewing the Web

You can view the World Wide Web from within SmartSketch with a special
tool called the Symbol Explorer. The Symbol Explorer is available only if
you have installed Internet Explorer 3.0 or later. After you click the Symbol
Explorer icon on the Main toolbar, the Symbol Explorer appears on the
right of document window. You can type the URL or directory path of an
HTML page in the Address Box and press Enter to view the HTML page.
Publishing on the Web

SmartSketch is an ActiveX document. This feature means that you can open
a SmartSketch document with its own toolbars and menus in the Internet
Explorer window, without having to activate SmartSketch. SmartSketch
toolbars and menus combine with those of the Internet Explorer, allowing you
to work on the document from the Web viewer. This practice can be
convenient if you want to work on a SmartSketch document and then go back
to the HTML page that you were viewing. Web administrators can use
existing SmartSketch documents on the intranet without having to convert
them to another format for viewing on the Web.
Tip
You can also view ActiveX documents in Netscape Navigator if

you install the appropriate plug-in software. For more information,
you should visit www.netscape.com on the World Wide Web.
If you want to place a graphic document in an HTML page for viewing on the
Web, you can save the document to .CGM format.
Important
To save a document in .CGM format, you must install the Web

Publishing module.
Accessing the Internet Without Leaving Your Document

If you want to access the Internet, you must have an internet connection.
Then, you can access the Internet without leaving your document by clicking
Help > SmartSketch on the Web.

Tip
SmartSketch on the Web displays in your system default web

browser. If you do not have a web browser, you can install Internet
Explorer. SmartSketch on the Web works with any web browser,
but you do get extra settings and hot links by using Internet
Explorer.
From the SmartSketch on the Web web pages, you can access a myriad of
tools to help you use SmartSketch more efficiently, keep up-to-date on
product happenings, view a Web gallery of SmartSketch drawings, and
contact Intergraph.
Publishing Customer Drawings on the SmartSketch Web

Gallery
The SmartSketch on the Web HTML page also has links to a Web Gallery
that displays a collection of customer drawings produced with SmartSketch.
The Web Gallery shows drawings from each industry: mechanical, civil, and
architectural engineering, utilities, and so forth.
You can submit your own drawings to the Web Gallery by following the
instructions on the Web Gallery HTML page. Just follow the links from the
SmartSketch on the Web page.
Tip
You can access the SmartSketch on the Web HTML page via the
Help menu.
Open a Document Inside the Internet

Explorer
1. In the Internet Explorer, click File > Open.
2. On the dialog box, select the document that you want to open inside the
Internet Explorer. Because SmartSketch is an ActiveX document, its
toolbars and menus appear inside the Internet Explorer, along with the
contents of the document that you selected.
Notes
You can also drag a SmartSketch document from the Windows

Explorer to the Internet Explorer. The document automatically
opens inside the Explorer.
Hyperlinks
You may want to link an element or object in a document to other documents,
such as a web page. The Hyperlink command on the Main toolbar is used to
create, edit, and follow hyperlink addresses attached to objects in a document.
Tips
You can also click Insert > Hyperlink to activate the Hyperlinks
command.
If you use Save As to save the document to a .cgm file, the

hyperlinks are retained during the translation process, creating a
.cgm drawing file that is ready for web publishing. You can also
use Save As Web Page(s) to do this.
Insert a Hyperlink
1. On the Main toolbar, click Hyperlink
Tip
You can also click Insert > Hyperlink.
2. Click the object or element to insert a hyperlink and to display the Add
Hyperlink dialog box.
3. Click the Source field and type the URL or directory path of a HTML
page. (http://. . . )
Tip
You can also link to files on the intranet or your computer. For
example, you can type the following path: D:\MYFILE.htm.
You can also click the Browse button

to open the Link to File
dialog box and navigate to the file you wish to link.
4. Click Add. By default, SmartSketch inserts the URL or filename in the

Name field.
Important
If you link to a SmartSketch document which contains multiple

sheets, you are prompted to select which sheet to link to.
5. Click the Name field and type a logical hyperlink name, if desired.
6. Click the Set as default link check box to identify this link as the default
link for the object.
7. Click OK to accept the hyperlink.

Notes
To stop the Hyperlink command, press Esc.
You cannot add hyperlinks to dimensions, elements contained in

nested symbols, or fills.
While in the Add Hyperlink dialog box, repeat steps 3 through 6

to add any number of hyperlinks, URL addresses, or file paths to
an element or object. If you add more than one hyperlink, you must
choose a link as the default.
Right click on any drawing object to display a list of associated

hyperlinks.
The text, which appears in the Name field will display as a tooltip
when the mouse passes over the hyperlinked object. The hyperlink
name will also appear in the shortcut menu when you right-click
on the object.
Edit a Hyperlink
Tip
You can also select this command from the Insert menu. You can
press Esc to stop the command.
2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink.

Tip
The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists.
3. On the shortcut menu, click Edit Link.

Tip
Right-click to display the shortcut menu. On the shortcut menu,

you can also use Add Link, Edit Link, and Remove Link to
modify the hyperlink.
4. On the Select Link To Edit dialog box, click the hyperlink to edit.
5. Click Edit.
6. On the Edit Hyperlink dialog box, click either the Source or the Name
field and type your changes to the hyperlink.
7. Click the Make default link check box to identify this hyperlink as the
default link for the drawing object.

8. Click OK.
Note
The Select Link to Edit dialog box only displays when an object
has more than one hyperlink assigned to it. If an object has only
one hyperlink, the Edit Hyperlink dialog box displays after you
click Edit Link.
Delete a Hyperlink
Tip
2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink.

Tip
The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists.
3. On the shortcut menu, click Remove Link.

4. On the Select Link To Remove dialog box, click the hyperlink that you
want to remove.
5. Click Remove.
6. In the Remove Hyperlink? dialog box, click the OK button.
Note
The Select Link to Remove dialog box only displays if an object

has more than one hyperlink assigned to it. If an object has only
one hyperlink, the Remove Hyperlink? dialog box displays after
you select Remove Link from the shortcut menu.
Follow a Hyperlink
Tip
2. Pause the pointer over the object or element with a hyperlink. A tooltip
displays the name of the default link.

Tip
The pointer changes to a hand icon if a hyperlink exists. You can

also click Show Links on the shortcut menu. All the elements or
objects with hyperlinks highlight.
3. Click the left mouse button to follow the hyperlink.

Notes
When an object has more than one hyperlink, the default hyperlink
can be set via the Set as default link check box. If you do not
select a default hyperlink, SmartSketch uses the first hyperlink
assigned to the object as the default.
If the hyperlink points to a SmartSketch document, then

SmartSketch opens the document. The browser opens all other
documents.
ActiveCGM
If you want to place a SmartSketch document on an HTML page for viewing
on the Web, you can save the document to .CGM format. Computer Graphic
Metafile (cgm), a standard file format for vector and raster data, is an ideal
format for publishing 2D vector drawings on the Web. This format requires
little storage space, displays quickly in a web browser, and has the ability to
zoom and display more detail. CGM documents can also contain embedded
hotspots, hyperlinks, and database links, allowing you to access information
outside the document instantly.
You can save a document as a CGM graphic embedded in a web page using
Save As Web Page on the File menu. You can also save to .CGM using Save
As.
Definition of CGM
CGM supports the definition of graphic objects bound to non-graphic
attributes. The CGM file format is defined by ANSI/ISO 8632-1992
(American National Standards Institute/International Standards Organization)
and MIL-STD-2301 (Military Standard). CGM is the international standard
that defines a hybrid (raster, vector, and text) graphics format. Definition of
graphical objects is supported at any arbitrary level of abstraction through a
tagging mechanism similar to SGML and HTML.
Definition of ActiveCGM
ActiveCGM technology converts 2D design files, such as construction
drawings, into CGM files to link non-graphical data into graphical elements.

For example, you can navigate an intelligent drawing using a Web browser.
ActiveCGM provides rapid, accurate, enterprise-wide access and display of
graphic information. It allows hyperlinking of vector and raster graphics
defined in the Version 4.0 Computer Graphics Metafile format. ActiveCGM
products based on ActiveCGM technology support zooming, panning,
magnification, navigation of CGM graphics.
Important

module.
Save a Document as a Web Page

2. Specify what you would like to save.
Select All Sheets if you want to save all the sheets in a document
as a web page.
Select Active Sheet to save only the active sheet as a web page.
Select Include linked files/sheets to save links associated to the

selected sheets.
3. Click the Next and then Finish buttons to create the web page(s).
Important

module.
Notes
When the SmartSketch document is saved as a web page, you can

view the HTML document as a web pages in any web browser.
You can also use the Save As command to save a document to

.cgm format.

Hyperlink Command (File Menu)
Adds hyperlinks to objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as
lines, circles, ellipses, and groups. You can enter a link to a file or a web page
on the Internet.
Insert Hyperlink Dialog Box

Inserts a hyperlink to a selected object, symbol, text, connector, or element.
Dialog Box Options

Source - Specifies the URL or directory path of a HTML page. (http://. . . )
for the hyperlink.
(Browse) - Opens the Link to File dialog box. From here you can navigate
to the file you wish to link.
Add - Adds the hyperlink to the selected object.
Name - Specifies a logical name for the hyperlink. The text which appears in
the Name field will display as a tooltip when the mouse passes over the
hyperlinked object. The hyperlink name will also appear in the shortcut menu
when you right-click on the object.
Set as default hyperlink - Identifies the link as the default link for the object.
OK - Closes the dialog box and saves the hyperlink.
Cancel - Closes the dialog box without saving the hyperlink.
Edit Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Allows you to change the web addresses or paths for hyperlinks that are
applied to objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements, such as lines,
circles, ellipses, and groups.

Tip
To see the shortcut menu, you must first click Hyperlink on the
Main toolbar and then right-click.
Remove Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Removes hyperlinks from objects, symbols, text, connectors, and elements,
such as lines, circles, ellipses, and groups.
Tip
To see the shortcut menu, click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar,

and then right-click.
Follow Link Command (Shortcut Menu)

Allows you to open the web page or file at which the hyperlink is pointing.
Tip
To see the shortcut menu, you must first click Hyperlink on the
Main toolbar, and then right-click.
Show Links Command (Shortcut Menu)

Displays all the hyperlinks in a document. When you click this command, all
the elements or objects that have a hyperlink are highlighted.
Tip
To access this command, click Hyperlink on the Main toolbar and

then right-click.
Save as Web Page Command (File Menu)

Saves the current document as a .cgm graphic embedded in an HTML
document. You can view the HTML document as a web page in any Internet
browser, such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer.
This command starts a wizard that steps you through the process of saving
your document as an HTML page.
Important


module.
Save as Web Page Dialog Box

Specifies the name of, location of, and format for a document when you save
it as a .cgm graphic embedded in an HTML document.
All sheets - Saves all the sheets in a SmartSketch document as a web page
Active sheet - Saves only the active sheet as a web page
Include linked files/sheets - Save links associated to the selected sheet(s)
Important

module.
Working with CAD Drawings: An Overview
Working with CAD Drawings: An

Overview
Use SmartSketch's CAD translation capabilities to translate or reference
MicroStation (V4/5/SE) and AutoCAD (R10-2000) files for use with
SmartSketch. MicroStation and AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, and fill styles are
fully supported, so you can modify your drawings in SmartSketch and then
save them as either MicroStation or AutoCAD formats. CAD translation
provides equivalent objects to and from which elements or entities may be
mapped during translation. Translator options let you customize how
MicroStation or AutoCAD fonts, linestyles, widths, views, and units are
imported, referenced, or saved as MicroStation or AutoCAD drawings.
Working with MicroStation Files: An

Overview
CAD Translators for SmartSketch directly supports MicroStation font and
linestyle (*.RSC) resource files, resulting in near perfect visual fidelity when
you import, reference, or export MicroStation drawings. Invisible
MicroStation information such as database linkages, tag data, and user data is
preserved as attributes on SmartSketch graphics. You can even import
MicroStation cell libraries as SmartSketch symbols, further enhancing your
re-use of existing data.
Important

module.
Opening and Saving MicroStation Files

SmartSketch supports opening and saving MicroStation files in two ways: you
can either select a MicroStation file and translate it into equivalent elements,
or you can create a reference file from a MicroStation file.
If you use the method for selecting a MicroStation file and translating it into
equivalent SmartSketch elements, you can click Open on the File menu. After
you have opened a MicroStation file using this method, the resulting file is in
SmartSketch format (igr).
Tip
If the MicroStation file extension is not a .dgn extension, you may

need to use a utility to define other extensions as MicroStation
files.
If you use the method for creating a reference file from a MicroStation file,
you can either click Object on the Insert menu, or you can drag from the
Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer. This action enables you to display
and, if MicroStation is available on your PC, edit the MicroStation file while
working in SmartSketch. You can also select the view position of a 3-D
MicroStation file upon placement. Once a MicroStation file has been
referenced using this method, you can then locate and establish relationships
between the new information and elements on the drawing sheet.
Tip
The Options command on the Tools menu displays the Options

dialog box. By selecting the Foreign Data tab and setting the

format to MicroStation, you can configure the settings for
importing MicroStation data that applies to both of these methods.
Caution
Roundtrip of MicroStation data (importing MicroStation data to

SmartSketch data and exporting back to MicroStation data) is
currently supported visually. Data fidelity for information such as
tags, database linkages, and user data are not supported during
export to the MicroStation file format.
Other Methods for Importing MicroStation Data

You can use the following methods to move MicroStation (.dgn) documents
into:
Cutting and pasting.
Dragging.
Inserting the information as an object.
When you open a MicroStation document that has references to other

documents, those referenced documents appear as well. You can locate
referenced documents in the current document.
Tip
You can also use Open on the File menu to translate and open
documents. You can use seed files to preserve the original fonts
and line types of the document when you open a MicroStation
document.
Cutting and Pasting

You can select the information in the MicroStation document and then cut or
copy the information and paste it into SmartSketch with Paste Special.
Dragging
You can select the information in the MicroStation document and then drag it
into SmartSketch. In the Windows Explorer, select the MicroStation
document and then drag it into SmartSketch. The document will be embedded
in the drawing by default. Immediately before placing the document, you can
embed the document in SmartSketch by pressing Ctrl. If you press Ctrl +
Shift, the document is linked. When you place the document, handles appear
that allow you to scale the object. The foreign document is placed into
SmartSketch and behaves much like a symbol, allowing you to click to place
it or move it around.

Tip
You can set placement options by clicking Options on the Tools

menu. Then, you can set the options you want on the Reference
File tab of the Options dialog box.
Inserting as an Object
Inside SmartSketch, you can insert the entire foreign document with Object
on the Insert menu. On the Insert Object dialog box, you can set the option
to link or embed the document. After you insert the object, SmartSketch
places a SmartFrame border around the object, allowing you to crop it without
altering the scale of the object. The software recognizes the geometry of the
inserted document. You can use the relationship indicators to draw or create
relationships between the geometry of the inserted object and other elements
in the SmartSketch document. You can edit the inserted object by doubleclicking it.
Tip
Object inserts any OLE 2.0-enabled object, such as a Word or

.AVI document, or a CAD document, such as .dgn. You can then
edit the inserted object by double-clicking it.
Saving SmartSketch to MicroStation

You can save a SmartSketch document as a MicroStation document. Before
you do this, you can adjust the translation options with Options on the Tools
menu. On the Foreign Data tab, you can click Export Options.
When you save a SmartSketch document as a .dgn document, the active sheet
is saved. On the Options dialog box, you can map SmartSketch layers to
MicroStation levels (163). All the remaining layers are placed on the last
layer or level of the foreign document. The layer names are preserved,
whether you are importing or exporting MicroStation documents.
Caution
If you save SmartSketch documents with raster reference files as

MicroStation documents, only the files of the same type (.dgn) can
be exported back into.
MicroStation-Based Workflow Examples

Important

module.
Conceptual Design
Because the software gives you robust and intuitive drawing tools, this
software is a natural choice for sketching and developing concepts during the
initial stages of a project. You can capture relationships as you draw, or easily
add them later as relationships or dimensions. You can also alter dimensions
to directly drive graphics. After you create your design, you can save it in the
MicroStation (.dgn) file format to complete downstream tasks in
MicroStation.
Details
You can use the software to add annotations to existing MicroStation files by
inserting a MicroStation file in your document with Object on the Insert
menu and then adding annotations and text. You can then save the added
annotations, dimensions, text, and graphics as a MicroStation document with
Save As on the File menu.
If you do not have MicroStation but need to provide files in MicroStation
format, you can create the document in the software and then save the file in
MicroStation format.
Project Management
Managing large projects becomes easier when you use the software to
integrate MicroStation drawings. You can use the software to gather drawing
files from several sources and combine them into a single project book. You
can then add details using the software and save the files in MicroStation
format so other project team members using MicroStation can review the
project.
You can also assemble entire projects and then detail the project using the
software. You can then save the files in MicroStation format so other project
team members using MicroStation can review the project.
You can also use documents created with the software as a central location for
all project informationboth graphic and non-graphic data. Files created with
products that are OLE-compliant can be linked and embedded into a
MicroStation file that has been opened with the software.
Review and Redlining

The software is an excellent tool for reviewing and redlining MicroStation
drawings. You can use Object on the Insert menu to link or embed a 2-D or
3-D MicroStation drawing in your document and then sketch on the drawing.
You can sketch and revise on top of the native data. After reviewing, you can
then electronically mail the redlined file to others.
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During

Import
When you translate MicroStation data into SmartSketch, you are concerned
with either Visual fidelity, Data fidelity, or both.
Important

module.
Visual Fidelity
Visual fidelity is a phrase used to describe the visual accuracy of a picture
after translation. SmartSketch preserves the visual accuracy of a MicroStation
file by providing support for the following areas:
Colors
MicroStation maintains a fixed number of colors in a color table for each
document. Because SmartSketch uses true color, the color table of the seed
file is used as the basis of the translation. The default color table provided
with SmartSketch defines the first 16 colors as standard and fills in the rest of
the colors as they are needed. If the color table is full, then each color is
matched to the closest MicroStation color. MicroStation colors are
automatically translated to the closest red, green, blue (RGB) values in
SmartSketch.
Widths
SmartSketch provides a default set of line widths that corresponds to standard
metric pencil leads: .13, .18, .25, .35, .5, .7, 1.0, 1.4, and 2.0. When you open
a MicroStation document, a default mapping determines which SmartSketch
line width is assigned to go with which MicroStation weight. You can change
any of the default mappings to define your own mapping with the Line Width
tab of the MicroStation Import Options dialog box (accessed through the
Foreign Data tab after you select Options on the Tools menu).
Linestyles
The core MicroStation linestyles 0-7 default to matching SmartSketch
linestyles, unless they are mapped on the Linestyle tab of the MicroStation
Import Options dialog box. MicroStation User Defined Line Styles (UDLS)
are supported directly. If you use the Style Resources dialog box, you can
attach a MicroStation linestyle resource (*.RSC) file as a resource for
linestyles to use in a document.
Patterns

MicroStation associative patterns are automatically recreated as fill styles in
the resulting SmartSketch files. Non-associative MicroStation patterns are
imported as groups.
Font Styles
SmartSketch supports the system TrueType fonts delivered with Windows NT
and supplies additional ANSI and ISO TrueType engineering fonts.
SmartSketch also supports MicroStation fonts. When you open a .DGN
document, SmartSketch provides a default mapping to determine which
TrueType font is assigned to which MicroStation font. You can change to this
mapping to define your own mapping. You can change the mapping with
Options on the Tools menu. On the File Locations tab, you can set the paths
to the font resources by double-clicking on Fonts 1, 2, and 3.
References
MicroStation references are imported as SmartSketch reference files, which
use the automatic defaults or same options for configuring how color, weights,
line styles, patterns, and fonts are handled for visual accuracy.
Configuring the Fit to Sheet Feature

SmartSketch automatically calculates the sheet scale when you import
MicroStation documents so that the range of graphics automatically fits within
the lower left-hand corner of the drawing sheet. If you do not want the sheet
scale automatically calculated, then you must uncheck the Fit imported data to
active sheet check box on the MicroStation Import Options dialog box.
Tip
You can create a template for calculating sheet scale at the scale
you want and insert a MicroStation document to base the template
on. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, you set the Drawing Scale and
Paper Units that you want.
Using MicroStation Fonts and Styles in a SmartSketch

Document
If you want to make line styles from MicroStation resource files available in a
SmartSketch document, you can reference the styles with style resource
documents. You can reference a MicroStation .RSC file from the active
template or document by clicking Resources on the Styles dialog box.
When you attach a .RSC file from the current document or template, the styles
in the resource document are added to the Style dropdown list on the ribbon
for the active document.

Tip
MicroStation resource files for line styles are treated as a document

setting. If you want to have all documents that are created by
importing use the same styles, you must create an .IGR template
with those styles attached. You then specify the .IGR template as
the template to use during import of MicroStation documents.
Data Fidelity
Data fidelity is a phrase that describes how accurately the data is preserved
when compared to its original form in the application that created it.
SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing
equivalent element types with mapped entities to SmartSketch. SmartSketch
also provides support for non-displayed data such as database linkages, units,
and coordinates.
SmartSketch preserves data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing
support for the following areas:
Units
MicroStation files are determined by the master and sub-unit labels in the file.
If meaningful master units and sub-units are found, the resulting

SmartSketch document has the closest matching units set on the
Units tab of the Properties dialog box.
If no meaningful master units and sub-units are found, the File

Units setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box is used
to determine the units for translated or referenced MicroStation
files.
Coordinates
MicroStation data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate
positions when you translate the MicroStation files (click Open on the File
menu). Referenced MicroStation file coordinate positions are determined by
the settings on the Reference File tab on the Options dialog box.
Tip
You can use Coincident to import the data in its original

coordinate position at a 1 to 1 scale.
Levels
MicroStation level numbers, names, or both are preserved as SmartSketch
layer names, but the color and linetype settings (level symbology) are not. The
color and linestyle settings apply directly to the resulting elements.

Within a SmartSketch document, there are an unlimited number of layers per
sheet. When translating foreign files into SmartSketch, the levels in
MicroStation keep the same names. The MicroStation Export Options
dialog box provides a layer mapping table, due to the limit of 63 levels in
MicroStation. You can access this dialog box with the Foreign Data tab after
you select Options on the Tools menu.
Cells
When you translate a .DGN document, the default is to translate cells into
symbols. You can change this default with Options on the Tools menu so that
cells or blocks are embedded groups. This action translates cells and blocks
into embedded symbols, or groups, in SmartSketch.
Tip
All MicroStation Type 2 cells are imported into SmartSketch as a

group. The group contains a dynamic attribute set that stores the
name of the cell, its origin, and any other data characterizing the
cell. There is, therefore, enough information stored in the group to
reconstruct an element back into a cell to export in the future.
When you import a MicroStation document that has cells, a temporary folder
is created in the Temp folder on your computer. The temporary folder
contains the symbols that are embedded in the MicroStation document. By
default, these symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the
drawing sheet. You can change a setting in \\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM
\ITMSTN.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open the .INI file and
change the following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions =
0.
Cells with Attribute Data

When translating a .dgn document, the default is to translate all cells
containing attribute data into symbols with SmartLabels.
3D Data
All 3D data is flattened into a 2D view when you translate files using Open on
the File menu. The 2D view orientation is determined by the Orientation
setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box.
The following information is an entity-to-element map when you translate
files using Open on the File menu.
MicroStation
SmartSketch
Line
Linestring
Bspline Curve
Line
Linestring
Bspline Curve

Shape
Ellipse
Arc
Complex String
Complex Shape
Bspline Surface
Curve
Cone
Surface
Dimension
Text
Text Node
Cell
Shared Cell
Multiline
Point String
Reference
Raster
Database Linkages
Tags
User Data
Linestring
Ellipse
Arc
Complex String
Complex String
Bspline Curve
Bspline Curve
Flattened wire frame
Group
Dimension
Text
Text
Group
Symbol (Shared Embed)
Group
Points
Reference
Reference
Dynamic Attribute set on the element
Notes
The Image Integrator module must be downloaded to support

import of raster reference files.
MicroStation symbols with nested graphics, groups, and complex

shapes (e.g. rectangles) will not translate successfully into
SmartSketch symbols.
None of the data that is part of the reference file can be deleted or
altered using SmartSketch commands. However, if MicroStation
software is installed on your computer, then you can click Open on
the Shortcut menu over the reference file. This action opens the
MicroStation reference file in the MicroStation application.
If you establish relationships between elements in the SmartSketch

file and a reference file, the relationships will be removed if you
change the position of elements in the source file and then update
the reference file in SmartSketch.
If you change the inserted information (copied from MicroStation),

the original information does not change.
Accuracy of MicroStation Data During

Export
When you translate SmartSketch files into MicroStation data, you are
concerned with either Visual fidelity, Data fidelity, or both.
Important

module.
Visual Fidelity
after translation. SmartSketch preserves the visual accuracy of a file during
export to MicroStation by providing support for the following different areas:
Colors
When SmartSketch colors are saved to a .DGN file, a color table containing
matching colors is created and attached to the resulting .DGN by default. If a
seed file with a color table attached is specified on the MicroStation Export
Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select
Options on the Tools menu), SmartSketch colors are automatically mapped to
the closest RGB equivalent colors in that table.
Widths
SmartSketch default widths are pre-mapped to their most equivalent
MicroStation widths on the Line Width tab of the MicroStation Export
Options dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select
Options on the Tools menu).
Linestyles
SmartSketch line styles are mapped on the Linestyle tab of the MicroStation
Export Options dialog box. If styles from a referenced MicroStation .RSC
file have been used in the SmartSketch file being exported, the line style
names are transferred to the resulting .DGN file. If a style exists in the
MicroStation application by the same name, that style will be used. If there is
no style in the MicroStation application by the same name, MicroStation
assigns a default style.
Fill Styles
Basic fill styles such as Normal are automatically recreated as MicroStation
associative hatch patterns in the resulting .DGN files. Fill styles that use
symbols such as Earth (in AEC templates) are exported as individual elements
in the resulting .DGN file.
Font Styles
SmartSketch default font styles (TTF) are pre-mapped to their most equivalent
MicroStation font styles on the Font tab of the MicroStation Export Options
dialog box. If the font is not listed in the mapping table on the font tab, it
defaults to font 3 (Engineering) in the resulting MicroStation file. If font
styles from a referenced MicroStation .RSC file have been used in the
SmartSketch file being exported, the font style names are passed into the
resulting .DGN file, provided it has not been mapped in the font mapping
table. Mappings override automatic behaviors. If a font style exists in the
MicroStation application by the same name, that font style will be used. If
there is no font style in the MicroStation application by the same name,
MicroStation assigns the default font 3 (Engineering) style.
References
MicroStation .DGN files that are referenced in SmartSketch will be saved as
MicroStation reference files in the resulting MicroStation file. Raster
reference files in SmartSketch will be saved as MicroStation raster files in the
resulting MicroStation file. Other reference files (.IGR, .DGN, .or DXF files)
are not currently supported during the export to MicroStation. Inserted objects
such as .XLS, .DOC, or .BMP are not currently supported during the export to
the MicroStation file format.
Multiple Sheets
Only the active sheet and background sheet in a SmartSketch file is exported
to a MicroStation file. Exporting multiple sheets from a document is not
currently supported.
Tip
The active background sheet graphics are merged into the resulting
.DGN file.
Data Fidelity
Data fidelity is a phrase used to describe how accurately the data is preserved
SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of a MicroStation file during export
by mapping data to its most equivalent form in MicroStation. SmartSketch
does not support exporting data such as attribute sets that can be associated
with elements in the file.
SmartSketch preserves data accuracy of a MicroStation file by providing
Units

If a seed file is specified on the MicroStation Export Options dialog box,
then the units of that seed file are used in the resulting file. Otherwise, the
following chart indicates what happens to SmartSketch units as they are
exported to MicroStation units.
IGR Primary Units MSTN MU
MSTN Resolution
inches
feet
meters
millimeters
centimeters
manometers
yards
miles
kilometers
tenths
hundreds
thousands
poles
rods
links
chains
points
furlongs
1000:254
12:8000
1000:10
1000:100
1000:100
Seed file values unchanged
IN
FT
M
MM
CM
NM
YD
MI
KM
TE
HN
TH
PL
RD
LK
CH
PT
FR
Coordinates
SmartSketch data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions
when you translate to the MicroStation files.
Layers to Levels
SmartSketch layer names are preserved as MicroStation level names and
numbers, but the color and linestyle settings (level symbology) are not. The
color and linestyle layer settings are applied directly to the resulting elements.
Tip
Any translated levels past Level 63 are combined together on

Level 63.
The following is an element to element map when you translate files using
Save As on the File menu.
SmartSketch
MicroStation
Line
Ellipse
Arc
Line
Ellipse
Ellipse

Point
Linestring
Connector
Bspline Curve
Rectangle
Complex String
Text
Dimension
Symbol
Leader
Group
SmartLabel
Parametric Symbols
Multi Representation Symbol
.DGN Reference
.IGR, DWG, or .DXF Reference
OLE Objects (.doc, .xls, etc.)
Attribute sets
Raster Reference
Line
Linestring
Linestring
Bspline Curve
Shape
Complex Chain
Text
Dimension
Shared Cell
Dimension
Elements
Elements
Elements
Elements
.DGN Reference
Ignored (no equivalent)
Ignored (no equivalent)
Ignored
Raster Reference
Open a MicroStation Document

2. On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format
box.
3. In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import
Options dialog box.
4. On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and
template that you want in the Template File box.
Tip
You can search for the seed file by clicking Browse.
5. On the Browse dialog box, click the seed file you want.
6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dgn extension.
7. Select the document that you want to open.
Important

module.
Notes
If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object

or drag a MicroStation document from the Windows Explorer
into the current document.
After you place the MicroStation information on the drawing sheet,

you can locate elements and establish relationships between the
new information and elements that are already in the current
document.
You can use .dgn resource files to preserve the original fonts and
line types of the document when you open a MicroStation
document with File > Open. You can set font locations before
opening the MicroStation document by clicking Tools > Options
and then clicking the File Locations tab. You can set options for
line types by clicking Format > Style and then clicking
Resources.
All translation options for opening MicroStation documents with

File > Open are delivered through the Custom and Typical setup
options when you install the software. If you cannot open a
MicroStation document, you should re-install the software with the
Custom or Typical setup to get these options.
MicroStation line strings are imported as SmartSketch line strings.
MicroStation point strings are imported as groups.
A MicroStation text node (two or more lines of text handled as a

text box) is imported into SmartSketch as two separate line strings
(text boxes).
When you open a MicroStation document that has references to

other documents, those referenced documents show up as well.
Nested reference documents can be up to four levels deep. You can
locate referenced documents in the current document.
You can use the Registration Extension utility to register alternate

MicroStation extensions so that SmartSketch will view them as
valid MicroStation files without having to rename them. This
freeware program may be downloaded from the SmartSketch
software downloads web page at
http://www.smartsketch.com/support/downloads.asp
Place MicroStation Information in the

Document
To place MicroStation information onto the drawing sheet, you must first
open SmartSketch and open the document that you want. You set options for
inserting the MicroStation information into the document with Options on the

Tools menu. The options are located on the Foreign Data tab.
Important

module.
To Drag a Document
1. Open Windows Explorer and select the MicroStation document that you
want.
2. Drag the document into the active document in SmartSketch.
To Insert a Document
Click Insert > Object and select MicroStation document that you
want.
To Drag Selected Elements

1. Open the MicroStation document and select the elements that you want.
2. Drag the selected elements into the active document in SmartSketch.
Tip
If you press Ctrl while you drag a document, the symbol is

embedded. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked.
To Copy and Paste Selected Elements

1. Open the MicroStation document and select the elements that you want.
2. Copy the selected information.
3. In SmartSketch on the Edit menu, click Paste Special or Copy to copy
the selected elements into the current document.
Notes
You can also open a MicroStation document directly with Open on

the File menu.
When you open a MicroStation document that has references to

other documents, those referenced documents also appear. You can
After you place the MicroStation information in the current

document, you can locate elements and establish relationships
between the new information and elements that you place using
SmartSketch.
Create a Template to Insert a MicroStation

Document
1. Click File > Open and select the document to base a template on.
2. Click View > Background Sheets.
3. Click File > Sheet Setup and set the options that you want for the
background sheet.
4. Click View > Working Sheets.
6. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, set the Drawing Scale and Paper Units
that you want.
8. On the File Locations tab of the Options dialog box, select User
Templates.
9. Click Modify.
10. On the Modify Location dialog box, select the directory where you want
to store the template.
11. Click File > Save As to save the document in the directory that you
selected. This document is the template.
12. Click File > New to create a blank document.
13. On the File New dialog box, in the Templates box, select the template
that you created to base the new document on.
14. On the Insert menu, click Object and select the MicroStation document
that you want to insert.
Establish Relationships on a MicroStation

Reference File
You can establish relationships between elements in the current document and
elements in a MicroStation reference file that you inserted.
Important

module.
1. Place a MicroStation reference file in a document.

Tip
You should set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If you

want to see the relationship handles, set Relationship Handles on

the Tools menu.
2. Establish relationships between elements in the object and elements in the
same manner you would any elements.
Notes
If you change the position of elements in a MicroStation document

that is linked to your current document and then update the link in
the document, the relationships are no longer valid.
Control Layers in a MicroStation Reference

File
1. Open the MicroStation reference file.
Note
Any file that is not native to Catalog Manager and that is linked
or embedded and used for reference information is termed a
reference file.
2. Adjust the file in the active view by clicking Fit
3. On the Tools menu, click Display Manager.

4. If the document contains multiple drawing sheets, select the sheet which
contains the reference file on the Sheets tab.
5. Click the Layers tab.
Turn On/Off Layer Display

1. On the Layers tab, select a layer or layer group from the list.
2. In the Display column, turn on/off a layer by selecting or deselecting the
check box.
3. To save your changes and return to the drawing document, click OK.
Override the Color of a Layer or Layer Group

2. Click in the Colors column of the selected layer/layer group to display the
Colors dialog box.
3. Select a color from the list.
Notes
The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer

groups for the active drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in
the list, followed by individual layers.
If you wish to preview your changes without closing the dialog

box, click Apply.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators.
Add MicroStation Linestyles to a Document

You can reference a MicroStation .RSC file that contains linestyles as a style
resource document from any template or document.
Important

module.
1. Click File > Open to open the document to which you want to add a style
resource document.
3. On the Style dialog box, click Resources.
4. On the Style Resources dialog box, click Add.
5. On the Add Style Resource dialog box, select the name of the .RSC file
that you want to add to the template.
6. Click OK on each dialog box.
7. When you close the document, click OK when you are prompted to
indicate if you want to save changes to document.
The styles in the style resource document are referenced from the template or
document that you just saved. If you open a document that references a style
resource document, the styles in the style resource document will be available
on the Styles list of the current document ribbon. If you open a document that
is based on a template with references to style resource documents, the styles
will also be available in the same manner. You can then apply the styles in the
style resource document to elements or annotations in the current document.
Notes
Use this procedure only for linestyle resources.
You must apply linestyles to each document individually, unless

you apply a template.
Sometimes you can attach several style resource documents that


contain styles with duplicate names. In these cases, the Style
Resources list in the style resource document has priority. In that
list, the style listed first appears on the ribbon of the active
document.
If you want to add MicroStation fonts to a document, click

Options on the Tools menu. Then, on the File Locations tab, you
can set the paths to the fonts with the Fonts 1, 2, and 3 options.
MicroStation Cells in Your Document

To use MicroStation cells as symbols in your document, the cells must first be
converted into individual symbols (.sym). On the File menu, Open allows you
to open a MicroStation cell library. A directory is created, with the same name
as the cell library. The individual cells within the library are saved as
individual symbols in the new directory.
Important

module.
Tip
All MicroStation Type 2 cells are imported into your document as

a group. The group contains a dynamic attribute set that stores the
name of the cell, its origin, and any other data characterizing the
cell. There is, therefore, enough information stored in the group to
reconstruct an element back into a cell to export in the future.
You can drag these symbols from the Symbol Explorer or Windows Explorer
into other SmartSketch documents.
Options for the cell library units (SU and PU) can be set on the MicroStation
Import Options dialog box. You can access this dialog box by clicking
Options on the Tools menu. Then, on the Foreign Data tab, you can enter the
appropriate working units in the SU: and MU: fields.
Symbols in your document are saved as MicroStation cells during translation
from your document to MicroStation formats.
Open a MicroStation Cell Library

2. On the Foreign Data tab, in the Format box, click MicroStation.
3. In the Import box, click Options to access the MicroStation Import

Options dialog box.
4. On the General tab, set the Units of Resolution to specify the resolution
of the cells that you want to import.
5. On each dialog box, click OK.
6. On the Main toolbar, click File > Open.
7. On the Open dialog box, click the .CEL extension and select the cell
library that you want to open. A progress box appears to show the progress
of the translation of the cells in the cell library. The software creates a
subdirectory with the same name as the .CEL file in the directory of the
cell library. The software then creates one symbol for each cell that was in
the .CEL file; the names of the new symbols are identical to the cells used
to create them.
Important

module.
MicroStation Construction Class

Information
When you open a MicroStation document, the construction class information
is preserved with layer names. When importing the document, the software
creates special layers for construction elements. The layers are named so that
you can recognize the layers, including the layer for the construction element.
For example, level 6 would become Constr. 6 and level Border would also
become Constr. Border. You can also save these layers back out to the
MicroStation document format.
Important

module.

Foreign Data Tab (Options Dialog Box)
Sets options for moving information into the current document by dragging a
document or by clicking one of the following commands:
Paste Special on the Edit menu
Object on the Insert menu
Open on the File menu.
Tab Options
Format - Sets the type of format that you can use for importing or saving a
document. When you click MicroStation or AutoCAD and then click the
appropriate Options, you can access a specific dialog box to set options for
importing or saving AutoCAD (.dxf, .dwg) or MicroStation (.dgn) documents.
Import - Sets options for importing an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
File Units - Sets the units for the document you want to import. When you
insert or drag a document into the drawing sheet, the software uses this setting
only when the document has units assigned that the software does not
recognize.
Orientation - Sets the orientation for the document that you want to import.
Options - Accesses one of the dialog boxes for importing an AutoCAD or
MicroStation document.
Export - Sets options for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation document.
Options - Accesses a dialog box for exporting an AutoCAD or MicroStation
document.
Important
The Foreign Data tab is only available on the Options dialog box
if you install the CAD Translators module.
MicroStation Import Options Dialog Box

Controls how a MicroStation document is opened or inserted into the current
document.
Important

module.
General Tab (MicroStation Import Options Dialog

Box)
Tab Options
Cell Library - Sets options for translating MicroStation cell libraries. When a
cell library is imported, a symbol document with an .sym extension is created.
Units of Resolution - Determines the sub-unit and positional unit settings for
MicroStation cell libraries. Cell libraries do not have units and depend on the
MicroStation document for their units of resolution. These settings have no
effect on translating documents with a .dgn extension; the settings only affect
documents with a .CEL extension.
Cells - Sets options for importing cells in MicroStation documents. When you
import a MicroStation document, a temporary folder is created in the Temp
folder on your computer. The temporary folder contains the symbols that are
embedded in the MicroStation document. By default, these symbols are
deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet. You can change
a setting in ITMSTN.INI to save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open
ITMSTN.INI and change the following line in the Options section: Delete
Symbol Definitions = 0.
Options - Determines if cells are imported as elements on the drawing sheet
or embedded symbols. Symbol documents have an .sym extension. For
example, if you click Hybrid, regular cells, Type 2, are imported as groups
and shared cells, type 34, are imported as symbols.
Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you
want to use to create a document.
Browse - Accesses the Browse dialog box.
Fit imported data to active sheet - Places the MicroStation data on the active
drawing sheet. If the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is placed on a
new drawing sheet.
Font Tab
Maps the fonts in the software to a MicroStation font.
Linestyle Tab
Maps the MicroStation line types to line style definitions in the software.
Line Width Tab

Maps the MicroStation weights to line widths in the software.
MicroStation Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be translated to a MicroStation file format.
Important

module.
General Tab (MicroStation Export Options Dialog

Box)
Tab Options
Version - Specifies the version of MicroStation you want to use.
Seed File - Specifies the path of a default seed file that contains appropriate
units, color tables, and other important information.
Caution
When you specify a 2D seed file while exporting a 3D

MicroStation reference file from the current document, the 3D
reference file is not saved in MicroStation. For the 3D
MicroStation reference file to be saved in MicroStation, you must
specify a 3D seed file on the MicroStation Export Options dialog
box.
Browse - Displays the Seed File dialog box.
Font Tab
Maps the software font to a MicroStation font.
LineStyle Tab
Maps the line style in the software to MicroStation line styles. The values for
mapping are as follows:
SmartSketch
9
11
10
12
13
18
MicroStation
0
1
2
4
6
7

20
Line Width Tab

Maps the software line widths to MicroStation weights.
Layer Tab
Tab Options
Layer Mapping Table - Displays an alphanumeric ordered list of the layers.
Working with AutoCAD Files: An

Overview
CAD Translators for SmartSketch directly supports True Type Fonts and
dashed gap linetypes for outstanding visual fidelity when you import,
reference, or export AutoCAD drawings. Invisible AutoCAD information
such as database linkages, attributes, and Xdata is also preserved as attributes
on SmartSketch graphics.
Important

module.
Opening and Saving AutoCAD Files

Your document supports opening and saving AutoCAD files in two ways: you
can either select an AutoCAD file and translate it into equivalent SmartSketch
elements, or you can create a reference file from an AutoCAD file.
If you use the method for selecting an AutoCAD file and translating it into
equivalent elements in your document, you can click Open on the File menu.
After you open an AutoCAD file using this method, the resulting file is in
format (igr).
Tip
If an AutoCAD file contains paper space data, the resulting file

contains two sheets: one sheet represents the paper space data, and
is named paper space; the other sheet represents model space data,
and is named model space. The paper space views are recreated as
reference views of the model sheet on the paper space sheet.
If you use the method for creating a reference file from an AutoCAD file, you
can either click Object on the Insert menu, or you can drag from the Symbol
Explorer or Windows Explorer. This action enables you to display and, if
AutoCAD is available on your computer, edit the AutoCAD file while
working in . You can also select the view position of a 3-D AutoCAD file
upon placement. After an AutoCAD file has been referenced using this
method, you can then locate and establish relationships between the new
information and elements on the drawing sheet.
Tip
The Options command on the Tools menu displays the Options

dialog box. By selecting the Foreign Data tab and setting the
format to AutoCAD, you can configure the settings for importing

AutoCAD data that applies to both of these methods.
Caution
Roundtrip of AutoCAD data (importing AutoCAD data to

SmartSketch data and exporting back to AutoCAD data) is
currently supported visually. Data fidelity for information such as
attributes, database linkages, and Xdata are not supported during
export to the AutoCAD file format.
Other Methods for Importing AutoCAD Data

You can use the following methods to move AutoCAD (.DWG or .DXF) files
into SmartSketch:
Cutting and pasting.
Dragging.
Inserting the information as an object.
When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to other

documents, those referenced documents also appear. You can locate
referenced documents in the current document.
Tip
You can also use Open on the File menu to translate and open
documents.
Cutting and Pasting

You can select the information in the AutoCAD document and then cut or
copy the information and paste it into SmartSketch with Paste Special.
Dragging
You can select the information in the AutoCAD document and then drag it
into SmartSketch. In the Windows Explorer, select the AutoCAD document
and then drag it into SmartSketch. The document is embedded in the drawing
by default. Before you drop the document, you can embed the document in
SmartSketch by pressing Ctrl. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is
linked. When you place the document, handles appear that allow you to scale
the object. The foreign document is placed into SmartSketch and behaves
much like a symbol, allowing you to click to place it or move it around.
Tip
You can set placement options by clicking Options on the Tools

menu. Then, you can set the options you want on the Reference
File tab of the Options dialog box.
Inserting as an Object
Inside SmartSketch, you can insert the entire foreign document with Object
on the Insert menu. On the Insert Object dialog box, you can set the option
to link or embed the document. After you insert the object, SmartSketch
places a SmartFrame border around the object, allowing you to crop it without
altering the scale of the object. The geometry of the inserted document is
recognized; you can use the relationship indicators to draw or create
relationships between the geometry of the inserted object and other elements
in the SmartSketch document. You can edit the inserted object by doubleclicking it.
Tip
Object inserts any OLE 2.0 enabled object, such as a Word or

.AVI document, or CAD document, such as .DWG. The inserted
object can then be edited by double-clicking it.
Saving SmartSketch to AutoCAD

You can save a SmartSketch file as an AutoCAD file. Before you do this, you
can adjust the translation options using Options on the Tools menu. On the
Foreign Data tab, you can click the appropriate Export Options.
When you save a SmartSketch document as a .DWG or .DXF document, the
active sheet is saved.
You do not have to map layers for AutoCAD documents; the layer names are
imported or exported as named in the native document. If a SmartSketch layer
has not been mapped, it is automatically placed on the next available layer or
level in the foreign document until the last level or layer occurs.
Caution
If you save SmartSketch documents with raster reference files as

AutoCAD documents, only the files of the same type (.DWG) can
be exported back into.
AutoCAD-Based Workflow Examples

Important

module.
Conceptual Design
Because SmartSketch gives you robust and intuitive drawing tools, it is a
natural choice for sketching and developing concepts during the initial stages

of a project. You can capture relationships as you draw, or easily add them
later as relationships or dimensions. You can also alter dimensions to directly
drive graphics. After you create your design, you can save it in the AutoCAD
(.dwg) file format to complete downstream tasks in AutoCAD.
Drawing Files
You can use SmartSketch to add annotations to existing AutoCAD drawing
files by inserting an AutoCAD drawing file in SmartSketch with Object on
the Insert menu, adding annotations and text, and saving the file in AutoCAD
format.
If you have not installed AutoCAD but need to provide drawing files in
AutoCAD format, you can create the drawing files in SmartSketch and then
save the file in AutoCAD format.
Project Management
Managing large projects becomes easier when you use SmartSketch to
integrate AutoCAD drawings. You can use SmartSketch to gather drawing
files from several sources and combine them into a single project book. You
can then add details using SmartSketch and save the files in AutoCAD format
so other project team members using AutoCAD can review the project.
You can also use SmartSketch as a central location for all project
informationboth graphic and non-graphic data. Files created with products
that are OLE-compliant can be linked and embedded into an AutoCAD file
that has been opened in SmartSketch.
Review and Redlining

SmartSketch is an excellent tool for reviewing and redlining AutoCAD
drawings. You can use Object on the Insert menu to link or embed a 2-D or
3-D AutoCAD drawing in SmartSketch and then sketch on the drawing. You
can sketch and make revisions on top of the native data. After reviewing, you
can then electronically mail the redlined file to others.
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Import

When you translate AutoCAD data into your document, you are concerned
with either visual fidelity or data fidelity or both.
Important

module.
Visual Fidelity
after it has been translated. Your software preserves the visual accuracy of an
AutoCAD file by providing support for the following seven different areas:
Colors
AutoCAD colors are automatically mapped to the closest matching red, green,
blue (RGB) color in the color table.
Tip
Colors that were used in AutoCAD to determine plotting pen

widths can also be mapped to a width in your document by using
AutoCAD Color on the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Import
Options dialog box.
Widths
AutoCAD R9 through R14 polylines are the only type of entity that support a

width. Polyline widths are automatically mapped to an exact matching in
model width of your document. All other entities such as lines, arcs, and
circles in AutoCAD do not support width. For the entities that do not support
width, a default width is applied (all elements in your document have a
width). You can make changes to any of the default mappings to define your
own mapping with the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Import Options
dialog box (accessed through the Foreign Data tab after you select Options
on the Tools menu). SmartSketch provides a default set of line widths that
correspond to standard metric pencil leads: .13, .18, .25, .35, .5, .7, 1.0, 1.4,
and 2.0.
Linestyles
AutoCAD default line styles are pre-mapped to the most equivalent line styles
for your document on the Linestyle tab of the AutoCAD Import Options
dialog box. Line styles other than the default line styles or any complex line
styles containing shapes are mapped to continuous unless they are specifically
mapped on the Linestyle tab.
Hatches
AutoCAD default hatches are automatically mapped to matching fill styles in
your document. Hatches other than the defaults delivered with AutoCAD are
stroked into their primitive elements to preserve their visual accuracy
Font Styles
AutoCAD default font styles are pre-mapped to their most equivalent font
styles in your document, True Type Fonts, on the Font tab of the AutoCAD
Import Options dialog box. Other fonts default to the Arial true type font
delivered with Windows. If the font is not listed in the mapping on the tab, it
defaults to Arial.
Xrefs
AutoCAD Xrefs are imported as reference files in your document, which use
the automatic defaults or same options for configuring how color, width, line
styles, hatches, and fonts are handled for visual accuracy.
Paper Space
If paper space was active when an AutoCAD file was saved, the file
containing paper space data causes two sheets to be created when you click
Open on the File menu. One sheet represents the paper space data and is
named Paper Space. The other sheet represents model space data and is named
Model Space. The paper space views are recreated as reference views of the
model sheet on the paper space sheet.

Tip
AutoCAD files that are reference files instead of files translated

using Open on the File menu, do not support the display of paper
space data; instead, the model space information is displayed.
Configuring the Fit to Sheet Feature

The software automatically calculates the sheet scale in your document when
you import AutoCAD documents so that the range of graphics automatically
fits within the lower left-hand corner of the drawing sheet. If you do not want
the sheet scale automatically calculated, then you must manually modify the
.INI file.
To modify the .INI file, you click Explore on the Start menu and go to the
directory where SmartSketch resides. You can use any text editor to modify
the file. Double-click itacad. In the Options section of the file, set Ignore
sheet scale = 0.
Tip
You can create a template for calculating sheet scale at the scale
you want and insert an AutoCAD document to base the template
on. On the Sheet Setup dialog box, you set the Drawing Scale and
Paper Units that you want
Using AutoCAD Fonts and Styles in Your Document

The software supports the system TrueType fonts delivered with Windows
and supplies additional ANSI and ISO TrueType engineering fonts. When
you open a .dwg document, the software provides a default mapping to
determine which TrueType font will be assigned to which AutoCAD font.
You can make changes to this mapping to define your own mapping. You can
change the mapping with Options on the Tools menu. On the File Locations
tab, you can set the paths to the font resources by double clicking on Fonts 1,
2, and 3.
Data fidelity
when compared to its original form in the application that created it. Your
document preserves the data accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing
equivalent element types that entities are mapped to. The software also
provides support for non-displayed data such as attributes on the resulting
elements.
Your document preserves data accuracy of an AutoCAD file by providing
Units

AutoCAD files are considered unit-less files. The File Units setting for
AutoCAD import data on the Options dialog box is used to determine the
units for translated AutoCAD data or referenced AutoCAD data.
Coordinates
AutoCAD data is automatically positioned to the matching coordinate
positions when you translate the AutoCAD files (click Open on the File
menu). Referenced AutoCAD file coordinate positions are determined by the
settings on the Reference File tab on the Options dialog box.
Tip
You can use Coincident to import the data in its original

coordinate position at a 1 to 1 scale.
Layers
Within your document, there are an unlimited number of layers per sheet.
AutoCAD layer names are preserved as layer names in your document, but the
color and linetype settings are not. The color and linestyle settings are applied
directly to the resulting element.
Caution
In AutoCAD, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied on a

layer-by-layer basis. When you select a different layer, the colors,
line styles, and line widths change. In your document, colors, line
styles, and line widths are applied directly to each individual
element or object. When you select a different layer, the colors,
line styles, and line widths are not affected. When you export back
to AutoCAD, colors, line styles, and line widths are applied on an
entity basis.
AutoCAD entity colors & linetypes are determined one

of three ways on an element:
Byblock - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color

or linetype of a block containing it. The software does not support
the entity concept so the Byblock properties are applied directly to
the resulting element.
Bylayer - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or

linetype of its associated layer. The software does not support the
entity concept so the Bylayer properties are applied directly to the
resulting element.
Byentity - occurs when colors and linetypes are directly applied to

the entity and override any Byblock or Bylayer properties. The

software supports this concept for all of its elements and preserves
Byentity properties for colors and linestyles.
Blocks
When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate cells or blocks
into symbols. You can change this default with the Options command on the
Tools menu so that cells or blocks are embedded groups. This translates cells
and blocks into embedded symbols, or groups, in your document.
When you import an AutoCAD document that blocks, a temporary folder is
created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The temporary folder contains
the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By default, these
symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet.
You can change a setting in \\SMARTSKETCH\PROGRAM \ITACAD.INI to
save the symbols instead. In Notepad, open the .INI file and change the
following line in the Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
Blocks with Attribute Data

When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate all blocks
containing attribute data into symbols with SmartLabels.
3D Data
All 3D data is flattened into a 2D view when you translate files using Open
on the File menu. The 2D view orientation is determined by the Orientation
setting in the Import area of the Options dialog box.
The following is an entity to element map when you translate files using
Open on the File menu.
AutoCAD
Line
Circle
Polyline (lines only)
Polyline (lines & arcs)
Arc
Trace
Point
Face3d
Solid
Block
Multiline
Spline
Dimension
Text
SmartSketch
Line
Ellipse
Linestring
Complex String
Arc
Line
Point
Line
Linestring
Symbol
Linestring
Bspline Curve
Dimension
Text

Paperspace Viewport
Xline
Ray
Database Linkages
Attributes
Ellipse
Region
Solid3d
Mtext
Leader
Tolerance
Xdata
Hatch
Image
Reference
Line
Line
Dynamic Attribute set on element
Dynamic Attribute set on element
Ellipse
Ignored
Ignored
Text
Leader
Group
Fill
Reference
Notes
The Image Integrator module must be downloaded to support

raster reference files.
AutoCAD symbols with nested graphics, groups, and complex

shapes (e.g. rectangles) will not translate successfully into
SmartSketch symbols.
None of the data that is part of the reference file can be deleted or
altered using commands in the software. However, if AutoCAD
software is located on your machine, then you can click Open on
the Shortcut menu over the reference file. This will open the
AutoCAD reference file in the AutoCAD application.
If you establish relationships between elements in the SmartSketch

file and a reference file, the relationships will be removed if you
change the position of elements in the source file and then update
the reference file in your document.
If you change the inserted information (copied from AutoCAD),

the original information does not change.
Accuracy of AutoCAD Data During Export

When you translate your document into AutoCAD data, you are concerned
with either Visual fidelity or Data fidelity or both.

Important

module.
Visual Fidelity
after it has been translated. Your document preserves the visual accuracy of a
file during export to AutoCAD file by providing support for the following
seven different areas:
Colors
The software colors map to the closest matching red, green, blue (RGB) color
in the default AutoCAD color table.
Tip
Widths can be mapped to an AutoCAD color by using the Line

Width tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog box.
AutoCAD colors are used to determine plotting pen widths.
Widths
Every element in your document has widths applied that are exported as
polyline objects with equivalent AutoCAD widths if the widths are equal to or
greater than the polyline width threshold. The Polyline width threshold field
is located on the Line Width tab of the AutoCAD Export Options dialog
box. Whenever possible, elements that have widths less than the threshold are
exported as AutoCAD entities that do not support width.
Linestyles
The default line styles in your document are pre-mapped to the most
equivalent AutoCAD line styles on the Linestyle tab of the AutoCAD Export
Options dialog box. Line styles other than the default line styles or any
complex line styles containing shapes are mapped to continuous unless they
are specifically mapped on the Linestyle tab.
Fill Styles
SmartSketch default fill styles are exported as matching hatch styles in the
resulting AutoCAD files.
Font Styles
SmartSketch default font styles are pre-mapped to their most equivalent
AutoCAD font styles (True Type Fonts (TTF)) on the Font tab of the
AutoCAD Export Options dialog box. Other fonts default to the txt.shx font
delivered with Windows. If the font is not listed in the mapping table on the

font tab, it defaults to txt.shx in the resulting AutoCAD file.
Dimension Styles
SmartSketch dimension styles are preserved as AutoCAD dimension styles in
the resulting dwg files.
Reference Files and OLE Inserts

AutoCAD dwg files that are referenced in SmartSketch are saved as
AutoCAD Xrefs in the resulting AutoCAD file. Raster reference files in
SmartSketch are saved as AutoCAD raster files in the resulting AutoCAD file.
Other reference files that are not currently supported during export to
AutoCAD include .IGR, .DGN, and .DXF, files. OLE inserted objects such as
.XLS, .DOC, or .BMP are not currently supported during export to the
AutoCAD file format
Multiple Sheets
Only the active sheet in a SmartSketch file is exported to an AutoCAD file.
Exporting multiple sheets from a document is not currently supported.
Data fidelity
SmartSketch preserves the data accuracy of an AutoCAD file during export by
mapping data to its most equivalent form in AutoCAD. SmartSketch does not
support exporting data such as attribute sets that can be associated with
elements in the file.
SmartSketch preserves element and document data support for the following
areas:
Units
The subunits of the file being saved as a dwg file determines the model size of
the graphics in the resulting AutoCAD file
Coordinates
SmartSketch data is automatically positioned to matching coordinate positions
when you translate to AutoCAD.
Layers
SmartSketch layer names are preserved as AutoCAD layer names, but the
color and linetype settings are not. The color and linestyle settings are applied
directly to Byentity, the resulting element In AutoCAD.
AutoCAD entity colors & linetypes are determined one

of three ways on an element:
Byblock - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color

or linetype of a block containing it. SmartSketch does not support
the entity concept so the Byblock properties are applied directly to
the resulting element.
Bylayer - a property that specifies that an entity inherit the color or

linetype of its associated layer. SmartSketch does not support the
entity concept so the Bylayer properties are applied directly to the
resulting element.
Byentity - occurs when colors and linetypes are directly applied to

the entity and override any Byblock or Bylayer properties.
SmartSketch supports this concept for all of its elements and
preserves Byentity properties for colors and linestyles.
The following is an entity to element map when you translate files.

SmartSketch
AutoCAD
Line
Ellipse
Arc
Point
Connector
Linestring
Bspline Curve
Rectangle
Complex String
Reference
Text
Leader
Dimension
Group
Symbol
SmartLabel
Parametric Symbols
Multi-representation Symbol
Raster Reference
Line
Circle
Arc
Point
Polyline
Polyline
Polyline
Polyline
Polyline
Xref
Text
Leader
Dimension
Entity
Block
Entities
Entities
Entities
Raster Reference
Open an AutoCAD Document

2. On the Foreign Data tab, click the software that you want in the Format
box.

3. In the Import box, click Options to access the AutoCAD Import
Options dialog box.
4. On the General tab of the dialog box, enter the directory path and
template that you want in the Template File box.
Tip
You can search for the template by clicking Browse.

6. On the Open dialog box, select the .dwg extension.
7. Select the document that you want to open.
Notes
If you create a reference file, you can either click Insert > Object
or drag an AutoCAD document from the Windows Explorer into
the current document.
After you place the AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet,

you can locate elements and establish relationships among the new
information and elements that are already in the current document.
When translating a .dwg document, the default is to translate all

blocks containing attribute data into symbols with SmartLabels.
All translation options for opening AutoCAD documents with File

> Open are delivered through the Custom and Typical setup
options when you install the software. If you cannot open an
AutoCAD document, you should re-install the software with the
Custom or Typical setup for these options.
AutoCAD polylines are imported as line strings.
AutoCAD mtext (two or more lines of text handled as a text box)

is imported into SmartSketch as two separate line strings (text
boxes).
When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to

other documents, those referenced documents appear as well.
Place AutoCAD Information in the

Document
To place AutoCAD information on the drawing sheet, you must first open

SmartSketch and open the document that you want. You should set options for
bringing the AutoCAD information into the document with Options on the
Tools menu. The options appear on the Foreign Data tab.
Important

module.
To Drag a Document
1. Open the Windows Explorer and select the AutoCAD document that you
want.
2. Drag the document into the current document in SmartSketch.
To Insert a Document
Click Insert > Object and select the AutoCAD document that you
want.
To Drag Selected Elements

1. Open the AutoCAD document and select the elements that you want.
2. Drag the selected elements into the current document in SmartSketch.
Tip
If you press Ctrl while you drag a document, the symbol is

embedded. If you press Ctrl + Shift, the document is linked.
To Copy and Paste Selected Elements

1. Open the AutoCAD document and select the elements that you want.
2. Copy the selected information.
3. In SmartSketch, on the Edit menu, click Paste Special or Copy to copy
the selected elements into the current document.
Notes
You can also open an AutoCAD document directly with Open on

the File menu.
When you open an AutoCAD document that has references to

other documents, those referenced documents appear as well.
After you place the AutoCAD information in the current

document, you can locate elements and establish relationships
between the new information and elements that you place using
SmartSketch.
When placing translated AutoCAD symbols, all elements of the

items that make up the body of the component need to be placed
on the default layer of the document.
Establish Relationships on an AutoCAD

Reference File
You can establish relationships between elements in the current document and
elements within an AutoCAD object that you inserted.
Important

module.
1. Place an AutoCAD reference file on the drawing sheet.

Tip
You should set Maintain Relationships on the Tools menu. If you

want to see the relationship handles, set Relationship Handles on
the Tools menu.
2. Establish relationships between elements in the object and elements in the

document in the same manner you would any elements.
Notes
If you change the position of elements in an AutoCAD document

that is linked to your current document and then update the link in
the document, the relationships will not be valid any more.
Control Layers in an AutoCAD Reference

File
1. Open the AutoCAD reference file.
Note
Any file that is not native to Catalog Manager and that is linked
or embedded and used for reference information is termed a
reference file.
2. Adjust the file in the active view by clicking Fit
3. On the Tools menu, click Display Manager.

4. If the document contains multiple drawing sheets, select the sheet which

contains the reference file on the Sheets tab.
5. Click the Layers tab.
Turn On/Off Layer Display

2. In the Display column, turn on/off a layer by selecting or deselecting the
check box.
Override the Color of a Layer or Layer Group

2. Click in the Colors column of the selected layer/layer group to display the
Colors dialog box.
3. Select a color from the list.
Notes
The Layers column displays an alphabetical list of layers and layer

groups for the active drawing sheet. Layer groups appear first in
the list, followed by individual layers.
If you wish to preview your changes without closing the dialog

box, click Apply.
Important
To use this functionality, you must install the CAD Translators.

AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box
Controls how an AutoCAD document is opened or inserted into the current
document.
Important

module.
General Tab (AutoCAD Import Options Dialog Box)

Tab Options
Blocks - Specifies whether an AutoCAD block is imported as an embedded
symbol or a group of elements. An embedded symbol document has a .sym
extension. When you import an AutoCAD document, a temporary folder is
created in the Temp folder on your hard drive. The temporary folder contains
the symbols that are embedded in the AutoCAD document. By default, these
symbols are deleted after the document is imported into the drawing sheet.
You can change a setting in ITACAD.INI and change the following line in the
Options section: Delete Symbol Definitions = 0.
Template File - Specifies the path and filename for the template that you
want to use to create a document.
Browse - Displays the Browse dialog box.
Fit imported data to active drawing sheet - Places the AutoCAD data on the
active drawing sheet. If the checkbox is not selected, the imported data is
placed on a new drawing sheet.
Font Tab
Maps the font of the current document to an AutoCAD font.
Linestyle Tab
Maps the AutoCAD line types to line style definitions in the current
document.

Tip
The number values listed below are used in the linestyle table to
map linestyle definitions in the current document to AutoCAD line
types.
Linestyle
Normal
Dashed
Dotted
Dash Dot
Dash 2Dot
Chain
No Style
Delivered
Double Chain
2Dash Dot
Zig-Zag
No Style
Delivered
Type
Continuous
Dash
Dot
Dash Dot
Dash Dot Dot
Chain
Centered Chain
Number
9
10
11
12
13
18
19
Double Chain
Dash Dash Dot
No Type Delivered
End Gap
20
21
22
23
Line Width Tab

Maps a line width for the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Tab Options
Default Width - Defines the width to assign to all AutoCAD entities that do
not have width or color-to-width mapping.
AutoCAD Export Options Dialog Box

Controls how a document will be saved to AutoCAD file format.
Important

module
General Tab
Tab Options
Version - Specifies the version of AutoCAD you want to use.
Prototype DWG File - Specifies the default prototype drawing (.dwg) file to
use during translation. This document can contain appropriate styles, color
tables, and other pre-configured settings.
Browse - Displays the AutoCAD Template File dialog box.
Note
Not usable without add-in for translations.
Font Tab
Maps the fonts for the current document to an AutoCAD font.
Linestyle Tab
Maps the line style of the current document to AutoCAD line types. The
values for mapping are as follows:
Line Style
Normal
Dashed
Dotted
Dash Dot
Dash 2Dot
Chain
No Style Delivered
Double Chain
2Dash Dot
Zig-Zag
Type
Continuous
Dash
Dot
Dash Dot
Dash Dot Dot
Chain
Centered Chain
Double Chain
Dash Dash Dot
No Type Delivered
Number
9
10
11
12
13
18
19
20
21
22

No Style Delivered
End Gap
23
Line Width Tab

Maps a line width in the current document to an AutoCAD color.
Tab Option
Polyline Width Threshold - Defines the threshold used to determine when
polylines with width must be created.
Index
Index
about the product ...................................... 72
about the product"..................................... 67
accessing" ................................................. 67
training ...................................................... 73
actions" ................................................... 258
actions:redoing........................................ 258
actions:undoing ....................................... 258
ActiveCGM .............................................. 680
ActiveX"........................................... 675, 676
ActiveX:documents ......................... 675, 676
ActiveX:opening SmartSketch documents
inside Internet Explorer ....................... 676
ActiveX:using the Internet ....................... 675
adding a symbol attribute........................ 640
adding commands to the shortcut menu" 650
adding to groups" .................... 475, 479, 483
adding to groups:creating ....................... 475
adding to groups:using............................ 475
adding" ............ 220, 295, 313, 314, 365, 498
adding:dimensions to groups .................. 365
adding:favorites....................................... 498
adding:leaders ................................ 295, 313
adding:vertices ........................................ 295
add-ins" ........................... 597, 601, 602, 603
add-ins:included .............................. 597, 601
add-ins:installing ..................................... 602
add-ins:overviews ................................... 601
add-ins:removing .................................... 602
adjusting" ........................................ 617, 625
adjusting:brightness for raster images... 617,
625
adjusting:contrast for raster images 617, 625
alignments" ..................................... 332, 505
alignments:associating elements ............ 505
alignments:showing ................................ 332
angular dimensions"................ 358, 361, 388
angular dimensions:placing ............ 361, 388
angular dimensions:types ....................... 358
animations" ............................................. 527
animations:creating................................. 527
annotations
symbols ............................................... 645
annotations" ... 284, 285, 288, 289, 295, 297,
307, 377, 541, 553
annotations:adding to drawings ...... 284, 285
annotations:formatting .................... 541, 553
annotations:manipulating ........................ 289
annotations:moving................................. 289
annotations:placing ......................... 288, 377
applying" ................................. 293, 543, 548
applying:borders ..................................... 293
applying:styles ................................ 543, 548
architecture templates............................. 152
areas" ........................................ 36, 397, 401

areas:measuring ..................................... 397
areas:viewing ............................................ 36
arguments ............................................... 403
associative elements"..... 263, 373, 427, 429,
434, 442, 453
associative elements:applying relationships
............................................................. 453
associative elements:changing shapes .. 427
associative elements:extending .............. 442
associative elements:mirroring................ 434
associative elements:moving .................. 263
associative elements:rotating.................. 429
associative elements:trimming ................ 442
associative elements:using dimensions .. 373
attributes" ................ 532, 533, 534, 538, 641
attributes:adding...................................... 640
attributes:displaying ........................ 533, 534
attributes:editing ...................... 533, 534, 538
attributes:modifying ................................. 641
attributes:moving the Attribute Viewer .... 533
attributes:removing.................................. 641
attributes:viewing ............................ 532, 538
AutoCAD" .......................... 38, 719, 732, 733
AutoCAD:documents............................... 732
AutoCAD:help for users of ........................ 38
AutoCAD:workflow examples.................. 719
AutoSave" ............................................... 114
AutoSave:saving documents automatically
............................................................. 114
AutoSave:setting options ........................ 114
azimuth............................................ 400, 402
background sheets"......... 100, 101, 106, 705
background sheets:changing .................. 101
background sheets:displaying................. 100
balloons".......................... 284, 285, 288, 307
balloons:adding to drawings... 284, 285, 288,
307
balloons:placing .............................. 288, 307
base bearing.................................... 400, 402
basic dimensions..................................... 369
direction........................................... 400, 402
bearing" ........................................... 400, 402
bearing:azimuth............................... 400, 402
bearing:base bearing ...................... 400, 402
bearing:setting................................. 400, 402
breaking links .......................................... 593
brightness........................................ 617, 625
bringing" .......................................... 470, 473
cascading windows ................................... 34
cgm" ........................................ 110, 675, 680
cgm:ActiveCGM ...................................... 680
cgm:drawings .......................................... 675
Index
cgm:saving .............................................. 110
cgm:using the Internet and Intranet ........ 675
chamfers" ................................ 445, 451, 557
chamfers:drawing.................................... 451
chamfers:properties ................................ 557
changing" 101, 263, 264, 267, 275, 280, 373,
374, 427, 429, 434, 436, 440, 442, 453,
470, 471, 472, 473, 474, 479, 481, 482,
545
changing:associative elements ...... 263, 373,
427, 434, 453
changing:background sheets .................. 101
changing:display order... 470, 471, 472, 473,
474
changing:drawings . 263, 275, 373, 427, 429,
434, 453
changing:driving ...................................... 374
changing:elements. 264, 267, 280, 429, 434,
436, 440
changing:formats of a style ..................... 545
changing:layers ....................................... 479
changing:relationships ............................ 453
character maps ............................... 294, 312
circles".... 209, 210, 211, 213, 237, 244, 247,
557
circles:drawing ................................ 213, 277
circles:isometric .............................. 244, 247
circular
drawing ................................................ 275
class dimensions..................................... 369
clearing element selections" ................... 256
Clipboard" ....................................... 268, 269
Clipboard:copying to ............................... 268
Clipboard:pasting from............................ 269
closing".................................................... 116
closing:files.............................................. 116
colinear" .......................................... 459, 460
colinear:elements or key points ...... 459, 460
colinear:relationships ...................... 459, 460
colors" ............................................. 481, 571
colors:creating......................................... 481
colors:creating for fills ............................. 571
compression factor.................................. 631
computer graphic metafile....................... 680
concentric" ...................................... 456, 460
concentric:elements ........................ 456, 460
concentric:relationships .................. 456, 460
connecting" ..... 193, 200, 202, 341, 457, 460
connecting:elements ....... 193, 202, 457, 460
connecting:points .................................... 341
connecting:relationships ................. 457, 460
connecting:symbols ................................ 200
connectors" .... 194, 196, 199, 200, 201, 202,
523
connectors:attaching............................... 194
connectors:ending ................................... 194

connectors:formatting.............................. 199
connectors:merging................................. 200
connectors:modifying .............................. 196
connectors:placing .................................. 194
connectors:splitting ................................. 201
connectors:starting .................................. 194
connectors:symbols ................................ 523
construction class information" ....... 706, 733
context-sensitive Help ............................... 72
contrast............................................ 617, 625
control keys ............................................... 26
converting symbols ................................. 517
copying symbols.............................. 642, 672
copying".. 268, 269, 272, 275, 276, 434, 509,
511, 520, 522, 524, 589
copying:documents ................................. 589
copying:elements ... 253, 268, 269, 272, 275,
434
copying:embedding ................................. 589
copying:formats ....................................... 272
copying:linking......................................... 589
copying:pasting ....................................... 589
copying:symbols...... 509, 511, 520, 522, 524
corner trimming elements................ 445, 450
organizational charts ............................... 185
creating icons .......................................... 645
creating" ..... 76, 80, 131, 143, 148, 152, 155,
163, 175, 179, 315, 317, 405, 407, 408,
475, 478, 479, 481, 482, 483, 490, 527,
548, 571, 590, 594, 619, 630, 635, 646,
647, 648, 672
creating:a leader for SmartText............... 648
creating:adding to groups........................ 475
creating:animations ................................. 527
creating:colors ......................................... 481
creating:control loops .............................. 163
creating:documents .. 76, 131, 143, 148, 152,
155, 175, 179, 590
creating:embedding................................. 590
creating:fill colors .................................... 571
creating:labels ......................................... 317
creating:links ........................................... 590
creating:negative images from raster images
..................................... 618, 619, 627, 630
creating:parametric symbols ................... 637
creating:styles ......................................... 548
creating:symbols ............................. 490, 635
creating:templates .. 131, 143, 148, 152, 155,
175, 179
creating:text-driven symbols" .. 646, 647, 672
crosshatching"................. 568, 569, 571, 573
crosshatching:creating fill colors ..... 571, 573
crosshatching:placing fills ....... 568, 569, 571
curves"..................... 219, 220, 224, 239, 557
Index
curves:deleting ........................................ 220
curves:drawing ........................ 219, 239, 557
custom colors .......................................... 481
customer support ...................................... 69
menus ..................... 599, 600, 601, 603, 604
customizing".... 598, 599, 600, 601, 603, 604
customizing:menus ......................... 600, 601
customizing:toolbars ................. 24, 598, 599
cutting" .................................... 280, 282, 589
cutting:documents ................................... 589
cutting:elements .............................. 280, 282
cutting:embedding................................... 589
cutting:linking .......................................... 589
defining" . 637, 642, 644, 645, 646, 647, 656,
657, 663, 672, 673
defining:connect point attributes ............. 656
defining:drag point attributes................... 656
defining:drop point attributes................... 657
defining:handles for a symbol ................. 637
defining:multiple representations ............ 642
defining:SmartText.................................. 673
defining:SmartText attributes .................. 645
defining:symbol origin ..................... 644, 663
defining:symbol properties ...... 637, 663, 664
defining:symbol representation ............... 672
defining:text-driven symbols" .. 646, 647, 672
deleting" . 102, 107, 220, 280, 281, 282, 292,
329, 468, 483, 498, 502, 545, 548
deleting:drawing sheets .......................... 102
deleting:editing ........................................ 107
deleting:elements ............................ 280, 282
deleting:elements from groups................ 468
deleting:favorites ............................. 498, 502
deleting:groups ....................................... 468
deleting:relationships .............................. 329
deleting:styles ......................................... 548
deleting:text in text boxes ....................... 292
deselecting"............................................. 256
deselecting:elements .............................. 256
detail
views............................................ 334, 335
DGN files" ....................................... 706, 733
dialog boxes"............................................. 23
diameter dimensions ............................... 392
diameter dimensions".............................. 358
prefixes.................................................... 390
dimension axis ........................................ 388
subfixes ................................................... 390
suffixes .................................................... 390
superfixes................................................ 390
axis.......................................................... 355
not-to-scale ..................................... 375, 391
dimensions".... 330, 355, 359, 360, 361, 362,
366, 368, 369, 370, 371, 373, 374, 375,
377, 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 419, 541,
551, 553, 564
not-to-scale.............................................. 355
dimensions:adding to groups .................. 365
dimensions:angular ......................... 359, 361
dimensions:axis....................... 355, 368, 388
dimensions:changing .............. 355, 373, 377
dimensions:coordinate .................... 360, 389
dimensions:diameter ............................... 359
dimensions:diameters ............................. 392
dimensions:driving .................................. 373
dimensions:editing .......................... 374, 375
dimensions:elements ...................... 355, 373
dimensions:formatting ..................... 541, 553
dimensions:groups .................................. 360
dimensions:linear ............................ 359, 361
dimensions:locking.................................. 330
dimensions:manipulating......................... 371
dimensions:modifying.............................. 371
dimensions:moving ................................. 371
dimensions:not-to-scale .................. 355, 390
dimensions:overriding ............................. 375
dimensions:placing. 355, 361, 362, 364, 366,
368, 374, 388, 389, 391, 419
dimensions:prefixes ........................ 370, 390
dimensions:radial ............................ 359, 361
dimensions:removing overrides .............. 390
dimensions:setting .................................. 369
dimensions:styles .................................... 551
dimensions:symmetric............................. 392
dimensions:types of ................................ 369
direct modification .. 263, 275, 373, 427, 429,
434, 453
direct modification" .................................. 442
display properties"................................... 635
change toolbar......................................... 460
displaying" 31, 32, 36, 37, 99, 100, 311, 329,
332, 334, 377, 413, 414, 460, 471, 472,
473, 474, 475, 477, 478, 481, 482, 483,
484, 485, 533, 534, 605, 606
displaying:attributes ........................ 533, 534
displaying:background sheets................. 100
displaying:colors...................................... 481
displaying:dimensions ............................. 377
displaying:drawing sheets ......................... 99
displaying:elements......... 470, 473, 475, 477
displaying:horizontal or vertical alignment
............................................................. 332
displaying:layers.............................. 475, 477
displaying:magnification .......... 31, 32, 36, 37
displaying:objects .................................... 475
displaying:order ....... 470, 471, 472, 473, 474
displaying:parameters ..................... 533, 534
displaying:relationship handles ....... 329, 334
displaying:sheets..................................... 477
displaying:size ......................... 31, 32, 36, 37
displaying:toolbars .. 332, 377, 460, 605, 606
distances" ................ 389, 397, 398, 401, 418
Index
distances:dimensioning........................... 389
distances:measuring ............................... 398
document properties" ................................ 78
document properties:setting...................... 78
document properties:viewing .................... 78
documents" 33, 76, 77, 79, 80, 81, 110, 112,
114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 123,
126, 131, 143, 148, 152, 155, 163, 175,
179, 185, 490, 495, 496, 589, 675, 676,
687, 688, 694, 699, 704, 706, 707, 709,
716, 722, 727, 732, 733
documents:ActiveX ......................... 675, 676
documents:closing .......................... 116, 495
documents:creating 131, 143, 148, 152, 155,
163, 176, 179
documents:creating documents ................ 76
documents:cutting ................................... 589
documents:embedding............................ 589
documents:exiting ................................... 116
documents:exporting...... 688, 699, 716, 722,
727
documents:general diagramming .. 131, 143,
148, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179
documents:importing...... 687, 688, 694, 704,
709, 716, 722, 732
documents:linking ................................... 589
documents:mailing documents ....... 112, 115
documents:MicroStation ................. 687, 688
documents:new drawing sheets ............... 80
documents:new files ................................. 80
documents:opening.... 77, 80, 110, 496, 676,
716
documents:printing. 117, 118, 120, 122, 123,
126
documents:saving ........... 110, 114, 185, 716
documents:sending......................... 112, 115
documents:setting locations for ................ 79
documents:switching................................. 33
documents:templates..... 131, 143, 148, 152,
155, 163, 176, 179
documents:working with AutoCAD.......... 732
documents:working with MicroStation ... 704,
707, 709
doublelines
drawing ........................................ 205, 417
placing ......................................... 205, 417
arcs 190, 215, 216, 217, 218, 223, 224, 238,
337, 557
arrays .............................. 275, 276, 277, 278
bevels.............................................. 445, 451
corners ............................................ 445, 450
doublelines ...................................... 205, 207
dynamics ................................................. 324
polygons.................................................. 190
radial patterns ................................. 275, 277
squares.................................... 231, 232, 234

activating ........................................... 99, 100
drawing sheets"...... 29, 77, 92, 99, 100, 102,
104, 106, 107, 120, 395
drawing sheets:activating........................ 100
drawing sheets:area................................ 120
drawing sheets:background sheets ........ 106
drawing sheets:creating .......................... 104
drawing sheets:deleting .......................... 107
drawing sheets:fitting sketch in real-world
units ..................................................... 395
drawing sheets:inserting ......................... 104
drawing sheets:manipulating............. 99, 100
drawing sheets:printing ........................... 120
drawing sheets:renaming ........................ 102
drawing sheets:scrolling through tabs....... 99
drawing sheets:selecting......................... 104
drawing sheets:setting up ................... 77, 92
drawing sheets:tabs .................................. 99
drawing sheets:viewing ............................. 29
drawing".. 127, 188, 189, 190, 191, 205, 207,
209, 210, 211, 213, 215, 216, 217, 218,
219, 220, 223, 224, 227, 228, 229, 231,
232, 234, 235, 236, 237, 238, 239, 240,
241, 243, 244, 245, 247, 248, 249, 250,
275, 276, 277, 278, 321, 324, 326, 332,
345, 346, 347, 349, 350, 395, 417, 445,
448, 450, 451, 452
drawing:arcs .................... 190, 217, 223, 224
drawing:chamfers.................................... 451
drawing:circles................................. 213, 247
drawing:corners....................................... 450
drawing:curves ........................................ 220
drawing:doublelines ................ 205, 207, 417
drawing:elements .................................... 127
drawing:extend to next ............................ 450
drawing:fillets........................................... 452
drawing:freely .......................................... 324
drawing:intent zones ............................... 326
drawing:isometrics . 243, 244, 245, 247, 249,
250
drawing:lines ........... 188, 190, 217, 244, 248
drawing:patterns.............................. 277, 278
drawing:points ......................................... 191
drawing:polygons .................................... 190
drawing:precisely .................................... 345
drawing:real-world units .......................... 395
drawing:rectangles .......................... 231, 234
drawing:relationships .............................. 324
drawing:squares .............................. 231, 234
drawing:tools .. 127, 235, 240, 241, 321, 326,
332, 347, 349
drawing:trimming elements ..................... 450
drawing:using intent zones...................... 326
drawing:with PinPoint...... 346, 349, 350, 417
Index
drawings" 263, 275, 280, 284, 285, 321, 373,
427, 429, 434, 442, 453, 675
drawings:ActiveX .................................... 675
drawings:adding annotations to ...... 284, 285
drawings:applying relationships .............. 453
drawings:cgm .......................................... 675
drawings:cutting elements ...................... 280
drawings:deleting elements .................... 280
drawings:elements .................................. 280
drawings:modifying 263, 275, 373, 427, 429,
434, 453
drawings:relationships ............................ 453
drawings:SmartSketch ............................ 321
driven dimensions".................................. 374
driven dimensions:placing....................... 374
driving dimensions" ......................... 373, 374
driving dimensions:changing................... 373
driving dimensions:placing...................... 374
editing text attributes".............................. 646
editing" ... 261, 263, 272, 275, 280, 294, 317,
370, 373, 375, 406, 409, 427, 429, 434,
442, 453, 503, 512, 513, 532, 538, 557,
591, 593, 658
editing:actions ......................................... 261
editing:attributes.............................. 532, 538
editing:breaking links .............................. 593
editing:dimensions .......................... 370, 375
editing:drawings ..... 263, 272, 275, 280, 373,
427, 429, 434, 453
editing:elements ...................................... 280
editing:formulas containing functions...... 409
editing:labels ........................................... 317
editing:links ..................................... 591, 593
editing:parameters .......................... 532, 538
editing:pasting ......................................... 272
editing:properties .................... 532, 538, 557
editing:smart points ................................. 658
editing:symbols ....................... 503, 512, 513
editing:text boxes .................................... 294
editing:variables ...................................... 406
elements" 127, 193, 255, 256, 260, 261, 264,
265, 267, 268, 269, 270, 272, 273, 275,
276, 280, 281, 282, 285, 311, 330, 334,
354, 429, 431, 434, 436, 437, 440, 442,
443, 444, 445, 450, 453, 456, 457, 458,
459, 460, 461, 463, 465, 467, 468, 470,
471, 472, 473, 474, 475, 477, 479, 481,
482, 483, 484, 485, 505, 524, 541, 543,
544, 552, 554, 557, 590
elements:annotations...................... 284, 285
elements:concentric ........................ 456, 460
elements:connecting ............... 193, 457, 460
elements:copying ............ 253, 268, 272, 275
elements:cutting .............................. 280, 282
elements:displaying ........................ 475, 477
elements:drawing .................................... 127
elements:editing ...................................... 282

elements:equal ................................ 458, 461
elements:extending ......... 442, 443, 445, 450
elements:formatting................. 541, 544, 554
elements:grouping................... 463, 465, 467
elements:horizontal or vertical ........ 459, 461
elements:layers ............................... 463, 479
elements:linking and embedding............. 590
elements:locking ..................................... 334
elements:mirroring .......................... 434, 436
elements:modifying ................................. 425
elements:moving ............. 253, 264, 265, 267
elements:parallel ............................. 456, 461
elements:pasting ..... 269, 270, 272, 273, 590
elements:perpendicular................... 457, 461
elements:placing ..................... 284, 352, 442
elements:properties................................. 557
elements:relationships ............ 429, 453, 505
elements:reordering 470, 471, 472, 473, 474
elements:rotating............................. 429, 431
elements:scaling ............................. 437, 440
elements:selecting . 253, 255, 256, 260, 261,
269
elements:styles........................ 543, 544, 552
elements:symbols ........................... 505, 524
elements:tangent............................. 458, 461
elements:trimming................... 442, 444, 450
elements:ungrouping....................... 465, 468
ellipses" ........................... 227, 228, 229, 557
embedding" ............................. 587, 589, 590
embedding:linking ........................... 589, 590
embedding:objects .................................. 587
enhancements in SmartSketch 4.0 ......... 1, 3
equal" .............................................. 458, 461
equal:elements ................................ 458, 461
equal:relationships .......................... 458, 461
equations" ....................................... 413, 414
equations:displaying................................ 414
equations:filters ....................................... 414
establishing relationships ........................ 342
executables" .................................... 650, 651
exiting documents ................................... 116
exploring windows ............................... 23, 27
exporting" ........ 688, 699, 714, 716, 722, 727
exporting:AutoCAD drawings .......... 722, 727
exporting:documents...... 688, 699, 716, 722,
728
exporting:drawings .................................. 688
exporting:MicroStation documents.......... 714
exporting:MicroStation drawings ............. 699
exporting:Opening and Saving AutoCAD
Files ..................................................... 716
expressions ............................................. 403
expressions" .................................... 420, 423
extending elements ......... 442, 443, 445, 450
next element............................................ 450
Index
next element............................................ 443
FAQ........................................................... 71
favorites" ......................................... 498, 502
favorites:adding....................................... 498
favorites:deleting ............................. 498, 502
favorites:showing .................................... 498
file properties" ........................................... 78
file properties:setting................................. 78
file properties:viewing ............................... 78
files".... 33, 76, 77, 80, 81, 86, 110, 112, 114,
115, 116, 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 185,
589, 688, 716
files:closing.............................................. 116
files:creating .............................................. 76
files:documents ................................... 76, 80
files:editing .............................................. 589
files:embedding ....................................... 589
files:exiting .............................................. 116
files:exporting .................................. 688, 716
files:finding .............................................. 110
files:importing .......................................... 589
files:linking............................................... 589
files:mailing documents................... 112, 115
files:opening ........................ 77, 80, 110, 688
files:Opening and Saving AutoCAD Files 716
files:printing ............. 117, 118, 120, 122, 123
files:properties........................................... 86
files:saving .............................. 110, 114, 185
files:sending .................................... 112, 115
files:switching ............................................ 33
fillets"............................... 442, 448, 452, 557
fillets:drawing .......................................... 452
fillets:placing............................................ 442
fills ........................................................... 573
fills".. 568, 569, 570, 571, 573, 618, 627, 653
fills:creating colors for ............................. 571
fills:defining for raster images ......... 618, 627
fills:placing....................... 568, 569, 571, 573
fills:setting properties of .......................... 573
filters" ...... 255, 413, 414, 475, 477, 484, 485
filters:selecting ........................................ 255
filters:setting .................................... 475, 477
fitting views.......................................... 30, 34
following hyperlinks"................................ 684
for symbols.............................................. 645
closed boundaries ................................... 568
columns................................................... 410
geometric elements................................. 554
formatting" ...... 272, 298, 410, 541, 551, 554,
555, 564, 568, 570, 571
formatting:annotations .................... 541, 554
formatting:closed boundaries.................. 568
formatting:columns.................................. 410
formatting:copying................................... 269
formatting:creating fill colors ................... 571
formatting:dimensions ............. 541, 551, 554

formatting:elements......................... 541, 554
formatting:geometric elements................ 554
formatting:lines ........................................ 554
formatting:painter .................................... 272
formatting:styles .............................. 541, 554
formatting:text.......................................... 564
formatting:text box................................... 298
frames" .................................................... 566
FreeForm" ....................................... 235, 241
FreeSketch"..................................... 235, 240
frequently asked questions ....................... 71
functions .................................................. 403
functions"......................................... 409, 413
functions:editing in formulas.................... 409
functions:inserting in formulas................. 409
functions:keys............................................ 26
functions:list of......................................... 413
functions:wizards..................................... 414
general diagramming templates..... 131, 143,
148, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179
generating a lookup table........................ 660
gradation settings for raster images 617, 625
grids" ......................................... 82, 352, 354
grids:setting options .................................. 82
grids:using ............................................... 352
groups" ............................................ 360, 468
groups:deleting elements from................ 469
groups:dimensions .................................. 360
groups:elements.............. 463, 465, 467, 469
groups:properties .................................... 468
handles" .......................................... 255, 269
handles:copying ...................................... 269
handles:selecting .................................... 255
handles:symbols ..................................... 503
hatching........................................... 568, 573
topics ......................................................... 72
Help".................................................... 70, 72
Help:topics................................................. 72
Help:user assistance................................. 70
hiding".............................. 478, 481, 482, 606
indicating ................................................. 332
horizontal" ............................... 332, 459, 461
horizontal:alignment display.................... 332
horizontal:elements or key points.... 459, 461
horizontal:relationships ................... 459, 461
HVAC templates...................................... 155
hyperlinks"....... 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684
hyperlinks:following ......................... 683, 684
hyperlinks:inserting 677, 678, 679, 680, 683,
684
hyperlinks:showing .................................. 684
icons"....................................................... 645
images".... 587, 611, 613, 614, 621, 631, 632
images:inserting .............................. 587, 611
Index
images:positioning .......................... 613, 614
images:saving ......................... 621, 631, 632
importing" 589, 687, 688, 694, 704, 706, 709,
712, 716, 722, 732, 733, 734
importing:AutoCAD ......................... 687, 722
importing:documents...... 589, 687, 688, 694,
704, 709, 716, 722, 732
importing:drawings .......................... 687, 688
importing:embedding .............................. 589
importing:linking ...................................... 589
importing:MicroStation .................... 687, 694
importing:MicroStation documents ......... 712
importing:Opening and Saving AutoCAD
Files ..................................................... 716
insert
> <param name= ................................ 335
characters ....................................... 294, 312
detailed view ........................................... 330
font characters ........................ 294, 312, 319
inserting" 104, 220, 294, 295, 312, 330, 409,
587, 590, 611, 623, 677, 678, 679, 680,
683, 684, 705
inserting:characters................................. 312
inserting:detailed view............................. 330
inserting:drawing sheets ......................... 104
inserting:font characters.......................... 312
inserting:functions into formulas ............. 409
inserting:hyperlinks 677, 678, 679, 680, 683,
684
inserting:images .............................. 587, 611
inserting:linking and embedding ............. 590
inserting:objects ...................... 587, 590, 705
inserting:raster images............................ 623
inserting:vertices ..................................... 295
inspection dimensions............................. 369
installing" ................................................... 67
installing:add-ins ..................................... 602
installing:tutorials ...................................... 67
zones....................................................... 326
intent zones............................................. 326
inverting colors ................................ 619, 630
isometric" 243, 244, 245, 247, 248, 249, 250
isometric:circles .............................. 244, 247
isometric:drawings .................................. 243
isometric:lines ......................... 244, 248, 249
isometric:rectangles ................ 245, 249, 250
keys........................................................... 26
keys".......................................................... 26
keys:control ............................................... 26
keys:function ............................................. 26
kinematics animation" ............................. 527
labels"...................................... 284, 317, 318
labels:creating ......................... 284, 315, 317
labels:editing ........................................... 317
labels:moving .......................................... 317
labels:overview ....................................... 284
labels:placing................................... 317, 318

layers"..... 311, 475, 477, 478, 479, 481, 482,
483, 484, 485
layers:changing ....................................... 479
layers:creating ......................................... 475
layers:creating"........................................ 479
layers:displaying...................... 463, 475, 477
layers:hiding ............................................ 478
layers:using ............................................. 475
leaders" ................... 284, 285, 295, 297, 313
leaders:adding......... 284, 285, 295, 313, 314
leaders:adding vertices ........................... 295
leaders:deleting vertices ......................... 297
leaders:moving ........................................ 289
tasks .......................................................... 72
Learning Center" ....................................... 67
limit dimensions....................................... 369
linear dimensions" ........................... 359, 361
linear dimensions:placing........................ 361
linear dimensions:types........................... 359
lines"....... 188, 190, 217, 218, 236, 244, 248,
249, 337, 550, 551, 554, 557, 564
lines:drawing ... 188, 190, 217, 236, 244, 337
lines:formatting ........................................ 554
lines:isometric.......................... 244, 248, 249
lines:properties ........................................ 557
lines:styles....................................... 550, 551
linking" .... 416, 587, 677, 678, 679, 680, 683,
684, 704, 706, 732, 733
linking:hyperlinks ..... 589, 590, 677, 678, 683
linking:objects.......................... 590, 704, 732
linking:showing ........................................ 684
linking:to the web ... 677, 678, 679, 680, 683,
684
linking:variables....................................... 416
links" ........................................ 590, 593, 594
links:breaking .......................................... 593
links:creating ........................................... 590
links:editing.............................................. 593
links:linking ...................................... 589, 590
listing windows" ......................................... 35
key points ................................................ 330
key points ................................................ 334
locking" ............................................ 330, 334
locking:dimensions .................................. 334
locking:elements ............................. 330, 334
locking:key points ............................ 330, 334
lookup table ............................................. 659
lookup table" ......................... 659, 660, 670
macros" .. 597, 599, 601, 603, 606, 607, 650,
651
macros:running 597, 599, 601, 603, 606, 607
mailing documents" ......................... 112, 115
maintaining relationships" 329, 334, 339, 341
manipulating".... 99, 100, 200, 264, 265, 267,
289, 317, 371, 429, 434, 436, 437, 440,
Index
465, 467, 469, 470, 471, 472, 473, 474,
522, 523, 524
manipulating:annotations ........................ 289
manipulating:dimensions ........................ 371
manipulating:drawing sheets ............ 99, 100
manipulating:elements ... 264, 267, 429, 434,
436, 437, 440, 467, 469, 470, 471, 472,
473, 474
manipulating:labels ................................. 317
manipulating:symbols ..... 200, 522, 523, 524
manipulating:with PinPoint...................... 265
masking symbols .................................. 653
measuring" ...................... 397, 398, 401, 418
measuring:areas ..................................... 397
measuring:distances ............................... 398
mechanism modeling"............................. 527
merging connectors ................................ 200
MicroStation".. 704, 706, 707, 709, 712, 714,
734
MicroStation:export options .................... 714
MicroStation:help for users of ... 54, 691, 708
MicroStation:import options .................... 712
MicroStation:saving documents ...... 688, 699
MicroStation:styles .................................. 707
MicroStation:using cells in your document
............................................................. 708
MicroStation:workflow examples............. 691
MicroStation:working with ....... 704, 707, 709
mirroring .................................................. 434
mirroring"................................. 434, 436, 520
mirroring:elements .......................... 434, 436
mirroring:symbols.................................... 520
end points................................................ 196
modifying a symbol attribute ................... 641
modifying" ...... 263, 275, 280, 371, 373, 427,
429, 434, 442, 453, 483, 548, 551, 573
modifying:dimensions ............................. 371
modifying:drawings 263, 275, 373, 427, 429,
434, 453
modifying:elements ......................... 280, 425
modifying:fill properties ........................... 573
modifying:layer groups............ 475, 479, 483
modifying:layers ...................... 475, 479, 483
modifying:relationships ........................... 453
modifying:styles ...................................... 548
modifying:text styles................................ 551
back......................................................... 473
front ......................................................... 473
moving" .. 103, 104, 105, 200, 264, 265, 267,
289, 292, 348, 371, 470, 471, 473, 522,
524
moving:annotations ................................. 289
moving:dimensions ................................. 371
moving:elements .... 253, 264, 265, 267, 470,
471, 472, 473, 474
moving:leaders ........................................ 289

moving:sheets ......................... 103, 104, 105
moving:symbols....................... 200, 522, 524
moving:text boxes ................................... 292
moving:the PinPoint target point ............. 348
naming" ........................................... 102, 483
naming:drawing sheets ........................... 102
naming:layer groups................ 475, 479, 483
new drawing sheets" ............. 34, 76, 80, 104
new drawing sheets:documents.......... 76, 80
new drawing sheets:windows.................... 34
nodes" ..................................................... 220
nodes:deleting ......................................... 220
nodes:inserting ........................................ 220
nominal dimensions ................................ 369
objects"... 255, 256, 260, 269, 311, 439, 475,
477, 479, 481, 482, 483, 484, 485, 557,
587, 590, 704, 705, 706, 732, 733
objects:changing layers of....................... 479
objects:copying........................................ 269
objects:displaying ............................ 475, 477
objects:handles ....................................... 255
objects:inserting ...................... 587, 590, 705
objects:linking.......................... 590, 704, 732
objects:properties .................................... 557
objects:scaling......................................... 439
objects:selecting...................... 255, 256, 260
objects:working with ................................ 733
ODBC data source .................................. 659
office layout templates ............................ 143
offsetting elements"................. 271, 273, 274
OLE" ................................ 587, 589, 590, 591
OLE:embedding ...................................... 589
OLE:linking .............................................. 589
OLE:linking and embedding .................... 590
OLE:selecting objects ............................. 591
online help"................................................ 71
opening" .................. 67, 77, 80, 81, 110, 591
opening:applications ............................... 591
opening:documents ..................... 77, 80, 110
opening:files .............................................. 80
opening:linked objects............................. 591
opening:OLE objects ............................... 592
opening:tutorials ........................................ 67
options"...................... 82, 255, 332, 333, 598
options:selecting ..................................... 255
options:setting ........................................... 82
options:SmartSketch ....................... 332, 333
order of elements" ... 470, 471, 472, 473, 474
overviews .................................................... 4
overviews" ......................................... 24, 463
panning" ........................................ 28, 31, 35
panning:IntelliMouse ................................. 28
panning:views...................................... 31, 35
paper and model units............................. 394
Index
parallel" ........................................... 456, 461
parallel:elements ............................. 456, 461
parallel:relationships ....................... 456, 461
parameters"..................... 532, 533, 534, 538
parameters:displaying............................. 533
parameters:editing .................. 533, 534, 538
parameters:viewing......................... 532, 538
parametric symbols"................................ 637
pasting" ... 269, 270, 272, 273, 280, 589, 590
pasting:cutting elements ......................... 280
pasting:documents.................................. 589
pasting:elements ..... 269, 270, 272, 273, 590
pasting:embedding.................................. 589
pasting:linking ......................................... 590
pasting:pasting elements ................ 269, 272
patterns" .......................... 275, 276, 277, 278
patterns:circular ...................................... 277
patterns:creating ..................................... 275
patterns:drawing ............................. 277, 278
perpendicular" ................................. 457, 461
perpendicular:elements................... 457, 461
perpendicular:relationships ............. 457, 461
PFD and P&ID templates........................ 176
PickQuick"....................................... 255, 256
PinPoint" . 265, 346, 347, 348, 349, 350, 417
PinPoint:drawing with.............. 349, 350, 417
PinPoint:moving elements .............. 265, 346
PinPoint:re-orienting ............................... 348
PinPoint:repositioning target point .......... 348
callouts .................................................... 287
coordinate dimensions .................... 360, 389
placing" .. 287, 288, 298, 307, 317, 318, 355,
361, 362, 364, 366, 368, 377, 388, 389,
391, 419, 491, 493, 500, 507, 509, 511,
568, 569, 571, 573
placing:annotations ................. 288, 307, 377
placing:callouts ....................................... 287
placing:dimension groups ....................... 364
placing:dimensions 355, 361, 362, 366, 368,
388, 389, 391, 419
placing:fills....................... 568, 569, 571, 573
placing:labels .................................. 317, 318
placing:symbols ..... 491, 493, 500, 507, 509,
511
placing:symmetric diameters" ................. 366
placing:text .............................................. 298
placing:text boxes ................................... 287
planning your symbol .............................. 635
playing macros"....................................... 606
plot plan templates .................................. 179
pointer feedback" .................................... 321
points" ............................. 189, 191, 503, 557
points:drawing ................................. 189, 191
points:properties" .................................... 557
points:symbols ........................................ 503
positioning".............................. 613, 614, 623
positioning:by clicking ............................. 614

positioning:by dragging ........................... 613
positioning:images .................. 613, 614, 623
precision drawing" .. 345, 346, 349, 350, 352,
354
previous view............................................. 35
printing" ... 117, 118, 120, 122, 123, 124, 126
printing:documents . 117, 118, 120, 122, 123,
126
printing:options ........................................ 124
printing:to files ......................................... 122
programs ................................................. 650
programs"........................................ 650, 651
SmartFrame ............................................ 566
properties" .. 78, 86, 124, 300, 314, 468, 532,
533, 534, 538, 557, 566, 573, 620, 628
properties:attributes .......................... 86, 532
properties:displaying ....................... 533, 534
properties:editing............. 532, 534, 538, 557
properties:elements................................. 557
properties:file............................................. 86
properties:fills .......................................... 573
properties:groups .................................... 468
properties:images............................ 620, 628
properties:leader ..................................... 314
properties:printers ................................... 124
properties:setting....................................... 78
properties:SmartFrame ........................... 566
properties:text.......................................... 300
properties:viewing ..................................... 78
pulling elements up" ........................ 471, 473
pushing elements down" ................. 472, 474
questions ................................................... 71
quitting..................................................... 116
radial dimensions" ........................... 359, 361
raster images" 587, 613, 614, 615, 616, 617,
618, 619, 620, 623, 624, 625, 627, 628,
630
raster images:adjusting contrast and
brightness .................................... 617, 625
raster images:filling with color ......... 618, 627
raster images:inserting.................... 587, 623
raster images:inverting.................... 619, 630
raster images:positioning ........ 613, 614, 623
raster images:selecting areas 615, 616, 623,
624
raster images:viewing properties .... 620, 628
real-world units ........................................ 394
reapplying styles ..................................... 552
rectangles" .............. 231, 232, 234, 249, 250
rectangles:drawing .......... 234, 245, 276, 278
rectangles:isometric ................ 245, 249, 250
redefine symbol origin"............................ 644
redoing" ........................... 258, 261, 621, 630
redoing:actions ................................ 258, 261
redoing:image-related actions......... 621, 630
Index
reference dimensions.............................. 369
reference files" 687, 688, 694, 699, 706, 716,
722, 728, 734
reference files:AutoCAD . 687, 716, 722, 728
reference files:MicroStation ... 687, 688, 694,
699, 706, 734
refilling boundaries"................................. 571
registering software" ................................. 73
relationships".. 263, 275, 280, 281, 321, 324,
329, 330, 332, 334, 339, 341, 342, 373,
392, 427, 429, 434, 442, 453, 456, 457,
458, 459, 460, 461
relationships:applying ............................. 453
relationships:coincident................... 457, 460
relationships:colinear ...................... 459, 460
relationships:concentric .................. 456, 460
relationships:connect .............................. 457
relationships:connecting ......................... 460
relationships:copying elements............... 427
relationships:creating .............................. 332
relationships:deleting ...................... 280, 329
relationships:dimensions......................... 373
relationships:displaying........................... 329
relationships:equal .......................... 458, 461
relationships:establishing........................ 342
relationships:extending or trimming ........ 442
relationships:handles" ............................. 334
relationships:horizontal or vertical... 459, 461
relationships:indicators ........................... 321
relationships:indicators" .......................... 434
relationships:locking................................ 334
relationships:maintaining ........................ 341
relationships:moving ............................... 263
relationships:parallel ....................... 456, 461
relationships:patterns.............................. 275
relationships:perpendicular ............. 457, 461
relationships:rotating............................... 429
relationships:symmetric .................. 392, 459
relationships:tangent....................... 458, 461
overrides ................................................. 391
removing
attributes.............................................. 641
removing" ........................................ 469, 602
removing:add-ins .................................... 602
removing:elements from groups ............. 469
removing:overrides ................................. 391
renaming" ........................................ 102, 544
renaming:drawing sheets........................ 102
renaming:styles ....................................... 544
reordering elements"...... 470, 471, 472, 473,
474
re-orienting with PinPoint"....................... 348
repeating actions" ................................... 261
reports".................................................... 536
reports:symbols....................................... 536
reports:types............................................ 536
reports:updating ...................................... 536
repositioning"................... 103, 104, 105, 348
repositioning:sheets ................ 103, 104, 105
repositioning:the PinPoint target point .... 348
resizing text boxes" ................................. 294
restoring" ............................................. 30, 35
restoring:previous views............................ 35
restoring:views .......................................... 30
actual value ............................................. 375
returning dimensions to actual value" ..... 375
reversing actions ..................................... 261
ribbon bars" ....................................... 23, 324
ribbon bars:for drawing ........................... 324
rotating" ................... 429, 431, 521, 522, 524
rotating:elements............................. 429, 431
rotating:symbols ...................... 521, 522, 524
routing documents through e-mail" ......... 115
running macros" .............................. 599, 606
HTML....................................................... 110
saving"...... 92, 110, 114, 185, 546, 621, 631,
632
saving:as bitmap image .................. 621, 631
saving:as image ...................................... 631
saving:automatically................................ 114
saving:documents ................... 110, 114, 185
saving:drawing sheet settings ................... 92
saving:HTML ........................................... 110
saving:images ......................................... 621
saving:selected image............................. 632
saving:styles............................................ 546
saving:templates ..................................... 185
scaling" ............ 437, 439, 440, 518, 522, 524
scaling:elements ............................. 437, 440
scaling:inserted objects........................... 439
scaling:symbols ....................... 518, 522, 524
scrolling drawing sheet tabs" .................... 99
segmented" ..................................... 544, 552
segmented:elements............................... 544
segmented:styles ............................ 544, 552
selecting" 255, 256, 260, 261, 269, 592, 615,
616, 623, 624
selecting:areas ................ 615, 616, 623, 624
selecting:elements . 253, 255, 256, 260, 261,
269
selecting:objects and elements ....... 255, 260
selecting:OLE objects ............................. 592
selecting:polygonal area on raster images
..................................................... 616, 624
selecting:rectangular area on raster images
..................................................... 615, 623
sending" .......................... 112, 115, 471, 473
sending:documents ......................... 112, 115
sending:elements to back ............... 471, 473
units of measure...................................... 399
Index
setting up an ODBC data source ............ 659
setting up drawing sheets" .................. 77, 92
setting" 78, 82, 300, 368, 369, 399, 475, 477,
484, 485, 573, 598
setting:dimension axes ........................... 368
setting:dimension types .......................... 369
setting:display criteria ..................... 475, 477
setting:document properties...................... 78
setting:fill properties ................................ 573
setting:filters .................................... 475, 477
setting:options ........................................... 82
setting:properties ...................................... 78
setting:text properties.............................. 300
setting:units of measure.......................... 399
sheets" . 77, 92, 99, 100, 101, 102, 103, 104,
105, 106, 107, 477, 484, 485
sheets:background.................................. 106
sheets:changing ...................................... 101
sheets:deleting ........................................ 107
sheets:displaying .................................... 477
sheets:drawing .......................................... 99
sheets:inserting ....................................... 104
sheets:manipulating ................................ 100
sheets:moving ......................... 103, 104, 105
sheets:setting up ......................... 77, 92, 100
sheets:using ...................................... 99, 104
showing".......................... 329, 332, 334, 498
showing:favorites .................................... 498
showing:horizontal or vertical alignment. 332
showing:relationship handles.......... 329, 334
sketching"................................ 127, 209, 324
smart points" ................................... 658, 661
smart points:editing................................. 658
smart points:properties ........................... 661
SmartDimension" ............................ 377, 391
SmartLabels
creating................................................ 315
SmartPoints" ................................... 656, 657
SmartPoints:with connect point attributes656
SmartPoints:with drag point attributes .... 656
SmartPoints:with drop point attributes .... 657
SmartSketch Learning Center" ................. 67
SmartSketch" 1, 3, 4, 73, 321, 328, 329, 332,
333, 336, 337, 338, 339, 341, 342
SmartSketch:examples .. 336, 337, 338, 341,
342
SmartSketch:maintaining relationships.. 328,
329
SmartSketch:new features...................... 1, 3
SmartSketch:options ....................... 332, 333
SmartSketch:overview ........................ 4, 321
SmartSketch:tips ....................................... 73
SmartText" .............................. 645, 648, 673
SmartText:attributes................................ 645
SmartText:leader .................................... 648
SmartText:placing ................................... 673
software" ................................................... 73
software:registering ................................... 73
software:tips .............................................. 73
spellchecking" ................................. 292, 311
splitting a connector ................................ 201
spreadsheets" ......................................... 411
standardizing drawings" .......................... 576
style resource documents" .............. 546, 707
styles" ..... 541, 543, 544, 545, 546, 548, 550,
551, 552, 553, 554, 576
styles:applying................................. 541, 543
styles:changing formats of ...................... 545
styles:creating ......................................... 548
styles:deleting.......................................... 545
styles:dimensions ............................ 551, 552
styles:elements........................................ 554
styles:examples....................................... 576
styles:formats .................................. 544, 548
styles:lines....................................... 550, 551
styles:parts of elements .................. 544, 552
styles:reapplying ..................................... 552
styles:renaming ....................................... 544
styles:resource documents ..................... 553
styles:saving............................................ 546
styles:segmented ............................ 544, 552
styles:standardizing................................. 576
styles:supporting company standards..... 576
styles:text ................................................ 551
styles:using.............................................. 576
support ........................................ 69, 71, 675
company standards ................................. 576
suspending relationships" ....................... 328
switching" .................................................. 33
switching:documents................................. 33
symbol authoring ..................................... 635
Symbol Explorer".... 491, 494, 495, 496, 497,
498, 500, 502
Symbol Explorer:closing.......................... 495
Symbol Explorer:managing documents with
............................................................. 500
Symbol Explorer:overview....................... 491
Symbol Explorer:setting home page ....... 497
Symbol Explorer:using favorites..... 494, 495,
496, 497, 498, 500
symbol properties .................................... 664
authoring ................................................. 635
libraries.................................................... 493
symbols.................................................. 653
symbols" . 200, 269, 488, 491, 493, 500, 503,
505, 507, 509, 511, 512, 513, 516, 517,
518, 520, 521, 522, 523, 524, 525, 527,
536, 635, 637, 640, 641, 642, 644, 645,
646, 647, 650, 651, 663, 664, 666, 667,
668, 669, 671, 672, 673
symbols:adding attributes ....................... 640
symbols:aligning...................................... 505
Index
symbols:animation .................................. 527
symbols:associating................................ 505
symbols:attaching to other symbols........ 525
symbols:connect points........................... 200
symbols:connecting ................................ 200
symbols:connectors ................................ 523
symbols:converting ................................. 517
symbols:copying ..................... 509, 511, 520
symbols:copying format .......................... 269
symbols:creating ..................................... 635
symbols:define properties ....................... 637
symbols:defining handles........................ 637
symbols:defining origin ........................... 663
symbols:defining properties .................... 663
symbols:defining representations ... 642, 672
symbols:drop points ................................ 525
symbols:editing ....................... 503, 512, 513
symbols:elements ................................... 524
symbols:formatting .................................. 516
symbols:handles ..................................... 503
symbols:integrating with programs . 650, 651
symbols:libraries ..................................... 493
symbols:managing text ........................... 645
symbols:manipulating .... 200, 503, 522, 523,
524
symbols:masking.................................. 653
symbols:mirroring.................................... 520
symbols:modifying attributes................... 641
symbols:multiple representations............ 671
symbols:overview.................................... 488
symbols:parametric................................. 637
symbols:placing ..... 491, 493, 500, 507, 509,
511
symbols:points ........................................ 503
symbols:properties .................................. 516
symbols:Properties dialog box664, 666, 667,
668, 669
symbols:redefining origin ........................ 644
symbols:removing ................................... 641
symbols:reports....................................... 536
symbols:rotating ...................................... 521
symbols:scaling....................................... 518
symbols:SmartText attributes ................. 645
symbols:SmartText editor ....................... 673
symbols:text attributes ............................ 646
symbols:text-driven ................. 646, 647, 672
symbols:unlocking................................... 524
symmetric" .............................. 366, 392, 459
symmetric:dimensions .................... 366, 392
symmetric:elements ........................ 392, 459
tabs on drawing sheets ............................. 99
tangent" ........... 211, 213, 216, 223, 458, 462
tangent:arcs ............................................ 223
tangent:circles ......................................... 213
tangent:elements ............................ 458, 462
tangent:points.......................................... 348
tangent:relationships ....................... 458, 462
technical support ....................................... 69
technical" ................................................... 71
technical:support ....................................... 71
control loop.............................................. 163
atlas mapping .......................................... 131
templates" 76, 131, 143, 149, 152, 155, 163,
176, 179, 185, 546, 707
templates:architectural ............................ 152
templates:atlas mapping ......................... 131
templates:control loop ............................. 163
templates:creating ..................................... 76
templates:general diagramming..... 131, 143,
149, 152, 155, 163, 176, 179
templates:HVAC...................................... 155
templates:office layout ............................ 143
templates:overviews....... 131, 143, 149, 152,
155, 163, 176, 179
templates:PFD and P&ID ........................ 176
templates:plot plan .................................. 179
templates:saving ..................................... 185
templates:style resource documents ..... 546,
707
templates:styles....................................... 546
templates:workflow.................................. 149
text attributes" ......................................... 646
text boxes"....... 287, 292, 293, 294, 298, 312
text boxes:applying borders .................... 293
text boxes:deleting text ........................... 292
text boxes:editing .................................... 294
text boxes:formatting............................... 298
text boxes:inserting font characters ........ 312
text boxes:moving ................................... 292
text boxes:placing ................................... 287
text boxes:resizing .................................. 294
text in symbols......................................... 645
text" 284, 285, 292, 298, 300, 313, 551, 555,
564
text:adding leaders to.............................. 313
text:adding to drawings ................... 284, 285
text:deleting ............................................. 292
text:formatting.......................................... 564
text:modifying styles ................................ 551
text:placing .............................................. 298
text:setting properties of.......................... 300
text:specifying styles ............................... 551
text-driven symbols ................. 646, 647, 672
Tip of the Day"........................................... 73
tolerance dimensions .............................. 369
toolbars" . 332, 460, 598, 599, 603, 604, 605,
606
toolbars:customizing ....... 598, 599, 605, 606
toolbars:displaying .......... 332, 460, 605, 606
toolbars:hiding ......................................... 606
Index
tools" 23, 127, 188, 209, 231, 235, 260, 324,
326, 346, 349, 350, 606
tools:drawing ................... 127, 188, 324, 326
tools:macros............................................ 606
tools:PinPoint .......................... 346, 349, 350
tools:relationships ................................... 324
tools:select .............................................. 260
trimming elements........................... 444, 450
trimming elements" ......................... 442, 445
starting ...................................................... 67
tutorials" .............................................. 67, 72
undoing" .......................... 258, 261, 620, 630
undoing:actions ............................... 258, 261
undoing:image-related actions........ 620, 630
ungrouping elements .............................. 469
ungrouping elements" ............................. 465
uninstall add-ins ...................................... 602
units........................................................... 86
units" ....................................................... 394
units:model.............................................. 394
units:paper .............................................. 394
unlocking symbols" ................................. 524
user assistance ......................................... 70
user interface ...................................... 23, 27
drop points .............................................. 525
IntelliMouse ............................................... 28
internet ...................................... 73, 675, 676
intranet ............................................ 675, 676
mouse ....................................................... 27
using expressions" .................. 420, 423, 475
using expressions:layer groups .............. 475
using expressions:Variable Table ... 420, 423
tables............................................... 403, 411
variable functions .................................... 413
Variable Table"....... 403, 405, 406, 407, 408,
411, 413, 414, 416, 420, 423
Variable Table:setting filters for .............. 413
Variable Table:using ....................... 411, 423
vertical" ................................... 332, 459, 461
vertical:alignment display........................ 332
vertical:elements or key points........ 459, 461
vertical:relationships ....................... 459, 461
vertices" .......................................... 295, 297
vertices:adding ........................................ 295
vertices:deleting ...................................... 297
vertices:inserting ..................................... 296
viewing" ............. 29, 104, 532, 533, 534, 538
viewing:attributes ............................ 533, 534
viewing:drawing sheets ..................... 29, 104

viewing:parameters ......................... 532, 538
views" ....... 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 35, 36, 37, 78,
106, 354, 605
views:areas ................................... 31, 32, 36
views:background sheets........................ 106
views:detail...................................... 334, 335
views:document properties ....................... 78
views:fitting................................................ 30
views:IntelliMouse ..................................... 28
views:overview .......................................... 29
views:panning...................................... 31, 35
views:properties ........................................ 78
views:restoring .................................... 30, 35
views:toolbars.......................................... 605
views:zooming in ................................. 32, 36
views:zooming in on area.......................... 31
views:zooming out............................... 32, 37
Web linking" .... 677, 678, 679, 680, 683, 684
Web"........................................................ 675
Web:gallery ............................................. 675
Web:linking.............. 677, 679, 680, 683, 684
Web:linking" ............................................ 678
What's New? in SmartSketch 4.0............ 1, 3
windows" ............... 23, 27, 28, 29, 34, 35, 36
windows:cascading ............................. 34, 36
windows:exploring ............................... 23, 27
windows:fitting views in ............................. 34
windows:IntelliMouse ................................ 28
windows:listing .......................................... 35
windows:new drawing sheets.................... 34
wizards" ................................................... 414
workflows" ................................................. 72
workflows:learning..................................... 72
workflows:templates ................................ 149
working sheets" ....................................... 104
working sheets:using............................... 104
Office applications ................................... 589
working with AutoCAD ............................ 733
world units ............................................... 394
World Wide Web" .............................. 73, 675
World Wide Web:accessing from the
software ................................................. 73
World Wide Web:publishing .................... 675
zooming" ................................. 31, 32, 36, 37
zooming:in ........................................... 32, 36
zooming:in on area.............................. 31, 36
zooming:out......................................... 32, 37

Smart Sketch User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Smart Sketch User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SmartSketch v4.

WHAT'S NEW IN SMARTSKETCH V4.0: AN OVERVIEW

System Management Services (SMS) Support

Exploring the Interface: An Overview

Menu Bar and Menus

Using the Keyboard

Standard Control Keys

Using the Mouse

Exclude Universal Scrolling with the IntelliMouse

Viewing Your Work

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Cascade Command (Window Menu)

Getting Help for AutoCAD Users: An Overview

Command Comparison: AutoCAD to SmartSketch

SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide iii

Getting Help for MicroStation Users: An Overview

Using the Learning Center: An Overview

Accessing Support Resources: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

About SmartSketch Command (Help Menu)

UNDERSTANDING DOCUMENT CONCEPTS: AN OVERVIEW

Commands and Dialog Boxes

New Command (File Menu)

Managing Multi-sheet Documents: An Overview

Create a Background Sheet

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Saving and Printing Documents: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Save Command (File Menu)

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Print Command (File Menu)

USING SMARTSKETCH TEMPLATES: AN OVERVIEW

Using General Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Atlas Mapping Templates

Using AEC Solutions Templates: An Overview

SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide v

Using Electrical Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Using Mechanical Engineering Templates: An Overview

Using Process Diagramming Templates: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

DRAWING BASIC ELEMENTS: AN OVERVIEW

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Drawing Connectors: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Drawing Doublelines: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Place Doubleline Command (Draw Toolbar)

Drawing Circles, Arcs, and Ellipses: An Overview

Draw a Circle by Defining Three Points

Commands and Dialog Boxes

vi SmartSketch v4.0 Users Guide

Draw an Arc by Defining Three Points

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Draw an Ellipse by Defining Three Points

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Ellipse by Center Point Command (Draw Toolbar)

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Drawing FreeForm Shapes: An Overview

Commands and Dialog Boxes

Arc by 3 Points Command (Draw Toolbar)

Drawing Squares and Rectangles: An Overview

FreeSketch Command (Draw Toolbar)

Creating Isometric Drawings: An Overview

Draw an Isometric Circle